EECOMMES"DATIO]SrS. The publishers, in issuing a new and enlarged edition of this work, would remark that they are gratified to know, as stated in the translator's adver- tisement, that it has been adopted as a text-book in many of the highest in- stitutions of learning in this country and Great Britain, and would express their hearty thanks to the press, and to several distinguished philologists, from whom they have received commendatory notices of the book. The fol- lowing, among numerous recommendations of the work, and statements in respect to the Syriac language, are respectfully submitted to the public, hoping that other seminaries, and especially theological schools, may be induced to form classes for the study of a language which was essentially the vernacular tongue of our Saviour, and which has furnished the earliest and best version of the Sacred Writings ever made : From the North American Review. " To one already versed in the Hebrew, the character presents the only (and that not a serious) obstacle to the study of the Syriac. The anomalies of the former, as compared with Occidental languages, almost all reappear in the latter, and the two have hardly a less close mutual kindred than the Ger- man and the Low Dutch. The book before us contains not only a complete ap- paratus for the study of the Syriac, but a method which would entirely super- sede the need of an instructor. We have never seen materials of the kind so skillfully arranged, or so large an amount of help in the acquisition of a language brought within so brief a space. The Chrestomathy is composed of extracts from the Peshito, followed by a minute verbal analysis ; and these extracts are sufficiently varied to furnish specimens of every variety of style to be found in the entire version." From the New-Englander. "The chief fault of the original is the obscurity of its statements. Too much matter is heaped together in single sentences, which are of course long, complicated, and abounding in parentheses, abbreviations, and departures from the natural order of thought to all but Germans. Mr. Hutchinson, more judicious, has faithfully given us all the matter of his author, without copy- mg his faults. Many of the long sentences of the original he has broken into two, three, or more, by differently arranging the matter of them, and then separately clothing each thought in perspicuous English. . . . We hail the appearance of this meritorious work, as supplying a real desideratum to American and English students." From the Methodist Quarterly Review. " According to the testimony of the most competent teachers and schol- ars, * Uhlemann's Grammar of the Syriac Language ' is the best extant. Mr. Hutchinson has not only translated it well, but has added a course of exer- cises in Syriac grammar, with a Chrestomathy, and brief lexicon. With the aid of this book any one tolerably versed in Hebrew can acquire Syriac wilh great rapidity." 1 RECOMMENDATIONS. From the Bibliotheca Sacra. " We have here a complete, and we had almost said perfect, apparatus for the study of the ancient Syriac. It would be difficult to find a better gram- mar of any language than Uhlemann's of the Syriac ; it is here accurately and clearly translated, and the addition by the translator of a good Chres- tomathy, and lexicon and exercises, leaves the learner nothing to desire, so far as the rudiments of the language are concerned. Let him go carefully through with the study of this neat and compact volume, and he can begin to read with ease the Syriac translations of the Bible, and derive from them all the necessary illustrations of the text. Every theological student who purchases this work, and thoroughly studies it, will find that he has made a most profitable investment, both of his money and his time." Ffom J. G. Palfrey, D. D., formerly of the Theological School connected with Harvard University. " The Syriac version, curious in the highest degree from its antiquity, is also, I presume, the best version of the evangelical writings that exists in any language. There is a peculiar interest in reading the discourses of the Saviour in a dialect closely resembling that in which they were originally dictated. And, to a person with a fair knowledge of the Hebrew language, the Syriac is a very easy acquisition. I hope that the Grammar may come into extensive use among Biblical students." From the late B. B. Edwards, D. D., formerly Professor in the Theological Seminary at Andover. " I have been much pleased with ' Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar.' It is the best for purposes of instruction of any with which I am acquainted." From C. E. Stowe, D. D., Professor in the Theological Seminary at Andover. " It is highly desirable that all theological students should make them- selves acquainted with the Syriac tongue ; for it is not only (next to the Chaldee, perhaps) the eldest sister of the Hebrew, and the sacred dialect of that interesting people, the Nestorians, but it gives us the very best trans- lation of the Bible (especially of the New Testament) that has ever been made in any language." From T. J. Conant, D.D., late Professor in Rochester Theological Seminary. " The excellence of ' Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar,' as the best manual for school use, is universally acknowledged. The exercises added by the Ameri- can translator furnish such abundant facilities for the grammatical study of the language, that a knowledge of it may be readily acquired, by one who is acquainted with the structure of the Hebrew, without the aid of a teacher. The volume contains also Syriac reading-lessons, and a lexicon, making the apparatus for the elementary study of the language complete, without the purchase of any other book." From Professor D. T. Smith, of Bangor Theological Institution. " I have been acquainted with the Grammar for many years, and I regard it as better adapted for translation in this country than any other Grammar that I know of. ... I am much pleased with the translation, . . . and it strikes me that the Chrestoniathy appended must be a most welcome addition to those who are entering upon the study of the Syriac." SYRIAC GRAMMAR, A COURSE OF EXERCISES, A CHRESTOMATHY, AID A BRIEF LEXICOI^. 7 ' , 'I -^i.ttOJ^' UHLEMANl^'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN, By ENOCH HUTCHINSON WITH A COURSE OV EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR, A CHRESTOMATHY, AND BRIEF LEXICON, PREPARED BY THE TRANSLATOR. SECOND edition; WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. NEW YORK: D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 549 & 551 BROADWAY 1875. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, By E. HUTCHINSON, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. .pr^ ^^Nu.oA^\^LT- TRANSLATOR'S ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION. The first American edition of this work having be- come exhausted, and considerable orders for more copies received by the publishers, it becomes necessary to supply the demand. It is a source of gratification that the work has been adopted as a text-book, to an encouraging ex- tent, in theological seminaries, universities, and other institutions of learning in this country and Great Britain, and has been instrumental, we trust, in arousing more interest than has heretofore existed in the study of Ori- ental philology. In 1858, an abridgment of Hoffman's excellent " Syr- iac Grammar," prepared by B. H. Cowper, was pub- lished in English dress, in London. The author seems to have ably performed his task, though we have not had time to thoroughly examine the book. "We should rather see the translation of the entire work, or a more extended abridgment of it. However, it will, no doubt, prove to be a valuable contribution to Syriac literature in our own language. .^ FT 040S 11 TEANSLATOR'S ADVERTISEMENT TO SECOND EDITION. Uhlemanii, in his second edition, lias made extensive additions and some corrections. The translator, in pre- paring this second American edition, has carefully com- pared the two German editions, and inserted at the end of the volume a translation of all the important additions made by the German author, with explanations (vide p. 371), showing where they belong in the body of the work. It should be remarked that the German author has added a large number of examples, especially in the Syntax^ and, where they have seemed to the translator to be more numerous than was absolutely necessary to illus- trate the principle stated, he has omitted some of them, in order to avoid swelling the volume too much. In those cases where Uhlemann has merely changed the phraseology of sentences, expressing them with more perspicuity than in the previous edition, the translator has made no change. He has corrected many typographi- cal errors found in the second German edition, as well as some found in the first American edition, and trusts that the work, thus improved, may, in a still greater degree than heretofore, subserve the interests of Semitic philology. The translator is happy to express his obligations for the valuable assistance which he has received from the Astor Library (an institution established by the Astor family, and filled with a rare and extensive collection of books in almost every department of science). E. HUTCHINSON. New York City, Jvlyy 1874. EXTRACTS FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION " In the revision of a manual like this, whose first ap- pearance has had a favorable reception, whose usefulness, for a series of years, has established it as a standard work for academical instruction and private study, I thought it better to retain essentially the order and arrangement of the first edition, so far as its simple, gradual unfolding seemed to be really adapted to aid the learner by mak- ing his task lighter than it otherwise would have been. Hence, on account of the extensive use of the original work (first edition), in reading the Syriac language, I came to the conclusion that some parts, though imperfect to a small extent, had better not be changed, and that other parts might with propriety be enlarged ; therefore, I felt it to be my duty to insert the improvements and additions which appear in the new edition. In accord- ance with this plan, additions are made to section 5, and the attentive reader will perceive where similar improve- ments and additions are introduced into the sections upon Etymology. The Syntax has been somewhat extensively IV EXTEACT FEOM THE GERMAN AUTHOR'S PREFACE. enlarged by sucli additions as seemed adapted to the scope and design of the work. For this purpose the elaborate works of Agrell (' Supplementa Syntaxeos Syriaca,' Gry phiswaldiae, 1834 ; ' Appendicula ad Supplementa sua Syn- taxeos Syriacse,' ibid., 1836, and ' Appendicula posterior,' 1838), which extend over the writings of the Oriental scholars Asseman and Barhebrseus, have often been con- sulted, while the careful study of the classical Ephrem, and the 'Acta Martyrum Orientalium,' by Maruthas, have furnished such important contributions appropriate to this Grammar, that the new edition could not well be longer delayed. So, also, it seemed proper in a manual like this to present a brief view of the grounds of Syriac metre, which I have compressed into section 88. I felt myself particularly called upon to do so from the fact that the poetic part of the annexed Chrestomathy has been favorably received," * ^ The remaining portions of the Preface relate to the author's Chrestom- athy, which is not inserted in this work. [Tr. TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. The following translation was undertaken in accordance with the suggestion of several literary friends, and in view of an increasing desire among American students to become acquainted with a language in which the earliest and best version of the New Testament is generally admitted to have been made, and which is essentially the language spoken by our Saviour. Uhlemann's Grammar is acknowledged by all to be a manual of rare excellence ; and it is hoped that, in an English dress, it will be found tx) be well adapted to promote the progress of ori- ental philology in this country. Some of our helps of this kind, in the study of the Syriac, are too brief, and others are too volu- minous. Uhlemann has aimed to present, within moderate lim- its, a work sufficiently extensive for ordinary purposes of instruc- tion. The translator has endeavored to give as Rteral a transla- tion a,s is compatible with perspicuity. He has added, where it seemed to be necessary, occasional explanatory notes. After having prepared an abridgment of the paradigms of verbs and nouns, following Winer's arrangement in his Chaldee Grammar, he, on the whole, concluded to insert the full paradigms as they stand in the original work, and not to make the attempt to im prove a grammar so nearly faultless. Vi TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. The translation is followed by a course of Exercises in Syriac grammar, which, if carefully studied, will, it is believed, mate- rially facilitate the progress of the learner in an accurate know- ledge of the elements of the language. After having read, with care, the introduction, and cursorily examined other parts of the grammar, the pupil may, at once, commence upon the Exercises, and merely consult the grammar (as directed in the introductory remarks to the Exercises) as a book of reference, in order to enable him to solve the difficulties with which he may meet in analyzing the first page of the Chrestomathy. The translator trusts that he shall not be considered as obtrusive in calling special attention to a method of analysis which he has found to be of great advantage in teaching classes in Hebrew. Some in- structors have probably adopted a similar onCj and others may have devised still better methods. This is submitted to the con- sideration of those teachers who have not already adopted a satisfactory one. A brief Chrestomathy and Lexicon, prepared by the transla- tor, follow the Exercises. The former is composed of selections from that beautiful edition of the Peshito Bible published by the British and Foreign Bible Society in London, in 1816, and reprinted in smaller type in 1826. It was executed for the use of the Syrian Christians in India. It was corrected for the press, as far as the Acts of the Apostles, by Dr. Buchanan, and com- pleted by Rev. S. Lee, Professor of Arabic in the University of Cambridge. Several manuscripts were consulted, and the text is considered as very correct, though we have discovered in it some typographical errors. In the Exercises, an extended analysis will be found of the first TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. YU page of the Chrestpmathy, and merely brief explanatory remarks on the remaining pages. The basis of the Lexicon is that inserted by Uhlemann in his grammar, to which the translator has made many additions, having consulted the Syriac Lexicons of M. Trost, E. Castell, ^Egidius Gutbier, and ^milius Rodiger. The Lexicon is intended merely to include those words which occur in the Chrestomathy. Some errors, in the author's numerous references to the Old and New Testaments, have been discovered and corrected. There are, probably, others which were not observed. The translator trusts that this effort will be received with indulgence by the literary public. Errors will doubtless be found by teachers who may use the Manual, and he will be very thankful to receive suggestions from any quarter, by which a future edition, should it ever be called for, may be improved. The publication of the work has been unexpectedly delayed, most of the stereotype plates, when nearly completed, having been destroyed by a disastrous fire. The translator avails himself of this opportunity to express his obligations to Mr. W. W. Turner, late of the Union Thelogical Seminary of this city, T. J. Con ant, D. D., of Rochester Univer- sity, and J. G. Palfrey, D. D., formerly of the Theological School connected with Harvard University, for valuable suggestions; also to Mr. A. H. Guernsey, of this city, for important aid in the examination of the manuscript before going to press. New yoRK, Jan. 1855. EXTRACTS FROM PREFACE TO FIRST GERMAN EDITION. The earlier sheets of this Text book, designed, principally, for academical instruction, had been printed, and that part of the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands, when the more comprehensive work of Professor Hoffmann made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1 was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed with, since the greater portion of the Syriac forms may be explained from those of the Hebrew language ; and in fact, a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with the principles of the Syriac. Upon a close examination of the above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu, Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the collocation of separate rules. Although I might have approxi- mated more nearly to the work of Hoffmann, by isolated alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations existed, to follow my own views ; as for example, in the ta- bular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the nouns placed under Declension HI.,* instead of classing them with the Segholate forms ; this was done because the vowel entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced un account of the difiiculty of pronunciation. Real Segholate * g 48, Decl. III. forms, monosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs 3 rad. Olaph quiescent, belong rather, according to their principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension Y., and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoff- mann, followed the Lehrgebdude of Gesenius ; and like him, alsOy I have made use only of those passages of the Old Tes- tament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfet- tered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the Xew Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;* Ephraemi Opera Syr., Romae, 1743, tom. III., fol. ; Barhebrsei Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789 ; and Assemani Bib- liotheca Orient. Clementino-Yaticana, Eomge, 1719, tom. HI., fol. ; so that a close and impartial examination will easily determine what has been added from my own not inconsider- able collections, f -^ -J*- * * * -^e- Berlin, March, 1829. * In point of time the Feshito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient document extant in the Syriac iiinguage, though the New Testament was trans- lated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time. Michaelis su]^- poses, that the Syriac version of both Testaments was made near the close of the first, or in the early part of the second century. Tr. t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lv.'ssons, which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg-baers. Tr. CONTENTS PACT I.VTRODucTiON. Brief Historical Yiew of the Syriac Lang'.i%'e and Literature 17 PART FIRST. ELEMENTS OF THE liAIVGUAGE. CHAPTER I. WKITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USE. 1. Consonants 28 2. Yowels in general (Yowel Letters and Yowel Signs) . , 30 3. Yowel Signs . . . . . . . . .30 4. Diacritical Points which supply the place of Yowels . . 31 g 5. Kushoi and Rukok 32 6. Ribui 33 I 7. Mehagyono and Marhetono 34 8. Linea Occultans ?6 I 9. Tone . 3r) ^10. Marks of Punctuation i^6 CHAPTER n. PECUI.IARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS, ? 11. General Yiew , . . ?> 1 12. Changes of the Consonants . . . . , . , 3(> 2 jii CONTENTS. 13. Quiescent Letters ,39 g 14. Yowel Letters which are not sounded (Otiant) ... 40 g 15. Changes in the Towels 41 PART SECOND. ETYMOLOGF, OR PARTS OF liPEECII. CHAPTER L PRONOUNS. I (J. Personal and Possessive Pronouns 44 Table of Pronouns and Suffixes 4.5 3 17. Uther Pronouns 48 CHAPTER IL THE VERB. g 18. General View 49 I. Regular Verbs. ^19. The Inflection of Regular Yerbs in General ... 50 L Table of Personal Inflection 52 II. Table of the Temporal Inflection of Regular Yerbs . . 53 A. Personal Inflections 54 B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods 55 ^ 20. A. The Ground-form Peal its formation and signification . 5G B. Derivative Conjugations. 21. Ethpeel 58 I 22. Pael and Ethpaal . 59 ^ 23. Aphel and Ethtaphal 60 24 Shaphel and Eshtaphal 61 g 25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Yerbs 2 26. Yerbs with Gutturals 63 II. Irregular Verbs. 4 27. General Yiew 63 Table of Irresrular Yerbs ... ... 65 CONTENTS. A. QuiesceiU Verbs. I 28. Verbs 1 Rad. Olapli Quiescent . 29. Yerbs 1 Rad. Yud Quiescent I 30. Yerbs Med. Olapli Quiescent I 31. Yerbs Med. Rad. Yau and Yud Quiescent . g 32. Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent . B. Defective Verbs. I 33. Yerbs 1 Rad. Nun I 34. Yerbs Med. Rad. doubled .... 35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Yerbs Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular Yerbs 36. Regular Yerb witli Suffixes Table of the Same 1 37. Suffixes to Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent . Table of the Same 2 38. Auxiliary or Substantive Yerbs . xm PAGH C7 G8 70 70 72 75 r5 7G SO 37 102 103 108 110 g39. HO. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 3 47. CHAPTER III. THE NOUN. Derivation of Nouns . . . . , . . .111 Nouns derived from Yerbs 112 Tabular Yiew of Nouns derived from Regular and Irregular Yerbs 113 Denominative Nouns 122 Composite and Exotic Nouns 123 Gender of Nouns 124 Number of Nouns 126 Different Relations (states) of the Noun . . . .129 Table of the Same 132 Nouns with Suffixes 136 Declension of Nouns in general .... .139 XIV CONTENTS. PACK g 48. Exhibition of Xouds according to Declension . . . 139 g 49. Anomalous Nouns 145 Paradigms of Nouns with Suffixes 148 g 50. Adjectives and Numerals . 150 CHAPTER lY. PARTICLES. g 51. Adverbs 152 52. Prepositions .153 Table of Prepositions with Suffixes . . . .155 53. Conjunctions and Interjections 156 PART THIRD, SYNTAX. CHAPTER I. THE PHONOUN. g 54. Use of Separable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes A. Separable Personal Pronouns B. Suffixes g 55. Pleonastic use of Pronouns A. Separable Personal Pronouns B. Suffixes General Remarks on Personal Pronouns 5G. Use of the Relative Pronoun 57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns g 58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms A. Reflexive Pronouns B. Other Pronouns 15: 157 159 160 ICO 161 163 164 166 166 166 167 CONTENTS. XV I'AOX CHAPTER II. THE VERB. 1 59. General View . . . . . . . . . 172 60. Use of the Preterit . .172 61. Use of the Future 175 62. Use of the Imperative 178 63. Use of the Infinitive 179 A. Infinitive Absohite 179 B. Infinitive with >i or the Construct form . . . 180 64. Use of the Participle 182 65. General Yiew of the Manner of Designating all the different Moods and Tenses, and particularly the Imperfect, Pluper- fect, and Optative 1S8 66. The Persons of the Yerb 190 67. Construction of Yerbs with the different Cases and with Prepositions 193 I. Yerbs with the Accusative 193 IT. Yerbs with Prepositions 196 III. Passive Yerbs and their Construction . . . .201 Mode of expressing Greek Composites .... 203 g 68. The Substantive Yerb and some other peculiarities chiefly- relating to the Construction of Yerbs in General . 204 A. Useof"|oai A-a] and Ail 204 B. Indirect Discourse 205 C. Ellipsis Zeugma Paronomasia and Puns . . .206 CHAPTER III. THE NOUN. I 69. Use of the Noun in General ' . 207 70. Gender of Nouns 210 ? 71. Number of the Noun 212 XVI CONTENTS ^2. 74. 75. 76. I 77. 78. 79. ^80. Apposition and Duplication of No-irs The Emphatic State The Construct State and the Genitive Designation and Use of the other Cases The Case Absolute . Comparison of Adjectives A. The Comparative . B. The Superlative . Construction of Numerals A. Cardinal Numbers B. Ordinal Numbers . C. Other Eelations of Numbers Union of the Noun with Adjectives Union of the Noun with the Verb A. In Respect to Number . B. In respect to Gender C. In respect to both Gender and Number D. Construction of Sentences in which there or more than one Subject . Peculiarities relating to Nouns . A. Ellipsis of the Noun B. Zeugma and Ilendiadys The rendering of Composite Greek Nouns Compound PAGE 212 214 215 218 220 222 222 223 224 224 224 22G 227 229 229 232 234 234 237 237 238 23S CHAPTER lY. PARTICLES. 1 82. Construction and Union of Adverbs 240 83. Use of the Particles of interrogation, affirmation and negation 242 04. Prepositions 244 2 85. Conjunctions 240 I 86. Interjections . . .240 Peculiarities in respect to the Position of Words . . . 2.)U CONTENTS. xvii PART IV. Exercises 253 Ohrestomathy 313 Lexicon 841 Corrections and Additions ....... 369 IISITEODUOTION, BRIKF HISTORICAL VIEW OF THE ^YKIAC LANGUAGE A:^D LITERATUEE. 1. The Syriac language (sometimes called the Western Aramaean, to distinguish it from the Chaldeean or Eastern Aramaean, with which it constitutes the Aramaean dialect of the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the whole northern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine to E'atolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the Euphrates.* It degenerated at an early period, and, during the continual changes of government, particularly by the re- ception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original purity. Of its pure state, no written monuments have come down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth cen- tury after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period, and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written lan- guage. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover, at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or N"esibene, and the Maronite dialects. The essential difference between these con- sisted very likely in the pronunciation ; this may be asserted with still more confidence in respect to the JS'abataean dialect. The ancient written language of Antioch or Com- magene is still used by various Christian sects, in particular * E. Rodiger says of the Aramaean language: "It was called Syriac in the form in which it appeared in the Christian Aramaean literature, and Chaldee kvhen it appeared in the Jewish Aramaean writings." See Gesenius' Heb. Gramm , 15th edit, by RoJiger, Leipz. 18-18 ; Eiuleitung, 1. 2. b. Tr. 18 IXTKODCCTIOX. by the Mai'onites, Kestorians, and Thomas-Christians of India, JI.-5 their ecclesiastical language. So also the Zabians, or so- called St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in their religious ceremonies. But as the language, as early as the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs from the cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian guage. Although several modern travelers of note, as Kiebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some parts of Mesopotamia, about Raka, Edessa, and Damascus, as well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres Sauvebceuf and Yolney, wliile Chateaubriand, Seetzen, Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in silence; and Burckhardt only remarks, that the Maronites in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the present day, as we do the Latin.'-^ Rem. The LXX, even, use Syria, (2u^ta, 2vpoj, Su^itfTt) in ..he wider sense, for the Old Testament &^5)5 (^'] comp. the "Apifxoi in Horn. II. ii. 783 ; Hesiod Theog. 304 ; Strabo Geog. i. 2, xi. 14 ; Stephanus Bjzant. under "Apijxa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii. 5, 6 ) ; and the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp. Diod. Sic. ii. 13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2 ; Xenoph. Cyrop. vii. 5, 31 ; Lucian de Dea Syr. 1 ; Oppian, Kuvrj/ III. 402 ; Horat. Od. II. 11, 16; HI. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Aramian Marcell. xxiii. 6. The Arabs call it f^^t, as it lay at the left, when their faces were turned towards the east (comp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5 ; Assemani Bibl. Orient. T. III. P. ii. p. 782.) In the earhest times this country was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl. Archaol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd. vi. p. 1 seq.; Vater Commentar iiber den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 ; Winer Bibl. Real- worterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.); of these, subsequently to the time of David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the most powerful ; David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6 ; 1 Chron. xix, [xviii ] 3, 4. sq ), and Solomon kept possession of them * Since Uhlemann prepared his grammar, it has been ascertained that the Nes- torians use the Syriac language at the present day. Mr. Layard, in liis admirable work on the ruins of Nineveh, says of the Nestorians (or Chaldaians as he incor rectly denominates them) : " Most of their church books are written in Syriac, which, like the l^tin in tlie "West, became the sacred language in the greater part of the East." See Layard's Nineveh, chap. viii. Missionaries who are laboring among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. Ta. INTRODUCTION 19 until Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been ^enersil of the king of Zoba (1 Kings xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government inde- pendent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incor- porated with the monarchies of the Assyrians (^38 b. c), the Persians (539 B. c), and the Macedonians (331 b. c). Though after the death of Alexander the Great, they arose again for a time under the Seleucida3 (301 B. c), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pora- pey (64 b. c), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman sway. At the division of the Empire, mider Theodosius (395), Syria fell to the Byzantine Empire, after Jovianus had (a. d. 363) already surren- dered Nesibis* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken possession of by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the Ommiades and several other Arabic royal famiUes, whose dytiasties were, in 1086, brought to a close by the Seljooks.f At the time of the Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the Seljooks but a short time (1097 and subsequently) ; and in lltl, Sala- din wrested the country from them. In 1369, Syria became a prey to the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timur ; and it has now, for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke(cf. Gatterer, Hand- buch der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. ; Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd. I. p. 213 sq. ; Heeren, Ideen iiber die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p. 213 sq. ; Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 152, sq,). The transition into broadness of pronunciation ('TrXaruo'TOfj.ov) seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish captivity ; and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and decipher- ed by Barthelemy and Swinton, may have grown up soon after Solo- mon, the founder of that city. In the Edessene Period, during which flourished Ephraem (died 318), Jacob Yon Sarug, Isaac the Syrian, and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of the seventh centuiy, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Maronites on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followers of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. ; Pfeififer, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. ; Gieseler, Lehrbuch der Kirchengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 6T5 ; Riihs, Hand- buch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the an- cient Syriac dialect ; still more closely do the Nestorians (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who diifer from the Xestorians only in name and place of residence (cf. Assem. a. a. 0. pp. 413, 435. sq. ; Pfeiffer, pp. 285, 484 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638), all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language ; the two former speaking Arabic in common life, and the latter, the language * A celebrated city and military post inMesopotamia, generally written Nisibis.TR, + Called, also, Seljiiks, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks. Tk. 20 INTRODUCTION. of Malabar. Dififerent from this is the dialect of the so-called Johannes- Christians, Mandaeans, or Zabians (who are not to be confounded with a Mohammedan sect of the same name, in Maraccii Goran. Sur. II. p. 33 sq. ; Assem. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 ; Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 66 ; Neander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion und Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. II. p. 427), whose religious books are written in a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian Irak. By the Nabatoean, according to Barhebrseus (in Assem. T. I. p. 476) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian country- people. On the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr. von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352 ; Brown, Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr. Thl. I. p. 489 ; Ferrieres Sauveteoeuf, Memoires historiques, etc., T, II. p. 169 ; Yolney, Voyage en Syrie, etc., T. I. p. 331 ; and Burckhardt, Travels in Syria, etc., pp. 22, 186. 2. Syriac literature, which extends over almost all branches of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Eccle- siastical History, flourished principally in the period between the fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era. The language itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the translations of Aristotle and other Greek authors, and by its accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the departments of Grammar and Lexicography. As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost, history records the names of Achudemen (died 575), Joseph Hu- zita(died 580), Jacob of Edessa(died698),who labored to restore the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Cha- mis. Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died 876). The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth century ; about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to have composed his Rete Pundorum^ and Barhebrseus (died 1286) to have made known his grammatical works. At the beginning of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was transplanted to Europe. Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529, teacher to Albert Widmansiadt, who subsequently pursued the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon. Through the labors of these men, and of Moses von Merdin, whom INTRODUCTION. 21 Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to Julius III. at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas (Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in 1555. At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself, by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas, and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seven- teenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis. From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been gram- matically pursued in Germany; partly independently of other languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ; partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and Jahn ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Hot- tinger, Schaaf, Vater, and others. The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography were also made in the ninth and tenth centuries, in Syria, by Honain Isa or Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochtiesu. More im- portant, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar-Ali (about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most serviceable Avork of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about 963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie, Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hottinger, Gutbir, Nicolai, Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared smce the sixteenth century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the Syriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe. Fer- rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject, and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach, who compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed, besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and significations wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncom- pleted. More recently, copious works have been promised by Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen', Grimm, Hahn, and Sieffert. Rem. Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to Jesus, and the answer to it, as among the most ancient Syriac writings (cf Assem. I. 554 ; III. P. II. p. 8 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 74) ; and. 22 IXTRODUCTION. in like manner, John is said to have written his Gospel in the Syriac language. But the most ancient Syriac work of undoubted authenti- city, is perhaps the translation of the New Testament,* which musi have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug, Einleitung in die Schriften des N. T., Thl. I. p. 348 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123). That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Ara- bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.) ; and its capacity for rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebrseus (Chron. p. 231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). Abulphara- gius, in his Historia Dynast., ed. Pocock, p. 147, mentions Theophilus of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the Iliad (cf. Assem. I. p. 521). In addition to the larger work of Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orien talis Clementino-Yaticana, Romaj, 1729, ) 3 vols, fol., and the abridgment of it by Pfeiflfer, Erlangen, 1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, in Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur, Thl. XIV., pp. 225-291. I. Gil AM MA US. Thesd Amhrosii, Introductio in Chald. linguam, Syriacam, etc., Papise, 1539. Aug. Caninii, Institutiones linguae Syriacag, Parisiis, 1554. Widmanstadii, Syriacae linguae prima eltmenta, Yiennae, 1555, 4to. ed. II. Antwerp, 1572. loh. Merceri, Tabulae in grammaticen linguae Chald., quag et Syriaca dicitur, Paris. 1560. 4to. Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Syr. Yite- bergae, 1579, 8vo. Imman. Tremdlii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Ap- pended also to his edition of the New Testament. Andr. Masii, Grammatica linguaB Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antweqi. Polygl.) 1573, fol. Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syr^e ex optimis quibusque apud Syros scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidae, 1619, 4 to. Georg. Amirce, Grammatica Syr. sive Chald. etc. Romae, 1596, 4to. Chrisioph. Cri'Msii, Gymnasium Syr. h. e. linguae lesu Christo verna- culae perfecta institutio, etc. Yitebergae, 1611. lo. Buxlorfii, Grammaticae Chald. et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615. Ed. II. 1650, 8vo. * Hug, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the New Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both weni uicluded under the same name, Pcshito. Tk. INTRODUCTION. 23 [o. Casjp. Myriad, Grammatica Syro-Chaldaea. Genev. 1619, 4to. Herm. Nicolai, Idea linguarr. Aramsearum per comparationem etc^ Copenh. 162t, 8vo. Ahrah. Ecchellensis, Linguae Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Romae, 1628, 16mo. Ludov. de Dieu, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebraeorum, Chald. et Syr, inter se coUaturum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof, ad M. 1683, 4to. Isaac Sdadrensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 1636, 8vo. loh. Michad. Dilherri, Rudimenta grammaticae Syr. Halis, 163t. Ed. XL, 1646, 12rao. Tosephi Acurensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 164*7, 8vo. lo. Ernst. Gerhardi, ixiaypoup/a, linguae Syro-Chald. Hal. Sax. 1649. Andr. Senrwrti, Ebraimus, Chaldaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non Rabbinismus, etc. Yiteb. 1666* 4to. Eiusd. Chaldaismus et Syrias- mus, etc., 1666. loh. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Chald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic. 1652, 8vo. Eiusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to (the Syriac also printed separately). Briani Waltoni, Introductio ad lectionem linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Loud. 1653, 12mo. lo.Leusdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc. Ultraiect. 1658, 8vo. Giiil. Beveridgii, Grammatica Syr. tribus libris tradita. Lond. 1658, 8vo. Edm. Castelli, Brevis et harmonica quantum fieri potuit grammaticae linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. ^thiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio. Lond. 1669 (preceding his Lex. Heptagl.) Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Yiteb. 1665. lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebf. Chald. Syr. Arab. Jj]thiop. Pers.orientalium secundum prima prasceptadelineata harmonica. lenae, 1670. 4to. Ed. IL Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686. lo. AlHngi, Synopsis institutionum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 1616. Ed. Yl. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo. Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca. Cizae, 1677, 8 vo. Eiusd. Porta Syriae patentior, etc., 1682. Henr. Opitii, Syriasmus facilitati et integritati suae restitutus, etc. Lips. et Francof. 1678. 4 to. in compendium redactus a Chnst. Ludovicl Yiteb. 1669, 4to. Car. Schafii, Opus Aramaeum complectens grammaticam Chaldaico- Syriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo. lo. Aug. Danzii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc. lenae, 1689. Ed. HI. 1715, 8vo. In. Ern. Gerhardi, Harmonia linguae Chald. Syr. et JEthiop. lenae, 1693. 4to, 24 INTRODUCTION. Herm, von der Hardt Syriacae linguae fundamenta. Helmst. 1694. 8vo. (Only Paradigms.) Ge. Othonis Palaestra linguarr. orientt. Chald. Syr. Arab, -^th Pers etc. Francof. 1702. 4to. lo. Phil. Hartmanni Hebraicae, Chald. Syr. et Samarit. linguarum institutio harmonica. Francof. ad M. 1*707. 4to. Sam. Frid. Bucheri Thesaurus orientalis s. compendiosa et facilis methodus linguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to. Christ. JBened. Michaelis Syriasmus i. e. grammatica Hnguae Svr. Halis, 1741. 4 to. lo. David Michaelis Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to. /. G. Kals Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram. Amstelod. 1758. 8vo. lac, Ge. Christ. Adleri Brevis linguae Syr. institutio etc. Altonte, 1784. W. Hezel, Syrische Sprachlehre. Lemgo, 1788. 4to. loh. Gottfr. Hasse Practlsches Handbuch der Araraiiischen o.ler Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen Sprache. lena, 1791 ^ Svo. Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones hnguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lenae, 1787 et 1789. 01. Gerh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. (Ap- pended to his Chrestomathy.) lo. lahn. Aramaische oder Chaldaische und Syrische Sprachlehre fiir Anfanger. Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleit- ner Elementa Aramaicae s. Chaldaeo-Syriacae linguae etc. Viennae, 1820. Svo. loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Gram- matik. Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. Svo. Thomas Yeates'' Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. Svo. Hampus Tullherg Elementale Syr. P. I. et IL Lond. 1824. Svo. Paul Fwald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. Svo. Andr. Theoph. Hoffmanni Grammaticie Syriacae hbri III. Hil.-e, 1827. 4to. II. LEXICONS. Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium. Antwerp, 1521. folio Fahr. Boderiani Dictionarium Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (i'om. VI. of the Antw. Polygl.) Val. Schindleri Lexicon pentagl. Hanovioo, 1612. 1649. Lond. 1635 Francof. 1653. 1695. fol. Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum. Viteb. 1612. 4to. loh. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomenclator Syriacus. Romae, 1622. 4to. loh. Buxtorfii iun. Lexicon Chald. et Syr. Basil. 1622. 4to. Martini Trostii Lexicon Syr. etc. Cothenis Anhalt. 1623. 4to. SYRIAC ClIRKSTOMATIIIES. 25 Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. Roma2, 1636. 8vo. Andr. Sennerti Lexici Chald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666. 4to. loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum orientt. s. Lexicon harmonicum heptagl. etc. Francof. 1661. Turici, 1664. 4to. Dav. Grafunderi Compendium Lexici, Syr. (Appended to his Syriac Grammar.) Aegid. Gutbirii Lexicon Syr. Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to his New Testament.) Jdm. Castelli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been specially edited the Syriac, by J. D. Michaelis, under the title, Edmundi Castelli Lexicon Syr. Gotting. 1788. Tom. 11. 4to. lo. Ft. Nkolai Hodogeticum orientale harmonicum etc. lenae, 1670. 4to. Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinum. Cizae, 1683. 4to. Car. Schajii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale. Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Ap- pended to the New Testament ) xiut. Zanolini Lexicon Syriacum. Patav. 1742. 8vo. (Appended to the New Testament.) HL CHEESTOJVLiTHIES. loh. Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Gottingen, 1768. 8vo. Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar. u. Anm. vervollstandigt unter dem Titel : loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestoma- thia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /. Ch. Dcepke. 1829. /. C. G. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr. Hafn, 1784. loh. Gottfr. Hasse Lectiones Syro-Arabioo-Samaritano-^thiopicae Regiom. et Lipsiae, 1788. 8vo. Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr. Hofae, 1789. 8yo. (Newly edited by Bernstein.) Glai Gerh. Tychsen Elementale Syriacum etc. Rostochi, 1793. Svo. Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium u. 8. w. Lemgo, 1795. 8vo. Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam pai'tem e Codd. MSS. collecta. Gotting. 1807. Svo. Aug. Hahn et Sieffert Chrestomathia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina seleeta. Lips, 1825. Svo. (With a Lex. Syr.) a SYRIAC GRAMMAR PART FIRST. ELEMENTS OP THE LANGUAGE TABLE OF CONSONANTS. i p i' umi. c 3 5 ? ? 3 NAME. 1 1 1 1 SOUND. 1 1 Olaph ,W\K 1 ^! ^ 1 Spiritus lenis 1 2 Beth Zuo O r^ .n CI B, Bh, V. 2 3 4 Gomal Dolath ? r r > D,Dh( ^ K, Ch. L. 20 30 13 Mim ^S 5:D So Ul ^ M. 40 14 15 Nun Semcatb. , "H J CO 1 m N. S. 50 60 16 Ee ]i L L \i Vi 2? Hebrew. 70 17 Phe \ Si Si. ^ ^ P, Pb, F. 80 18 19 Tsode Koph .2100 S n ^ ^ Ts. K guttural,Q. 90 100 20 Rish ^? J r r > R. 200 21 Shin M A ..A . .. Sh. 300 22 Thau o2 I A A Z Th. T. Greek.' 400 2S CONSONANTS. CHAPTER I. Weitten Characters anb their Use. 1. Consonants. The Syriac, or West Aramsean Language, lias an alphabet (3onsisting, like that of the Hebrew and Chaldee, of twentj- two consonants. In common with the Arabic, it connects together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines at the bottom ; from which arises a fourfold form, though essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial, or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding letter, as exhibited in the table on the preceding page. Rem. 1. The character exhibited in the preceding alphabet, is called Feshito, i. e. the simple. It is employed by the Maronites and Jacobites, and is said to have been invented by Jacob of Edessa in the seventh century. Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo^ not from c'^po/'^uXoj, round, (see Asseman Biblioth, Orient. T. IH. P. 11. p. 378.) which, according to M'cbaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15, means the Gospel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis of the Nestorian smaller character, to wnich the so-called double alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books, bears a strong resemblance. There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscrip- tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Mandcean or Nahatcean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalgamation of the gutturals f with 1 , and Ol with ^ , consists of only twenty con- sonants. It is written in a continuous line, with four different forms of each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the vowels a, ^, or u. Rem. 2. The letters I, p 01, Q, ]., ^, J, A, connect only with the preceding letter. After one of these letters, therefore, J , # , J , 2 , stand unconnected ; and also, with the exception of ^ , always at the beginning of a word. The final letters are ^ , ^ , -^ , . , VX . y before ^ is written S^ ; and after it U or }^ . Double L , at the end of a word takes the form of m. The letter G, in words adopted from CONSONANTS. 29 Other languages, is written \^ . Several consonants, where they ter- minate a word, are slightly inflected upward ; e.g. S, wD, *a, etc. Rem. 3. The gutturals express the several gradations of guttural sounds from the weakest to the strongest, f and 01 may be compared with the Spiritus lenis and Spiritus asper of the Greek language ( 12. 5. b). Deeper guttural sounds are .j.* ( = the German ch ) and ^ which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spiritus asper, and sometimes by /. The sound of JD is formed in the fore-part of the mouth ; that of vO farther back towards the throat. %* = "^J sometimes stands for g at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced, according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated conson- ants A2iS,.||jQ are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red point placed over them ; the removal of the aspiration is indicated by the same sign beneath them ( 5). Rem. 4. The division of consonants, with reference to the organs of speech, is the same as in Hebrew. But the gutturals ^ImOiI occasion less difficulty than in Hebrew, as the Sheva and Daghesh forte are vi^ an ting in Syriac. Of the gutturals, in connection with a. and Q, it is to be remarked ; a) that | between two vowels has the sound of y ; e.g. Vo|o Jco-yem ; h) that O quiesces in and (= and w), and after and (= a and e), forms the dipthongs au and eu ; c) that initial a with == z, and even when | is pre- fixed, it is pronounced i ; e. g. |>00U| Ihudlio ; d) that initial 1 17 IS ; e. g. JGIL ehadh. Rem. 5. The letters of the Alphabet suffice for designating the numerals as far as 400 (Vid. Table of Consonants, Amira, p.l2. sq). In compound numbers, the larger stand first ; e. g. p^oZ 441. From 500 900, the tens of 50 90 are denoted by a dot over the letter ; e.g. vCD 600, *2) 800. Thousands are designated by placed under the units, ten thousand by ~^, ten thousand thousand by 7\ The numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by double yD and ^, Uiv final letters falling away where units are added. Fractional numbers are designated by a small line drawn obliquely downward, from left to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of tho fraction ; e.g. iD =^, . . == s ^C" 80 VOWEL LETTERS AND VOWEL SIGNS. 2. Vowels in General {Vowel Letters and Vowd Signs). InSyriac, the vowel-letters |, o, and a originally served to designate the vowels, and, at the time of Mohammed, the Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which sufficed for their language, and which the Arabs appear to have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 ; Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 84), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa, in the eighth century, the Greek vowels appear to have been in common use. The Nestorians, on the other hand, make use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 878). The Monophysites or Maronites commonly use them only in doubtful cases. Rem. Even in the last century, the Maronite Gabriel Heva era- ployed the vowel-letters to designate the vowels, making *\ = a, f == 0, I = c, wi = i, and O = u (v. Michael is. p. 29). 3. Voivel Signs. The Syrians denote the vowels by diacritical points, or by characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels, the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient manuscripts both modes occur together. FORM. NAME. SOUND. Syriac. Greek. 7 7 Pethocho (]1*'A2)) a. It or or Revotzo (r^i)3. I or Chevotzo (V^^) i- or Zekofo (laoi) 0. , Q Q Q Etzotzo (lii^) " DIACRITICAL POINTS WHICH SUPPLY THE PLACE OF VOWELS. 81 Rem. 1. The names are derived from the form of the organ used in pronouncing the vowel. The Greek forms from which they are derived are easily recognized. also occurs without Q = w in vJD and Vy.^VD (For lA^^fiD, Luke xvii, 29, stands more correctly |A^;.OD Psalm xi. 6). The first three vowel-signs may also be written beneath the consonants. Rem. 2. As*to pronunciation, seems to have denoted a and ae^ though was sometimes sounded by the Nestorians like a (V. Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 379). In foreign words it quiesces in Q. In are contained both the German 6 and u. Rem. 3. As to quantity it may be assumed with some certainty that is always long, and always short ; according to others, P 9^ 7 with ^, and with Q are long ; is short, except in foreign words. 7 P Amira, on the other hand, maintains that = a, = o, and the others, even with Q, are common. Some grammarians also denote the quantity of the vowels by diflferent signs, thus ; Revotzo. /r ;- Ciievotzo. O "O O Etzotzo. Rem. 4. The dipthongs are formed with Q and ^. With Vau ; a) r with preceding at the beginning or middle of a word, au ; e. g. (Zq5^ ; b) with .* preceding, oi nearly ( the German eu ) ; e. g. wiOIOaA*! ; c ) in the middle of a word, after -i, lu ; e. g. - I 7 *. jiOlQuj^QJ; c?) Vau doubled, the first with ^ ou (according to Amira u). With Yud (besides the combinations b and c above); a) with a preceding , ai ; e. g. p-^; b) with m the middle and at the end of a word, oi ; e. g. (AAiOpO. 4. Diacritical Points which, siijpply the ptace of Vowels. These were employed earlier than were the vowels, and 82 KUSHOI AND RUKOK. were used even after the invention of the vowels, by the Nestorians. The point which designates the suffix 3 sing, fern, cn seems to have originated from that system. ^ 7 Rem. According to Amira p. 51, 001=001; while 001=001; jO1=wa01 ; *aOl=u01 . Ludov. de Dieu has treated this subject more definitely in his Grammar, p. 35 seq. ; according to him the point when above the consonant denotes a, o, and w, under it e, un- der -a and I i, .and under Q u. The principal use of this point in the verb, is to denote the diflferent persons and tenses (v. Amira, p. 51 ; Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the exception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals. In the parti- ciple, it denotes, over the first radical, in Peal, _!., in Aphel, _i., or in Verbs med. Vau, _f_. In the imperative and infinitive it may be omitted or written underneath. The future takes it onlv under the radicals, not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1 sing., where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritic! bei den Verbis, Gottingen, 1773). 5. Kuslioi and Rukoh (wfc-QO yl^oi)* 1. According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant with a short half-sound of e ; e.g. ^QOJ pronounced ^ hum. Some Grammarians, as Amira, p. 42, and the Zabians, use J!L* So too, according to Asseman, the doubling of consonants in pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael andEthpaalofVerbs^andMl** But as the doubly written consonant falls away where analogy would require it to be retained ( 8), this grammatical usage is still very doubtful. This duplication is retained only in foreign words. 2. Analogous withDaghesh lene is Kushoi^{i.G. hardening), a red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is indicated by a point placed underneath, called Rukok (i. c. softeninfr). * It should be borne in mind that Sheva and Daghesh are not, in Syriac, denoted by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation. Tr. EIBUI. 33 Rem. Some consider Kusboi to be Daghesh forte, which is denied by Amira and Gabriel Sionita. Lud. de Dieu, p. 25 sq., places it; a) at the beginning of words, except where ^0^2 precede, or where the preceding word ends in - , O , | , in wllich case Rukok is retained; e.g. f, iViNZ, fp.fci2^A^; 6) in the middle, after a quiescent letter ; e. g. 01 '^.\V) ; c) after dipthongs ; e. g. Aa-^ ; (ZqId, with the exception of ^ | as. Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides the cases noted under a above ; a) when one of the aspirates ends a syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ^V^M ; b) when, according to Hebrew analogy, they follow a movable Sheva ; e. g. |A3)QO ; c) after an open syllable ; e. g. Hij. So too these consonants are not pronounced as aspirates in Pa. and Ethpa. of Verbs ^, when the J preceding them has fallen away ; e. g. . qXoZ from ^^ij ; and in verbs with the middle radical doubled, where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands. Furthermore, here belong the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be com- pensated for, in the future and infinitive of verbs *.^2), or in general where Daghesh forte euphonic stands in Hebrew. These points do not occur in printed works. 6. Bibui (^QOj). 1. To distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from the singular written with the same consonants, the Sjriac makes use of Bihui^ i. e. two points placed horizontally over the word. This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in printed books. Thus, bj means of these points ]^\V> is read \h \So the Icings^ and distinguished from |n\V>, the Jcing. This sign is also used in the 3 plur. fem. pret. of Verbs 3 rad. Olaph in all the conjugations except Peal ( 32), to distin- guish it from 3 sing. masc. ; e. g. i\ ..iZ] they have praised themselves ,from * > \ . . Z | he ha^ praised himself. In like manner Kibui strengthens the distinction between the 3 plur. pret. masc. and fem., where the formatives Q and t^ at the end sometimes fall away from the 3 sing, masc; e. g. \^.^ = qL4o, i \t^ * The plurals, which are easily recognized, re- 34- MEHAGYONO AND MAEHETONO. ;nain without this designation, though it is not omitted in plural forms with suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary. Some mark with this sign only the feminines, and the forms with suffixes ; e. g. ^7jl2, .QIUjIZ. Rem. Amira, p. 48, omits Ribui, when the plural form ^ ( 44) lias the signification #QJ| or tOGLkAal, i. e. they are^ but adopts nie above-mentioned use m numerals, and uses it also with prepositions joined with plural suffixes ( 16. c). 2. Ribui also serves to denote collectives ; e. g. I'rOb a heeve^ ];ao a herd of heems. Rem. When Ribui stands over > (with the exception of the 1 sing, pret. and fut., and the participles Act. Pe., according to 4. Rem!), 7 or coincides with a diacritical point representing , one of the points is omitted. When three points come together, one of them represents Kushoi. 7. Mehagijono and Marhetono. ^0 7 . ^0 0, ,7 (tll^Olk) - WOl-r^). When an accumulation of consonants without vowels occurs, and the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the consonant to which a vowel (usually more rarely ) is to be supplied ; e. g. lAi^j. This line is called Mehagyono^ and denotes a removal of this accumulation in utterance (Diaeresis). If, on the contrary, the voice is to hurry over these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is called Marhetono \ e. g. lAojl. Rem. 1. Some Grammarians place Mehagyono only before viVr>\ and before ai^ in (A*jJD>. Amira, p. 41. sq., compares the two with Diceresis and Synceresis, which may have been transferred from prosody into prose. (Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et SiefFert, Lips. 1825. p. 11). Rem. 2. Sometimes a line is found over consonants ; a) in numerals ; e. g. i^ 12 ; 6) in abbreviations ; e. g. pO for \A^r^ ', c) over the particlo of exclamation 0|, to distinguish it from 0|. LINEA CCCULTANS. .S5 8. Lima Occultans. This line placed under consonants denotes ; a) that the letter under which it stands is not pronounced ; e. g. Z;i ( 12. 1); h) that 1 at the beginning of a word, followed by Ol is to be pronounced weaker, and like f ; e.g. jcni (vid. 1. Eem.4) ; c) that the letter quiesces,viz., in the impera. of the pass. Ethpeel and Ethpaal ; e. g. ^^-^2*1, pronounced etlikatl^ and imp. from %4^' 5 which with the transposition of the first two radicals is w^^Ol (comp. 12. 1). Rem. Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal and Eshtaphal ; but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely a diacritical designation of the imperat. As such it may in general be regarded as coming under h and c above. 9. Tone. 1. The tone stands regularly upon the penultimate sylla- ble, when the ultimate does not terminate in a movable consonant ; e. g. ln\V >, Mdlco. Rem. In an accumulation of consonants, where by Mehagyono ( V) the penultimate syllable becomes the antepenultimate, the tone remains upon the stem-syllable. It is more difficult to determine whether words, which, according to Amira, p. 462, have Q in the penultimate, follow the same rule ; e. g. PQjaj, and should be pronounced achuno or achuno. 2. The tone is on the ultimate, when it ends in a movable consonant ; e. g. t^A* ; so too with. Q and t^ final, if they have arisen from 2q and Ax ; e. g. on\V) from ZonSV). vid. Amira, pp. 467 i69. 10. Signs of Inter punctio7i. The Syrians, who do not possess the Hebrew system of accents, divide their periods, according to Amira, p. 475, into 36 GENERAL VIEW. protasis and apodosis, which again are subdivided into smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of subject and predicate. In this respect they designate ; a) the separate members of the protasis with () ; h) the close of the protasis with (.), which is also the sign of interroga- tion; c) the separate members of the apodosis with (*), which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest mark of interpunction, and () or (::) the largest point. Rem. Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and the like. CHAPTER II. PECULIARmES AXD ChANGES OF THE LeTTEES. 11. General View. As the changes in the different parts of speech are effected partly by consonants and partly by vowels, this chapter is naturally divided into two parts. In the first place, those changes which take place uniformly, in accordance with fixed laws, in pronouns, verbs, and nouns, must be accurately distinguished from those which occur only in individual forms. Tliough the former class of changes will be here principally treated, yet in order to afford a proper connection between them, that which occurs universally will be first treated of, and that which takes place in special and individual cases will be appended, either independently or in remarks. 12. Changes of the Consonants, Of those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew grammarians classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 87 awaj, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in Syriac. And this want is only in form, for in point of fact this feature exists in those cases where a letter is dropped in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans ( 8. comp. Gesenius, Lehrgebaude, p. 162). Here should be no- ticed the following 1. Consonants are dropped in pronunciation, by the occurrence of Linea occultans, as follows : A) In General ; a) in nouns whose middle radical is doubled ; e. g. ]ilSo mano ; h) j without a vowel before Z; e. g \l^j^ ; c) 01 in suf&xes of the 3 masc. sing. *aOi . .jcno , aau., %^oiQ^ of the verb, and *^01Q of the noun plural (v. Table to 16); or when Linea occultans has arisen from theGreek Spiriius asper ; e.g. wi^ooij cpw^y] ; J) o in derivatives of verbs w^aand |2), as IlijOQ* from 1^* : B) In particular is this the case ; a) with 1 initial in ^.i il , ^tjs*l , .Jiol , and in the pronoun m1 in connection with the participle, Ij") Ivm ; h) with Oi, particularly in the following cases ; a) in the pronouns OOI and *j01 , with the throwing back of the vowel upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ool AaA ; or with the falling away of the letter with the preceding vowel ; e. g. 001 )mD pronounced h^ slieu ; in which case, however, before 001 , passes into ; e. g. OOI p( for p( ; /3) in fOOl (v. 38) when it is an auxiliary verb ; e. g. fOOi ^^4^ he had hilled ; 7) in *O0U for QOU to give ; c) with ^ in ^ll to gb away^ when it should have a vowel which falls back upon the 1 ; e. g. ALll'^for ASlf (v. 28) ; d) with J in the pronouns Aj( masc. and ^bS\ fem., and their plurals .oAj| masc. ^Z\J| fem., and in some other words ; e.g. fAls ; and finally ; e) with > in b^ daughter ; (v. 8). Rem. Linea occultans is retained under f in nouns derived from those adduced under a ; e.g. '\Lci\ > ! , lZ;-si| , fZoju] , and many 38 CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. others. It also occurs in p| , 001, and -*01 when they are used for the logical copula or substantive verb (comp. 16. 1., 54. A. 3. a and c). In these pronouns, even when thoy stand pleonastically ( 55. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is con- 19 001 ( 68. A), which verb loses Linea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of to he^ to become^ to come to pass; As to further inflection of ^OLi compare 29. 1. Rem. 2. Transposed is L before sibilants in Eihpe.^ Ethpa.^ and Eshta.; e. g. .-^ikAcol from IJcD , ^j6A1 from ^}Qm. 2 7 7^ is changed into %4 ^^^^^' V '^^^^ ? ^^^^^ ^ *' ^' S' ^^^4 ll 7 7 J*!* 7 7 ^-^ 7 '*J"" . . . for okSaD*Z(, ^?ll for ^Kl* There is no transposition when Z is doubled in Ethpe. of Verbs aJ^ and Ql ; e. g. ^Q^L^dLL] (v. 31. 2). I as middle radical is sometimes transposed; e. or. %aS|Z1 from (j^fO* Also J in the imperat. from *.^(JlJ (v. 8). 3. Dropped are ; a) f with. Linea occultans ; e. g. ..aj;^ for j1 jo and as first radical in the 1 sing. fut. Pe. infin. and part. Pa. of Verbs ]si ( 28. 1) ; e. g. ^Qsf for VkOoll ; and in ^] for ^1 *al ; b) w> and J as first radical, and Q as middle radical in Verbs ^x ( 29. 2), ^ ( 38. 1), and Qi ( 31. 1) ; e. g. -oak) from^QSJ. Here belong snch nouns as JlQ^Lo for tJomV) The same is true also in respect to the middle radical of Verbs Ml ( 34. 1), and the nouns derived therefrom ; c) one of two Z without a vowel standing between them ; e. g. ]ZpA* for 1ZZ,-m. Also when three Z stand together in the fut. pass. ; e. g. \L^IL for ^^ioZZZ. Finally Z falls away at the end of the fern, end- ings Zq and Ajl ; e. g. o^\V) for Zoo^V). 4. Exchanged are ; a) the gutturals 1 and 1 before Ol; e. g. r0l1 for hOU; b) in transferring Hebrew words into Syriac, 7 passes into j , ^ into ^ , into Z , sometimes -| into -^ and J ; also ^ of verbs "13? into Ol ; e. g QUIESCENT LETTERS. 39 r TT ^ . - : Zoio = vjj'-^^ ; c) Z, when transposed with sibilants, in the passive, goes over into > and v^, according to Eem. 2. above; d) 1 with Z in the construct state fem., and before suffixes ( 45, 46); and in the Mhj)e. and Ethpa. of verbs ]a ( 28. 1 Eem. ; e. g. r^ZZ*| for h^IZ]* Rem. This last has been also applied to nouns derived from \zi Verbs ; e.g. \**JiL from J4J| In many cases this usage is doubt- jy.Z which may be derived from JytZ or J.. I Hence \\%\L is found. The derivatives from Aphel do not belong here; e. g. (AajoZ from -*J0| 5. Added are ; a) sometimes ] at the beginning, before a vacant consonant ; e. g. Lqd\ for Zoo ; ^Lm\ for taZ^ ; also in Greek words beginning with 2 ; e. g. ^0*^420! = ra\>*=^ == ^iXi'T-ttoj. J3DQ is also used for a j e. g. .C0QO)| = ol^X"-*' ^^ ^^^ later language we find also *CDQJLiZ| = 'A&r]vaij ; .CDQOj| = app^aj. 8. -!., medial and final, quiesces, in and ; e. g. ^A^, w.Ji^..ZV .^ initial usually quiesces in ; e. g. ^^, and fiills back upon the preceding vowelless prefix ; e. g. 7 1 r I QlraO for Qlr^O* Also between two consonants ^ quiesces in ; e. g. lAjJjf for iLjl. 14. Vowel- Letters which are not sounded {Otiant). In the following cases *j, o, 1, are not sounded ; 1. ] in the pronouns 2 plar.masc. and fern. ^oAj] , ^Aj") conjoined with the participle to denote the present tense, e. g. toAjl ^-ib^4^ pronounced hotelitun^ in which case th^ ^ of the participle is not sounded. 2. O and wt at the end of words ; a) in verbal endings without any vowel preceding (2 pret. sing. fem. ; 8 plur. masc. and fem.; imperat. sing. fem. and plur. masc. ; and 2 flit. sing, fem.) ; e. g. uiA^^^O , Cl^O ; h) in the sufiixes 7 7 w, ^jlQ, t>ni , *aOlQ, where *a is sounded only when fol- lowed by Ooi ; e. g. OOl . i^n pronounced hehiju ; c ) in > > \V)Z I yesterday^ %^^ rest^ and the like, which form J> in the emphatic state ( 46. 1). CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 41 15. Changes in the Yovjels. Although to a less extent than in Hebrew, the rowels in Sjriac, undergo various changes and modifications in res- pect to formation and derivation, still they are exchanged^ transposed^ dropped or added, 1. They are exchanged partly in accordance with the genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires the following exchanges of vowels ; a) in the preformatives of the fut. and infin, Pe. in simple syllables, in Verbs \zi , vA^ , (]-i-M 32), passes over into ; e. g. ^Iso'p, r^lSD ; but before gutturals and 5 at the end of words, inta ; e.g. >,. for jp ; h) in the feminine with \ , , in the con- struct state, passes over into ; e. g. (n^ construct state An^ ( 45. 2). In transferring words from the Hebrew and Chaldee, the following vowel changes may be noted ; a) for the Syriac prefers ; e. g. Byi == Hbt^ ; 5>0jY= ^^^^^^ ; T _ _ \^ "^ "T IT-: b) nr is exchanged in proper names mostly with ; e. g. QCQ^l = yQ^^ ; with ; e. g. *>*A2L = n?l3^ ; c) 1 with Q- ; e. g. V?<^ = tlJlp ; ^^ with Q- ; e. g. "ISDoi = (Chald. 2. Vowels are transposed ; A) in general ; a) q in the im- perat. plur. masc. Pe. when a suffix is added ; e. g. 0^040, with sufSx ^olQ-i.^^^ ; ^) concerning the falling back of the vowel over 1, a, or oil*, upon prefixes, compare 13. 1. 3; 52. 1; 53.1. Eem. ; B) in Particular ; ff)in^l), vrhen- ever 1 is vacant, the vowel of the ^ falls back upon it ; e.g. t^\\ for ASi] (12.1) ; Z>) in some nouns of the form ^O^^, when a syllable is appended and in the emphatic state li?Q> ( 45. 8 ; 48. A. Decl. IV) ; of the form 1^^, emphatic state fZrOa ; c) in ^^QjD and iOjOD with 1 prefixed, Q is placed before Q when a and j retain theii ; e. g. ^.SqqqV .,SDoal> In r^ when it enters into 4:2 CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. composition, moves forward upon j ; e. g. Vu^^l, ]Sd^ 8. The vowel of a final mixed syllable is dr opined ^ when an entire syllable is added at the end, especially when the last radical begins the new syllable ; e. g. in the verb ^i^6JD masc. AX4^ fem.; in the nouns j^SLo, ]^Sd Rem. This vowel remains unchanged ; a) when merely a formative letter, without a vowel, is added ; e.g. Q^4^ ixova ^^^6^ ; ^) when a syllable is added, if the stem-syllable remain a mixed one ; e. g. xOl^^O from ^o^^ ; and moreover ; c) when the stem-syllable becomes a simple one, in the following cases ; a) in the second form of the 3 fem.plur.pret.and 2 fem. plur. imperat.; /3) where inHebrew Daghesh forte stands ; e. g. ^<11 emphatic state (SOik (q^, 1723?) ; 7)in words ofDeclension I.piasc. (comp. 48.A). In ^o^ emphatic State \\ iS; ^Qji emphatic state pOQa, the original vowel only reappears (comp. 48. A. Decl. IV). 4. Yowels are added ; a) with 1, *j, and 2^, at the begin- nmg of words ; | and i^ usually take and ; e.g. ^QO | (imp.), joii ; but u usually takes ; e.g. JOLk ; b) of two vacant consonants at the beginning of a word, the first takes ; e. g. (iV)n for [>Vrf*^ ; go also when two vacant consonants m the middle of a word follow ; e. g. ji^j^'r^ for 1A>**^ ; or when in Hebrew, the first has Daghesh forte ; e. g. U^J^for l^'ryiV from ^in^i^ ; or finally when three vacant consonants would come together in the middle of a word ; e. g. Al^Z] for t^al]. This assumed vowel is sometimes ; e.g. AS^O (pret. Pe.) from xs.^^ ; or before ^ (v. 13.3), excepting in the emphatic state of the participle fem. pass, of Verbs ]] in Pa., Aph., and Eshta., where is added to distinguish it from the.^active participle (comp. 48. B. Decl.IV. Eem.). Finally Q is as- sumed in the emphatic stats sing, of some words ; e. g. VAloaSD from 13aSD for lAlsiSo ; c) a vowel is assumed with Q between two vacant consonants : this vowel is _!. when it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable ; e. g. CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 43 .qdZo,-m ; but when it stands in a simple syllable ; e. g. UOpM . d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be attached to the preceding, and the second to the following syllable ; e. g. "^wwOjib and ]A>.Q,iD; if the second consonant be ], must be assumed, for a., Q and ] cannot stand without a vowel between two consonants. PAET SECOND. ETYMOLOGY, OR, PARTS OF SPEECH. CHAPTER i. PRONOUNS. 16. Personal and Possessive Pronount. The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes : Separate Pronouns^ which stand as separate words, and mark the nominative case ; and Svjjixes^ consisting of syllables formed from the separate pronouns, which are appended to other parts of speech ; appended to Yerbs, they mark the accusative ; appended to nouns, the possessive pronoun, or the relation of the genitive ; and, with preposi- tions, they form the remaining cases. TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES. 45 TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES. SEPARATE. SUFFIXED TO VERBS. SUFFIXED TO NOUNS. 6. c. In Sing. In Plural. Sing. 1. 2 1 1 c. m 7 7 ! 1 A .1 ^ ^' 2 m. LA' * P >*- 7 2 f . ^AjT .jSI^ j *u^ ^ 7 3 m. f OCT Ol- r . ! ^01CLb. t^Ol p -kOLki 01- 7 ^01Q ^ OOI uOIQiA. ^01Q 3 f. waGI I 01 r . I OU OU.^ di * . p 01 OVi. Plur. 1 c. ^ . ^ u p V ^ ^ 7 2 m. ^oi\jT ^a^ * v^' ^on .QOjI 2 f. 3 m. ^a J * -1* p -ft X 7 OOIa. SEPARATE FROM THE V ERB. 3 f. ^r ^(Jl i -" 7 &Ota. J 46 KEMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCEKInING THE TABLE. Remarks and Explanations concerning the Table I. T/!.e Personal Pronoun. The second and third persons have two genders, while the first person is of the common gender. The fem. of the 2 sing,, is denoted by ^^ appended to the masc. In the 3 sing. 001 masc. and wai fem., are used rather in a demon- strati ve sense, while 001 masc. and *a01 fem., are used in connection with adjectives and participles rather to designate the present tense. And so in the plur., the first forms given above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the second as accusatives (comp. 36). Concerning Linea oc- cultans under ] and 01 of the 1 and 3 sing., see 12.1. II. Suffix Pronouns. A. Suffixes of the Verb. In the sufiixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pro- nouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was not L but O, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203). Of the suffixes to verbs, given in the Table, those marked , fall into two classes ; the first of which are attached to con- sonants (with the exception of ^ ) in the forms of the regular verb ; and the second mainly to the same forms of Yerbs ]3, and in part to the imperat. and fat. of the regular verb. The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both. The suffixes marked h are appended to forms with Q and .x, which then quiesce in _1 and _i. Where this form is wanting under h it is comprehended under a. Finally the suffixes under c are attached to the forms with ^, and also to the t> sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret. The forms wanting under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union, comp. 36, and 37, and the accompanying Tables. B. Suffixes of Nouns or Possessive Pronouns. The suffixes of the noun (possessive pronouns) are attached, to the emphatic state ( 45,) with the SUFFIXES TO PAETICLES. 47 falling away, of V- ; e.g. *A^ , empliatic state 1raS > ^ , with suff. i n\V)> In the plural they coalesce with the end ing of the construct state wi., so that they may be considered as attached to the final consonant of the noun ; e.g. construct state I n\V^, with suff. y i n Vo Only in the 3 sing. masc. does *A pass into Q, and in the 3 sing. fern. _L is the union vowel. In the noun fern, the suffix with a union vowel is attached to the emphatic state, with the falling away of V , e. g. CfiALoAo from emphatic state IALoAo* In the remaining persons (1 sing. 2 and 3 plur.) suffixes sing, are attached to the construct state (v. 46. 2); e. g. ^Al^oAii from the construct state Z^oAo, plur. ^j^ALoAid from construct state A^oAo* Kem. For the complete union of nouns and suffixes, compare 4648, and the accompanying Tables. Besides, the possessive pronoun may be expressed in a separate form jfrom the noun, by means of some form of ^iui? (from J = -I'jjJi^ chald. i^ and ^ ) with a suffix, thus ; Plural. Singular. 1. ^~^? ^^^** I HiN i> ^Q^\i> your. X . >Ni> my. .3. ^Oll^> ^OOI^J their. \ GlSa) her. OlK*> his. Rem. This form, which corresponds with the German der meinige (mine)etc. occurrinjr after a suffix to the noun, indicates an emphasis ; e. g. jA^J yii,>V)\2o, hut thy scholars. Sometimes it signifies relating to; e. g. ^0^\i> to us. C. Suffixes to Particles. The Prepositions^ which were in part originally nouns, *ake suffixes sing, and plur. Singular suffixes are attached 4:3 OTHER PRONOUNS. to JOa in, ^ the sign of the dative, io^ to, ^io from^ >Ams and hta after, ^o^ricQ^ towards, against, comp. 15. 2. Plural suffixes are attached to >Q\n aside, only , iS\o without, ipM or ^Sr^ about, JZiLj^for, ^^ over, jK or p*. towards^ /^01 is united with the X X 7 personal pronoun 3 sing. masc. 001 and fern. *ji01, forming QJOl and JOI* Sometimes OOl and ^0\ precede ; e.g. pOl OCl just this, (jOl adjust this. The Chaldee ,^iN| is only used in compari- sons ; e. g. ^^iNi] ^i5', or ^^iNoi ^\} such. 2. The Relative for all numbers and genders is j, who, which, that, and with the pronouns ^-So c. Ji-1 m. |r*l / ^ i ^O pi. com. preceding, it becomes interrogative. Rem. p-il having a relative signification with > following it, is an exception to the general rule. 3. The Interrogative ; a) for persons of both genders and numbers is ^iD ivho. It unites with 001 following, and niE VERB GENERAL VIEW. 49 forms Ql2iO and M-i| masc. whof \rA fern, whof V) (io and ^Syb wliat^ refer to things ( U^D, tOLo ) ; c) yjk\%\ refers to both persons and things. 4. The Beoiprocal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed partly by passives ( 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2), or by the noims \m2i^ soul^ and ] SD Qir> person^ with suffixes appended (comp. the Syntax). CHAPTER II. THE VERB. 18. General View. 1. The Yerb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of the others. Yerbs may be divided into the three following classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them in accordance with definite laws, or as a noun is to be considered as their stem: a) Primitives \ e. g. J^to to write^ ^J>4^ to hill ; h) Verbal Derivatives {Conjugations) ; e. g. *Djl to justify^ from *jDj1 ; c) Denominatives^ subsequent formations from nouns ; e. g. ;jcai to tithe^ from ;flll ten ; 7 k7 '^ %ja.^f to celebrate Easter^ from f^.^ Easter. 2. The Stem-form in the 3 sing. masc. pret. consists usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum), and is pronoun- ced as a monosyllable, by the help of placed over the middle radical in transitive, and in intransitive verbs. 3. From this are formed the Derivatives or Conjugations, which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection of persons, and the principal characteristics of mood and tense. Modern grammarians have added a third conjugation, Shaphel, to the two originally derived from the ground-form. The passive is formed by prefixing 2^, and has not only a passive but also a reciprocal and reflexive signification. 50 THE REGULAR VERB. The Conjugations are as follows ; Active. Passive. 1. Peal ^O to kill ;* Ethpeel ^^s^Zf. 2. Pael ^^4^ to murder ; Ethpaal Vy^^Z]^ 3. Aphel ^4^1 to cause to kill ; Ethtaphal ^\4^^^f 4 Shaphel ^\^l to cause to kill (mr^) Eshtaplial ^4^Aa1. Rem. x\ll verbs do not have the whole of the conjugations ; and wherePael and Aphel are found together, there is usually a difference 7 7 ^ l' in their signification ; e. g. ^^^ to honor, JO0( to be burdensome. 4. The Syriac, like the other Semitic dialects, has a Pre- terit and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the active. The Hebrew Infinitive absolute and Infinitive con- struct are in Sjriac united in one form (v. 19. B. 8). RexM, The other relations of time are supplied in the following manner ; the Present is expressed by the participle with the personal pronoun following; the Imperfect and Pluperfect by (OCTI ( J^^in)' T T the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite. The Optative and Subjunctive^ are contained in the future, to de- note which more explicitly, | OCT is also frequently used (v.Syntax). 5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes. Regular and Irregular. In regular verbs the radical letters remain unchanged, while in irregular verbs, one of the rad- icals either falls away {Defective Verbs), or quiesces {Quies- cent Verbs) V. 27. 1. EEGULAR VERBS. 19. The Inflection of Regular Verbs in General, The formation of Verbs, in respect to person, tense, and mood is effected, in general, by uniform laws. The irre- gular verbs are formed in a different manner, in particular Literally, he killed, etc. The infinitive being considered in English the ground-form of the verb, and for the sake of brevity, is uniformly used to represent the Syriac ground form 3 masc. sing. Tr. KEGULAR VERBS. 51 cases only, according to their special laws. It will therefore be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of what- ever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb. In the following Tables of the Inflection of Regular and Irregular Yein^s, the following signs are used : The radical letters are denoted by *. The vowels which stand imme- diately over the *, belong to the inflection of transitive verbs ; and those vowels which are separated from the * by belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote other forms in equal use. Radical letters which have fallen away, are denoted in the Table of Irregular Yerbs, 27 by . Those which take their place, stand over this sign. 52 TABLE OF PERSONAL INFLECTIONS. O S Ph o O H 1 1 1 Singular. s CO 5f 5t CO * f } X- 1 * ^ * : f * * * * * * * * : * H * * 4 ' * 1 T 1 * * CO I* i u T a I. * CI 1 * * .0^ CO 1 * * 2 * ^d * * * * * TH * ^ '1. ^ o TABLE OF THE TEMPORAL INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 53 O o o H Q O H O ^ 1 ti, i 1 i Particip. Pass. 1 * * * * : X- ^ -x- X- ^ : i x- 5f 2 '1 ^d 54: PERSONAL INFLECTIONS. A. Personal Inflections (comp. Table 1). The inflection of persons is found in its most simple form in the preterit and imperative, where formative syllables are appended only to the stem {Afformatives). In the future the form is more complex, additions being received at the beginning {Preformatlves)^ and at the end. The inflection is as follows ; In the 3 sing. pret. the simple verbal stem suffices for the masc; but in the fem., 2, preceded by JL (== X]~t)i is appen- ded and considered as a sign of that gender. The 3 plur., which has a two-fold gender, is distinguished in the masc. by the addition of the plural-sign Q, from which the fem. in its simple form is distinguished only by a silent ^ instead of Q* In the same person of the fat. the inquiry into the origin of the preformative J in the sing. masc. and the plur. masc. and fem., is a difficult one. The opinion that the J had its origin in tji is opposed by the fact that among the Zabians this preformative exists, while there is no similarity between those two letters. More consideration is probably due to the derivation from poi and ^QJOl (comp. 17). In the plur., the masc, in addition to the preformative J, is distinguished as in the pret., by the plural-sign Q with ^ pa- ragogic, which causes the vowel of the last radical syllable to fall away. And thus the ^^ in the fem. reminds one of the paragogic final syllable }-l!D ii^ Hebrew. The abbreviated form of the personal pronoun evidently appears in the 2 sing, and plur. Thus in the pret. sing., 2 masc. and ^Z fem. are related to Ai1 masc. and *^Li\ fem., as fOZ masc. and ^Z fem. are to tOAj | masc. and ^Aj] fem. in the plur. The same is true of the preformative Z in the same person of the fut. sing, and plur. where the fem. sing., in order to designate the gender, takes .^ final and ^ paragogic, with a like influence upon the vowel of the preceding radical syllable. In the plur. the 2 pers. shares with the 3 pers., this same character at the end. In the 1 sing. pret. the ori- ginal form of the Z with _1 = i^ preceding, has not been shown. But in the plur. ^ and ^J, as well as f before the INFLECTION OF THE TENSES AND MOODS. 55 1 sing, and J before the 1 plur. fut. refer us the more defi- nitely back to \A and ^j^* Here too it should be noticed that the 1 plur. fut. is distinguished from the 3 sing. masc. which has the same form, by Ribui. The preformatives of the fut. uniformly take except m Pael and Shaphel, where (with the exception of the 1. sing.) they are vacant, and in Aphel, where they take The imperative coincides with the future in respect to formatives at the end, except that the paragogic ^ in the 2 sing. fem. and 2 plur. masc. falls away, the former person ending in the feminine sign ^, and the latter in the plural sign Q . In both cases in Peal, Q is retained as the vowel of the radical syllable. Finally the fem. plur. ends with ^ and the vowel of the final syllable is retained. B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods {pomp. Table 11). 1. With the preterit (the characteristics of which are more specifically given in Table 11. and the section following), the imperative most nearly coincides. The imperat. Peal receives, in Yerbs Med. A, between the second and third radicals, Q quiescing in ; but in Yerbs Med. E. and 3 y Gutt. the middle radical takes All the remaining imperatives are like preterits, except that in Ethpe. and Ethpa., Linea occultans stands under the middle radical 7 with preceding. Rem. The same holds good in respect to the imperatives Ethta. and Eshta., if Linea occultans be admitted in them 2. The future is formed from the imperative by prefixing J In Aphel the characteristic falls away, and in passives 1 of the formative syllable 2] . In Ethpe. and Ethpa. after the rejection of Linea occultans, the vowels of the preterite re-appear. 3. The infinitives (of which the simple form denotes the gerund in do or the absolute state, but with L prefixed de- notes the construct state) are formed from the preterites by prefixing So* They end (excepting in the Peal, where they coincide precisely with the preterit) in Q, and in the apoco- 66 THE GROUND FORM PEAL. pate feminine form, in La , changing the vowel of the last syllable of the preterit into 4. The participles are formed from the preterit as fol- lows ; in peal, active form, the first radical takes -^, and the second JL ; in the passive form jl_I_ is inserted between the last two radicals. In the other conjugations Id is pre- fixed, and JL, in the second syllable of the active form, is changed, in passives, into JL* But this distinction appears only in the absolute state of the masc, and even here is lost in verbs 3 Gutt., j, and 01, the active form of which like- wise takes _L* 5. The preformatives of the fut., infin., and part., mostly take JL ; but in Aphel they take _L, rejecting the 1 accor- ding to No. 2 ; and in Pael and Shaphel they are without a vowel. Rem. For the reciprocal use of these twoTahles, which suffice for the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ; that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal. The forms in Table II. in the inflection according to Table L, retain their charac- teristic vowels, and merely take from Table I. the affbrmatives with the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the stem falls away, the remaining preterits also lose the vowel of the last radical syllable ; but Ethpe. takes _!. over the first radical, where this has _L in Peal.* In the fut. the vowel of the last radical syllable is uniformly lost where Q falls away in Peal, except that in this case also in Ethpe.the first radical takes _!_ In imperatives the * . vowel of the last radical syllable is retained, as Q is retained in the imperat. Peal. 20. A. The ground form Peal its Formation and Signification. 1. The usual form of Peal is ^^4^ {transitive verb med. A), Besides this the form with Ji {med. E) is always used *The inflection of the different persons iu the {)reterit should be noticed in order to perceive the verification of this remark. Tu. ITS FORMATION AND SIGNIFICATION. 57 for intransitives ; e. g. oAa to sit, JD'fO to be near. To this class also belong Verbs ]l, which, throw back upon the _ i first radical ; e. g. jOt\o to feel pain^ or derivatives of Hebrew Verbs ^^ ; Ci^g. *o]^ = ^-jt:- ^ne form Med. O. still ap- pears in the Verb joao to shudder. Rem. With the inflection of Verbs Med. A. agree those with 3 rad. 01 ; e. g. 01SQ to name, OlliZ to admire. Verbs Med. E. retain , when in Verbs Med. A. stands in the radical syllable. In respect to the forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret. iNf)^, ^ ' ^^*^ and ^X^O adduced bj Buxtorf, the first is found only in Verbs |J and the second seems to have originated from crasis with the affix ^01* There are instances to be found, though rare, in which is placed over the third radical in the 1 plur. ^^4^* The apocopate form of the infinitive with Q is also sometimes found in Peal ; e.g. Luke ix. X 7 * 33. a^iSQ^* In the imperat.plur.masc. with ^ paragogic, Q final quiesces in _ ; e.g. tO^Q^^* Besides the 2 plur.fem.with x, Amira (p. 300) adduces another form, viz : t j> \q^ The imperat.ofVerbs Med. E.takes instead of Q ; though the transitive form with Q is also found ; e.g. QJ^O'^Q from iD;iD^ Sometimes another form with occurs ; e. g. Rom. xiii. 3. r^^* More rarely the vowel of the imperat. differs from that of the fut. as in the Verb ^ll, fut. ^1 p, imperat.^1* Not only the imperat. but the fut. of Verbs Med.E. and 7 7 > of those having the third rad. a guttural, take ; e.g. ;Km* In the fut. 3 sing. fem. the form with t-i attached is more frequent. Also a form of the fut. with ; e. g. -^*^^' together with n\n Instead of the part. act. ^^v^jO, the participial noun of the form^\4^, emphatic state ij-4^) is often used. In the part. act. the emphatic state masc. and the absol. fem. are alike ; e. g. 1J-4^ The active form ^9,ikM (Mark xiv. 67), in immediate connection with ^^^ (verse 54), is perhaps to be regarded as an error iii transcribing. The passive form is always fully written ; in intransitive verbs, the first radical sometimes takes Passsive intransitives occasionally occur in 58 DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS. an active sense, sometimes derived from transitives ; e. g. ^ >r^^ hearing^ f^.j>*\ holding. To the inflection of the participle belongs also the idiom by which the present tense is expressed by a'^reviated per- sonal pronouns, appended, like afformatives^ to the partici- ple. But this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the 1 and 2. plur. masc. and fem., and is as follows : Participle Passive. Participle Active. COMM. MASC. wiZ2^' Al4^ 2 Sing. ^ixX4^ 1 Plur. ^b!L^ ^oAjlS^ 2 Plur 2. From the preceding remarks it appears that the signifi cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive. Sometimes we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there is no difference of signification ; e. g. fns\ and fft\\ to chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification; e.g. ^v-^ to divide^ *\V^^ ^^ ^^ divided. B. Derivative Conjugations. 21. Ethpeel. 1. The characteristic of this conjugation, as in the other passives, is the formative syllable L\ and the vowel or in Verbs 8 Ead. Gutt. _L, in the last syllable (vid. Amira, p. 278). The passive conjugations are distinguished from each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters, or by the addition of 2 {Eihta.) or by the insertion of {Eshta.). Rem. Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z see 12. 2. The first radical takes _L in the 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing, pret., in all of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fem. and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem. DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS. 59 of the future, and finally in the part, excepting the absolute state masc. According to others is used, but only in Verbs t^ even when 1 falls away ; e. g. Acts. xx. 27. A^lV; tSlmf* This usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Amira. The 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem. of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 2lY, from the same persons of Ethpa. excepting when the first radical is AH aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form ^"i^^Z*! is not mentioned by Amira. In the Verb m^^, in Ethpe., w>.- is inserted between the two final radical letters. The infinitive however is excepted ; e.g. pret. jn^Sl^^l j infinit. Offi^^ ASb* 2. The signification of Ethpe. is ; o) passive of Peal ; e.g. ^\4^2f ; h) reflexive ; e. g. JQlmZ1 to reflect hy or upon ones self; c) = Peal in intransitive verbs ; e. g. \iSi and wxiaZl to return; d) sometimes Ethpe, is passive oi Aph. ; e.g. 5n.,f) (verse 32) is a participial noun. 60 APHEL AND ETHTAPIIAL. 2. The signification of Pa. is ; a) causative ; e. g. ^js*j to cause to he afraid^ from ^xj to fear ; h) intensive ; e.g. Mli^ to overwhelm from M^4 ^ press; c) = Pe.; e.g. .jQmJ and *lm^ to kiss ; d) to hold forth^ to declare ; e. g. *i^?i to pronounce just. The signification of Ethpa. is ; a) passive of Pael ; e. g. ^^4^21 to he murdered ; h) reciprocal; e. g. i^yl] to wonder within one's self; c) = Peal ; e. g. ^ZiDjL] to he made to hlush^ i. e. to hlush = *mJ 23. Aphel and Ethtaphal, 1. Aphel is characterized by 1 placed before the stem, which quiesces in _L After the preformatives of the fut., infinit. and part., ] falls away, and its vowel falls back upon the preformative. JL occurs in the second syllable, and, only in Yerbs 8 Pad. Gutt. and S , is -L found in that syllable. In the passive, to compensate for the loss of the characteris- tic 1 of Aph., L mit JL is inserted between the stem and the formative syllable of the passive I^* The final radical syll- able takes ; e.g. ^\4^ZZ1* Rem. The characteristic | of Aph. is retained after the prefor- mative, in verbs, which lose a radical letter ; e.g. ^.^j^pD from ^.ja* Under the same rule should be placed Verbs \L\ e. g. A!2 p or ^t^J* But the Verbs *m>iT| to he able, and ^L\ to drink, do not belong here, since _2^ already re-appears over ( They are rather forms of Pe. with ( prosthetic, as is also shown by their further for- mation ; e.g. fut. t^jJUAJ, infinit. QuMJQmSD (comp. 20.Rem.), part. P. '^^ ''^*, and the passive ^**oL\* In respect to the participles of Aphel the same rule holds good as in 22.1. Rem. compared with 19. B. 4. Buxtorf RTid others do not recognize the passive. Lud. de Dieu p. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult. SHAPHEL AND ESHTAPHAL. 61 ^iw4o^2) Later Grammarians however doubt the correctness of this form (Comp. 8. Rem.). 2. The signification of Aphel is ; a) causative as in Pael ; e. g. ^Ljk\ to bring forward ; and then it frequently takes two accusatives ; e. g. ..ao!^ to cause to put on (something upon some one) ; h) imperative or permissive ; e. g. ^OOj*! to suffer to mount a horse ; c) intransitive ; e. g. ^^oaIoI to he weak ; d) = Pael ; e. g. ^^>* j and ^^I* jl to frighten. The passive has either the passive signification of Aphel or co- incides with Pe.; e.g. *oAji to dwell, *qZoZZ| to keep house. % 24. Shaphel and Eshlaphal, 1. Shaphel is one of the conjugations, admitted into the paradigm at a later period ( 18. 8). Its characteristic is m with JL prefixed to the stem, and Jl in the last syllable. In inflection it coincides with Aphel. In the passive (Eshta- phal) occurs the transposition of m and L and L appears in the last syllable. The preformative of Shaphel, like that of Pael, takes JL only in the 1 sing. fut. Rem. In verbs which lose a radical letter, this conjugation some- times furnishes a new stem ; e. g. *>OmA to he black, from ^OmA, Shaph. of ^V>i The same is true in Eshtaphal. Thus JajOAs*! furnishes the new quadriliteral u;.kA{ 2. The signification of these two conjugations is similar to that of Aph. and Ethtaphal. Sliapliel is, in the examples still extant; a) cav^sative ; e.g. ^yir* to let fall-, h) intert,- sive ; e. g. <^N to exchange, from ^ZlLj^ to change, Eshta- phal has sometimes a passive and sometimes a reciprocal signification ; or it forms intransitives ; e.g. ^..jAsI to err^ ijo sin. 62 OTHER CONJUGATIONS AND QUADRILITERALS. 25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs. The occasional conjugations (vid. Agrell in Otiolis Sjr. p. 28 sq.) are similar to Pa. and Aph. and take, for the most part, their signification. They are also to be considered as quadriliterals. To verbs, which take the initial, prosthetic letters So , CD , Z, and are. Is 7 A. similar to Apliel, belong ; a) Maphel, ,^nfnV) to make poor, pass. ^!MQSdZ( to become poor ; b) Saphel, *sai;flD to permit to hapten and to hasten === iiOlj] , pass. ^\^^AfiD] to persecute ; c) Thaphel, r^^O^Z to teach. Rem. For ^LGuCTI (jiA| vid. 23. Rem.) no special form can be assumed, as similai*examples do not occur. B. Similar to Pael are those conjugations which insert JL, Sq, ;, Q, after the first radical viz.; a) Pauel = Poel, usually transitive ; e. g. '>^y io chew the cud, pass. jyQoL] to become divided ; b) Paiel, transitive ; e. g. f*^>fy> to suffer ; c) Pamel ; e.g. ^^fflV^.i to remain : d) Parel ; ^yi^ to dance, pass. ^j;..Z] to be cut off. C. Kot very diiferent from the last are also the quadril- iteral verbs with prosthetic - and final ^, viz. ; a) Pali = Pael ; e. g. ^LmJ^ to domesticate, pass. vaAjJDZ] to converse with one ; b) Palen, ^^y to be master, pass, ^a^)^ ( to make one a master. D. Here belong quadriliterals with a radical doubled = f y Pilel and Pilpel ; a) Palel = Pael ; e. g. ?r^^ to reduce to slavery ; b) Pealel with its pass. ^\V>\mZ1 to dream, and finally; c) Palpel (in Yerbs Ml); e. g. ^ocoSqcd to heal, pass. l^;ljZ1 to be broken. I^EM. Those verbs, which are compounded of two ground forms, 7 7..^ 7 7 also belong here ; e. g. ;SSnfc| to blush, from ^^ t and ;l # In quadriliterals formed from the Greek (e.g. Q^Ao to elect a Bishop), VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. 68 a letter of the ground form frequently falls n way; e.g. yt'rti^ ^^ appoint as Patriarch. 26. Verbs with Gutturals. Since tlie peculiarities of Guttural Yerbs, are not marked in Syriac, as in Hebrew, eitber by Dagbesh forte or Sbeva, the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second rad- icals are gutturals are entirely wanting ; and those only, of which the third radical is a guttural or >, deviate, and those in but very few cases from the regular verb, in connection with which these deviations have already been cited. (Con- cerning Yerbs ], K, and ]]" compare g 28, 80, 82). For more convenient reference, these cases of deviation are here brought together. These verbs take ; 1) inthefut. and im- perat.Peal, instead of Q ; e. g., fut. jfMJ ; imperat. Jf] 2) in like manner in the other conjugations, and in the part, act. Peal, they exchange the _2_ of the last syllable for _L ; e. g. part. act. Peal, '^U pret. Ethpe. ;Lo|Z|, fut. jSojAj; 77,77, ^77 ,"' Pa. pret. j,^, fut. j^aJ, imperat. >,, part. act. & pass. Jr*^; Aph. Pret. ^>1, fut. ^is'^J, imperat. M>|, part. act. and 7 7 pass. ^;Sd Rem. In the same manner in Pa. and Ethpa. are formed the following ; ^lo to console, JiQ.^ ^^ ^^^h 11 1 ^^ de/ile, and 1 fSM to be adorned (comp. 13. 1. Rem). II. Irregular Yerbs. 27. General View. 1. Under Irregular Verbs, are to be comprehended, those in which there is a change in respect to one of the three letters of the ground form. Such letter either quiesces or/alb avjay (Quiescent aiid Defective Verbs). A verb in which two let- 64 IRREGULAR VERBS. ters of the ground form are changed is said to be doubly an- omalous ( Verbum dupliciter imperfectum). 2. The Quiescent Verbs are the following ; verbs with 1. rad. Olaph (la), ^oJDf; 1. rad. Jud (^^.a), y^; med.rad. Olaph (ll), ^|i; med. rad. Vau and Jud (Ol,^ ^o (2>0QO), A^; and 3 rad. Olaph (]]) U^ To defective verbs belong those with 1. rad. Nun (-2)); e.g. *Q2LJ, and med. rad. doubled (Ml); e.g. *aDj Rem. Here, and frequently in subsequent sections, the designa- tions of classes of verbs are taken from the position of the radicals, of the Verb ^*iA2) (= ^5?S), by which the variations affecting the radical letters of irregular verbs are kept in view. TABLE OF lEREG Verbs 11 ; IJ^- 32. Yerbs |1 ; Part. Pe. 1 Imperat. Pa. | Fut. Pe. Pret. Pe. p *** Pret. Aph. | Imp. Pe. j -n p *** 7 *** ] 1. ***i 7 *** Part. P. Pa. | Imperat. Pe. | Intia. Aph. Pret. Ethpe. Part. Pass. Imperat. ^7 7 *^x U-*-. 7 **:zi 3Pl.f.Fu.Pe. 1 2Pl.f.Imp.Pe. | 3f.S.Pr.Pa. | 3 f. S. Pr. Pe. 2.A. a. b. Fut.Ethpa. |Pr. Ethpa.| ^-0 .7-^ 7 7 7 * "Ji 'JL* 2S.f.Pr.Pa. 1 2Pl.f.Pr.Pe. |2m.S.Pr.Pe. 1 S. Pr. Pe. Yerbs Qland tuJL; ,-7 -7 ZoHc* Par.Act.Pe. 1 Pret. Pa. .1. * o* T>--7 3Pl.m.Fu.Pe 1 2S. f. Fut. Pa. | 8 m.Pl.Pr.Pe. 1 Sf.S.Pr.Pe. 2.B. ^o:;zi 7 o * * S. A. a. 1 1 1 ! Pr. Ethta. | 2 S.m.Fut. *o*ZZ] 1 ^o^LL Part. Pass. | Infinit. *o^2i) Yerbs ^ ; Par.Act.Pe. | Pr. Ethta. ^1, * o * ^th] i 1 Pr.Ethpa. | Pret. Pa. | 1 1' *;:2j T> 7 *** ULAR VERBS . Vid. pp. 51, 63. ^io* 30. 1 Verbs ]si ; ^1- 28. i Fut. Pe. 1 Pret. Pe. | | Pret. Ethpe. | Fut. Pa. | Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. | y * * * * J *** 1. * ** Z| 7 . 7 7 -n * ** i. Future. 1 Pr. Ethpe. | | Infin. Pa. | Fut. Pa. | (2m.Fu.Pe.) | l.S.Fut.Pe. I | 1 ^ " r 2. Q**oLO i> 7 (*Q*oZ) 7 I *Q*ol 7 X 2. Fut. Pa. 1 Pret. Pa. | | Pret. Esht. | Pret.Shaph. | Pret. Ethtap. | Pret.Aph. | | 7 A. * 7 ** * 3. **0 A*( 7 :.*oZZl ^0 * * I -1 3. :^,5a ^. 31. Verbs .jlQ ; riLT* ^ 29. Part. P.Pe. 1 Pret. Pe. | 3f. S. Pr. Pe. | Pret. Ethpe. | Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. | \ 1 I-^ 7 X * ** * * * 7 1. Future. Pr. Ethpe. | | Imperat. Pe. | 1 S. Fut. Pe. Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe. L 2. *o*ZAj *o*2Zl 2. S. I. * * ol 7I. Fut. Aph. Pret. Aph. Pret. Esht. Pret.Shaph. i Pret. Ethta. | Pret.Aph. * O * J 3. **oAl 7O 7 - **oZZ1 .0, a jncon 34. Verbs ^ ; * aaj* 33. Pret. Aph. Pret. Pe. | " | Fut. Aph. | Pret. Aph. 1 Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe. | (*),.7 * * 1 * * 1. ft 7 * * O J . .7 * * o I 7 "R 7 Pr.Ethpe. | Part. P.Pe. | ***zi * A H H 2. VERBS. 67 A. Quiescent Verbs. 28. Verbs 1 rad. Olaph quiescent (]2)) ^^io] to eat. The following are the irregularities of these verbs. 1. In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the fii'st radical has no vowel, I takes _L , but in the imperat. and part, pass., it takes ; e. g. ^Qol , ^i^^1 If the preform- ative or characteristic. consonant of the conjugation be with- out a vowel, the vowel of 1 falls back upon it ; e. g. fut. Pa. ^|j; pret. Ethpe. ^W* Rem. In the fut. and infinit.Pe. the preforraative takes Jl, in the verbs y^i; V5^T, Ui;^, V^XMl r*T-rvOIe.g. ^Qb^^to^ But is used in the verbs ^X ^ll" ^^SlL", ^X, '^X yT^X e. g. ^1j, ;SDl!k)* Both of these forms are found in 1Z1 It should further be remarked that the first class of verbs mentioned above, form the fut. and imperat. Pe. like transitives with Q , excep- ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or >, and the second class form them like inti-ansitives with _L Lud. de Dieu (p. 26 ), rightly doubts the correctness of the double form of the infinit. and fut. Pe. with JL and _f., although the form ^i|SD-^ is found in I Cor. x. 27 ; but the fut. of it is not found with Q Also the correctness of ^Q-ialZ in 1 Cor. x. 28, is suspected. The forms of the 3 plur. fem. pret. i\o| and ,^iN^| are not approved. The vowel is sometimes found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (20.1.Rem.). In the passives Ethpe. and Ethpa. of the Verb fjaf, ] is assimilated to the preceding 2; e. g. ,jaZZ|* This formation is also found in some other verbs varying little from regular verbs ; e. g. ^^ZZf and "^XiX 2. The radical 1 usually falls away in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.; e. g. \qd\ I will eat^ '^Xl^^iH speak. 1 does not so often fall away in the other persons. The same peculiarity ex- ists in the infinit. fut. and part. Pa., and the vowel is thrown back upon the preformative ; e. g. *2LiJ and 2iL^* 68 QUIESCENT VERBS. Rem. The Verbs ^1( to go away and jZl to come^ lose | in the imperat., and form ; ^f, oil, ^f, ^f ^]2, oZ, -2, XL 3. In Aphel and Shaphel with their passives, 1 is chang- ed into O, and, with the preceding _L , forms au ; e. g. Rem. In two verbs | is changed into i^, viz : 1Z1 , Aph. -Aa1, imperat. iLif, fut. liJuJ , infiait. Oi^xSO , part. IAaSd* {^) , Aph. ^kIC71 = p)2J5n ) For this reason *Sl^\ and Ubk to learM, are sometimes found together. General Remarks, The Verb ^'ij (according, to 12.1 ; 15.2) should be no- ticed in the following persons ; pret. 3 fern, and 1 sing. AllX ^if ; ftit. 2 f em.sing. and 2 and 3 plur. ^-AlH^oLilT, etc.; part m. emph. Bl] and plur.masc. and fern. ^^lV, ^^t* In the signification, to he of ttse^ to profit^ it is formed regu- larly. Verbs which commence with oil, like Verbs |2), as- sume the vowel and throw it back upon 1 , but do not, like those, reject or change it, although this latter occurs in the Galilean dialect, which had but a single character for the two gutturals (comp. ]. Eem. 1), 29. Yerhs with 1 Bad. Yud (^2)) j.^ to bring forth. In respect to these verbs it should be observed : 1. That in the pret. Pe. even when transitive, they take JL in the ultimate syllable (excepting Verbs 3 Bad. Gutt.) ; VERBS 1 RAD. JUD, ETC. 69 e. g. j^Lk (^r)* If a, the first radical, be without a vowel, as is usually the case (in pret., imperat., part. pass. Pe.), it quiesces in ^* In the fut. and infinit. Pe. the vowel JL falls back upon the vowelless preformative ; e. g.. ^^^J , r^lSo* So too in Ethpe., falls back upon 2 ; e. g. r^-*^!* But where, in the regular verb, the first radical takes a vowel, these verbs are regularly inflected ; e.g. 2^^* Rem. In the part. pass. Pe., besides the regular form, one with 7 x 7 7 7 appears ; e. g. 2LiA^* Only ^Gl* takes ; but where the regular verb takes over the first radical, , with Linea oocultans under Ol, falls away ; e.g. AaOU Lin. occultans with appears in the 3 fern, and 1 sing. pret. with a suffix attached ; e.g. GlA^OLi . 7 14 she has given him (LdGLk)* In 3 plur. masc. and fern, under sim- 9v 7 ilar circumstances, Lin. occult, falls away ; e. g. wtCTIQOOla thei/ v 7 " have given him (QQOLi)* 2. In the fut.and imperat.Pe.the second syllable takes _!_ In the fut. and infinit. Pe. this class of verbs is similar to Verbs la, and changes a into f which quiesces in (vid. 1. above). But in the 1 sing. fat. ^ falls away ; e. g. ^SV The imperat. on the contrary retains ^ ; e.g. ^* UKU.^fl and *Oi\I follow the inflection of Verbs ^ ( 33) ; e. g. imperat. ^> and ^lOL, fut. ^,J and ^qAj, infinit. Kif%0 and 7. -n V * 7 *oALd* In like manner *^01 imperat. from *QCJU follows the same rule. 3. In Aph. and Shaph. with their passives a is changed into o (vid. Yerbs ]a, 28. 3) ; e.g. jSoV, ^?cii Rem. ^ is retained in ^oSul and Alal ; still it should scarcely * 7 be considered as an irregularity, since from f^La appear Pa. ,^10, Ethpa. fLolX* 70 VERBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YCJD QUIESCENT. 30. Verbs Med. Olaph quiescent (]l) ^]i to ask. The irregularities of these verbs occur only in Pe.,Ethpe., and Pa. with its passive. 1. Peal. In the pret. 1 quiesces in Ji and the latter falls back from 1 upon the first radical ; e. g. ^]i ; but when u is the third radical, it quiesces in standing before T ; e. g. w]] The vowel appears in Aph. ; e.g. ^1*1 In the imperat. and fut. Pe. 1 quiesces in ; e.g. ^1* , ^]ij 2. In Ethpe., besides the regular form *))2l , is some times inserted after Z ; e. g. jiloZ]* Rem. In both cases metathesis of f takes place ; also a duplication of it ; e.g. ^X ^V^ ^"^ l^l^V^ 5 Ethpc^AOllf and ^12d12]* 3. In Pa. and Ethpa. 1 is generally changed into a. ; e.g., n*.^ and *^^^ZV The other verbs retain 1 ; e. g. ^lAslI Rem. Both forms are found from \\ (l],.^ ] and y^ . 1) 31. Verbs Med. Bad. Van and Yud quiescent {oL and -1^) ^QD (iOQO) to stand up^ A.Vn to die. The verbs whose middle radical letter is Q or a., and whose grammatical structure generally agrees with that of the reg- ular verb, differ from the same in the following cases : 1. In the pret.and infinit.Pe. of Yerbs Ql, the vowel ap- pears in place of Q, which is dropped ; e. g. 5>ao, S^qSo In the part. pass. Pe., and in the other conjugations generally, Q is changed into jl, and quiesces in . in the part. P., Pe , Ethpe., Aph. an i Ethtaph.; e.g. 3>cu^, ^CLX)ZZ1, ^ f>>o ]' VEEBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YUD QUIESCENT. 71 On the contrary, a. is movable in Pa. and Ethpa ; e. g. ^alo, ^OjldZV In the part.act. masc. of Pe.,1 (=y, vid. 1.| Eem. 4), which has arisen from Q, goes over in the other inflections into a; e. g. U){o masc, |V)> n fem. Only in the imperat. and f ut. Pe.^ Q remains and qniesces in JL ; e.g. ioooj, in which cases, as well as in the pret. (in Yerbs -iA), A appears and quiesces in ; e. g. A.kLo , y) i mn Finally the preformatives of the fut. Pe. have no vowel, ex- cept the 1 sing., which takes over 1 ; e. g. ^ool* Rem. In Pe., Ethpe., Aph., and Eshta., verbs of this class, which are at the same time U ( 32), as (QA and some others which can be V 7 referred to no particular species, as t-f^Or, \QO, retain Q movable. Some are inflected in both ways, but with a different signification ; e. g. 30^ to take a handful, Aph. >1 ( to deviate from the way. TheVerb i>aco, contrary to the rule, takes j. in the fut. and imperat. But LtlD follows the inflection of Ql' Verbs ; e.g. fut. ZqSQJ* The imperat. of %DQja to spare, takes (rf>>), with the signification, far be it. In some manuscripts _2_ is found in the preformatives of the fut. and in the infinit. Pe., which manner of writing was received by the ancient grammarians, and which, as is testified by Amira, p. 311, the Mandseans used on account of metre (vid. Lud.de Dieu p. 292). 2. In Ethpe. 2 of the formative syllable 2] is doubled ; e. g. JtO-i^ZZI^ By this, the transposition of the sibilants does not occur ; e.g. MalZZl* When three Z come together in the 3 sing. fem. and 2 sing, and plur. masc. and fem. fut., one Z is omitted ; e. g. ^>0.x^ll.* The occurrence of three Z together is unavoidable only when the verb itself begins with Z, in which case four Z would properly come in succes- sion ; e. g. ^o\nZZ2 Ps. Ixii. 10, from ^^L Elhtaph. differs from Ethpe. merely in signification ; e. g. \>QjSLL\ Ethpe. to raise one^s self Ethtaph. to he token away. Rem. ^mi^ZZy to he convinced, Ethtaph.. from m i <^ l , is usually written ^ma^^ZV 72 VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. 8. In Aph. the preformatives of the fat.,infinit.,and pan., lose the characteristic _L , excepting the 1 sing. fut. ; e. g. ^Q-iJDf The part, pass., contrary to the analogy of other part, passives, changes ^ into ; e.g. 5>aQk>, to distinguish it from the active form y)iOV> Rem. No example is found of Shaphel. 32. Verhs 3 rad. Olaph Quiescent ((J) |J-.. to disclose. These verbs, which include the Hebrew jj^i and j^^ Verbs, are different from the regular verbs in the following cases. 1. The third radical 1 either quiesces or is changed into %^ Here it should be remarked that the pret. Pe. ends in |-; e. g. B-i , the other preterits in ^; e.g. Ethpe. .aI^uiZ]* The futures of all the conjugations end in |- ; e. g. re. |J..^j , the imperat. Pe. in .jb- ; e.g. *"yi , imperat. Ethpe. ill .ji. ; e.g. -h^..Z( ; the other conjugations in | ; e.g. Pa. lJ-..> The termination of the infinit. Pe. is the same ; e.g -^i^Ld The other conjugations in the infinit. end with Oi^; e. g.' Aph. cu^.|^2^, the participles generally with |- ; e. g. Pe. Ij-yf Only the part. pass, of Pa., Aph., and Shaph., 7 ^7 ends with *jl-; e. g. Pa. ^A.^^.-So* Rem. Some verbs with .a* (-^) in the pret. Pe. are inflected like the other preterits. Here belong mostly intransitives, or Verbs Med. E. ; e. g. ^^.^^.-fiD to be great. Both forms are found in the Verbs pOa and "^> to swear. The imperatives of this kind of Terbs, take wi at the end. Some verbs with 3 rad. He., seem to belong here ; e.g. OlSD to name, Pa. .jlSQs* Some grammarians, VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. 78 without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms |jyiZ( and IJ-..Z| The Verb |001 has two forms of the future; e. g. (OCJIJ and (OOU^ In the formation of the present tense in connection with the pronoun, the part, takes wk quiescent, instead of f. ; e. g. A^lOjliD for Aj"! 1lO>liD From p-CO ^o hate appears a double form of the part. pass. ; e. g. [ISO and |>1CD The former refers more particularly to things, and the latter to persons. 2. "When a letter or syllable is added, 1 is either changed into a. or falls entirely away. A. In the first case, a. is a) movable in the pret. 3 sing, fem. of all the conjugations excepting Pe. of verbs ending in ]L ; e.g. Ethpe. AlLy.21 ( Pe. AS.. ) ; in the second form of 3 plur.fem. ; e. g. Pa. ^a-IS.. ; in the 2 plur. fem. of all the imperatives ; e. g. Pe. ^jloJ^.. ; in the 2 and 8 plur. fem. of all the futures ; e. g. Ethpe. ^j-^y. Aj ; in the fem. sing, and plur. of all the participles ; e. g. Pe. M-^yi ; and finally in all the infinitives except that of Pe. ; e. g. Aph. cub^.^lo (Pe. IJ w_Ld) ; J) A is quiescent in tbe 1 and 2 masc. and fem. of both numbers of all the preterits, and in such, a manner that .*. in Pe. (excepting tbe 1 sing. A.*^.. ) quiesces in ; e.g. AaS.. , .oA-i-iy. In other cases a quiesces in ; e.g. Ethpe. AjiJ^..ZT, ^oA^..Z11 B. 1 falls away in the 3 sing. fem. pret. Pe. of Verbs ending in ]1 with retained ; e. g. ASyi ; in the 3 plur. masc. and fem. pret. Pe., and in the 3 plur. fem. (in the 3 plur. masc. Pe. of Verbs -..iii and of other preterits, a- remains) of all tbe preterits ; e.g. Pe. ^vX' i^^tliefut. throughout in the 2 sing, fem., while the regular form ^ is changed into ^', e. g. Pa. r^Vj/' ^^^ ^^ *^^ ^ 74 VERBS 8 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. and 3 plur. masc. ; e.g. Pe. .a^.--J ; also in the 2 sing. fern, imperat., where ^ quiesces m ; e.g. Pa.. --^vi ; also in the 2 plur. masc. imperat., where Q quiesces in ; e. g. Aph. Q!i..1 ; finally in the plur. masc. of the part., where the reg- ular form ^a. is exchanged with ^a ; e. g. Pe. ^-^ ^ . Rem. Instead of Pa. and Ethpa.,sometimes the quadriliteral form -Q^.. appears. The 3 plur. masc. pret. Q^ii (with paragog. Nun ^OQ^..) occurs, sometimes with | retained ; e. g. Acts xxviii. 2. ^00|^ But the form CL^t* which Buxtorf adduces, is neither confirmed by examples nor found in Amira. In all the conjugations excepting Pe., the 3 plur. fem. pret. differs from the 3 sing. masc. only by taking Ribui (vid. 6), for which Amira (p. 266) in verbs ending with ^-, and in Pa. of verbs ending with (-, writes a double a ; e. g. > ^v<* ^^ ^he imperat. Ethpe., besides the form given in the paradigm, occurs the 2 plur. fem. ^^i i A.iZ.| General Remark. Verbs |J orjL^, which are at the same time ]^ (comp. 30. 1), are inflected like Verbs ]j ; e. g. pret. Pe. wi|j. Zuj], L\i, ^Zutf, plur. a1], etc., infinit. lllSo, imperat. J\i, ^a]], etc., fut. ll]j, plur. ^ol]j, etc., part. act. \\i, pass. 1|J, Apn. pret. JiH] and *A1, infinit. a|Jk), imperat. J\i], fut. *.*lJj, part. ^U^. APPENDIX TO 32. Inflection of the Verb XLa* to live. In the Verb ]a** with a movable, a. is rejected when the first radical and the preformative are without a vowel ; e. g. infinit. Pe. 1*iD for 'U.mwLo* Sometimes this verb takes 1 between the preformatives and the first rndical ; e. g. DEFECTIVE VEKBS. 75 \jS^ (better perhaps V^V^), fut. "liiJ for )1mJ and with ] inserted iCLmM, Apli. pret. -k^, infinit. 0>rV) or Qa-j^lSo , fut. |mJ and |js*p , imperat. ]>11, part. ^wkSD and "U*!^* JL also falls away when no preformative precedes, and its vowel falls back upon the first vacant radical ; e.g. imperat. Pe. ti *i for > I. ig, part. fern, p-m for |aii>i The form ^(j^ (Matt. XV. 27) is found in the part. plur. masc. B. Defective Verbs. 33. Verbs luith the first radical Nun (^) *n2LJ to go out. The irregularities of these verbs are the following : In the fut., imperat., and infinit. Pe., and in all forms of Aph., the first rad. J falls away ; e. g. jDoaj, *OQ2), -^<^Vr> *Q2) ! The fat. and imperat. Pe. sometimes take and ; e. g. *iaj, \>LJ Rem. The exceptions to this rule are ; a) Verbs Med. Rad. doubled ( 34) ; e. g. ^ ; h) Verbs Med. Rad. Quiescent ; e. g. *2LI ; c) Verbs Med. Rad. Ol ; e. g. JOU, fut. JOUJ* Those verbs whose third radical is ^ or Z, are not changed by assimilation, as in Hebrew; e.g. ^iLCLftOI we have believed^ .oZAjjJ ye have descended. TheVerb * nmi to mount up, takes its pret. and part. Pe. from toKtr) (vid. 35.2). Upon retaining the characteristic 1 in Aph.; e.g. \d\L for pj. Comp., 23. 1. Rem. 34. Verbs with Med. Rad. doubled (ML) *CDflD> to sprinkle. In respect to these verbs it should be remarked : 1. That the middle radical falls away in the pret., infinit., 70 DOUBLY IKKEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. imperat., and fut. (having over the preformative) Pe. ; e. g. pret. CD> , infinit. CD*^ , fut. %flDO;J , imperat., %CDOn Also Aph. and Shaph. with their passives; e. g. *flDJ|, %flD)221^ The part. act. Pe. takes 1 in place of the middle radical, which has fallen away ; e. g. *Ci]j ; but 1 falls away again when a syllable is added ; e. g. plur. Rem. Those verbs whose 2 and 3 rad. is ( , are exceptions, and are inflected according to the rules for quiescent verbs ( 35. 1. d). r * In the fut. and imperat. Pe. forms with (not ) appear ; e. g. < 1 , ^ The part. act. Pe. has ^*^R in the plur. from the Verb ^\l to go in. In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical appears again, but it is marked by Linea occultans ; e. g. Heb. ix. 5, ^^ i N\t)V> In Aph. the characteristic f sometimes remains after the preformative ; e. g. QlO^^IoA from '^*^-- (Comp. 23. 1. Rem.). 2. The part. pass. Pe. *Q-i^) , Ethpe., Pa. and Ethpa. ; e. g. *CQCDjZ| , JCQCDj , are regularly inflected, with the retention of the middle radical. Instead of the last two forms, how- ever, Palpel. and Ethpalp. ( 25. D) are more in use; e. g. Rem. The last remark holds good also of Shaphel, which occui*s more rarely (Comp. 1. above). 35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Yerhs. 1. By Doubly Irregular Yerbs are understood those in which occur two of those letters which usually give rise to irregularities. In the inflection of these verbs, either one or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. This class of verbs consists of (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.); a) Yerbs ^ and 13 ; e. g. Imj , Aph. %jJDd1 to ajpjprom ; b) Yerbs ^S) and ]]"; e. g. \1I\ to come^ Aph. jiZu] , Iflol to heal., Pa. aXo1 , ]2)1 to boil, Ethpe. ^^iilZl ; c) Yerbs J!a and ]] ', DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 77 e. g. ISnl to swear ^ imperat. i V) i, fut. Ik5]j , infinit. 'jlo'lLo , Aph. ^AJk)! ; |:l ^(? sprout^ imperat. .klu, Aph. %^ol and -A.l^l ; d) Yerbs li and B ; e. g. 1 p to chide^ imperat. ^"lo , infinit. ]^k? ; ^1] ^6> 5^ displeased^ Aph. J^* 2. To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 344:) belong the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the regular verb in inflection and interpunction. a) Impersonal Verbs. From JDjl to he hit^ occurs only the part. act. ^j1 it hefits. From tfLo appear the 3 sing. fern. pret. Aj|Lo it is disagreeable^ the part. act. fem. \i^ and the 3 sing. fem. fut. ttolZ ; and from Uo and 1V appear the act. o and It* it is suitable. b) The following defective verbs are completed from others which are synonymous : * nNno to mount up^ part, act. nOXm ; the other tenses of this verb are formed from .ncoj , imperat. jQcd , fut. -Qcaa , infinit. nrnV> , Aph. cQcdI , -n 7 7 7 IN part, .ooft^o ^ Ethpa. .oVAnn]. A similar complement is 7 ^7 found in t^Ol-a to give (see 29. 1. Rem.), imperat. *scn , infinit. \^] fut. \ES from \L , Ethpe. .oouZl'l c) Those which differ in form and inflection are t-^O"? to run^ imperat. ^JOl ; ^l] to go away and 12] to come (see 28. 2. 3. Rem.); also looi to be (see 32. 1. Rem. and 38), fut. |oou and joau ; also from looi is found a fut. apocopate ]oiJ , loiZ , plur. tOOU , etc., having the signi- fication of the conjunctive as well as of the usual future (comp. Agrell. Otiola Syr. p. 46) ; lAs to drink^ with ] prosthet. ^L\ , imperat. ^As"| , part. lA , fut. IAaj , infinit. IAaSd ; ^1 , Aph. ^iOkCTi to believe ; 11** (see App. to 32), to live. Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph. ; e. g. "U^ , Uq^ , 11 1 ? 1^)2] (1>2), which merely occur in Pa. and its V8 DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. passive, the second syllable qiiiesces in L, as in Verbs 8 Gutt. (see 13. 1. Eem.), and 1 is retained in all of the tenses and moods, while its vowel falls back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. 3 sing. fern. pret. I] > o , The formation is as follows ; pret. Pa. |ajq , part. V-n^ infinit. oUik) , indperat. "Uo. fut. laldj, Ethpa. Ui^l" part. U^Ai , infmit. ojloAi , fut. "llr^Aj. 80 PARADIGM I. like EthtaphaX. C^H like Aphel. 'vj -^ -vl "^ -v| J^^ r^ r^ j^ ^^ q '^ '^ d) <3) i.<:i) ^^ h^ f '4 -^ i -^ v 4 4 U a | # 3 1 \'V ^ '1'^ J^ ^ "^ -vl Q 'vl tvj 'vl 'i '^ v ^% 4 ^Q ->^Q -^q ..( I ! I :l "-I I r^ '4 f f f f ^ CJ J^ f^ -v4 Vj -^ >>J -vj -nI ri 1/ ^ ^-^ ^^ .^*9) ^-^ ^^ r.-^) i 4 J CI CI Regular Verb. 81 I :l4 t '^ '?i ';:! ci '^ '^ '-3 ;:J ;;-- ^ '^ ^ "3 "3 ^ '"^ ^^ q "^ ' .-t 'I 'I q ^vj tTvi .TM 'T;- Q ^ I '3 c^ a '::} 'CT '-3 '^ a '^1 '^ 1 n ^1 ^1 '9 :g ^ .q .g -d -g -q ^q :' 1/ :^ ^ 1 q Q Q Q b^Q t-Q " n t-Q f-^ .<:i) '^^ -^ ^ |=L ^ fj. '^ '^ '^ CI '::j '^^l '^ '^ '^ ^ cj '^ 'I 'I J-- ^4 W ^^ r^ r^ '*T' c f'^J f*^ * n ^ ^ /*n| ^e^ *^ *a ^o ^ */\ 4.0 -^ ^ t:P \ zP 1 ^ J T .1 1^ CO CO 44_: o (M 1-1 -^ CO CO 1 ^ 82 PARADIGM II. 1 ;| ? 1 ' d *6 '3 00 [ f, f,^ =, ^t^ =, \ =,^ ^,^ =* \ . tTvJ ^^ ^*v4 ^-vj (Tvl .rvj .TvJ .TvJ .J^ ,r^ ^o ooooooooo % 1 .\"'-' V-i o o ^ % 'o^ 'oT o o o o c r^ -^ -^a '^a ^ '-^ K < r 'o' *" 'oT 1 ^d 1 " f f ( V * * ''* - **" ^' ^' ivT ^ t?^ tT^ t!^^ t?^ ^"^ rT^ ^ "^"^ ^'^ 31 f- (^ (^ ^ ^ r^ i '^ 1 1 1 1 '1 ';^ 3 :l '4. '^ '3' C7 C7 ^c^ {::][ sq" ^jqp c^ c^ cj jq- c:^ ^d <^o n^.:^^^ ^ '^' i '^ 1 1 1 1 '1 If S ;l H "a ^1 \ 1 ^ 1 C^CO CO (M (M 1-tQ^COCO C^ (N i-i } 1^ CM C-. Verbs First Rad.Olaph. 83 o o '^ "-I tr^ W !H :5i 5i rvi -vj < cT-i 6 o 6 --^ -^ --^ o o ^-^ I a -a o o o o ^3 ^-^ -^ ^"^ 'o ^3 ^3 -^ "^ ^3 ^1 ^% /TT/Tf ^^%2 ^:v| ^vi ,rv| tT-l ^ ^oooooooooo ^^. .-4. n. n. ?4. n. ^-4. n. H. H. -ni ^ "^si -vi o : 1 -^ ri r 4:0 n. '4.. i '4. /I. '-4. '-1. .-4. '-4. H. '-4. '-4. '-4. 1 '0" '0' n. 4 p = f f f f. f f ^<^_ f,_ .-^ r^ r^ .-^ .-^ ^-^ .-^ r:i ri :^ vt A "A 'A A A A A., n. A.. 1/ '5 11 * 1 1 4 <'0 0- 4 -^ Cl^ CO 00 I S .. y- 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 1 ^ =1 -^ r^ rr 3 ^.4 ' ^ rH^COCO 5 ^s 's ^s ^^ '^ ^s ^^ ^.a ^4 ^4 '1 '3 0= s .51 d ri 1 ' fa ^Q :]a ^^ :; ^s 'S >s -^ii -ii 1 ^^ 4 :| '^ 3 =^ ^ .^, 1 3 .3 ^^^i "r % * ^* f f f f f %_ i 's '^ ^ 'ii 'ii a '4L '^ '^ ii S- 1 -^^ ^ ^ '^ 3 =1 4 ^ T '1 ^3 ft < . '4 '41 '^ '^ 'iL 'il '^ 'il % S 1 .|^-^ vs 1 1 ^1 4. ss,^' -' Verbs Mid. Rad. OlajjJi Quiescent. 87 'I ^ fn ^n "^ -"^ ^'^ -^"^ ^^ ^n "^ 1 n ^ n r^ -^"^ "^"^ ^n ^n "^ ^ :a ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ -l^ci 'I 'I "3 r^ t?^ 'i '^ '^ 111 '^ ? '4 '^ '^ c:j "{ 1 1 1 Qi 'vi < a 1 "^p r^ r^ ^M. :il :^ r 1 i ^q ,!^ ^-^ ;3 3 a a I ' -i '^ ':::! ':::J'^ : .^ :il^^ '1 .3 '1 ' 'I 'I |:| -vi -^ "^ *- n 1 'vi ^ 1 i 1 v a 51 a 31 1 'S 1 ':::! ^^ '-3 '^ 'il 'il "I ' 4 '^ c:| cj'^ % a a'il a ^3 -1' i^ !^ S 'ia ^3 'i :| ia S'i 1 p -^ ' ^^^3^-u1 ^^g f. 1 Part. P. m. f. 88 PARADIGM V. ^ ^ %- *# <=< ** ** Vl '^ "^ "^ "^ ^ "^ -^ -VJ Q . 1 o. V -T/ i ^ 11 l I vj ,51 a CO "3" CO ~ "^ ~ n rt n r '^ O "^ U "3 3 " ^ v.-i, .Q .n .g .Q .g .(j .^ .n ;a ^Q ^ ^1 I I ^1 ^ :^ I J 4. 1 ./o^v^a f f f _ f ( f , f f f-, vT Vj "Vj "^ P^J -"xj "^nJ >J >s| *^ Q hQ hQ hQ hq ^n hC 1/ -^ 1/ 1/ rv4 V| M .q .q M a "8 a ^ ^ 1/ 1 I 1 ;i ;i ^ jft^ CO CO i H>1 uyl H>| H >1 Kyi u yl 1 -1 J -1 =3 1 A =3 a "1. "> '^ v^-i i V 1 Id '1 "1 "1 "1 "1 "1 a % 1 'i^- v^^ "1 1 "1 "i "1 1 =1 "1 .1 1. 'I i > 5^"" ^^ ^^ ^>- '5^'' t^^ t;^'' ^^ ^" -5^ i --i 'n '-^ '-i --2 n '-^ n % 1 i,'-'i'-i 51 r *"'" ^ ^!^ 'I I ^ & I ;=!. <4J S Uh w S *j 3 <*j ja^COCO t^ N r-H^COCO . ^ 1 ^1 1 1 i 1 ; 1 :i t .3 0.1 6 f C = 4 40 1/ .^ ^1 -V4 r>g a : -6 C 'vl "^^ "^ >vj ."vl ^ "^ "-^4 --nJ "^ t ^'1/'i 'I '' 'f^-vs ~v4 >s4 9 s ^ Verbs First Bad. Nun. 93 'I \ 1 \ 1 '\ 1 1 \ J \\ '9 '* rTvj tfxl .r-4 ^ ii ^v| ^'^ "^n 11 'fil q ^ a. f : ^ c:J '2J ':^ =7 '^ '^ '::j -i:^:^ f ":5 rs ^s ^a ^^ ^-^ " I i .14 .| 4 <=t| =( q d r^ "^ ^ ^ !3 ^^ ''^ !3 1 Q Q ^ ^a '3 ^i a ^3 -^'a ^-a.^ a .a q d-d ^ .3 q '3 ^ 11 .3.3 r-J .'vi ^ '^ '^ CJ C^^^ f ' 1/ 9 q 1 r^ r^ r-J tt <=!3 ''^^ r^i r^ ^ri '% ^% -a ^1 I ^ a .^1 q 9 j, q 'Oy ^ >\ I'q d"fil Q^ ,^ q CO 093 ^ -^ rO 'i f ". ^j *t^^ =, . ''4 ^ ** ' ^, tr-4 .T^ r^ r^ -^ ^^ tTvl K^ fvj ,j^ g ^1 1 1 'I ' =1 1 :i H. - ^ 1 'I *V4 >vj ^..^ tK.rs l.^ "^.rs t-.e. t-.rs ^ q '^'J t-^ -'^ 1'-^ V^T '-r^ >>-^ b,^ t>-^ .a ^a .a ^a ^a -*o ^ 'I P < Q i ' 1 ^ , f_ f ^ f f f P f^ P f "Vl Vj ^ -^ J^ ^y -s^ "^ ^J* J^ '1 I '9 '9 'i 'I >*s f.^ ^ ^1 I I 'I =^ J 'I ^ ^o ^o g ^ Verhs Middle Bad. Doubled. 95 n '^ t^ ^i::! ^:^ '^ '^ '^ f^ :^ '^ .vj ^.7; "^T;* %^ ^-^ r-i .r-j ^r^ ^rs r-i 1 i-i 9 -J -'1 r4 tTvi r^ /^ ^n "^TL -"^ '^'^ ^TL '^ 1 '1 "1 ^ ^ ^% : '1'^ a 1/ - - 3 '::j ci ':::i ^^ '^ '^ c{ ':::i '-3 ;'S ^'S -s "^'s s ^"S "'S vs -^ -'S i i ^ . i I 'i i ii ^ a a -n. ,7;! .*:;; .7;; &;: o. .Tu -^ ^ '9 "I ' a 'i 9 ^ '"^ ""^ f H 9 a ,a a -i a '^ '^ '^ '^ *=^ '^ '-5 <:^ c:i'^ ^9 ^a a ^a a 9 ^a ""^ i ^1^1 :n. c;! r;j r;| ':;: ^n ^n. r^i r;! ^n. (^ CO CO C^ (M 1-f CO CO (M (M it ^*- PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS. PAKADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POmTS. ( Compare 4. Rem. ). 3 m. 3 /. 2 m. 1 c. j Preter. Sing. ^\4^ 1 A!^ Al^O ^54ol ' Al4o aU^ Al4o AI40 J Plur. q14^ 0^4^ i * Fut. Sing. ^Q^nj 1 ^Q^oZ ^a4)Z ^ofcoZ ^C4)Z Plur. ^q14^ ^q^4^ ! ^ 1 = Imper.Sing. m. ^Q^JQ ^Q^O IPlur. m. qIq^O qIq^^ | Infill. Vi^a^ VV^ciSo \\^n^ VNj^nLD nl^n^ etc. | Part. Act. ^54^ m. U^^' f. ^54nSD Passive ^^u4^ ^J)u4^ ^4^ ^4oAk) ^\4)ALd ^^4iAk5 Rem. The forms of the verb which are omitted in the foregoini^ Table, are not marked with diacritical pcints, since they may easily De recoofnized from their formation. VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 97 36. Verbs with /Suffixes. The union of verbal forms with suffixes is much more simple in Syriac than in Hebrew. It should be remarked in general that the vowel of the first or second syllable either falls away ; e. g. in the 3 fern, and 1 sing. pret. and Q in the fut. ; or the vowel of the second syllable falls back upon the preceding consonant ; e. g. in the same per- It sons of pret. Pe. in w^hich of the first syllable falls away. The verbal endings ^ and o quiesce in . and Verbal forms, unless they terminate with *jl- and Q- , remain unchanged before the suffixes tQS , ^-^^ Also the character- istic vowel of the first syllable of Pa. and Aph. remains unchanged, and the suffixes of the 3 plur. are attached to verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the particular persons the following should be remarked (see Table of the pronouns, 16. and table of the verbs, with suffixes, 36). A. Preterit with Suffixes. 3 sing. masc. ^\^ before the suffixes #00 , ^-lo in the 2 plur. masc. and fem. The other persons ^^-4^ with suft'. a. 1. 3 sing. fem. AS^^ before ^QD , ^^* The others Al^ with sutf. a. 1. 2 sing. masc. AL^^ unchanged, and by way of exception with sulf. c. 2 sing. fem. ^A^4^ is changed into ^AL^ with suff. b. . sing. com. AK^ forms A^fr^ with suff. a. 1. 3 plm\ masc. Q^J^ becomes Q^^ with suff. b. or w^ith . parag., excepting before tOO , ^.aO* 3 plur. fem. o^fex) either \>4o with suff. c. or with , parag. ,^ i S(} n* 98 FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES . 2 plur. masc. and fern, and 1 com. retain the forms .oAl4^, ^i^^^4^ , ^^4^ with suff. c. Rem. The 3 fern. 2 masc. and 1 com. sing, in some forms with suffixes are only distinguished from each other by the diacritical point, which, in the first person, stands over the consonant (vid. 4). Verbs Med. E. with suff. follow the form of Verbs Med. A., and retain where the latter retain ; e. g. 3 sing. fem. Al^S with suff. OlAl4^ Yet the form OlAV)> occurs in Ps. cxviii. 167, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua- tion should perhaps be . The same is the case even in Verbs Med. Olaph. Quies. So the vowel -.-. belonging to ^|* is changed into i over Ol^js ; but in the 1 sing., remains; e. g. ^Aj^|a* In respect to verbs 1 rad, f and a quiescent, it should be remarked, that where, in the regular verb, the first radical is without a vowel, ( retains its and ji its ; e. g. OlA^^Of* But where, in the regular verb, - stands over the fii*st radical, this class of verbs retains it in the same manner; e. g. '^\ with suff. Oi;iO( , ^^.^ with suff. t|\ i Defective verbs, or those with Med. Rad. doubled, retain in the pret. unchanged, like the form ^\4^ The 3 fem. and 1 sihg. change into ; e. g. Aqj with sufi". OlAoj ; but they remain unchanged before tOO and ^.a^ ; e. g. tQDMK Pa. and Aph. retain the vowel of the first syllable unchanged. In respect to of the second syllable, it should be observed that where Pe. retains , Pa. 1i 7 retains _ ; but where - falls away or falls back upon the first sylla- ble , is lost. The 3 sing. masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fem. in Pe. and Pa. with suft'., are hence all similar, and can only be distinguished from each other by their signification in the context ; e. g. OlX^^ (from ^^4^ ^^ \i*^i)* But these forms are exceptions to this rulQ when standing before tOD and ^--^* B. Future with Suffixes. Throughout the sing, and in the 1 plm\, Q , which has been inserted, remains unchanged before the suffixes tOO and IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 99 ^^* Before the other suffixes it falls away, and the form v^^OJ takes the sufF. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3 person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur. the 2 and 3 niasc. and fem. remain unchanged with sulf. c. Rem. aji parag. of the 3 sing. fern, falls away, and is connected with the sufF. after the form \)*^JDL* What is true of Q in Pe. is also true in Pa. in respect to the falling away of the vowel of the last syllable, excepting before ^OO and ^^^^ In the 3 sing. masc. with suff. of 3 person masc. ; e. g. ^uOlOiN^ni , _ appears sometimes over Q But this form is neither mentioned by Amira nor by Sionita. The 2 sing, sometimes takes ju before the suff. of the 1 sing, and plur. The same is true in respect to the imperat. ; e. g. iZoioZ Jj put me not to shame. In Verbs Med. E. the middle radical retains , and in Verbs 3 Gutt., _ This peculiarity, Amira, p. 3 89, refers exclusively to quadriliterals , i. e. to Aph. ; but examples are also found in Pe. ; .e. g. Ps. Ixxi. 9. ed. Erpen. il iOn*^Z |J , ed. Paris. iinnZ , and in Pa. Ps. cxviii. 172, 1 1 1 'n\L* Amira adds that this form is found particularly in prohibitory negations, which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given. The persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged. But it shotild be remarked that if the form ^Qa4qJ takes the suff. of the 3 per. sing. masc; e* g. ^CTIaJoN/^OI, sometimes falls away; e. g. Matt. viii. 25, ^010*rJuLJ) C. Imperative with Suffixes. The 2 sing. masc. ^q4^ remains unchanged with suff. a. 2. of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fem. When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c. is used. In the 2 sing. fem. of the form ^Ao^o with sail', b. .^ quiesces in In the 2 plur. masc. oikO^O passes into Q^^Q-^ with buff. b. 100 LNTINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. The ^ plur. fern, is rare, and omits t before the suffix. Rem. The imperative with and in Pe. and in the other 7 7 conjugations, retains its vowel unchanged ; e. g. i1 iSSn hear me, >,*01i\no receive him. Tlie forms of the imperat. pass., with an active signification, also remain unchanged ; e. g. V^>M ^^ reminded, with sufif. jkX^'fDyLl* In respect to the transposition of Q in the plur. it should be remarked that | of Verbs |2) ( 28. 1) loses its vowel But in those [i Verbs whose imperat. does not take *. 7 ; Q , this vowel is inserted after the first radical ; e. g. 0;Ld( with suff. ^010;SdO( Yet this transposition of Q does not always take place, as the form tjiJoNofc^ sometimes occurs. In Pa. and Aph. _, in 7 -X 7 ^ *. 7 Verbs 3 Gutt., , falls away; e. g. Ok > *^ with sufF. %jk(J\Q^*Sl praise him, oikOOj with suflf. -OlQ-iQO( lead him hither. Verbs \l are an exception, as they retain ; e. g. wjJQo|^ | do me good. Also a form with parag. sometimes occurs ; e. g. tONo^ with sufF. . m. inV^r>o In the fern, plur, the paragogic form is the more usual ; but in Pa. and Aph. both forms occur together. D. Infinitive with Suffixes. 7 * The infinitive Pe. \.4^^ with suff. a. 1. remains un- changed before the suff. of the 2 per. plur. The suffixes of the other persons are attached to the form ^4^k3 But the infinitives of the remaining conjugations with a are treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached separately to the form with Q) they take, attached to the termination Zol (Compare 45. 2. and 48. B. feminines, declension 1). Rem. In Pe., where of the second syllable falls away, some grammarians insert, in its place, ; e. g. Ol St^nV^V Buxtorf adds yet two other forms with Q oc Q inserted after the third radical ; e. g. PARTICIPLES WITH SUFFIXES. 101 wiOlQ-^Q^D and wtOloN^nV)* If the vowel be , as in Verbs Ql , it remains unchanged ; e. g. GlSOOlQ^* E. Participle with Suffixes. Participles, which are considered as nouns, take their suffixes. This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act., where either prepositions are used ; e. g. 5^^ , ^^iSn who seek thee^ or a noun formed from the participle is joined with the suffix; e. g. jA supporting^ OljO^l his helper. On the contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid. 18. 4. Rem.), or with afformatives ( 20) form the present tense. 102 KEGULAE VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. Proper Form. Sing. ] c. 2 m. Pret. Pe. ) y^ Sing. 3 m.) ^ . >iV^o 2 f. y^ inV^Q 3f. 2 m. tS46 i&^ ;av^ - ^AV^<^ AV^ J^l^ 2f. 1 c. iAl4) Ai4o Ai:^ ^'Al4> ^t^^ Plur. 3 m. oii^ 3f. 2 m. V o"A}^k^ wiJuoAL^ 2f. :ai^ ^Al^D 1 c. .^, J^i^^ . >^lV^O Infinit. ^5^^^ .^1X4^1:1^0 I imp. sing.) VJ^Q^^ ' 2 m.) ' ^.4J^^q4^ ^K4qSd 2 f. wAci43 >i iXq4q Plur. 2 m. qLq4^ iqI^qo 2f. ^1q'4o ^'ut.sing.) V^^J 3 m. ) ^^*b' '- .Ai^fe>n,3 5^^^4^ .AnS^oi Plur. 3 m. .o\f^,n.i oV^rM ^jq14^ nfoSt)n.i Pret. Pa. "^6 .ilNfcjD >^^ ^i^Kf)^ Infin.Pa. oL^nLo >^2o\f)nV) ^Zol^'nk) xD^ZoSf^nV) I REGULA.R VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 103 ] S m. 1- 3f. Plur. 1 c. 2 m. 2 f . cnS^ ^S^ ^dai^ Ol2\l4i3 oi^^^^ (tHo .qdAS^o ^Ail^o ; ^CTU^^I^ oiAL^D (tHo 5f * ^aiaki\l|^ GuAl^ ^'Al^D * 1 1 cnWla ci2^^^ 1 * .qoAL^ ^Al^ ^moLAr) 9 -x. r P -X. . 7 X P >t . 7 1 "^ "^v * '' 1 i'^Q^{)0 .k^QJO^AjO ^Gu!L^ .. .T, 7 v P ..i 7 1 .^va';; 1 ........ . , Ai ^KAo waOujoAL^ ouoAL^o ^o"a1^ ?( * ^oia-LiM^^ ^'Al^ * * 1 oiiL^ * X P. 7 i'^iVAo ! n^^Q^ oi!i4ci^ ^S4^ ^anL^'ciV) .AV^'^oVrt ; ,jcna^a4o 01.1.^04^ ^ X- .^aicu.S(i4) x- 1 1 ^oial^Qo oioL^Qo ^ 4f ^au.i^XQ4o rrii >Ko^p 1 * oixl^^^j t:^^ ^oaLa^oj .-01jJq14qj oijol^xnj ^jq14^ .aaiaL^^j P 9. . - oiIIAo oill^D .^ fOa\/\o . n\^o oi7Ql4'nV> cfi'Zal^'o^ ^'Zal^Qk) .qdZqI^JqLd, ^oZoi^^OSO 104 SUFFIXES TO VERBS WITH THIRD RADICAL OLAPH QUIESCENT 37. Suffixes to Verbs with third Radical Olajph Quiescent (]]) Yerbs ]] ( 32) differ so widely in their mode of connection with suffixes, from regular verbs, as to demand a separate treatment. It may be remarked in general : 1. That the termination iL either loses 1 , as in the 3 sing, masc. pret. Pe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa., Aph., Shaph. with suff. c ; or ] is changed into a. movable, as in the infinit. Pe. with suff. a. 1, excepting before .QO , ^jJd , where the ^ which has arisen from | also falls away, according to some. So the termination of the fut. V- is changed into a- with suff. b. 2. Forms which end in a. either omit entirely, and connect the suff. a. 1, with a. movable, as 3 sing. masc. pret. Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with wk final), or remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and, without exception , remains also in the first case before X f> oa , ^^^ The terminations of the imperat. fem. .-k_ , ^^i.> are changed into -^ (or ujL) with suff. b, and into l-- with suff. c. 3. The forms which end with Q otiant,, take for Q the forms OQ (and o].-) ; and for Q.^- the form Qa unchanged in all the preceding cases with suff. b ; e. g. 3 plur. masc. pret. of all the conjugations excepting Peal. In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with suffixes, the following should be remarked : A. Preter. with Suffixes. (Comp. Table of Verbs JJ with Suffixes. Tlie 3 sing. masc. P.t loses 1 and appends suff b, and suff. ^OU of the 3 sing. masc. to the form -L^^^ FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 105 The 3 sing. fern. A!L.. takes, unchanged, suff. a. 1. The same is true of the 1 sing. Aj-^.i* 2 sing. masc. A^yi takes, unchanged, suff. c. 2 sing. fern. .uAjlL.. attaches suff. b. to the form ^A^.t* 3 plur. masc. Q^yt is changed into OQ^ , (and o|^ai)with suffb. ^ \. \. 3 plur. fem. ^^yt remains unchanged with suff. c. 2 masc. and fem. and 1 plur. take, unchanged, suff. c. Hem. Yerbs 3 rad. ^ , as they are mostly intransitives, take no suffixes in Peal. But Pa. and Aph. of these verbs with a transitive signification, as well as of Yerbs U with the same ending, take suff. a. 1, with the falling away of , excepting before ^a:3 , iQS , where remains. The 3 sing. fem. remains unchanged in Pa. Aa\.. and Aph. AlL.."!* The same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The 3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with O doubled {see Amira^ p. 372); e.g. Ps. liv. 3, ed. MJrpen.^ oiOQlii they have sought them. Sometimes the original 1 appears 4v 7 before both 00; e. g. Ps. Ixxvii. 16, ^oo(p^ they have seen thee. In Pa. Q^yi and Aph. Q^ytl? falls away before the suff., and jl becomes movable ; but Q quiesces in ; e. g. O*^ with suff. >-cLjjL ; oAiVwith suff. ^QDoi/ul* The 3 plur. fem. in Pa. and Aph. in the simple form, takes the suff. given in the tab. with the falling away of over *j ; e. g. waOIi Vytl* The paragogic form of these two conjugations takes suff. c. given in the table, without change. B. Future with Suffixes, The 3 sing. masc. floJ and All the persons which terminate with \L , affix to the form ^^SyJ suff. b. The 2 and 3 plur masc. and fem. remain unchanged, and are connected, as in the regular verb, with suff. c. 106 IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. Rem. This mode of formation also occurs in Pa. and Apli. Sometimes also takes the place of in the suif. 3 sing. fern. ; e. g. Matt. i. 19, oujju that he should dismiss her^ or in Pa. ; e. g. Luke xiii. 18, 20, OUlDjj I shall liken it. And with the falling away of -; e. g. tOSOja] / will show you^ the correctness of which Lud. de Dieu^ p. 398, doubts. C. Imperative with Suffixes. 2 sing. masc. *^yi is unchanged with suif. h. 2 sing. fern. J^yr is changed into j-^y with suff. b. 2 plur. masc. Q^.. is changed into OQ^.t (and op..) with suff. b. ^ ^ ^ 2 plur. fein. ^^i i\.. affixes suff. c. to the form J-^y** Hem. The imperat. Pa. (Jyt and Aph. Jj..| take the suf- fixes of the pret. in connection with the 3 or 1 person ; e. g. oiflDf heal her. The same is true in the plur. masc. of the same conjugations. In the fem., the paragogic form with suff. c. is the usual one. (Compare 2, above.) D. Infinitive with Suffixes. In the infinit. Pe. V-or^, in place of ] , ^ without a vowel is inserted with suff. a. 1. In respect to the falling away of A, before ^QO, ^xO , (see 1. above,) Lud. de Dieu^ p. 395, doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treat- ed as in the regular verb. (Compare 36, D.) E. Participle with Suffixes. (Compare 20 and 36, E.) Passive. Active. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. vlV^,v\ ^A ^^k '^k \> ^^^ ,S^^^ ^ \ 7,^^ ff. ^^ !r. PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 107 The participles of the other conjugations are inflected in a similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g. Pa. act. .oZu^^ ye a^/l', .Aph. ^ujQiD we tharik^ Ethpe. ^1 iT^ASd we turn about. General Bemark, Yerbs of the form of piJD to console^ never lose the third radical letter 1 when taking a suffix, but throw back i'^s vowel upon the middle radical, which, according to 36, usu- ally stands vacant ; e. g. pret. 3 sing. masc. .jujIjLo , ^]Il3 , 3 p]!. masc. t-uJoVj::i, 5^o]ujd, fem. ^-^Ijld, .aaulAr:), fut. 3 sing. masc. ^aJJ-lOJ, ^ | i n 1, imperat. 2 sing. masc. ^jJuVi^a, P 7 7 i ^ ^ 17 7 * T uiOuV*^ , fem. wijufu^ , ^010^1^2 ) 2 plur. masc. toVaJO , ..7 7 P. .7 108 VERBS |] WITH SUFFIXES. Proper Form. Sing. 1 c. 2 m. 2 f. ^'ret. Sing. Pe. j '{{a 1 r 7 3 m. Pa. ^ wkQja 7 7 wftJ.JlCLKA P 7 71 7 Pe. ( 2-0 ^/- Pa. ( Alm^ p,p 1 c. Zu-o * yt^\a . ^asTAj'^ P^wr. 3 w. -j X 7 . 7 1 7 3 /. ] ^^ -O 7 P 7 ..p 7 p * 7.. R 7 /?l/w. Tr^=^ ^;n!i ^'^ ^a^-'nV) 2 m. ] Pa. \ -^.^ P 7 * * 2 /. --^ ^ll-^ * * PZwr. 2 m. 0'^ * * 2/ ^\ P -^tP ! * Pwiwr. 3 w. VrQJ 7\ -R VERBS IJ WITH SUFFfXKS. 109 j 3 m. 3f. Plur. 1 c. 2 TO. ~2f. 1 ^ 7 01^ . P 7 p 7 7 X p . 17 -R I 7 1 ai2-) GlisJr^ oi2L^ )< - A ^ ^/u-^ X 7 dioo-o diol-jo .CUCJ X -x 7 .QO00*r) -^ -X 7 -^ .X 7 .. p 7 pT. p^r. -p':. V 1^ ^ p i< T. au;nV> 6u\cx}i) 7 -n X P 7 6u^ . P 7 P 7 jf jt IP . ip ip ^xp jf * ^IJ,LI X 7 . .X 7 . .Xij7 X- 1 p-n .p . p -^lP ^Vl * jf ^r^ .on ifo 1 -n -. i 110 AUXILIAKY VERBS, OR VERBS SUBSTANTIVE. 38. Auxiliary Verbs^ or Verbs Substantive. 1. There are in Syriac two auxiliary verbs (verbs sub- IP 001 to be^ which, in Hebrew, exists as Yau conversive, is used to form the moods and tenses which are wanting (see 18. 4. Bern.). The other, which is properly a noun, A^ being^ substance^ essence {essen- tia)^ with Olaph prosthetic Lk\ , takes the place of the aux- 001, belongs to Yerbs ]] , like which it is inflected, but in respect to which it is to be particularly observed, that, when connected with the participle, preter.or future, the 01 (with Linea occultans) is not pronounced ; this is also the case when the verb is IP X 7 001 *0k\M he has begun. Upon the double formation of the fut. (oou and looiJ, see 35, 2, c. The inflection of Lk\ is as follows : Plur. F, a M. ^Lj\ {we are) m^La\ (ye are) .QQ^Aji| aOUA^I {they are) .OOIaZLiJ Sing. F. C. M. ^LiV {lam) 1. iLiV {tliou art) y^l^X 2. GVj^LkX{he, she is) ^OloZul^'s. 2. In connection with U is formed Zu.^, which is inflect- ed similarly to Aaf ; e. g. *^^a.S / arn not. tu] in connec- tion with looi forms the imperfect; e. g. looi Lj] or looi ^cioluXhe was. The same tense is also expressed by looi looi. looi doubled marks the pluperfect ; e. g. A^ooi AaOOI / had been. . DERIVATION OF NOUNS. Ill CHAPTEE III The Noun. 39. Derivation of Nouns. 1. Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive, derivative, and sometimes compounded. To primitives belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate ani- mals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of animals, etc. (See Gesenius^ Lehrgeb. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they designate ; e. g. \n\'^Jlesh, JOOl; gold^ i*^rno silver. The derivatives, which are by far the most numerous, are form ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns (denominatives). 2. The derivation of nouns is effected ; a) without any change of the original word ; e. g. ^^So counsel, from < \V) to counsel ; \>J^ mourning, from ^\s1 to mourn ; or by a mere change of the vowel ; e. g. j^-SJsO king, \i\ fetter ; h) by the falling away of the radical letter ; e. g. \LM sleep, from ^a^ ; (As care, from Zi .-j ; (JQ^ the heart, from .nn\ ; but especially c) by the addition of formative letters or of entire syllables. Those letters, if initial, are 1 , SsO , u, 2 , * ; if medial, they are ^ and Q ; final, 1 , , Z Several of these formative letters are some- times found in the same noun ; e. g. yi V)\ Z scholar, Xl^QM dominion, 1ZoiV)i;V) compassion, 1Aa^0i\ fame. 1.12 XOUXS DERIVED FROM VERBS. 40. Nouns derived from Verbs. Verbal nouns are kindred either to participles, and de- note the subject or object of the action (Concrete Nouns), or they are kindred to the infinitive, and receive the significa- tion of the action or quality itself (Abstract Nouns). But frequently in the formation of these nouns, rare or obsolete forms of the infinitives and participles arc chosen. The following tables present a collective view of the modes of formation. TABULAR VIEW OFDERIVATIVE NOUNS. 113 TABULAR VIEW OF NOUNS DERIVED FROM REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS. I. PARTICIPIAL FORMS A. oTpeAL. a. The simple hut unusual Participial Forms ^ ivhich are most- ly Adjectives. Absolute state, f ^^O Emphat. state., ( V^ ^.. a man. ^Aj an associate. M^ryt leprous. Ql and .J^ 1 ^\^ v^ Whsi foolish. P'oio ruralf quiet. ^^ sick'. pure. ^OiS mournful V and Ji. QM, \aQM equal. \tkO hard. pil4 impure ; >,j>.tCX) much. From these are derived Abstract Nouns ; e. g. |ZQ.iAOAarc?w<'55; (Zo|A.|lb multitude. 114 TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. b. Usual Participial Forms of Peal. a. Active. /3. Passive. Absolute state, j ^O j ^^.^ j \j^ Emphat. state, ^ ]]^ ( 111*4^ ^ llli^^ 901CD a witness. X) i ^n sound. Q->>1 righteous, >a3| 6/ac^. f^LkOlA given. 'r^vU ^ hireling, Jk2) Ql and wk.! wkJZ) PdA^ a^i inhabitant. ^o^ cursed. {*S i c?ry. frOJ a herdsman. ;jQ1 6Z/w(?. 'r-Kt^ long-suffering. Ql and wii ^ Ml' P. ^ . l"*! *PI7 (^..^ reviling. (,Oi/^4 renowned. |*^int beloved. iJ |jljk*/re^. IJ A.^> rare. t.Ll> a herdsman. P pQl* a landlord. (fiOD concealed. U'and la U'and U lim] a physician. \\Si m. '\Lk\Si f. beautiful. j]"and li Ipi beautiful. U and ^ Vk n 4 publication^ \Lqi\^ freedom, Q^^?1 and |Z.QLQjt)l righteousness, iZoai*^ I dryness. TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 115 c. With Immutable Vowels. t " ' > Ab. Stat., j ^^\^ ^q4^ , ^q4^ \a^O ^OO & with J f\^ a plough- JQl] sma^/. J^Oryl ^^^- (r>V)QCD a r^/ man. ' ^pheraer. {color). ^a^< weak. ^Q.Xm a mo6, ^0)1 a sower. AS^xi) a friend, a rabble. _2) fej |) merer.'] \si \^ a carpenter. \}a2i\a preacher. ^0)( a ham- ^SODOf 6Zac^. Ql and .LL ^2) Q^ and wtA Pr^O|aj905. 5 a cleft. P and wkL U and .^.^ |J and ^ PiV*^ a seer. H^H^ mournful. mO;2 creator. I' >^* g'm'e^. (OOJ a mocker. B'and ]2) P P ^7 |.aJZ)( a baker. From these are formed Abstract Nouns, like iZ oa\ i rejection^ IZOJQII littleness^ IZobOjI division^ IZoJO*! 5'i^i'wy, etc. 116 TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. B. PARTICIPIAL FORMS, a. Of the other Active Conjugations. Pael. It takes the usual] form, and the form j with ^1- and the j form U^QiD J P^^Sd a leader. |o(T>Vn poor. ]l^\V) a teacher. a torturer. QL and .^ L.OpO united. }^'^ high. Uand^ |l-i^i^ll7 seditious. -^0 7 pUjOlSD a leader. 11 and^ |l f1D yiiD a physician. a and ]i Pf i^V> a comforter. Aphel. Usual form and ] ^^naV> a dwelling. |^n\V) pincers. ^JOanV) an offense. 7 7 ^>0V) despairing. pp|nV) injurious. QL and ijlI ]] and ^' (VmIo a watch-tower. pOVyjJisO a sickle. ]] and *jl) jlajQib a confessor. Sbapliel. Usual form and 10 7 ,n\V) a slave. 'k'p fO 7 |*^\ti changing, ^P P 7 p^lOs a deliverer, ]Jand^ |> NSaV) proud. Part. pass. t7 7 t i NSnaVi completed. From these are derived Abstract Nouns, as (ZQJ;^,iD direction, ]2oi'^SV> doctrine, VZoiIflolli healing, &c. TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. b. Of the Passive Conjugatwns. Ethpeel. 117 Ethpaal. Usual form and Eshtaphal. Usual form and %P0 Usual form and | Usual lorm and | Usual torm and j those with y^Xi. ) those with # , ]1 ) those with t , (1 ) Ql and *jil U^lf^ASo curdled. ]] and ^ ]irn^2ASQ entreat- J^ ll i\V)Zl\V)\ unhurt. (j4-l) a farrier, treasurer. Parel. Usual form and ^ 10. 7 ^ Taphel. Qu. ""-iliterals. Usual form and | ] AnLo |Jy.;>j a pitcher. \jlyJ^L an interpreter. ^aCi;mV) sudden. |, >V)\Zi a pupil. an accuser. 118 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. II. INFINITIVE FOEMS. A. OF PEAL. a. Simple Infinitive Forms Segliolates. Absolute state, J ^^y.^ j ^5\4^ J ^Q^O Einphat. state, ^ ll^i) (' B^^ ^ U^QO [mSll the soul. y^^'i rain. pt>QD holiness. |V7m>\ bread. X**-^} morning. P9Q2 the knee. ]j^La sea-grass, \r^\ lamb. \*^yQ'\ a way. yO'rA herbage. ji:Z) |,X* a child. I As* c?2'%e7ice, (for lAa^-a). Q2^ and .i^ Ql and .aJL Q1 and .iJL (2qVo death. P-*^ peace. l^Q-4 goodness. L.Ol a yoke. fjjij a dwelling. (QCO aw e?ic?. |j and w^ |J and jl}^ (0,-M yoy. 1 1 N rest. Ml ^^ Mi (Vi* a treasure. \^^ the heart. |)GlO coldness. ]] and K W'and K U'and ^^i) (Zja countenance. |Zo|J /nr^or, lAaoj anguish. It is seldom that all three forms are found derived from one orig- inal ; e. g. iJ^A* a rope^ U^jsi a pestilence^ JJSCLm g^dlt ; oftener two forms, as |Jl an oak, \i] a storm (from ml). TABULAR VIEW OF DKllIVATIVP: NOUNS. 119 b. Infinitive Forms with Immutable Vowels. Abs.stat. ) ^\^ ( ^Q) Em. Stat. / \y\^a htrd. \ ^S^OJ a punc- ^A^n^N seizure. oLaCD foll(/. If!^ a work. ture. V>?nnV) affiance. IZonSV) a kiwj J2) (r^Q^ gleaning. (2) VrCol a girdle. ]2) (and ]J) IIjQCoV a/ei/er. |rCu| renown. \ " - ^ P^ ,,.. ^ Qi.and*Al )?1.L , IJ^Q^ ^rac?^7^(m. ')' ^ . ,7 .- Ql ar ppaO a vessel. yk fO talkative- ^ y oi and JL:^ ,,.^ ^ ^^5*. }^y a floioing. ^^ ^"^ *^ ]] and ^ P^0Q2);>er>m^. Uv^Ol medita- 1*^?? ^"'^^^^''^^. Mi |] and ^j^Si *p p I f *Si a sprout. Ql and .a^ on I ^ favor. II and ^ (Zq.aJ1 indecency. p. -x 7 (Z.QjiOVm appear- ance. \l0Q1O posses- sion. llandU (ZQa^Q orna- ment. (nnn\ confi- dence. M and ^ ^jjtQj error. 120 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. B. USUAL INFINITIVE FORMS OF PEAL AND OF THE OTHER CONJUGATIONS. Peal Pael. Aphel. SliapLel. . Usual form Usual form Usual foim and and and V^4ak),^^in!i, ^^4^2^ ^H^ "^^^ ^a^ck) or ^q4o2 lAnV) l^^>iQ^ thought. change. ^oSOrSaO a bed. \ciMJLZiL flattery. |Zo,n\ slavery. ^^^ a desert. l^r^Z help. (JiAaSD a concussion. PqaQ^ a thrust. \0LDL combat. |>*0C1S delay, ]^ '\Zi \zi ]si Y^\^ a speech. ]LhQ.y]I.mer- IZqJ^QLo c?e chandise. struction. tf u o - VS,^ insight. ^tx^^^oLdespair.^t^UXOLJ^a gift. \ti\OQM deliver- _2) Ql and .aJL ^ ance. ilO^ departure. |;fr>V) ri sa'^;. fj^oaLo bellows. ]AQ^Z rubbish. i;nV) a /iO^. Ql and .-Jl U and wi^ ]] (and "Js) (J and ^ fZlSiO harken- 1 A i moZ a man- IZq^AaSD an a5- ] i . > . V) a cow- ^ 2/1^. tie. sembly. elusion. ]]'and *aX P'and ^jlS P'and w^ IJ and *j^ }]'^ a drawing X^i^^ doctrine. IZoi i<=^0V) cow- VijOQ* a jt?ro- *ojf (of water). * elusion. misc. l]"and la ]A-i Z|SD arrival. TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 121 C. INFINITIVE FORMS OF THE LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS. Palel and Palpel. Pealel. Pavel and Paiel. ..ox V f;j)C11 splendor. I'i^SnSv^Sji in- ]lLoZ a worm. Ql and tJkL nocence. l]"and A ]j|J^Q.. motion. Pali. |J2i-lQ2) contam- ination. JuCni^QS astonish- ment. Parel. Pamel. Taphel. ^OIlQflO swiftness. (;l!iDO shame. |,V)\oZ doctrine. 122 DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. 41. Denominative Nouns. Here belong : 1. Koans ; a) without any formative additions, derived from some other nouns, which may be either primitives or derivatives of verbs ; e. g. f^yt gardener^ from JJOl.. a garden ; ]\V> a seaman^ from ]fcii\V) salt ; h) with the formative syllables "U- masc, IZL- fern., (Patronymics or Gentile Nouns) ; e.g. '^Sdo?'' Roman, l/U^',rCL'| /sraeZiVess ; with the falling away of the syllable J3DQ in names of towns ; e. g. V^xoa] an Ephesian, from ^ooma]^; or Feminine Abstract Nouns, terminating in Vq and 1A^ ; e.g. IZoiX^ youthfalness, from fll^ a youth ; 12o;^Ql Hind- ness, from ;^Q1 blind; JA.1.JU9 beginning, from tAaS ^Ae Aeac?, principal ; c) diminutives with tQ or *flDQ masc. and IZUJQ fem. attached to the noun; e. g. X^o*^ a little son, from 1;r:i ; "IjOk*! a little brother, from Ia*] ; lA^oZ^Q a lit- tle daughter from IZ^Q ; |fl0on\o a young dog, from ]n\r) Sometimes we find both forms in use ; e. g. IJO'f^i.. and JCDO;^.. a manikin, from Ir^yi^ Dimmutives from com- pound nouns also occur ; e. g. pQAJ;!D from (aj;2 ; also a double formation ; e. g. poflDOjCi.. a very little man, IA^qAjoZji:^ a very little daughter. Rem. Amira (p. 145) mentions a form with the third radical letter doubled, and Q inserted between them ; e.g. ]h^o{)o\ a little assembly, from ]i^^ 2. Adjectives belong here, which are formed ; a) by affix- ing the terminations p masc. and IZLj fem. ; e. g. ^LmO) masc. IAaLmoS fem., spiritual, from paOj ; h) by afiixing the terminations V masc. IAju- fem. ; e. g. U^SosQ.. masc. COMPOSITE AND EXOTIC NOUNS. 123 |A>V)Qyt fern, corporeal from |SqQ.. ; ordinal numerals (see 50. 8) ; e. g. tkLSl the third, from ]i!il ; c) by affix- ing the terminations \^ masc., IAjJ fem.; e.g. ]il mO> masc., VZuiI*Oj fern. Rem. In respect to the cases under a. and c. above, Amira re- marks (p. 106) that the latter is rather used in metaphorical lan- guage, yet he also admits the interchange of the two forms. 42. Composite and Exotic Nouns. 1. The formation of words by composition is more frequent m Syriac than in the other Semitic dialects, (see Michaelis, p. 151 ; Lud. de Dieu, pp. 73, 74). The words most fre- quently used in forming compounds are ^p son ; e. g. pu;^ man^ poZjIDuozce; >\1Q sir ; e.g. t^Q, NS*^ enemy; *^hmuch; e. g. iLkSH JD) householder; ^Aaj principal ; e.g. (AjAuu) firstling; ]LkJ^ house; e.g. AjJD ]msiO corn-house; sometimes ^^1 eating ; e. g. 1 *;nSol adversary. In changing the Concrete idea into the Abstract, either the last part of the compound word only is regarded ; e.g. l2on*o,Vsn hostility, or both parts are changed into the feminine ; e. g. ]LoLk:> Adj house-holding. Upon the plural inflection see 44. 2. The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into their language, and given them either Syriac terminations or permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms. The following are examples ; f-^-yn oiyicc, ^ a. \ %JO\ suay^eXjov, (JQSQ-i^CTI j7fc>wv, ^qNNV) fJuaXXov, J^iD|Z\LD fxa^TifxaTa, .rct nKnrcs r>\r>on (fvXkoyKf^og. There are some peculiarities 124 GENDER OF NOUNS. in the formation of these words, for which see 12. 5. and 44. Kem. 8. At the time of the Crusades, the Syrians introduced words also from the western languages ; e. g. 11.Ji^;a the Franks^ ."to]] ] (7ermawy, >lZuJiL^| England, \ljk*^ Prince, ^^y^^Sl Henry, etc. 43. Gender of Nouns. The Syriac language has but two genders, masculine and feminine. The latter is distinguished partly by the signifi- cation and partly by the form. 1. In respect to the signification, the gender is fixed by the same rules as in Hebrew. Masculines are the names of men, masculine offices, nations, mountains, months and rivers. Feminines are the names of female persons and ani- mals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal bodies, which are found double although they have mascu- line endings in the plural ; e. g. ^jiiyo/ee^ from ^y>, etc. 2. In respect to form, the feminine is characterized by - ( 1^ ), *. i , Q , Z But the first of those final syllables, which is particularly used for the for- mation of feminines from masculines (e. g. \\Ci^ female com- panion from ;^jsj masc), must not be confounded with a similar sounding termination of masculines (the emphatic state, 45, 8) usually given in the lexicons, as the only mas- culine form in use. To distinguish this fem. form from the masculines, it is usually given with the termination \L ; e. g. lAnSV) the queen. The forms with q1 and *.i- have arisen by apocope from |Z; e. g. oni ^ goodness, ^\o heam. The last of the above mentioned endings Z is seldom used ; e. g. t^^ part. GENDER OF NOUNS. 125 Rem. 1 . The feminine ending (- is generally found in adjec lives ; e. g. JQ^ masc. fii^ ^^^' ^^ ^^^^ word ends with f , this letter is changed into jl , and forms (a ; e. g. (OJ masc. (>ni fem. Gentile nouns and numerals ending with t.i change that termina- tion into pu. ; e.g. taYOOLi masc. ^i>OCnu fem. Nouns with \L final are masculine when Z is a radical letter of the noun ; e. g. ^Aa} bow, |AjD ornament, |Aal olive. Rem. 2. Many nouns with a masculine ending are feminine or common. They are usually given in the emphatic state ( 45. 3) ; e. g. ]<=^^ skip, "U*'! W'ay, ll-L rib, ]1j"| mr^^, p..i1 pitcher, >(q well, IJOQ ^erf?, Ij^ys ^**^^ of battle, \1^} com. /ime, \b] leather bottle, (C)^ sword, com., vISQSD burden, I'fDD talent, \si\D stone, IfiD^ 6e?/y, jlil-^ com. tongue, |jkL3 50mZ, fjQJ ^re, jjOlfiO com. moow, f^IlCD shield, ffflCY) com. mo^A, ^2Lll branch, IsD'fL bed, (a*09 com. mwc?, |A*Z> com. terror, yLj^oh com. firma- ment, ^QU- hades, \L^QM rust, |iiV> com. heaven, {aSDa com. sww, ^^* ^^^y Names of animals also are of the common gen- der ; e. g. l;Sfli an ass, U-^yt camel ; also the cardinal num- bers from 20 to 100^ Greek nouns retain their gender ; e. g. DO,JQflD tfuvoJo^, (OaA^3 ^ja&>]x>). In general, those nouns are considered as feminine which come from the feminine of the He- brew, ending in n"r, and all of those nouns which, in the emphatic state, end in IZ ( 45. 3). 126 NUMBER OF NOUNS. 44. Nurnher of Nouns. There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural. There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew, ending in ^-i_ (^iZ masc. two.^ ^Ljl fem. two, ^Z]So two hundred, and ^> ^ Egypt) ; but they cannot be considered as a special form of the language. Pairs are usually ex- pressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two. The plural of masculines is formed by annexing the syllable ^^ to the noun sing. ; e. g. ^)Q4 mountains, from jQ^ ; that of the feminine by ^ (instead of | ) ; e. g. (JoAs virgin, plur. ^oA2 Rem. 1. Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U, ending with ]- and *jl- , terminate in ^ji_ ; e. g. P.^ hoy^ ..-'^ 7 7 * 7 plur. ^iN(^ ; *^;aSo dwelling, plur. ^,^alD* Feminines ending in q and L take tQ ; e. g. onW) kingdom, plur. an\V) : those ending in *-l- take ^ ; e. g. *j;iO creature, plur. ^r^* Nouns derived from Yerbs Ml , if the doubled consonant appear again in the plural, take Linea oocultans under the first of the similar lettere ; e. g. ^ .a Sfi^^ a from P7 I.. 7 P7 pOt sea, ,^iV)V>S from (ioi people. Rem. 2. Some masculines form the plural in the same manner as feminines. Here belong : Iflo] physician., plur. .Qfiol ; \iSo\ crib, plur. VZqIjo] ; \S\ lion, plur. Uo-ail ; ^L\ place, plur.VZojZI ; ]Iq>^ snake, plur. '|ZoQ^;|Ij>Qa mz^Z^, plur. tZQJ>Qr);i.CDiQr) throne, plur.|ZaDjQO ; f-i-ii^ night, plur. ]2oS 'i S ; ^0.0 member, plur. iZolcc ; U> herdsman, plur. (as a part. ^^Aj) |Zqij ; \cib cup-heareft\ plur. lZoo> , &c. (Compare Agrell, Comment, de varietate generis et numeri, p. 68 ; and upon the absolute and em phatic states, their form and use, see 45. 1. 3.) NUMBER OF NOUKS. 127 Rem. 3. The following feminines form the plural like mascu. lines ; a) by rejecting the feminine ending of the emphatic singular ( 45. 3), \^Xell, ^J^V; (\ltS( woman, \mJ) ; ]hD]\an, ]cd1" Xi^^ ffarden, \lyJ; fZ^OSD.. coa^JlDQ.. ; X^!^} Jif/-basket, ^^} ; VAiS)> tear, K^?^ ; 1\^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ '> iM^ wheat, 1^^ ; 1^\^ leaf {of paper), W]^ ; 12\\^ sickle, W]^ ; I^^LcLaIO sieve, ^Ow^ ; l^^lSO word, llSo ; l^li AaiV, ]liD* l2;sV) cave, TpkkJ ; Vi'^MC 6ar%, iJlQD ; VAljLflD skip, IjLsiCD; VAoiI cluster (of ff rapes), l^lll ; lAo'^l thonff, U^pl ; l2>cL^a 6H(f^e, 1>C1.^ ; lAsilikD bark, ]f^So ; l^ryv* almond, Irvn* ; I'Ali ymr, ^^ ; I'Ali hour, ^^ ; I'AjfZ /^, "^fZ, etc. ; 6) by retaining Z; e. g. l2^ Joo^y, X^\^ *, T^iy. cry, lAl^^^; (Zixi siffht, (ZIkm ; |Z)^ noxious means, \L\^ ; \l\ ugliness, \L\ ; X^\ care, X^\ ', 1^^ callin(/, X^^ ; l^^^OS rw5?, lAjaQ* (see Agrell, passim, p. 70. 55',) Rem. 4. Some nouns form a double plural (the feminine fotm father, ^G12( and tdO( ; ^\jlaj army, ^^iNia* and ^ ON t ; \^f^ breast, ^t** ^^d ^O,.** ; ^Ql time, ^iini and ^^1^1 [times, ^i^rns m repetition) ; ^k Ziawc?, ^r*] and iCIr^l [gripe of the hand); X 17 97 "i^C ^V* -, y %^ ^Qa (/ay, ^-liDO* and ^LOOi ; |n\ Amr^, ^^iH^ and ^QilLl ; I'rLo /ore?, ^'^ and ^O*^ ; JOIJ stream, ^JQIJ and ^OJOU ; Xr^ feast, ^^""and ^>K ; 1^^ eye, ^La and ^IjlI (/oi^w- tain) ; if^ol ^eeZ, ^.i.,OnS and ^^nOS ; ^J^O ^orw, ^*r) and ^^ {corner) ; "ISO* wam^, ^OISDs and ^OlSO* , etc. Some 128 NUMBER OF NOUNS. masculines as in some of the above examples, take Q or CJI between the plural ending and the last radical. Also some feminines in \L take Q and 01 before the plural ending ; e.g. "{t^O^ people, ^ZoSdI; 1i\ik) ^ar/, l2QlLiD ; \i^ offering, '^LoiiL', \iJ:){ mother, 'iL(jC^'{\ IAIsdI handmaid^ |ZoiSD( (compare 49). Sometimes jb is in- serted ; e. g. I^JQlDj 6^e, |Aa>QO> ; (Adoj j^Zac^, jAjJDOj ; (AfiDQCD mar^, |Aj[ix}QfiD, etc. Rem. 5. The composites (42.1) form the plural in such a man- ner that either ; a) the last part of the composite is inflected ; e.g. trciao Aa^ granary, or ; 5) the first part ; e.g. (a1aJL2 man- kind, or ; c) both parts ; e.g. tJ.oZl2 tattling, Kem. 6. Some words only occur in the plural ; e.g. (.ftlD water, yjL^ life, [Si] face, puSD> worth. Rem. T. Some singular names (collectives) take the plural mark, ijJiJMi ( 6) ; e. g. (a3) horses, f^QO cai^/e, (xi sAee^. Amira IP" J ^ ^e X ^^4 ^^^^5 and (r'i^^ draft-cattle. Rem. 8. Greek nouns, without regard to gender, take the Syriac plural ending of masculines in |L ; e.g. taQOrfti*^! iifKfxoieoi, L J^2) (paXa/ysj, pQ.iO> doyiJjOLra. Less frequently do they take ^ . . ^. . . . ^"1 "k^j " ^ T ^ the plural terminations of feminines in \L ; e.g. (Zol^pO /xiip^ava<, (ZojAfiOl (fTdSia. Letters which constitute the Greek singular terminations are commonly omitted; but in some instances retained; e. g. |fiDQlQ3 vojxoi from vo^o^. The plural terminations 5sg and tss, from 15 and as, are represented by |p and Xi'^^- g' u *^^ xXsj(Js^ from xXsig', X^^^rA oLvS^iavrsg from ctv^^ia^. The Syriac often re- tains the termination of the Greek plural and of the cases, represent- ^7 7 *7 ingthe accusative aj (first declension) by fiD, %0], D0 and DOf; 7 ^y7 7 I 7 l^ 7 e. g. tlXlJOl ^uva^, JSM A^ (piaXa^, i2DQlaZ| 'A^vjva^, ;ain Ksyx^^sag; oi and ouj (second declension) by Q and DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN 129 kCDO ; e. g. OOjOfe^t ^Tu'ixoi, ^CDO'^iNi^ ^tXiirieovg; and ; e. g. I |JlO xsqjaXaia ; the genitive ; e.g. >0( iO>| a^x^Luv ; s^ and a^ of the third declension are represented by JXU., tlD, CD| and ^fiDO ; e.g. P;rnn Kaitfa^a^, flolO-La'ff'Xaxaj, xaQ1 iNoi 'EXX7)vaff ; sig from the singular in j^ is represented by JSQa^; e. g. trn>rr>>f a]^s* one. There are many nouns which never, or very seldom, occur in the absolute state ; e. g. [^Om heat, JLdqo situation, 'iyoLhull, 'ilc^ death, etc. 2. The construct state ; a) of nouns masc. sing., does not differ from the absolute state ; e. g. ^ good ; but in the 130 DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. plural, the ending ^x is changed into jl-; e. g. -.^^ con- struct state from ^a^Z* Nouns masc, which form the plural by ^.^ ( M.Bem.l), change that termination into aa ; e.g. wA^r^ from ^r^ ; h) in the fem. sing., J- of the absolute state is changed into 2 ; e. g. Lz^L from \^* To the ter- minations Q and u^ only L is added ; e. g. 2on\v> from on\V) , Aj'^ from ^\0* In the plural, 2 is appended instead of ^ ; e.g. An^ from .^^* 8. The characteristic of the emphatic state, for both gen- ders and numbers, is final 1 (= n the Hebrew article). This is ; a) attached to the sing, of nouns masc. with 1^ preceding; e.g. fiQL from ^^ water, and I >Vf> heaven, belong here. Buxtorf cites yet a third form, witli U-; e.g. Rom. ix. 24. (iipO; 26. (.irD; Ephes. ii. 11. ]-ar^| But these forms are not recognized by Amira, and the form in ^... should perhaps be restored in these cases, af more correct. The fol- lowing should be noted as irregular emphatic plural forms : (lO^ j DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. 131 from yd] fruit, (, 1 kj> from U*^9 odor, |-JOVm from '\o\j!*siff/it, |Ao from (A.1^ house J etc. Eem. 2. Feminines with masculine endings ( 43. Rem.2), form tlie emj)hatic state like masculines by attaching the termination ^, e. g. ^J ( mr^A, emphat. state yLj\ ; ^O^ A;wee, emphat. state pjQO* Before the ending (. of the fem. absol., Q is inserted and quiesces m ; e.g. \LOfj>* from lO^js^^oy. Forms with \^^ take (A.&i* Some words in the emphatic form take Q before the last radical ; e. g. ]ALqo|So from |JO pD/ooc?. Feminines which are formed from masculines, like |Z^y. from r^ii, and especially adjectives, form the emphatic state fem., by affixing the syllable \L to the masc. absol. ; e. g. lAll^ (froui .jQ^ niasc). Adjectives in I- change this termination into ; e.g. fAj^^L^ from Jj^ dull. y ftxp7 7 Those in ^ take a, after 1 ; e. g. |^itV)M;V) from ^^>>;^ compassionate.. In the emphat. state plur., some words change jl into Q ; e. g. f^QQJ from ^^.OJ sAeep. Some take Q ; e. g. fZoiV) from tl^ part. Others insert jl ; e. g. fAar^pD from |Z;flDpi> bundle. Rem. 3. The emphatic form is found even before the genitive, which is formed by J ; e. g. |2l^L0) ],dL servant of the kinr/ (vid. Syntax, 73). 182 TABLE OF RELATIONS OF NOUNS. Table of the Different Relations (States) of the Noun, ( 45 and 48). MASCULINES. A. Nouns of one and two syllables with immutable vowels. (Decl. 1. 48). emphat. Plural. Singular, constr. absol. emphat. constr. and absol. Head. Vessel. Thief. Herh. Nazariie. Nation. u-v 7 ! ..IX U*'> ^1 p]i^ ^Is^ ^J^D IJU^ .ti) -..-^ > 7 ..7 7 x t> 7 * > P 7 7 ,-^.*^ 7 7 *. 7 .. T 9v 7 , * J DECLENSIOX OF NOL'XS. 183 C. Nouns in which (in gutturals ) of the ultimate syllable falls away, and the vowel appears over the antepenultimate radical consonant. (Decl III). 1]^*ALd JX^oALd ^i'^fc^Ak) IJ^ASd ^^^tlJD (One dead). D. Segholate forms, which begin with a vacant consonant, over . . ' "" ... *" . which the original or ^ reappears in inflection, or Q is assumed in their stead (Decl. IV). , T>.. IS 7" IS I.. 1\ [Mjao ^AjmyQjo ^^^^ao ..- r ..7 7 .. x 7 i. - .. 7 ..7 7 ..17 jlo^ 1jiS ^iliS ]]l Ji^ ^]^ h\>, t-^- , in which I passes into %-k and is movable as in both the other forms (Decl. V). |aV ) - > V > >^< |^< pj ma^ grazes. (ZqI > ZqIj ^Ql5 PiAj ^1> Herdsman. y.Krf\Krs . > I VrnVn ^>VmV> ]\ VmO^ ^iSmV) Abandoned. * * * ]V* - A Jiest. ]*^^ - o^ ^'^^ ]>*^* H^ Prisoner IHI DIFFERENT RELATIOXS OF THE XOUX. F E M I N I N E S. A. Nouns with immutable vowels (Q, .ji ,etc.) before the ending U (Dec!. I). IJoAo Virgin, 135 Bride, ^L^ Citi/. Plural Singular. empliat. constr. absol. emphat. constr. absol. l^^lIoAfi* Ai^oAo ^oAo I'AloAo l^oLa ]]oAo ]h^ A!So ^^' 12^ A^ Wo I^O-j'fLD AL'r^iD ^'r^ li\l-i%D AL'pk) li-Trk) B. Nouns, whose final syllable begins with two consonants, which, in the emphat. state sing, ha^ e -I- or Jl. inserted between them (Decl. II). llLojf Widow, ]]Ll Chariot, \Qy\ Jims. UlvD,T ASsoiT ^'T 1^^>V AV^DiV ULDiV l^v? ^\^ ^^^ ^V ^ve V^ jAoji Aoji ^ji lAoji Aoji t)>i C. Nouns, in whose emphat. state, the vowel of the first syllable is moved forward to the second vacant consonant ( Decl. Ill ). pSLM Partner, p-j.^ Cow. IZ'^A* Z'riZlM ^^^ U'r^*^ ^*r^^ Tr^:^ lAS^' Ail^' ,^^ lAl^ AS^ 1]!^' DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 135 D. Derivatives of Verbs IJ ending in |.j and (0 , whose %^ and O in the emphat. state sing, quiesce in_i, and Jl. ( Decl. IV ). Xa.j^O Blame, 'Q.iJs Animal, H^Ji^ Crirl. ? 7 7 P 7 ^ff *.7 >'' ^"^ VAllI Ali^ ^ IkS^ ^ Ui^ E. Derivatives of Verbs (J ending in Q and t.^. ( ^ ) beginning with two consonants, and having O 'Rnd -i movable in the plural ( Decl. V ). O Thing, OjaV) Plague, *-i;.2 Creature. Q^ Request, LllJD Part, OpD Dominion. .. 7 p 7 .. 12^s ^^^i 12qm1o Zoj^iii) VAI-^ p.. -h l2oS^ ^.5 rzoiii 2ai^ l2o^i, 23-3ij V^ P..7 p 12^, 2qo^ .*^^ r2ovi ZomID Om^ 1^-,= Zu*r> wi-^ r2oi. 2<^, ol, lAliD Alio Also 120-^ . . p o;^ 10 136 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. 46. Nouns with Suffixes. The noun, m taking suffixes (see 16. 2. B. and table of suffixes, 16), undergoes the following changes : 1. In masculines ; a) the suff. in the sing., is attached to the emphatic state, with the falling away of 1- : e. g. pNV) (from y^"^), with the suffix inSVi. In decl. I. III. lY. Y. ( 48. A) the radical vowels are not changed. In nouns of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state JH or _L, re- appears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural ; e. g. ^oJil, emphat. ]^\\ with suffix , iSnSs ; jOl-flO, JOlflO , with suffix ^OljOiflD* So also monosyllabic nouns, which lose Jl or _L in the emphatic state, take it again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ; e.g. ^B , emphat. jkLs , with suffix ^^ln , j^Lq {^'^ from ^'), etc. In nouns, derived from Yerbs ]] ending in \2 , emphat. state U (Decl. Y), w* before the suffix of the 1 sing., 2 and 3 plur., quiesces m _!. ; e. g. ,i i\^ , ^oniN^ from jJi , emphat. I^X^ ; but before the other suffixes ^ is movable ; e. g. ^ N(^ , o l i S^ ; ( and according to Syriac grammarians, *a is movable even before the suffix 1 sing ; e.g. wiJLX^)- The same is true also of nouns ending with jl- (passive participles of Pa. Aph. and Shaph. of Yerbs IJj' 32.1, 48 masculines, Decl.Y); e.g. ^oouAAkJ, j^AmSo (^AmSo) from w^AaLd drmh These nouns with suffixes of the 1, sing, are pronounced like the absol. state ; e. g. ^aAjiId my drink, (*-iIX)jQO my throne from |m>ao is an exception). Here belong all the emphatic forms ending with V j having a vacant consonant preceding, excepting U'^k) master, which with a suffix is as follows : ^"^ , y^, Oi'^k) , .ooI'^Ld, etc. Finally, in emphatic nouns ending in V"; having a vowel preceding, the general rule is followed ; e.g. M-yi^ reflection^ NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. I37 with suffix Aa.yiCn , or mo;o creator ^ with suff. a-o;q , ^0\^* The same is true of nouns with || for Ja ; e. g. itiOO with suff. ^al^QQ , *^UQS, ^aOIaQQ, etc., plur. ^JLiOO, 5^VQO But in cases where the termination ]] does not stand for V , as in l|ico , 1 takes Lin. occul. in suff. 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ; e. g. J\lSi , ^]lco , etc. In the other suff., and in the plur. with suff., the vowel of ( is thrown back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ^j^pio , ^(IQD ,plur. ^tlD , ^(lCO , etc. b) Plural suffixes in the masc. are attached to the construct foiTQ ( 45. 2. a) with which the suff. 1 sing, forms a crasis ; e. g. >an\V). In the sing, masc, however, wi. passes into Q ; y V IKY e. g. ,iOinn\V> (also ^jOIQ- = Germ, aij (Engl, oi, nearly), according to Lud. de Dieu^ p. 160, but not according to Amira) ; and in the 3 fem. before ^^a passes into ; e. g. qiinSV) ( 16. B). Plural nouns with ^-Jl , attach the suf- nx to the construct form ending m ^jl^ ; e. g. ^->--^ii with y 7 7 7 , v* suff. t^ii >\.> , %a01Cu.^.. So also in the emphatic ending ^07 \^ ~ #7 ^ .7 with JjL- ; e.g. >*^y( , *jOlQ^.t (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 163). - ; e.g. (i A^, with suff. .iNq and 1 1 N ({, and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing., differ from the sing, with the same suff. only by taking Eibui ; e.g. ^IAjilLd drink, with suff. ^a^m!^ ; plur. emphat. l-aAAk) ..77 ^ A " '' with suff. uAmSD and ^o.AaSo my drinks. Rem. 1. Collective nouns sing, with Ribui, take the suff. sing. ; e.g. iKwith sufF. oul , jA^* Only liij] takes the suff. plur. ; e. g. ^OlQuiil* Amira p. 213, supposes that l-iJQO with both Buffixes belongs here. 188 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. Rem. 2. \i\ father, \jj\ brother, jUthj^ father-in-law, are formed anomalously. The first two, with the suff. of the 1 sing., change into ; e. g. wk^Of* The last takes ; e.g. A.SQi. Final | before the other suflBxes is changed into Q; e. g. ^Qol , kSOo] , ^OlQOl , OlQQl , ^QOJ , etc. 2. In Feminines ; a) the suffix in the sing, is attaclied to the form of the emphat. state with a union vowel preced- ing; e.g. OiA!LSd)1 from \i^i] widow^ emphat. state lAi^iV The suffixes of the 1 sing, and of the 2 and 3 plur. are attached to the construct state without the union vowel, to avoid the concurrence of three vacant consonants ; e. g. ^L\Ol^ from l;^Js , constr. state 2;1m* Rem. From yLf^ (emphat. state) mistresSj is found tOOlZ^So. In 1^^ daughter, constr. state, L'fCi with the suflf. of the 1 sirig., moves forward from the first to the second consonant ; e. g. *aZ;q It should be remarked that the letter marked with Linea occultans is to be pronounced, if the above suffix occur; e. g. \t\ >,V> with suff". .CLdAia^, IZpl with sufi". wZ^ Amira asserts (p. 190) that the laterSyrians have the form.tOOlAljjSO , etc. b) In the plural, feminines take singular suffixes ; e. g. uA^'oA!D , yjbLLoLa , etc. Rem. In respect to the cardinal numbers ( 50. 2), it shouJd be remarked that they take both the sing, and plur. suffixes, forming with the first, possessive pronouns, and with the last, demonstrative pronouns ; e.g. Ol2;Dtl his ten, ^OOUjZ those two, ^CJuZlZ those two, tOCTuALZ those three. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 139 47. Declension of Nouns in General, Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (44.46) accord- ing to their form, either with or without any vowel changes. Thus they are divided into two principal classes, viz. ; those with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class, on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place of the declensions of the western languages (comp. 48). 48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension, A. Masculines. DecL I. This inclu^ps all monosyllabic nouns as well as those having more syllables than one, with immutable vow- els (ju, , Q, Q,) e. g. %-*> head^ H^ master^ *Q.JD fean, Q.. midst, .i^OQ partition^ %oZoZ native. To the latter class belong likewise those nouns whose penult, syllable is either a close one ; e. g. t Q^^ herbage, (gentile nouns with a. ; e. g. ^'r^ Nazarite), or such as would have a close penult, syllable, if tlie Syrians employed duplication of letters 7 (= Dagh. forte ) ; e. g. *^^yf i^^tf- Rem. Here also belong nouns derived from ^ Verbs with j which in the plural, double the final radical letter, and mark the first of the two doubled letters with Lin. occult. ; e. g. ^alwa^^on, plur. -jlSC^OI* But monosyllabic nouns having Q and ^ , and m the emphat. state, which change and into , belong to segholate forms(Decl.IV); e.g. ^Q- da?/, emphat.state pOQ-i ; ^-lA eye, emphat. state \lLL ; as do those also in which under the same circumstances Q is transposed ; e. g. *0pO holiness, emphat. state ]ijao In S^>^^ young man, ^IQl Md, and ^CCLij;2> paradise, 2_ falls away in the inflection and j. with _L preceding, forms ai ; e. g. emphat. state |V>iNs , etc. 140 DECLENSION OF NOUN^S. Decl. 11. This includes nouns, with _1 and JL, which have . two consonants ; e.g. ^Q name^ or two syllables, of which the penult. is either a mixed one as in ^^f^So (part. pass. Aph.), na^r> mighty ; or whose middle radical must be 77 71 doubled ; e.g. po a talent ; ;a sparrow ; or has an immu table vowel ; e.g. ^q\i eternity ; JOICD witness ; ^\^\ wheel. In these nouns, the vowel of the final syllable falls away, excepting in the sing, before the suff. of the 1 sing, and be- fore the 2 and 8 plur. ; e. g. emphat. state ]V>Ss with sufp. 01^\s, ,iV>^S, and *00lV>Sv Rem. Here belongs also ^a Aawrf, emphat.state 1^^] ; plur.jipjl, 7* 7 . -^0 *7 etc. Forms also like i>*"'),V> a?/ar, and (m^^ belong here, which take a new syllable with _^ over the first radical letter in consequence of an accumulation of consonants ; e. g. ImIo,^ (see 15. 4). The following are examples : *.^^ morning^ osaAslLo opening^ etc. From ^^^^^0 fountain^ appears the emphat. state ]lSV), plur. tLl!^> Decl. III. To this belong those nouns, which, throughout their inflection, lose 2_ (before gutt. _L) of the final syllable ; but take _L as a helping vowel over the antepenultimate radical consonant, viz. ; in participles Ethpe. ; e. g. %^t^ dead, emphat. state ]l4^Ak) Decl. IV. Here are to be enumerated all nouns which cor- respond with Hebrew segholate forms (see Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 668 sq). Such for the most part in Syriac, are monosyl- labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have for their characteristic vowel _!_ or JL, which appears first in the emphat. state over the first radical. In this form the noun remains unchanged throughout its formations. They may as in Hebrew, be divided into derivatives of verbs with and without gutturals, and derivatives of Ql and *.*^ Verbs. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 141 A) To the first class belong forms like ^j^ hing^ emphat state pj^; \ZiSO book, emphat. state l^acD; ^1' child^ em- . phat. state ]^ ; with suff OialSo , .001;?} ff) , ^\\1^ To the form with Hholem in Hebrew corresponds .^0^0 holiness, emphat. state l^^ao; ^ojo hnee, emphat. state ]a5QQ (comp. 15. 2. B. b). The same applies : ft B) In forms with gutturals ; e.g. ,o) wa?/. C) Finally, derivatives of Yerbs w&.^ and oL lose or belonging to the middle quiescent radicals ^ or Q^ In con- nection with _L, A and Q form the dipthongs ai and au ; e.g. ^v^ eye, emphat. state P-iJL; jo^Qla* guilt, emphatstate (ocLm (AxT) constr. state, house, emphat. lAx^). Rem. The following forms take , viz. : ;Q2 flesh, 'r^D side, y^^ counsel, and the emphat. forms |j^ f mourning, (^ i] sea, l^jl threshing floor, \2}l^ ship, 1;Sd"| lamb; from ^iwO*!, etc. Some words which would in Hebrew, take Pattah, in Syriac, take J^ ; e.g. ^y.j/oo^, emphat.state |J.tJ , etc. ( is considered as a guttural when at the end of )SL^ impure, emphat. state ] pCX^, plur. absol. ^p^, constr. ^pQ^, emphat. ipCl^ ; and in the emphat. form ff jZ, plur. al'Z ( also ^jlZ ) from the absolute form |j2 grass. Decl V. Here belong derivatives (mostly participles and (comp. 40.) ending in }., ^ and w* The distinguishing characteristic is, that 1 is changed into ^^ and is movable as well as both the other endings in the emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union vowel ; e.g. Uyt emphat. state M-^yi ; with suff. OU^ . But before the suff. of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ] quiesces in 142 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. I . I # ; e. g. ^oou-^y. The same is true in the plur. which ends with ^ ( 44. Eem. 1) with the falling away of ] ; e.g. ^jb^... The suffix is attached to the emphatic state ending with ]jL as well as to the constr. state ending with .j^* In respect to the changes of the vowels, it should be remarked that the form with ]- takes in the emphatic state, if it be a monosyllable and begin with a vacant consonant ; e. g. VA.. from ]].. revealed. In words of two or more syllables the preceding vowel remains unchanged ; e. g. pV**^ from l]>j^ , Vi-^y. AJiD from UyiASo* Monosyllabic nouns witli ^ik mute likewise retain their vowels ; e.g. "jLao from - -^^ wine. Finally nouns ending with %. (part. pass, of Pa. and Aph. see 32. 1), lose _L in the emphat. state sing. ; e. g. ]*\mV) from >iNmV) abandoned; but appears again in the emphat. state plur. ; e. g. liSmV)* Rem. From monosyllabic nouns ending with \Z. we find forms with ; e. g. lifino (Matt. vi. 4) from JCOS* Also from [1^ we have the plur. emphat. 1 1 \(i^ as though from t\(f* Here belongs also |>V) from the obsolete form ]S/QA, constr. state plur. - ^^- The part Pe. act. differs from the noun of the same form by being inflected as usual,while thenoun,in the plur.takes the form of feminines of decl. IV., and ( is changed into Q movable with _l_ preceding ; e.g. Jl> pasturing^ plur. ^>-^) , constr. ti iS> , emphat. JjA) ; ^1> herdsman^ on the contrary, becomes m the plur. ^Q^>, ZOl), (LQl)* From |;Sd master^ both forms of the plur. cccur ; the latter form in (qD9Q2 throne. The noun (.uQJ prophet, in the plur., contracts a. and 1 into a., |>ni ; while the adjective % it ^ takes yet another], emphat. |Jju^ , plur. ^^^ , ^^i.^, |U^^* DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 148 B. Feminines. Bed. I. This includes all the Feminines ending with ]_ , which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In *.his case the penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter quiescing in it ; e. g. ]]oAiD^;^V^m, or the noun is a derivative of Yerbs ^, in which case in the plural, the first of the duplicate radicals reappears, and takes Linea occultans ; e.g. yi^ (also \i\i^ pretense from ^Sil ; Uo Iride^ plur. -SSo* The sulf. of the 1. sing, is appended to the constr.state with- out the union vowel ; e. g. w*A^oAq The suff. in other persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state ; e. g. yt^oL^ , etc. (comp. 46. 2). Rem. From \laLq:^ waistcoat^ appears the plur. ^^il iZoO as if from IjlIuZqD or A.laZQD Some forms with final \l take Linea occult, in the emphat. state under J ; e.g. iLipSo city^ emphat. state |Ajl,.Sd ; or J falls entirely away as in \i\jS\ another^ emphatic state IZ^I* -^ Decl. 11. Here belong all nouns fem. whose final syllable begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity, ] masc), emphat. state f ALs^j] ; IJ40 (from ^^4^ masc), emphat. state lAl^^ ; before guttu- rals is always the vowel inserted between the two conso- nants in the emphat. ; e.g. \^\Sifovjl^ emphat. state -jAja^S* In the reception of suffixes this declension agrees with decl. I ; e. g. ^aAilSDjf , OlA^il), ^tS^ and OlAll^. Rem. Some insert Q ; e. g. \123^fall^ emphat. f Aj^Qi5^ So too (;l0)Z wonder^ (k*^Z love. Decl. III. This includes those nouns fem. whose vowel of the first syllable is moved forward, in the emphat. state to 144 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. the second vacant consonant ; e. g. l;^ja female companion^ emphat. lZ^x ; |].^ cow^ emphat. lA^.Il^ Nouns of this class, taking a sufF. in the sing., are treated like nouns in decl. L and II. Rem. .i. Some nouns have several emphatic forms. Thus }iD>l alms^ has three emphatic forms ; e. g. lAoj] , lAojl , lAojl* In the same manner also are inflected (m^) offering^ (Ag12 terror^ |*^m woman, |J>*? /^<^^, etc. The following contractions in the emphat. state should be mentioned : \Lr*^ for \LLfj>* new, \bsiy>> for |Al21.. from K^yt ^^^^5 jAiiik for |^1*S\ from jmN brick. Decl. IV. This includes fem. derivatives of Verbs |J end- ing in t* and lo It should be remarked in reference to them that the immutable vowel of the penult syllable is retained, and ^ and Q , in the emphat. state sing., quiesce in and ; e. g. (Ajj^o from Pft^O . reproach, jZOk-M from |QjLj^ animal. If the masc. be monosyllabic the vowel of the first syllable falls away ; e. g.lAjJl^ from \*!^ girl, (Vi masc). But in the constr. state, and in all the plurals, M and Q are movable ; e. g. Lm^j^o . , Zoi-m , ZuJL^ , plur., ,^1 iO , etc. Rem. Here belongs also the participle act. of Pa. and Aph. ; but the fem. participle pass, in the same conjugations, ending, in the raasc, with w*. , takes instead of in the emphat. state. With this vowel a forms the dipthong ai ; e. g. j i N .t V) , emphat. |A>\.tV) from .i^y.Lo Decl. V. To this belong mostly monosyllabic derivatives of Yerbs ]] ending with Q and ^ (some end in Z ), which begin with two consonants ; e. g. QjaSo calamity, -;) crea- ture. Also dissvllabic nouns belong here with immutable ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 145 vowels in the penult syllable ; e.g. 03] victory, -ijoZ thanks^ whose o and ^ quiesce, throughout in the sing. But in the \AuT. where O and ^ are movable, some nouns (derivatives of Pa.) take after the second radical letter ; e. g. oL. entreaty J plur. iQ^ , ^^ti I^Cl^t* Nouns ending with 2 belong here, which in the plur. take Q with the falling away of 2; e. g. ASi offering, plur. tOAl, Lcl^, I^QlSi* Other nouns (derivatives of Pe.) take after the first rad- ical letter ; e.g. QiD> resemblance, plur. tOSoj , Zoioj, |ZqSd>; or wdth gutturals following, they take ; e. g. QaaId hloiv, 7 plur. tCl*AiD, etc. Rem. The same peculiarity of taking a new vowel is found also 4, "7 ^ 7 in 0;iD authority, plur. tO^ , etc. ; (ini sheep^ plur. tOOJ and ()SD a hundred, plur. (Zo |ib as if from QOJ and 0|Sd So also in some nouns which are not derivatives of ]j ; e. g. Q-i\*^ partition, \7 v 0. -n ^\ plur. ^Qu^JiS}; OjOlCD testimony, plur. |Z0J01CD, and even 0*^\V) , .O^NV> , besides tO^NV) , and some others. 49. Anomalous Nouns. Some nouns of very frequent occurrence are inflected in a manner varying more or less from the above mentioned paradigms ( 47, 48). This arises either from an attempt to unite different ground-forms, or from the simple ground form conforming less closely to the general laws of inflection. These nouns are the following : 146 PARADIGMS OF NOUNS. MASCULINES. Plural. Singular, emphat. constr. absol. emphat. constr. absol. 01Q| ^Gia] ^Cld] ) \oi\ *0| JD| Father. *CPP7 * D m7 ""SI IZoi^l Zoiol ^ai^l ^ \mJLO wJLO ^aLd ('^ \Ci jp 5ow. I'Z^ JaAo ^'Ao I'A.&r) AjlO c^ ^02^5^. loiSQA JoiSqs ^oiSqa ) ]Sn ^gl ^qs JVam^. p, p p.. . pp.. ..p p r (ZaiSOA ZoiSqa ^ctiSqs ' i26rzr 2o,'zr /ovzr lizr ^^^r ^lUiace, F E M I N I N E S . VZoiSir ZafiLof ^oiSDf tof :>o'f 5>of jl/o^Aer. iMii Aii ^i) I'Z'rO Z'ri Daughter. VZoilV 2culV t^V T^ Sister. l2oikiV ZoiSdV .OliV l^V ^V "tofi/aiWm. ]2Qk)V ZqLD*!' tOS^jf IALOoI ALDo] lio] People. p, p .. - , p .. -ft p .. -ft ft "-ft |ZQ21D ZQ210 .QIQD |Z\lCD _^ Lip. fAlooj Aliioj ^^o? l^ooj Aobj looj P/ce. 148 NOUNS WITH StJFFIXES. Paradigms of Noum A. Masculine Nouns. Singular. Decl. II. Stat, absol. jOlcb Witness. Suff.Sing. 1 c. *^>aicb D 2 m. ^)C71C0 2 f. olOJOIOD 3 m. 01>GIQD 3 f. dlJOUX) SufF.plur. 1 c. 2 ra. 2 f. ^AO?01flQ Decl. IV. King. Decl. V. Boy. 7. 7 Drink. cuAaSd 7 4 7 2^ 3 m. ^OOljOlCD 3 f. ^01)0120 ^cnn^iLo ^ouX^ ^guAaId (To tlie sufF. 1 sing, of tlie forms ]li and *aAmLb add i iS^ and aLmIhD , compare *^AaLo 46. 1. a). / y ^ Plural. ^>01CD ^ Suff.sing. 1 c. *^J01CD *>n\V) 2 m. ^>aiD y 1 n\V) 2 f. . > ^ >^mM> . ininNV) 3 m.^aio>aiD *uaion\V) 3 f. GU>C7lD Oli^SV) Suff.plur. 1 c. ^jOlfib . inSV) V on 2 m..Q2^)0lD ^ -ft 7 D 2 f. ^jLiLijairo 3 m.,oau)OiD .oaiinW) ^n 7 7 3 f. ^OUJOICD ^Ol nSv> ^OOLii^ ^001 > I \^ NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. 149 loiih Suffixes, B . Feminine Nouns. Comp. 49 . Table. Decl. 1. Decl. IV. Decl V. 7 ^r 1 Vol^ X^ ^5 Son. Father. Virgin. Maiden. Petition. -r^ ^r ^t&ota ^td:^ oi7q1 otZqI. ^ooiZol. ^ctZqI. wi^ALoAo oi-b X ..7 ^OIQjDl Gii\LoA:2 01AA4 0\\Ci .- * ^7 OlOiDl oiiMoAii CT^uS4 7 . i.7 v .X ^7 ^oAo ^qoASoAo ^oai;i ^ * X .7 X -X ^7 .OOIQ^I ^ASoAtd ^ooiAlIoAo ^001 All^ ^ x .v" ^OlQliil ^oiASoAo ^oAo ^oiAll^ ]1 Flood, 7 Waters. 0.7 7 ^oioio oi'i'V) anjkSo V .ooilk} , ooii">^o oiASoAo (jfAll^ oi'aSoAo oiAliJ^ .QoAlLoAiD .qoAII^ .ooiASoAtd ^ooiAlL^ ^diASoAn) ^oiAjIL^ aZa^. n^. 7^ *, p. 7^ oiZq1 .obZol^^ ^-LoZqX X ,p .7 V. .ooiZqI* V * , .7 V. ^oiZqI. 150 ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS. 50. Adjectives and Numerals. 1. Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see 40. and tables) and having the same form as nouns^ are inflected ac- cording to the same laws (see 44, 45, 48). In respect to denominative adjectives, see 41. 2. Rem. The Syriac has no special forms for the comparative and superlative. For the manner in which these are expressed, see Syntax Y7. 2. Numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. In the former we should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to 10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings ; but feminines, on the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100 there is only one form for both genders. The numbers from 1 to 10 are the following : C ORDINALS. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Vr- 7 1. a; YA. 6. ^Vl ^'^ 2. W^m iLoi 1. tlL. XtlL 3. ]iii2 ]llii>2 8. ^hX ii^^r 4. ^l K.r 9. .V)m i^v.;. 5. 7 ItCQi 10. Rem. Upon the union of these numerical words with suffixes, see 46. 2. b. Rem. The tens from 80 to 90 are expressed by the plural of the cardinals from 3 to 9 ; e. g. ^iSSZ' 30, ^^^^jf 40, ^^laVOM 50, ^E^ 60, ^xini TO, ^jlii 80, ^-Jji2 90. The plural of 10 (^r^) represents 20. All plurals" are of the common gender. Iti) signifies 100, ^"ifco 200, l]k>AL7 or IZolliD ALZ 300, etc., with the preceding unit in the fem- inme. i^ signifies 1000 (instead of *a!ik or .SiISL, em- phat. Isil:^, plur. ,^i^^,'ta!L); ^i<^%^ ^ll signifies ADJECTIVES AMD NUMERALS. 151 2000, ,^-ii^ Ta!^2 8000. etc. (with the preceding unit in the masculine). The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following manner : Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Vjmi'r^ ;mi^ 11. T'^TilKM 'r^^i T>l2i2 'Ml 12. '^IhM ! ! TJcQlASZ ,aili^Z 13. f[resl^m -(^K^m 17. yCQiZ^aV^M ^ 1 ^ms^Z 'rmi^Z 19. The intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 31 to 89, etc., are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens, followed by the numeral under ten preceded by o ; e. g. (Aj^Zo ^L\l masc. 33, .aSOmO ^A fem. 66. . Sometimes the units precede ; e. g. ^^010 |^^^| 24, etc. So if the number of numerical words combined be large, the greater numerals are always placed before the smaller ; e. g. U^O ^"fSoLo l]Sn")V)Zo 2l^ 1827. 8. The ordinal numbers, from 3 to 10, are formed from the cardinal numbers by adding the terminations |^ masc, f Aa- fem., and inserting before the ultimate radical. Foi the first, a particular word is used, and for the second, a form differing somewhat from the form of the cardinal for 2. ORDINALS. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. VZuiDrO ]^rQ the first. lAa2uA ]lAaA the sixth. VAxIIjZ lll)Z the second. VAiStn* l>Sin the seventh. VLJLSL ]lhu^L the third. XLAj^I ViliV' Z the eighth ^A>v>A; ]\ K > A% the fourth. VZuloiZ ] i S i Z i/ie 7^^^^.'A. liui-iSOM 1". ^^^^^ the fifth. lAa'piini ll'piXQl the tenth. 11 ] 52 PARTICLES ADVEKBS. The tens of ordinals from 20 are expressed, as in Hebrew, either by cardinal numbers or by the addition thereto of the terminations (.k. masc., \Ll. fem. ; e. g. (i ^^onv , {>< -n\^ , 1 1 1 i sn> I , etc. The units are put after ; e. g. ]uAa.^Z The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19, etc., are formed by uniting the ordinal number 10 with a unit of the cardi- nals, into one word, the unit preceding ; e. g. lAm'^mv >. fem.,^;imSrM masc. the eleventh^\L^\ > ^\IM fem., |.;>rftv;/ masc. the twelfth^ etc. Sometimes the ordinal 10 is united with a cardinal number and the word is preceded by > ; e.g. 7 7 7 7 ,*7 ;rQ^rM> , 'jmuZj , etc. Rem. The Syrians, like the Hebrews, express the idea o( a part, by a feminine form and the insertion of Q after the first radical letter ; e.g. lA^oZ , 'il209 , IaSoOm third part, etc. Upon the other relations of numbers comp. Syntax 78. CHAPTER FOUETH. PARTICLES. To Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections. In respect to their origin they may be considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other parts of speech. The last are by far the most numerous. 51. Adverbs. 1. The following may be considered as primitive adverbs: ^1 so, )] , Q^ not, ^>OL there, p here. 2. Those derived from nouns and adjectives with the characteristic endings Al , Zo- and Lk\ , arc the following ; /? PREPOSITIONS. /. 163 Zu>*l at last J AlLOrO at first, ZqiIjZ again, Aa^oil^ godly, Aa|>^ m sAor^, A^(;1L Hebraically, fP^QA today. 3. As transferred from other parts of speech are to be considered those : a) from substantives ; a ) with a preposition ; e. g. |Z>i^ finally, \y\M^ truly, P^l^ once, <^i^ inwardly, . \ ^ 1 Kc^i'nm/mpdiafphj^ Ajj.JiD anew ; j3)withouta preposition; e. g. 1 '^*^ {want) not, |AmSo enough, ail^ , ^X^ wholly, na- tively, also in the plural 1 Alibi sometimes ; h) from adjectives, numerals and pronouns; e. g. %rx4, >-fc'yiffl very, >QuJ^, O. . 7 7 ij7 -P *7 V f*" ^ ' jOkk^jQ ow?y, r**^l ) lp**^l ^i once, (rM^ immediately, ]iQO Aow; mwc^ f )iSq1 , Qlk) i^^y -^ c) ^^^^^ verbal forms, as the infinitive, *QoZ a^am ; or participles ^mV)S , ^mulp ^ almost. Rem. Some adverbs are transferred from the Greek ; e. g. nVVvr> ^aXkov, ^mi\V) fxaXio'Ta, "lo^] s/xii. The Syriae lan- guage is especially rich in compound adverbs. Such are the fol- lowing : ]au1 where ? p-U l^r^ wherefore? ]j ^^saO^ not yet, *jiAliD]] l^OpL AoMJ long? piCn woz^>, (SOpL |Ld01^ until now, etc. Among compound adverbs may also be placed the circumlocutory A>V not to he (see 38). The simple interrogation is either not 7 expressed at all, or by the addition of wk^ : the negative interroga- tion, is expressed by IJ , and loi (] The syllable %a1 prefixed to pronouns and adverbs expresses an interrogation ; e. g. P-( ^Lo whence ? pL | who ? 52. Prepositions. 1. To the original Prepositions belong the prefixes s , J (gen.), ^ (dat. and ace.) which are always joined with a noun or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun begins with a regular consonant ; _e. g. ^QjlD , ln\\n\ Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually _L, when 154 PREPOSITIONS. the following consonant is vacant ; e. g. ]<^^*-^ ^ )X^^ ^ or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents ] or Oi; e. g. llSoo from l^D for ]1^ ; .-klDOOi'S for *jiiooi'^. Before words which begin with ] , *a or oil , the vowels, in which these letters quiesce, fall back upon the preceding prefix ; e. g. ]1jV3 , l^jo^i , 1%lJ , V,i\%N" , joi:^ from li>l , etc. Rem. Before (A 6, and ^A, these prepositions take , pro- bably because they were also written "{Lb] and ^Al* In ^^^QO and ^>QD the preposition L quiesces in Q , * which falls back (comp. 15. 2. B. c. and the tables following); e.g. V\^^nV ^r^oL , except when suffixes are appended with a union vowel, in which case the _\ of the second syllable falls away and the original form reappears ; e.g. OlXa on\ etc. Among the original preposi- tions may also be reckoned the monosyllables ^Ql witk^ 7n<^\ hy^ ICL^ to. 2. Most of the other prepositions are considered as trans- ferred from other parts of speech ; a) substantives in the constr.state ; e. g. ^^ before^ tPOy instead, *'^\^tfor, a1 in and ALfc^ between, hr*^ and ^)h^ about, Lo^L and Li^^Lunder, ^ (fromLl!^ part) from, 5Ao after ; b) substantives with prefixes ; e.g. >AcQQ according to, ^nno\ against, ^loQ^ before ; c) compounds ; e. g. ^ t^r^ until to, ^^aL over, plXo ^Sd without, >,-M ^laO around, about, \>^iOQ^ ^Sd against. 3. Several of the prepositions seem to have been origi- nally plural nouns, on which account they are united with plural suffixes. Here belong \^over, ?lt rt cfter,a- gainst, %Si^**for, ^^O before, Lqj^L under (comp. 16. 2. C. and the following paradigms). ^Instead of saying that -^ quiesces in Q the author should have said that L takes the vowel with Q quiescing in it, as ^ is not a quiescent (see 13). Tr. PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 155 Prepositions with. Suffixes. ( 16. II. C. and 52 ). A. With Suff. of the Sino. B. Of the Plur. Masc. Fern. ^ ZoL ^5^q1 ^ ^Hi in. Sing. 1 C. ^JJ^ 2 m. yJ^ to. /ZoL after, y',L6 against. over, on account of. 3 f. oiQ cfi'Zol oi)Ao aiSrjQol olJ^ oi2^Asd Plur. 1 c. ^ ^2q1 ^Ao ^^non\ ^j^ .Ai^So 2 m. .002 .qdZq^ .QD^Ab .nnNnoai .on i \\ .ooAIi^^ *^ *^ 1 P* *> , 5 ? -x 7 -X. -X .7 -X it"*. - *> 3 m..ooio ^ooiZo^ .ooijAo ^oaiNnooX^aujiL^ooiA^i^ 3 f. ^012 ^CTiZolu^cn^^AQ^aiVnnoS ^guXi^giAI^^Sd Rem. The following take no suffixes : Aa2 in, jlL without, Q. A w^77im, ^M!L oi;er, A>aA!^ under, ]SdA ^^^^^ ^<^> and ^^ ;^^ except. 156 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 53. Conjunctions and Interjections. 1. The original ConjunctioDS are the copulative O , > that^ because (^before infinit.), il ^^ p as^ since, of or, *jlO hence, ^Qj^ (for this preposition in questions see 51. 3. Kem.) r namely. ^> lest. Rem. O and J , like 2 and ^, are prefixed (see 52. 1). 2. Compound Conjunctions are ; a) with ^1 ; e. g. q2^ if, ^ 13] andlloi^ 7i7ilesSj ^] although, ^j ooul and^rj] if hut, tlo ,1 he it he it ; b) with j ; e.g. Bj lest, especially after prepositions ; e. g. j yu] as, j ^is^^ ? ^^ ^^^ ? *^^ because, j ^io ?e5/, j p^A until; c) with other conjunctions ; e. g. ^i-OOl /lence, ^ inV> now, .Qyi ,i therefore, -*^^ p although. From the Greek are borrowed |j ( aXXa, ;a.. ^ap, 3. Interjections as primitives are mostly onomatopoetic ; e. g. Of , ,0| .-^ *^0 wo ! \Cl behold/ ^OU hey / ha! They are sometimes borrowed from other parts of speech ; e.g. 2)oA( , ^aol^ ify^l - OV*^*^ I pray you I PART THIRD SYNTAX. CHAPTER FIRST. THE PRONOUN. 51. Use of the Separable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes. A. Separable Personal Pronouns. 1. These pronouns at tlie beginning of a sentence, denote a certain empliasis, and stand in various relations to the verb which follows in the same person. This relation is not only ; a) that of the nominative absolute ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 10. ^aalJ Li\ . Ij plD a J Aj| hut thoti, ivhy judgest thou thy brother I Eph. iv. 20., Acts xix. 15., II Tim. iv. 5 ; but it may be also represented ; h) by the oblique cases ; e.g. a) by the genitive ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. oNnaV^N pf fQ U> ooi wiOlQjmSD whose shoes I am not worthy to unloose^ John xix. 11., Ephes. vi. 20 ; ^ ) by the dative ; e. g. Kirsh. ii. 2. Aj"! ^jlL JD;) ]3 \i\o but no one comes to me, Luke xxiii.41 ; y) by the accusative ; e.g. Kirsh.iv.7.-9. ^ND ^oAjfj ]Ld 001 Uo oiiSuAo -K^ffio tjf ]snSai]i ^on"2> ]' \Sn ^tS\ OlA*An*1 what you seek to find in the nighty I seek to find in the day time^ and find it not. 158 THE PKONOUN. Rem. They are also emphatic after the verb; e.g. Luke iii. 14. ^Lm *a| fClL2 piO what then shall we do ? Upon ^ajj and -jUf as accusatives, comp. 16. Rem. 1. and the preceding table. 2. United with substantives, adjectives or adverbs they mark the Present ; a) of the substantive verb looi (see 38); e.g. *uai l^'r* slit is true-^ Matt. xxiv. 26. 001 UdSqm^ he is in the desert ; verse 23. OOl pjOl he is here ; h) of the finite verb with its participle; e.g. pi ^1 /say, AjI pJ^Jl* thou art horn (comp. 64). Rem. (Upon ] and 01 see 12. 1. B). The contraction of the pronoun with the participle or adjective into one word is found in the 1 pers. plur. ; e. g. ^^1 \\n we read ^ k}^^ "^^ ^^ ^^^ holy. It is also found sometimes in other persons ; e. g. Eph. iii. 13. (l^lji 4^ 7 I beseech ; Gal.v.3. n*^u^ he is guilty ; iii.ll (comp. 20.and37.E). 3. Farther in these cases ; a) the pronoun of the same person may be doubled, so that the former will denote the subject and the latter the substantive verb ; e. g. John i. 20. |j I Pi / am ; xiv. 20. tO Aj ( w^ # Aj | ye are in me ; Matt, xxvi. 73 ; or the part, present of the finite verb is placed be- tween ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. p| ,V>SV> pf / baptize ; xxvii. 4; John xiii. 13 ; Barh. 68, 16 ; 105, 14 ; 148, 15. h) In the simple pronoun may be contained both the subject and substantive verb ; e. g. Gen. xxix. 4. ^Ija >* ^Sd fO^Jf pV^if whence are ye ? we are from Haran; Assem. I. 83 ; 12, 13. c ) The pronoun 001 , as substantive verb, may follow the 1 and 2 person as subject ; e. g. Acts xxii. 8. ^Q*^ 001 pi I am Jesus ; Luke xxii. 67. f,iV) ooi Aj( .| if thou art the Messiah ; verse 70 ; xxiv. 18 ; Ephr. I. 214. E; Barh. 173, 18-20. Also ^Qjf and ^jY, follow the 1 and 2 PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 159 pers. as subject ; e. g. Matt. v. 13. IijIj 01m>\V) .qjV.oAj] ye are the salt of the earth; I. Cor. iii. 17; Barh. 133. 1. Rem. Instead of the pronouns, thePhiloxenlan version of the N.T. uses A^l with suff.; e. g. ^OloZuf \i\ Iam\ ^QD^Ljk\ ^bS\ye are, B. Suffixes 1. The pronominal suffixes of the verb denote the accusa- tive ; rarely, and for tbe most part in translations from the Hebrew, the dative ; e. g. wi-jAoctIji for w>JL Aiiou thou hast given to me. Rem. This imitation of the Heb. is neglected in passages of the 0. T. ; e. g. Zach. vii. 5. comp. with Ephr. II. 296. B. and Isa. xxiv. 4, comp. with II. 65. C. 2. In the relation of genitive, the suffixes are attached to the nomen rectum or to the genitive proper; e.g. Ez. xvi. 18. jbOAo^j p 1^ thy embroidered garments^ literally of thine embroidery or ornament ; vii. 20; xi. 15 ; xxvii. 16, 27; y p *> ^ " ^^ Matt. vi. 11. ^inJQD> pOM^^ our necessary hread^ literally of our need. Rem. The suffix is seldom found with the nomen regens ; e.g. Ez. xvi. 27. fLQjkJlJ .-fc-DAjaJOJ ^SsD of thy lewd ways, usually in con- nection with |1 i V)i the right, and |JSD0 the left ; e.g. Acts. iii. 7. |l iSf). kJ ClpA^ on his right hand; Matt.v.29; Rev.i.I7. Sometimes a double suffix occurs ; e.g. Ephr. I. 204. B. and G. ^^PQ^ yr^-^ thy first horn. 3. The noun taking a suffix stands before an adjective PxV ^'a'" connected with it ; e. g. Ps. Ixxxvii. 1. t*-"rO 01jq4o in his holy mountain'^ Ez. vi. 9; Ephr. I. 284. A. Jn^ Ol) .o] his good treasure. 4. The suffix to the noun is often understood objectively; 8. g. Exod. XX. 20. OiA!iI*j/ear before him ; I Cor. xi. 25. .ftJ;30rL in remembrance of me\ John xv. 10. OliiOA* love to'him] Barh. 218, 14. * Rem. 1. Possessives are also expressed by ^\^J with suff. ( 16. B) ; e. g. Barh. 49. 7. Oll^j ]]1mwU9 his commander ; 146, 10. 160 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger eia- phasis is required than is indicated by the mere suffix ; e. g. Matt. vi. 13. ]Zon\V) wCn y^y thine is the kingdom ; Barh. 146, 1. ;>A.O> ^^? (A05 (Lrl our great church in Haran. If the suff. to the noun be also repeated, it indicates (emphatically) the Greek possessives ^[klg tfo^, &c. ; e. g. John iv. 34. N*? *-A^QD]Sd sfAov /3^u/xa ; vii. 6 ; xv. 9 ; Rom. 3.7. The same repetition of the 7 1 7 suffix occurs also in prepositions; e.g. II Cor. v. 19. ^X*9 ^^ iv vi\iA\) ; I John ii. 2, and in certain forms of expression; e.g. Matt. xxvii. 4. ^^ PiD ^ T If fag >jfxa^ ; John xxi. 22. 7 Rem. 2. We should mention the use of the sufF. in ^;lD , .rSD, for the pronoun of the second, and in ,ui,*^\, ^ASd( , j^^aijfor the pronoun of the first person, when the discourse is addressed to superiors ; e. g. Genesis xliv. 16. ->;V) \ ;SDp plD what shall we say to thee {my lord) ? .^ii,*^s\ (Ol^^* our {thy servants') iniquity ; ve;*se 32. So kings in speaking of themselves use \d!^ ; e. g. Esth. viii. 8. ln\V)> ]V)n QCJo'Ao write in {my) the king's name; and in reference to God, 01, vv is used ; e. g. Gen. v. 1. Also %a^ stands connected with the second and third persons ; e. g. Mark xii. 37. ji;Ld Ol^ \\i 7 he calls him his {my) Lord, and diflfers from y^ , in that the for- mer is the common form of salutation, while the latter marks the pluralis majestatis, and is used of Christ in the version of the New Testament ; e. g. Acts i. 1 ; Rom. xiv. 8. Rem. 3. It is rather to be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew idiom, when the suffix relates to a noun which does not occur till later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) ; or when the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun ; e.g. Gen. xvi. 16. 55. Pleonastic Use of Pronouns. A. Separable Personal Pronouns. Here belongs the pronoun of tlie third person ooi (Ol) (comp. 12. 1. B) united with nearly all persons of the sing, and plur., by which an emphasis is denoted, which is disregarded in the later language. It is found still in such PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. 161 passages as John viii. 26. ]Sn\sn p] WVv^V) ooi ^.Aoi thai {exactly) I speah hefore the world; verse 28 ; xv. 16 ; Eom. iii. 31 ; Heb. ix. 17. It is to be considered merely as pleonastic m Luke vii. 19. ^i >^nn<^ 01 ^*h^|J o| or shall we wait for another ? Eom. xiv. 8 ; Heb. xiii. 22 ; I Tim. \A\ V. 9; Barb. 188, 8 ; Assem.I. 221,A.5, especially where it occurs with a feminine noun ; e, g. Eom. iii. 26. |jL3;i:) *Djj]iD 001 jZaiSOjiOlO hy faith is a man justified. OCFl is sometimes connected with a plural ; e. g. Ephr. I. 214, D. ^OOLUTDO OOI .OOUaJ AIj^^O on account of his ivives and children. Eem. Sometimes also the fem. -*01 (still more emphatic), is found ; e. g. Eev. xxi. 2. Aafja VAaji^ ^6l l^^LoXo and I saw (it) the holy city ; xxii. 19, and the plur. .QJOl Assem.L YT, A. 20, 21. OOI and OOI are sometimes united together without 3 7 7 -X emphasis ; e.g. John v.9. (^Qa 001 0010 and this day ; Barh.148, X P .jft P 7 > * 3. Also in the plur. ; e.g. Matt. iii. 1. tOJOl fASoOin ^j tO^Jl^ but in these days. The pleonastic use of 001 is confirmed from the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether. B. Suffixes. 1. The suffix is often used pleonastically with the verb, when the object with ^ as though by way of explanation follows; e. g. Matt. i. 21. Ol V)s\ wiOin > 1 ;jLy, oaifor he shall bless (it) his people ; verse 24; ii. 6, 11 ; Mark xiv. 47. Without ^in Matt. xxv. 25. j^J^a CxL^ki I hurled {it) thy talent ; xxvii. 5 ; I Tim. vi. 14. Rem. 1. The suffix also occurs pleonastically with " after verbs of motion, going, coming, &c. ; e.g. Gen. xxvii.43. y^ ^1 go ; Luke viii.37. OlS ^iU? therewith he departed; Matt.x.6 ; John xi.31; iv.3. .jDoZ OlS l2lo and he came again ; Assem. 1.44,A.l7. Oli^ n^1 he went out ; 186,A.30. ]lkJjT^^^^ ^^ 1^ ^^ ^^ ^"^ O^ne 162 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. to the Aramoeans ; Eplir. I. 260, B. l^!^ OlS ^OO Moses stood up ; Matt. iii. 2. IaIQ*? iZonSV) cCL tCi^O the kingdom of heaven is near ; the same is true frequently, after AoJ^ ( = ?o depart from this life) ; e. g. John xi. 14. Ol^ AjlSd jV^ Lazarus is dead ; Mark ix. 26 ; Assem.I. 367, 9 ; Ephr.l.204,A ; sometimes 7 with verbs which have not the signification of motion ; e. g. 'f!DD to believe ; John xi. 31 ; fi^lL to maJce^ Barh. 217, 10 ; J4* to be foolish^ Rom. i. 22 ; and even after |001 John i. 15. Rem. 2.-f-0n the contrary, the suffix in active verbs, sometimes, falls away when it can either be easily supplied from the context, or the same object has already preceded ; e. g. Barh. 424. 9. ^OiQlDjO \MliO - llOtO \l^y \0 ^na] he brought out all of the silver coin and heaped (it) up before him; particularly the ^k 7 7 neuter; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 49. t-iJOlOja inform me thereof. In many verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls away ; e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 ; I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb ; e.g. Barh. 419,5. Ol^ ,^1 i;O>V)0 ^1 > n>QSD we esteem and honor it. 2. The suffix is also pleonastic in the nomen regens which precedes the genitive with j ; e. g. John iii. 18. olSiiAO LpXMuk) in the name of the only begotten; xii.3. ^QAa> ^aOloL.. j the feet of Jesus ; verse 81 ; Acts v. 2 ; Ephr. I. 87, B. Rem. Here belongs also the repetition of the suff. before ^^j ( 54. B. 4. Rem. 1) and after ^^ = all^ without J following it ; e.g. Matt. xiii. 2. (jklD UV^D the whole m,ultitude ; ii. 3, 4 ; Kirsh. 114, 10. |Al*,V) ^01^ all cities. Sometimes ^\d with suffix occurs after the noun ; e.g. Barh. 71, 6. Ol^ ^> (SDI but the whole people ; Matt. vi. 33. ^01^ ^^iNoi all these things. Without the suffix ^\o signifies each, every ; e. g. Matt. iv. 4. v^ |j5jO every word ; Acts xviii. 4. 3. Finally, a pleonastic suffix is attached to prepositions thus ; ) > is placed before the accompanying noun and is PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 163 considered either as a sign of the genitive ( 52. 2) or as a relative ; e. g. I Tim. i. 8. JcdqIQJj oiZqo( according to (it) the law ; John i. 42. ^Qa^j oljAo /o (^m) Jesiis ; xviii. 15; jfXk Eev. V. 11 ; 2ciL Luke xxiii. 7 ; ^^^JiD Kom. viii. 3. liu^j oi^^S^JiO for (it) sin ; ^ Acts iii. 6 ; ^ Rom. xiii.6 ; Barh. 74,18. M0;^> <^aiQjxL against {him) the tyrant; ^ai 76, 11 ; ^fd Luke v. 19 ; 6) or the preceding preposi- tion with the suffix is repeated before the noun ; e. g. Luke ii.8. 'ihI\L ai::^ in {it) the field ; Barh.192,7; Assem.L 27, 1, 29; Ephr.I.87,B ; ^^ John ii. 2. VZoAaSqI oiS to {it to) the feast; ^ Acts viii. 35 ; ^ Acts ix. 21, etc. General Remark on Personal Pronouns. In Syriac, we also find in personal pronouns enallage ; a) oi number in A-i*! ; e.g. Barh. 166, 6. ^;01 tOOlO ^oioAal |,^Q |;Q10 (aj there were among them twenty women and ten children ; in words whose plural only is used ; e.g. Luke xxiii. 45. OiAi-Ld ^!i tlo^GI) ]ijZ Jia] -j4 tl^ the vail of the temple was rent {in its midst) in twain. The same is true in the dual ; e. g. Hebrews xi. 26. ^>^) oiASOiXO the treasures {of it) Egypt; Barh. 108, 2/, h) oi gender ; e. g. Michael. Chr. 20, 9, 10. ^Oir^ l2o>21\ooilo all places in these ; c ) of gender and number together, if by collec- tives sing. fern, are signified names of countries and cities, men or inhabitants ; e.g. Barh. 565, 18, 19. Xlamj] Ql**sim\ fZollo O-Dj .O^Oll alo UU-J^ they found a great many men, and these odso they led into captivity ; l2aJ^ 580, 1, 2 ; iW^ 591, 5, 6 ; .^^Vl50, 11, 12 164 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 56. Use of the Relative Pronoun ( 17. 2). 1. The Kelative j gives to adverbs of interrogation, place, time, etc., a relative signification; e. g. liil where? > p^l there^ where^ Jonn i. 28. ^IaaOi (001 ^SqiSdj pu| ihere^ luhere John haptized ; verse 40 ; Barli.82,2 ; '^i^ ivhither f ? ]L^ thither^ where: e. g. John xiii. ZQ. \i\ \\\y |iill whither I go ; Barh. 198, 13 ; Assem.I. 27; 2.3.V. E ; l^'{how ? ? liif jiLst as ; e. g. John iii. 14 ; v. 26 ; xiii. 83 ; ^t^] when ? J wiASol when^ as ; e. g. v. 25. ^QlSomJj ^Ak)1 when they shall hear; ]UlD how much? j ]Sdo so much ; e. g. John vi. 11. QO .J jSOD fl5 mwc/i a5 they would, y gives the same mean- ingsometimes to nouns; e.g. >^ I JO Zflce ; > 5Z| where; e.g. John iii. 8. 2. The oblique cases are formed by some mark of the case followed by a sufi&x ; a ) the genitive is indicated by the suffix added to the nomen regeris ; e.g. John ix. ll. ^QA.A OISq^j whose name is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14; h) the dative^ according to the following example ; Eom. i. 9. \i\ . V^iiV) aC^^ whom I serve ; verse 31 ; c) the accusative, thus ; e. g. John i. 26. 01^ .oAj*! ^-i^r^ U \ObS\y luhom ye know not. The accusative is also expressed by the suffix at- tached to the verb ; e. g. iii.84. CJIj^ji loCLj whom God hath sent ; d) the ablative by .^ ; e.g. John i.48; by ^io Rom.i.6. In a similar manner the relative is united with the preposi- 7 '"7kPP7 tion ; e.g. ^1, John iii.2. OlSoi |Ol22^j with whom is God^ etc. Rem. In connection with the suffix of the 1 and 2 person, added to the verb, it (the relative) forms, with reference to a preceding subject of the same person, the oblique cases who^ /, whom^ me, like the Lat. qui; e. g. Gen. xlv. 4. *jlUoAi)1j ^afiOOi '{j] W lam Joseph whom [me) ye have sold ; Num. xxii. 30 ; Isa. xli. 8 (Ephr. TI.88. E) 5^Aiil>jj L{\ ^^4 thou art Israel whom [thee) I have RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 165 nidde strong. The same occurs with prepositiona; e. g. Num. xxii. 30. thy she ass i \\ Aj| ^.^uS^jy upon whom (me) thou hast ridden. The relative alone sometimes marks the accusative, particular!} the neuter; e. g. Gen. i. 31. r^^^} \^ all that he made. The re lative is sometimes used before the mark of the case ; e.g. Barh. 43, 12. OUr^lTij to which time ; 137, 5. |OCri puk^) which belonged to the Arabians. 3. The Syrians express the relative with a demonstrative preceding Ae, or iliis^ who^ that, which, etc., as follows ; a) by > 001 , y 001 , > poi masc, ? ^Ol , > fjoi fern., and in the plur. J ^QjOl masc, j ^01 fem. ; e. g. John vii. 16. ^] 7 9 7 vJLJ9r? OOlj buthiSj who has sent me; Eom.iv. 5; vii. 6; Phil. ii.6. waOioA^lj Ijoi thatj which was; John i.24 0J>A1> tOJOl ;^Ao5e luho were sent; Barh. 17, 2 ; 170,5 ; i) by > ^ masc. and. fem., and j ^jib neut. ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 12. A^lj ^Sn\ I30l Aj Ol^ to him who hath, shall be given ; John iv. 34 ; V.30 ; vii.l7, 18 ; Matt.xiii.l7. ^o*AjV^v,.Ij U)^ that luhich ^ ^0 *7 ^i7 ^7 ye see ; Eom. i. 28 ; viii. 25 ; c) by j P-| masc, j fj-l fem. and plur. j ^^>\>] com. ; e. g. Eom. ii.29. 001 fimnn> \ju\ he ivho is inwardly /John viii. 9 ; Eom. ii. 2, 3 ; iv. 7 ; v. 14 ; Barh. 85, 3 ; d) frequently by the participle ; e.g. Eom.vii.l. (fiDOSas (.k^r^ those ivho know the law. Rem. If a particular emphasis is to be indicated the demonstra- 001 QAu> 001 QJOl this very one is he who sat. Sometimes, like the Greek ^attraction, the demonstrative is wanting; e. g. John iv. 14. Ol^ ^Z| pfj |lSo cou vSaros ou s/w ^wtfw olCtg) ; or the relative is wanting ; e. g. Heb. V.2. ..^>'^^0-> ]Lk]o and he {or this) who can; less frequently are both wanting, according to Hebrew usage ; e. g. Job xxiv. 19. Finally the relative occurs pleonastically before participles; e.g. Amos vi. 1. Q^Ol I!^ _a.^A.Ar^ *aO woe to those who depiseZion; Ephr.II.274.D. 166 DEMONSTEATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. The demonstrative is neither usecl for the relative^ nor does it give, as in Hebrew, a special emphasis to particles aDd numerals (comp, Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 750 sq.). It is used only in its proper signification. Rem. It IS emphatic m connection "with 001 and w01 ( 17. 1. Rem.) ; e. g. Matt. v. 47. Sometimes fJOl may be translated by hicce ; e. g. John xix. 19. 2. The interrogative pronoun ( 17. 8 ) is united with Douns of both genders and numbers ; e. g. Matt. xii. 48. wi.ja| ^QJ I -S^O ' ^| *a01 _Sd who is my mother and who are my brethren f The oblique cases are either so expressed that, in the genitive, the noun in the constr. state precedes ; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 23. ^tj) ^io L\i whose daughter art thou f or so that ^ follows with y preceding ; e. g. I Sam. xii. 8. ^j ]r-a) ^Lo/rom whose handf or Qlk)j stands before the noun ; e. g. Matt. xxii. 20. ^dAdo poi ^iii^t QiSDj ivhose image and writing is this ? The other cases are form- ed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions ; e.g. Assem. 1. 84, 6. ^Zl ^sb^ to whom shall I give ? Matt. xii. 27. (iSqo whereby e Rem. Sometimes }1ji| occurs instead of the relative in the indirect question, without J following it ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 42. ^00;V) iZ"! (Al* \fjL\a at what hour your lord will come ? and QlLo includes (OOl ; e.g. John xviii. 38. (>;* QlLo what is truth ? vii. 20. 58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms. A. Eeflexive Pronouns. The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun ( 17. 4) as fol. fows ; a) by the passive (comp. 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2); b) often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro- OTHER PRONOUNS. 167 noun ; e. g. Barh. 54, 15. ^*i4^ OliT 001 he killed himself; 77, 5. laLi ^001^ qSOi^I they chose themselves a king ; 83, 16; by prepositions; e.g.Barh. 164,12. Qn i.Kv oiL^lo and they lead hy themselves ; c) by \mSLi and }5aOQlD The former is used in reference to persons ; e.g. Matt, xxiii. 12. OlisiJ 2>CL;Jj jl^^ Ae who exalteth himself; Barh. 56, 2 ; 84, 15 ; 144, 12 ; less frequently, in reference to things ; e. g. Luke xi. 17. 0la2U ^ y^^ly on\V) ^^ every kingdo'^i which is divided against itself ]iDQlo is used in reference to both persons and things ; e.g. II Cor. xii. 15. VWl^ .>Vn oi^ I give myself; Luke xi. 17. ^o-SsAsi oiSOQlo ^j liud a house which is divided against itself Kem. Less frequently occur in ;i reflexive signification, \*i\ heart ; e.g. Lakeii .51 ; i^) head ; p^O) spirit ; e.g. Dan. ^7 7 * P . iv. 5, 9 ; |a.M life; Ps. vii. 6. The pronouns (jkL3 and (LdQIO by way of periphrasis for other pronouns; e. g. Rom. x. 3. (ZopO tOGlAU> their own righteousness ; 1 Cor.vi.l9 ; Phil.ii.4,5 ; Rom. ix. 3. , iV>Q10 X^X I myself ; Heb. i. 3 ; ix. 28. B. Other Pronouns. The other pronouns are thus expressed : 1. :77m, thai, see 56. 3. 2. Each, every, are expressed ; a) as substantives, by 1-i '. Gen. xl. 5 ; ^1 I Cor. iii. 8 ; vii. 2, 8 ; Gal. vi. 4 ;^ the latter is doubled in Acts ii. 88, 45 ; I Cor. vii. 17 ; xi. 21 ; II Cor. v. 10 ; I Thess. iv. 4. Sometimes they are expressed by %MSn ^^ Kom. xiii. 1 ; r^ r** ^^ Eph. v. 88 ; ^ .^jI ^ Luke xiv. 83 ; ^'rTilo or ^-^i ^ Rom. xii. 18 ; h) as adjectives ; a) by ^ Matt. vii. 17 ; 1 John iv. 8 ; ^So ^^Ad Assem. I. 11, A. 19 ; ^) by a re- petition of the noun defined by each, every ; e. g. II Kings 12 168 OTHER PHONO UXS. 7 7 xvii. 29. ^0.1 every nation ; Matt. xx. 10 ; / ) by the plural ; e.g. Amos iv. 4. Ir^ J^ every morning; sometimes by ttie singular which is to be considered as a distributive ; e. g. Jer. xxxvii. 21. V^XlxO each day. The neuter is ex- pressed by ^r^ ^\o John iv. 25. 3. Whosoever, (quicunque), is expressed by uu] ^o or cat\o John i. 7; 1 Cor. iii. 13; ?^ Matt. xiii. 19 ; ? Vi-T^O I John iii. 3 ; j ^ Mark vii. 16 ; Barh. 195, 3 ; 198,12. The neuter by ? |kilo Acts iii.22 ; iv. 23 ; ? U)^ Matt. X. 27. 4. Somebody, anybody (aliquis)^ in interrogative and con- ditional clauses, are expressed ; ) by ^mS\ and |J^i John iv. 33. ^ISol \>o;^ oliT JA^V^] ]\n\ AcfrA a/t// one brought him aughi to eat ? vii. 48 ; I Tim. vi.3. Ukl\ Zu| . | aiJ!^j ?/" any one teach ; Rev. xxii. 18 ; ft) by > ^io Mark vii. 16. OlL AjiIj ^ib hath any one? c) sometimes by ^io Rom. iii. 3. ^ooiliD ^ s/ Tivsg ; Mark xii. 5 ; or more in ac- cordance with the Hebrew idiom, by ]mS12 Lev. i v. 2 ; v. 1 , 2, 4 ; vii. 27. The neuter is expressed ; a)hj ^^ Acts V. 36 ; *S> 001 ^r^> that he was something {great) ; John vii.4 ; I John ii. 15 ; b) sometimes by ^ Lev. v. 9. JSoj ^ some {of the) blood; or U^^^^ (= 1^1 ) Gen. xviii.l4. ' 5. Nobody, no one ; a) as substantives, are expressed by m] 1] Matt.ix.l6; John i.l8 ; James i.l3 ; ]i\mS\ Acts xviii. 10 flCor.ii.ll ; 'riy. ]]''Num.xxxi.49 ; .ail 'r^ jl Jer.li.43 ; *mj1 Lj\ John vii.4 ; sometimes by *mS\} A^ John xv.l3 ; J A^ik or simply by Aa^ v/ith an adjective or participle fol- lowing; e.g. Matt.xix.l7. IfL^ AjlL no one is good. The neuter, by U)r^ 13' or U'^^lio Phil. ii. 3 ; I Tim. vi. 7; A^^ fol- OTHER PRONOUNS. 169 lowed by ^r^ Matt. x. 26 ; with ^^ preceding, II Cor. vi. 10 ; without '^^ James iv. 2 ; b) as adjectives, by IJ after the noun, with the verb, I Cor. ii.9. L\j^ ]] ]ijlL no eye hath seen it ; before the noun, Eom. viii. 39. \tu^ ]] no creature ; by A^ with the noun following, Luke iv. 24. I ni Aa.^ no prophet ; Heb.iv.13 ; with the noun preceding, Eph. V. 5 ; with the words standing between, John xv. 22. (Aa.4** ^001-^ Zooi Aa^ they would have had no sin. 6. Some, any^ are expressed ; ) by j A^] Matt. xvi. 14. ^r^l? Aa"| some say ; John ix. 9 ; with words interposed, vii, 12. ^'^l? rO.^OOOl L^X for some said ; ? ]jul A^f I Cor. viii. 7 ; xv. 34; fl Thes. iii. 11 ; b) hj **j] "^] Phil. i. 15 ; I Tim. iv. 1 ; ^ |ju1 John ix. 16 ; c) elipti- cally, by ^, Matt, xxiii. 34. ^oAj"| ^iS^ .oouSd some shall ye kill ; Mark xii. o ; Acts xvii. 32 ; Eom. v. 8 ; (f) sometimes by the plural of the noun ; e. g. Dan. viii. 27. I ALdOa some days ; poll , Gren. xxix. 20. The neuter is expressed by j Ajj , Matt. xiii. 4. ^^aj> A^l some fell ; also in verse 8. 7. Some, others, are expressed ; a) by \^\^ ^aj] , Acts xxviii. 24 ; or by .mJl ^mj] uijl ^mS\ Phil. i. 15 ; b) by )^r*A ? Aa"! Matt. xvi. 14 ; John vii. 12 ; or with > A^^ repeated, Assem. I. 10. Eem. 1, 2 ; c) by ^OOUio .ooilSo Acts xvii. 32 ; Barh. 105, 10 ; with the sign of the case prefixed, 114,14. ^00111 * s ScL .oouSdLo qI^^ ^oouIdIo some they hilled, others he blinded ; finally by Mr**| ^ Barh. 93, 18. Rem. When some signifies the greater party it is expressed by 170 OTHER PRONOUNS. p,.A*| ^5;D (Jo-i^CO , John vii. 40. So7ne this others that, by VA1j->*1 \i^] Acts xix. 32. 8. The one, the other, (alter) are expressed ; a) of persons, by ;iii masc. IZji** fern., repeated; or by 'fCi.y l;.0*i Isa. iii. 5 ; r^\\ k*I Gren. xiii. 11 ; also of inanimate objects, Matt. xii. 13. OlZ'^^js* ^^^l AloZo oi^r^^iLa he stretched forth his hand and it became sound as the other; I Cor. xiv.7; Col. iii. 13. ISQIOJ cniri>l ^ .aj]] Zuf^V i/* one hath an accusation against another ; Phil. ii. 3, 4 ; h) by ,.** or ^JOl repeated, Kom.xii.lO; j**.^ ja* one to the other {^each other, comp. Kemark) ; Matt. xxiv. 10 ; John xiii. 35 ; also by ]j>*l - r-^ Matt. vi. 24. ^'h^I ^>A John iv. 37 ; c) by the repetition of the same noun, Acts xxi. 34. io^o i>0^ - \nl] one this, another that ; or by Ij^x* Gal.vi.2. lVp*i5 1j^Q- CIII.4 ^^^ ^^^ ^^'^^^ (Another's burden. 77^ j^EM. One another is represented by ^x* ,m, with a preposition interposed between, John xiii. 14; xxii. 34, 36 ; sometimes by the simple preposition with sufRx, Rom.i.24. ^OOIO among one another ; or in like manner by |jr^ John xvi. 19 ; Barh. 41, 18. 9. The same, himself, herself, itself, are expressed ; a) by a personal pronoun doubled, with p placed between ; e. g. Heb.x.ll. U*^? tOJOl ^ .0301 i/ie 5a/?2e sacrifice ; Phil.iii.l. _a.JOl p ^JOI the same; also without p ; e.g.Assem.I.44,13. IALdcu .QJOlO -QJ-0l2^ ^he same time ; 6 ) by a compound- ing of the demonstrative pronoun ( l7. 1. Rem.; 57. 1. Rem.) ; c) by the pleonastic suffix befol-e the noun; e.g.Mark i. 42. |A\aO OIQ at the same hour; Heb. ii. 14; ix. 24. 1j.VQali cnS into heaven itself ; Matt. xxvi. 44 ; Heb. ix. 21. OTHER PRONOUNS. 17 1 PiDj ^k) ouSd with the same blood ; with ^> and tlie noun following ; e.g. Assem. 1.415; 3. lAij giLa) i/ie ^awe year ; 416, 1 ; d) sometimes bj \m2il and Udqit) with suffix ( 58. A), Matt. iv. 6 ; John v. 26, 43. Rem. More definite are 001 QJOl , equivalent to just the mme^ exactly the same ;John i. 15 ; vii. 25 ; Barh. 26, 2. 10. Jl certain (one) ; a ) by ^^ masc. (^m fern. ; John iv. 46. pM p-^ a certain king; v. 2. Ih^ lAoo J a ceriam place ; Barh.116,10 ; 117,3 ; with ^.Sd following; e.g. Assem. I. 33; 22, 27 ; Barh. 93, 6 ; ft ) by ^JSO relating to things ; e.g. Barh, l70, 3. W^ T-^'p^ ^ P when he had entered into a house ; l78, 2 ; 194, 3. Rem. In proper nouns it is sometimes expressed, by circumlocu- tion, by C31SQ> jl;e. g. Assem. 350, 18 ; 351, 2. 11. As great as {tantus quantus) is expressed by^^i*!; e.g. Barh. 190, 16. 001 ISdqJj Ij^o] ^V . OV** ^i'they saw no need so great as on this day. Of which nature of such , or 50 as [talis-qualis), are expressed by U^Oi j \i^] ; e.g. Assem. 1.39 ; 17,18. ^oioA.^Tliooi - IjoSoil Ajfljl^j )LQr>t as the statue which thou hast seen, so is he. This latter idea alone is also expressed by ^fand a pronoun following; e.g. John iv. 23; ^*S(7l ^Ij such; Barh. 55, 13 ; 70, 18. CHAPTEE SECOND THE VERB. 59. General View. The use of the Preterit and of the Future^ as iii ihe He- brew, is so comprehensive, that by them almost all liie other relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite rules (comp. 65). This, however, is usually in such a manner that the preterite designates those tenses which stand in connection with past time, while the future has the same influence upon future time. 60. Use of the Preterit 1. In the Past it designates ; -n 7 7 a) the absolutely pa^t tense ; e.g. Matt.ii.2. oiiiOQD ^W we have seen his star ; Ol-i y.tfflV^\ ^2*1 we are come to ivor- ship him ; John iii. 16; Assem. I. 861, 26, 27 ; h) the Narrative tense [Aorist) ; a ) mostly before the sub- ject ; e.g. Mark xi. 11. ^S)o]] ^am^ ^ Jesus came to Je- rusalem ; John ii.22. wiOlOpji^Z Op?^! his disciples remem- bered; /3) after particles (when something ac^waZ is denoted), e. g. rS, Barh. 68,12. oi^o ]] p since they did not receive; line 4. > t^r^ until that ; Matt. i. 25. l^'i P^A until she brought forth ; Barh. 24, 6 ; AjlSdj ^^^^ wni!i7 Ae died ; 213, 18 ; 217, 3 ; Assem. 1. 31,l7 ; Ephr. I. 196, F ; USE OF THE PRETERIT. 178 c) tlie Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses which define the principal action, and in point of time, precede it ; e.g. Matt. i. 24. ]1'^} OloOlo aC^ r^\ "U^T p^ he did as the angel of the Lord had commanded ; Mark xi. 6 ; b) after particles ; e.g. p when, aft^r ; Matt. ii. 1. ^QJu A^Z] p t6'Aen Jesws iw.? /wm; verse 9 ; John ii. 22 ; vi. 23, 24 ; Barh. 90, 9 ; Assem L 84, B. 6. ? iA^) q/J:er ^Aa^ ; Barh. 39,7. ^5>^? >Ao *fiDCUJ^ after that he hadslainDarius; 164,8. j >Aq ^, ibid; Assem. I. 213, A. 25; ? Vr**^ ^o soor* a5 ; Barh. 79, 12. Rem. More frequently, however, for the pluperfect, stands the If ^.^ ^ ocn(65). 2. It denotes the Present Tense ; q) in verbs of quality and condition ; e. g. Matt. xvi. 2, 3. y^ Z\nV)fY) the shy is red; John iv. 35. OjOk.? ]lLj(the fields which are white ; Isa. i. 3 ; Ephr. II. 11 7, A ; b) in general designations of time, denoting simply what is usual and customary ; e. g. Ps. xiv. 2. Q^J I M^Sb ^Ae Zorc? holes down ; xxv. 2 ; c) when it denotes a state or condition ; e.g. Gen. iv. 6. j^S *'liZ"| ]lV)\ vjAy ^^^ ^^<^^ angry f 3. It marks the Future Tense ; a) in prophecies, asseverations, and ^e like, (for the most part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew), which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished ; e.g. Isa. ix. 2. ]b> (ioiQJ OU* they shall see ^ a great light ; Gen. xvii. 20 ; sometimes after verbs in which is involved the idea of a future action ; e. g. Barh. 80, 1. ^oouj ;2i'| he promised that he would give ; b) the completed future (futurum exactum) after J |k5 ; e.g. Mark xii.25. lAlSo ^ qSQ)> ]Sd t<;Ae?i they shall rise from the dead ; John iv. 25. 4. In exhortations, and in clauses which contain condi- tions or conclusions, the preterite also expresses the rela- tion of the subjunctive ; a) of the present tense, (loqi with a XX r participle or adjective) ; e. g. I Thess. v. 6. ^'riA ^ooi let us he watchful; verse 8 ; Eph. ii. 11 ; Tit. li. 9, 10 ; h) of 174 USE OF THE PKETERIT. the imperfect : e. g. Jobn ix. 41. A^^ ^oLkOGl ]'^f^ Q^ |Aa.4** fCia^ Zooi if ye were blind, then would ye have had no sin; xv. 19 ; c) of the pluperfect ; e. g. John xi. 21. *u-m1 looi Zpo |J Zuooi ^L qIL hadst thou been here my brother had not died ; Barh. 93, 10 ; Ephr. I. 225, E. 001 is sometimes want- ing; e. g. Matt. ix. 17. iSl ^;4^ ]]j the bottles do not thereby hurst ; xxv. 24 ; Mark i. 44 ; ii. 21,22 ; Luke v. 36 ; the imperfect subjunctive is more frequently expressed by the future ( 61) ; and sometimes the preterite with jiQ^ oh, that, denotes the optative ( 65); e.g. Rev. iii. 15. A^OOl 1;^;^ ^Q^ oh, that thou wert cold ; Epiir. III. 284. Oil ,Xi ^ ZUOOI ll'^oL would that I were not of her children. Tiiis idea seems also involved in the cases under c. 5. Finally, the preterit also stands for the Imperative and the Infinitive ; a) the preterit fooi occurs as an Imperative in connec- tion with an adjective or participle ; e. g. Mark v. 84. ]*r)iNi kaAaOOI iV^j hyir^g ; II Tim. iv. 5 ; Rom. xii. 9, 10. tQQ.kM|J ,^iV>>> .OZUOOI love your brethren ; I Pet. ii. 13 ; iv. 9 ; after preceding imperatives ; e. g. Luke x. 87. I Pet. iii. 15 ; b) the preterit stands as an Infinitive after verbs signify- ing to come^ to go, to send, etc., without the copula ; e. g. Barh. 415,2. oni ^ ]{ ]1] he came to besiege Acco ; 402, 8; with the copula, Barh. 403, 16, 17. oLdO ^ oV^ the^ sent to entreat ; especially after *^\m ; e. g. Barh. 68, 1 . .jj.O,,k50 .j^As -ftV* be began to open and to offer up. USE OF THE FUTURE. 175 Rem. But this union frequently denotes merely the aorist ; e. g. Assem. /. 288, 2. oZ"! oSnn thei/ arose to go\, e. they went. 61. Use of the Future. 1. The Future stands ; a) for the Absolute Future ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. Zd. .;riU ]] . I \V)0 tOjriiJ ]:S\o ]>V^ Heaven and earth shall 2oass aivay, but my word shall not jpass aivay ; i. 21, 23 ; Luke xviii. 8 ; John xiv. 18 ; h) for the Complete Future in conditional clauses, (with the future in the conclusion of the sentence) ; John v. 43. ^oSnnZ OOT^i^ OIaU JxuilQ IZ^j" ^I>*1 tf ^Z" another shall have come in his own name^ him will ye receive ; viii. 28. XV. 7, 10. 2. Furthermore, it denotes, the following relations of time; a) the Present although, more rarely than in Hebrew ; e.g. 01^ JDOZ Ulo ^>\m ^ |AaJ > \0 "TTaj 6 'ttj'vwv sx rou uJaro^ roJrou, (Jj-vJ^yjtfgj -Tr'aXiv ; with 1 1 verse 48, after > ^r^ I^^ke xxii. 61. l]l..-J>Z' I'Oj' j ^5,^^ 5^re the coch crows ; h) the Imperfect ; "" a ) after such verbs as > ^*^ ; Assem. I. 27, 20. Ol!^ '^'U ? ^'r* ^^ sjmke to him (began to speak) ; /3 ) after particles ? \^^ until ; j ^pO before; e. g. Luke ii. 2L \a^'^ ^^^ ? ^r^ ^'ore 7ie i(;(X5 conceived in his mothers womb ; Barh. xi. 15 ; c) more rarely the Perfect ; e. g. Jud. v. 8. loiL^ ^VT' ^^^ Aa^/i chosen; Isa. xliii. 17, 19 ; d) i\iQ' Pluperfect : after |]'^, > ^r^ Z>e/ore ; e. g. Jer. i. 5. '3. It serves to express the following Moods ; .4 ) the Subjunctive ; a) of the Present ; ) in general ; 176 USE OF THE FUTURE. John vii. . 37. lAmJO *j2q^ ]l\3 let him come to me and drink ; Barh. 79, 1. ioSOJ ^inV) now let him die ; /5) after J , |j> with a preceding present or imperative ; e. g. John V. 10. 4a*rl ^QaZj *A 4*ii' "^it is not lawful that thou should'st carry thy bed; vi. 12. 5o^ ^]j ]]j QmlO gather that nothing he lost ; Matt.xxvi.41 ; Assem.I.877,10, 11,13 ; h) of the Imperfect ; a) in conditional clauses ; John ix. 22. Oia IjQJ AJ] ^1 if any man should confess concern- ing him ; (3) after a preceding imperfect ; e. g. John ii. 25. >aiQJ AJ(> fOOl *niiro iJ it was not needful that any one should testify; after a preterite; v.27. ]i-j r^ loouj Ci^^l he gave him authority that he should execute judgment ; i. 31 ; Barh. 80, 8 ; Assem. I. 359, 5 ; after the pluper- feet ; e. g. John iv. 8. .QlOp) 0001 Ouskl they were gone that they might buy ; 7) sometimes with (OOI appended; e.g. Ephr. I. 223, C. looi OlJniJ ]ilLt'{how he would do ; As- sem. I. 297, B. 3. V. E ; c) of the Perfect sometimes, in con- ditional clauses, after J and ^| ll( {in case that) ; e.g. John vii. 51 ; Ephr. I. 237, B. and E ; <7) of the Pluperfect, more rarely, and only with (OOl appended ; e. g. Ephr. I. 40, B. 001 IZliJ ^i^> U^i*? i?CT^ fooi (oou p-rflDOM p.2^ lohat harm loould have arisen because it had brought forth good ears ? Rem. May, might, can, should, must, and the Hke, are also ex- pressed by the future ; e. g. Ephr. I. 203, F. ]u*So ^{|/? that he might go and see ; John iv. 40. .OOl^Q-!^ fOOUj CUlJ^ OS*^ they entreated him that he toould remain with them, ^ verse 47 ; v. 14 ; Rom. vi. 1. |QOJ ^|j yllki what shall we say, shall lot ronflnue? Gen. ii. 16, 30, 31 ; Luke xviii. 7 ; John vi. 28 ; Heb. USE OF THE FUTURE. 177 i. 6 ; Barh. 63, 19. ZqSDJ ^m^^J ]]j ^ every one who of- fered not should die ; 68, 18 ; Mark ix. 49. IAmjD) ^ t\V)2Z ]\V)0 every sacrifice should he salted with salt ; Prov. XX. 9 ; jS^P ^2iD who can say? By way of circumlocution, 7 may and should are expressed by > *^i n ; e. g. 1 Cor. xi. 7 ; must by 3 |J0 with a future following ; e. g. John iv. 24 ; I Tim. iii. 2. B) The Imperative ; a) in Prohibitions ; e.g. Matt. i. 20. V5yjLj2 tf/ear wo^ ; John iii. 7 ; vi. 20 ; I Cor. xv. 33, 34. tQ4>*2 |j sin not ; h) after a preceding imperative ; e. g. John i. 40. ^OVwZo o2 Ipp^sc^s xa? /'^srs, verse 47; viii. 11. Rem. The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is 9G1QJ |OCU let there he light. C) The future marks the Irifinitivt after verbs which in- volve the intention of some action ; e. g. Barh. 34, 4, 5. fSQ. J"j ]l5 he sought to kill ; 90,7,8. ^uOloJ^^^? ^^1^ he thought to kill him ; Matt. ii. 22. ^l^J? ^^J he feared to --*7 7 -A 7 17 go; Assem. 1. 33, 25. |j^JO ^O^) -'r* he began to fast and to pray ; John iii. 3. fV^J? .^.aV) P //e cannot see ; verses 4, 5 ; xv. 4 (without j following, Matt. viii. 28). In like manner occur '\l\ Matt. v.l7 ; ^r- xvi. 3 ; ^0i Luke viii. 55 ; Acts i. 4 ; and many others. Rem. The infinitive with ^ also follows these verbs. Com- pare 63. B. 4. Finally, the future is also expressed by h^I ready ^ about to he ( = jasXXsjv ) and a following infinitive ; e.g.Matt. xi. 14. ]1\^ r-Al? he who is to come ; John iii. 14. ]aj1 > Oi;o qSD)2AS^ h^ lioai eten so the Son of Man iv to be lifted up ; vi. 6 ; vii. 35 ; in the plural ; Luke xxi. 178 USE OF THE IMPERATIVE. OOISq^ ^jl^GI ^jJf ^H>Al this will come to pass; verse86. The implied idea of the imperfect is expressed by looi ap- pended; e.g. John vii. 89. oSnnV)^ oooi ^^^? \L6y the spirit which they were to receive. Rem. Also occurs J ^jiAl with a following future ; e. g. Assem. I. 481, 22. X't^l IjOIO H'^Alj the priest shall begin ; 37, 17 ; Eplir. I. 197, D ; in the plural ; John vi. 15. The idea of willing^ purposing^ is also expressed by |s ; a ) with J and a future fol- lowing; especially Matt. xvi. 24. tu^Ao f^pj r^t? r~^ whoso will follow after me ; v. 40 ; Barh. 68,6 ; or without > ; e. g. Luke xviii. 13. ^Q^p i (001 |o JJ Ae would not lift up ; b) with an infinitive following ; John i.44. n<^V)\ |i f he would go forth. 62. Use of the Imperative, 1. The Imperative expresses either a command ; e.g. John V. 8. 5^010 ^&0;l ^on >OQO anse^ take up thy bed and walk ; or encouragement and permission ; e. g. Mark i. 38. |jynoV onLoi go into the city ; John xi. 15. Rem. In the same signification the Syriac appends the impera- tive of l2f (vid. 28. l.Rem. ; 2. Rem.) to the future of the finite verb, especially of \L and %aL in the singular, w^hen two, are in- tended ; e. g. Gen. xxxi. 44. |V^ O ^>m (Z let us make a covenant ; xix. 32 ; and oZ in the plural, when several are meant ; e.g. John xi. 7. ^i1j o2 let us go. 2. The imperative standing after the future, some- times acquires a future signification ; e. g. Gen. xlv. 18. Q^Qolo tOoL ^^2 1 / will give to you and ye shall eat; USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 179 07' the latter of two imperatives, following each other with- out a copula, denotes the infinitive ; e. g. John iv. 16. ^'fO *^] go to call ; verse 29. Vm qL come to see ; Ephr. I. 201, E; or with the copula they stand in the relation of cause and effect ; e. g. Gen. xlii. 18. Q-i-mO 0,i1 *|>oi do this and live, i. e., if ye would live. Rem. In this latter case the future also follows the imperative ; e. g. Isa. viii.lO. - >Vr><^/7 jJo |A^Sd oWV> speak a word, it shall not he fulfilled. 3. Of two successive imperatives, when one is negative, it is expressed by the future ( 61. 8. B) ; e. g. John viii. 11. ^u-^i U .^oZ lC7l ^Ldo *jl^1 go and henceforth sin no more ; Eom. xi. 20 ; Eph. iv. 26. Rem. Concerning the third person of the imperative, com- 001 to designate this person, see 60. 5. a. 63. Use of the Infinitive. The Syriac, which has not, like the Hebrew, a double form for the infinitive absolute and construct, denotes the latter by ^ prefixed (compare 19. B. 3). A. Infinitive Absolute. The infinitive without ^ is mostly used adverbially, and in connection with its finite verb, which it precedes, denotes ; a) a strenthening of the action ; e. g. Hebr.vi. 14. . . > " !! m*! cL-lfiOSoo v2^1 QDj^qLd / will bless thee exceed- ingly and multiply thee greatly ; I Sam. xx. 6 ; xxiii. 22 ; John ix. 9. OlS ISdj \i>^ he is very like Mm ; Acts v. 180 USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 28 ; Philem. verse 9 ; b) certainty, confirmation ; e. g. BarL. 15, 13. ^>Z ^pSo thou shalt know with certainty. N"eg- atively with (J before the finite verb it is equivalent to, hy no means ; e.g. John xx. 5. ^oi p m^Sd he hy no means went in ; Eom. ix. 6. ; c) it sometimes denotes continuance ; e.g. Isa. XXX. 19. ^QQoZ p p*^So ye shall not always weep ; Exod. xxxiv. 7. Rem. By the infinitive absolute are also expressed, rather how- ever after the idiom of the Hebrew, other minute points of the language; e.g. much, much more; Jer. xxii. 10. Q^Q ]^oVn weep much ; somewhat, indeed ( Germ, etwa ), Gen. xxxvii. 8. Nv Aj"! ' A^^ on ^V)V) wilt thou indeed rule over us ? then, truly; xliii.Y. ^OGI ^-Ir^ ^^^ could we then know ? per- haps, indeed ; Aci^ vW. ^^. LkY^k ]\.*1d I have indeed seen. More frequently it is merely pleonastic ; e. g. Luke i. 22 ; John xiii. 29 ; Acts vii. 45 ; and it is appended to the imperative ; e. g. Isa. vi. 9. 7 7 MSQaSd Qllfis hear ye. The negative sometimes stands before it ; e.g. Gen. iii. 4. ^L^iiDL ASibJiD ]] ye surely shall not die. The case a, in translations of passages from the01dTestament,is also expressed by the noun formed from the finite verb ; e. g. Gen. ii.lY. ZqLdZ IZqLd ^:])2Sr| ^li)3 thou shalt surely die (compare T Ephr. 1. 24, A), which is closely connected with the ordinary Syriac mode of expression ; as %:Ol^ |Asi |Zo,-m |,j<* rejoice exceed- ingly ; see 67. I.e. B. Infinitive with ^ or the Construct form. The Infinitive with ^ stands ; a) after verbs which denote a purpose, wish, determina- tiony capacity, command, etc. ; e. g. Luke xi. 54. ^jSO T> * 7 * t ^^ ratSQ^ they sought to catch something; Matt. xxi. 46; THE INFINITIVE. 181 John V. 16; vii. 1. QIjikOlSDiii loai \^1 J]" he would not go; Matt. xiv. 5; Barh. 14, 18; 88, 6 ; Matt. vi. 24. , \<^V)\ K>. naV) All |J no man can serve ; Mark ii. 7 ; Jolinm.2; x.21; Barli.192,20. vqAsqI ^ ioZl ^2 Uaf here also could he not remain ; Luke xv. 15. ]v ;<^V OVifM he sent him to feed ; John iv. 83. ^\o|s2iik ^Lk{ he brought to eat ; Ephr. I. 280, D. OjcrUSol _ ^oriCDj they shall take to kindle ; John xi. 31. ]^nV)^ ]]l] V^Cini^j that she goeth unto the grave to weep ; Barh. 12, 20; h) after verbs signifying to begin^ to cease, to be accustomed ; e. g. Matt. iv. l7. 01pV)\ *^\ he began to preach; xvi. 21 ; Barh. I, 1, 2 ; 5, 2 ; Assem. I. 5l8, B. 20 ; Acts V. 42. 0<^\V)\ 0001 ,^iS> |] they ceased not to teach ; Eph. i. 16; Barh. 5. 10. Q^iIkkaSqI ^"l:^ they were ac- customed to changes. Rem. 1. The infinitive with ^ (which can sometimes, viz. in passages translated from the Hebrew, be rendered by while, or when ; e.g. Gen. ii. 3. ,nNV)\ loi^ Vr^^ which God created, when he made it); forms, after fuAl ( 61. 4) and after looi, a cir- cumlocution for the future ; e.g. Gen. xv.l2. *^;SV)\ {aSQa ]oai the sun shall go down. But of the Hebrew idiom, by which the infinitive, joined with a preposition or conjunction, is explained by the finite verb, there occurs in Syriac, only the construction with J ^ before ^ ; e.g. Assem. 1. 42,8. 0<^^V)S> ^ ]oai IJa ]]o and he ceased not to teach ; negatively, in Hebr. iv. 1. ^^ASli^j Sd *A\Zi^ who should refrain from entering, i. e., ivho should not enter ; or comparatively, without > ; Gen. iv. 13. .o^0-^\ ^V) ^Zo \^CY) wftOI \oiy my crime is greater, than can he forgiven me. Rem. 2. Tn the poets we sometimes meet with a transition 182 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. from the infinitive to the finite verb; e.g. Ephr. III. 129, F. {IQ^Sd \i> i^l /ar fte^^er is it, in time of thirst to drink water^ than, instead of drinkimj to measure fountains (Hterally, and loe will not measure) ; and likewise conversely ; which seems to be done for the sake of the metre (compare Hahn et Sieff. Chr. p. V . Anm.). The Syriac also expresses the infinitive by the future, with or without J prefixed ( 61. 3. C ) or by the participle ( 64. 3. B ). 64. Use of the Participle. 1. Participles may be considered either as Adjectives or as Substantives : A) As Adjectives^ they assume the number and gender of their subject; and take their object in the case or with the preposition of the verb from which they are formed ; thus ; a ) the Active Participle ; e. g. John ii. 14. ija^0 l^r^O \j0L ^A.12p^? ^^Ol those who sold oxen, sheep, and doves ; verse 16 ; viii. 44 ; Barh. 52, 4, 5 ; 74, 20. IbilSv ^\Lj ln\V) a hing who fears God; Assem. I. 270, A. Kem. 9 ; Acts vi. 3. \1'S^} olLoj ^>Sv> full of the Holy Ghost ; Rom. i. 29 ; John iii.l5. oii ^^(k^l ^aila every one who believes on him ; h) the Passive Participle, with the case or the preposition of its active ; e. g. Ez. ix. 2. V.QQ ^d^ clothed in Byssus ; Barh. 32, 14 ; 108, 6 ; l70, 19. Ir*"! ...i^aZ) maimed in the hand ; Lev. ii. 4. ]M>>V>n ,^\ig^ V^'*''Vl <^^^^^'^ anointed with oil ; I Sam. ii.18. ll;Snh^ 5^jiD blessed of the Lord. B) As Substantives^ participles stand, in a genitive re- lation, in the construct state, before the noun ; thus a) the USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. ]8B Active Participle ; e.g. Gen. xxiii. 10. \Lj2 > \.^]L those who went m at the gate ; Kom. vii. 1 . (COQSQJ ^AApi those who know ike law (literally, the knowers of the law) ; Barh. 1 95, 11. ^alco I f^Sn who had draiun the sword '^ 214, 1 ; even before prepositions; II Tim. iii. 2. |2o*^ifcjD ^;ZiD ivho deny (i.e. refuse to acknowledge) favors; I Tim. i. 10. lAisOoi ^^ ^r^^ breaker of their oath ; b ) the Passive Participle; Gen. xxiv. 81. Hr^> Ol^i;*^ blessed of God\ xxvi. 29. 2. Participles mark the following relations of time : A) The present^ in connection with the separable pro- noun denoting the subject ( 54. 2 ) ; e. g. John iv. 9. Aj 1 \^ thou prayest ( art pro.ying ) ; xv. 15 ; Assem. I. 34, 9. t^So ^Sd '\i\ , >n<^ j] / have no command from our Lord. Rem. In the third person which is usually already rendered definite by a preceding noun or pronoun, the separable pronoun is omitted ; e. g. Luke xv. 5. 01^ ^\ci0 and he heareth it (the sheep) ; verse 6. - >mnVr>>^\ \^0 r^^ \m10 Iwo <^^<^ ^^^ ^^^ ^ great com- pany who came to him ; verse 11 ; Assem. I . 75, A.86 ; joined with o copulative ; e. g. Barh. 4, 3. ho^ik QONcT) 13 184 THE PARTICIPLE. ^)x0 ^oS o; , n > they went up on Mount Hermon and abode ; h ) the Perfect ; John vii. 52. ]3-^yi ,^ K^?' -^W *^^^ ^]jO U search and see^ that out of Galilee hath arisen no 'prophet. Rem. It is to be regarded as a mere imitation, and not as a constant idiom of the language, when tlie Hebrew infinitive tliin ^^ ^^ participle "rTbh' (^7 which, coming before the finite verb, is indicated the continuance or gradual progress of an action), is expressed in Syriac by the participle of ^1 ( ; e. g. Gen. viii. 5. ^lmI*o oboi ^iV "Uioo ( ^^t)r^^ -jibn ^^^n D^iTari") ) and the waters decreased more and more ; I Sam. ii. 26. ^l ^-lo ^iT U^o ( nit)i bi!\i tibn "i5sm ) ^ /rom oio>V^Kt;j ^q( my Father will love him, and lue will come to him ; Assem. I. 862, 5, 8. \i\ looi |i-a4^XLP - ? -^ ^ouAj ^" if it shall be granted me that then will I become a christian ; s ) after an imperative ; Mark xi. 24. ^oAjj ^-.1CQJ> QlSaaC31 believe that ye shall receive ; X,) after loi, John xvi. 32. lAl taZl loi behold the hour shall come ; Gen. vi. 17 ; xlviii.4 ; Exod. ix. 18 ; ^i ) in direct and indirect questions : USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 185 e. g. John vii. 41. V ^ iaV) ]l] O^y. ^ ]Sn\/ shall the Messiah come out of Galilee ? verse 31 ; viii. 22 ; xiii. 27. Aj| r^^y 2>0jSd w;7ja^ ^Aow t^;2;7^ do; b) thefuturum exacium ; a ) after particles ; e. g. Jolin vii. 27. Xl]\ ^Aif t(;^m Ae shall have come ; verse 81. Barh. 133, 2. ^tS\ 1iLq> ]So a5 5007Z as thou shall have heard ; /3 ) in conditional clauses ; e.g. Eplir. I. 218, F. tio ^ooiL Vl *SOUj tff unless I shall have given him water. 3. In like manner, participles indicate various Moods ; A ) The Subjunctive ; viz. ) of the Imperfect ( with OOl , compare 65 ) after ^f ; e. g. Barh. 38, 10. ^ZAk) U ]jZ| ;oZASo jr^V^ ^1 even though the vessel broke^ the ground would not break ; Assem. I. 379, 2. I^ B'lo \1L ]iV)0 \ZiCi ^ if he denied Christ then should he live^ ifnot^ he should die ; after ? U ], Barh. 56, 12. n , V)\ ^^^( 11? (J I ^e5ic?e5 that they would not sac- rifice ; in relative clauses depending upon a future .( = imperfect subjunctive ) ; e. g. Assem. I. 362, 19. ^/ia^ /^e shoidd be given them as Bishop^ ivhom they should ask ; 6 ) of the Pluperfect^ with (001 in conditional clauses ( compare 60. 4. c ) ; e. g. Gal. iv. 15. iocJl ]naV) oliv - V ^ mn -oAaOOI ! riiO^t ^ - ^ ^^ ^^ ^^<^^ possible ye would have plucked out your own eyes^ and given them to me; Heb. X. 2 ; xi. 15; I John ii. 19. B ) The Infinitive^ after verbs signifying to begin, to cease, to permit, to (ommand, to be able, etc.; e.g. Matt. xii. 1. ^r^SV) Q^\ they began to pluck; Mark i. 45 ; Luke v. 21 ; 186 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. XV. 14 ; I John ii. 8. (Vml\Sd ^ji;* IjOIQJ they began tos';e the light ; Assem. I. 37,15. llO ^\m he began to call ; 60, 5 ; Barh. 96, 7 ;. 108, 19 ; 160, 7 ; 180, 5 ; 83, 12 ; (Zpl ^>m ^io ^4^ /e ceased to build churches ; Matt. xiii. 30. ^-a^' opar^ji sw^er to grow ; Luke xviii. 16 ; John XL 44 ; xviii. .8 ; Luke x. 40. *jlS '{S^^ cHL '^'{ bid her help me ; Mark ii. 2. ^aJ| r-^l ^*^| U 2^ could not hold them / vii. 15 ; John v. 19 ; viii. 43 ; Acts x.47 ; Mark vi. 37. ^^fcfns^ .001^ ^Aj loe will give them to eat. Rem. Sometimes > also stands before such a participle ; e. g. Matt. xxiv.30. TZlj Imjlj (J\\Cl^ ^OVwJ they shall see the Son of man coming ; John v. 19 ; Acts xxi. 32. ^^ > >D ) ^io Q^OIO DQJ^Qk^ 0001 J'ff'ajO'avTo roitrovrsg rdv IlauXov. 4. The Absolute Participle is distinguished bj a) p pre- ceding it ; e.g. Matt.xiv.25. ^01Ld p ^om^ ^OOlZoi jZf ]vVn ^\l /e5W5 came Vr> |Q;or^ ^^^Ak) p disquieted by war he died ; 73,4. 1^) p l]']*^^]^ p U 710^ standing, but bowed to the earth; ft) by J preceding ; e. g. Mark ii. 14. ]mnV) Zuo j:^tly silting at the receipt of custom ; xi. 2, 4 ; Matt. xiv. 26 ; xxvi. 64. Rem. If to such a participle, a noun be appended, this con- struction sometimes expresses the Latin ablative absolute ; e. g. Matt. XV. 20. -010,-| i^mk) tl r^ with unwashed hands ; Mark vii. 2, 5 ; John xi. 44. ^Cnoiy^JO *uOldyal ^>^1 P hound hand and foot. Tn the translation of the New Testament, the participle is sometimes to be understood as in the person of the finite verb following it ; e. g. Matt. ii. 8. onn\ qI] ^opsu&s'vrsg c-^cTcctfaT? verses 9, 10, 11, 13, USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 187 5. The passive participles frequently have an active signification ; a ) those from transitive verbs ; e. g. Matt, viu. 18. 01^ ^pif^i those surrounding him ; Luke vii. 14. aCL 0001 ^o-^jkOA) tliose hearing him ; John v. 4. M.Sal locn MliD troubling the water ; Actsxxi.l6; Assem. I. 80, 4. U^^^^JulQ* yi bearing the child; 84,9 ; 87,8 ; 877, 2. Olyuti Oil Zooi 1n*n\ she drew him by the hand ; b ) those from intransitive verbs ; e. g. Matt. v. 4. U^SU ^OOU^oi blessed are those who mourn ; Mark vii. 80 ; John xi. 19. OOOI --it/Zl they were come ; xii. 15. xl ^ .0^9 ri(/iw^ w;7o/i a foal ; Barh. 170, 2 ; 228, 1. |C)( M^ jQaAji ^ sitting upon a bed. Rem. Participles sometimes have the signification of the Latin participle in -ndus ; e. g. Barh. 128, 2. ^^^..a-Mj timendus. Here also belong ( compare No. 5 ) such constructions as v^ vaI .Cu.ClM I have forsaken all ; y*^ oul \ASiD I deny thee ; .i^ >a.i-M)) *^1 as I will. 6. Finally participles are also used impersonally thus ; a) the Masculine ; Eom. xvi. 2. ]ii i,n\ *Ojlj ^1 as i7 becometh saints ; Heb. viii. 8 ; Philem. 8 ; Assem. I. 88,20. j^l *:>1 *^;Q Twy 50/1, 2i behoveth thee ; 455, A. 24, 41. 1oi-Lj TtO^V Wsi |J it behoveth not a servant of the Lord ; John iii. 30. (o;<^V (ooi jJo OOl OGL^ he must increase ; ix. 4. Uo *^ I must ; Acts xxv. 27 ; xxvi. 1 ; Rom. xiv. 4 ; Mark iv. 88. , i > .^1^ ..\ ^4^ U oy jasXsi Coi, on a-jroXXjfAs&a ; 6 ) the Feminine ; especially to denote the neuter; e. g. Gal. vi.9. ^1 jj^^ ZoOT W let it not be bur- densome to us; Barh. 45, 13. VisD? |?cn Mw 25 probable ; 188 MOODS AND TENSES. Assem. Ll79,B.22. 2!6cn XJ^ it was necessary ; 482, 24. JojlO \kQM it is honorable and right ; 5 19, A. 4. Rem. Here belongs also Rom. xiv. 4. ^aiOpAlfl) 14^ ^^ corner into A/i' hands ; i. e. Ae caw ; and in the feminine, Acts v. 39. nn>^ ]o |-^Vr> |j ye cannot. 65. View of the manner of designating all the Tenses and Moods ; of the Imperfect^ Pluperfect^ and Optative in particular. 1. The Indicative ; A ) of the Present is expressed; a) by the preterit (60, 2) ; h) sometimes by the future (61. 2. a); c) usually by the participle ( 54. .2. b, and 64. 2. A); B ) of the Imperfect ; a) usually by the participle joined 19 ooi ( 18.4. Eem., and 38 ; also without the substan- tive verb, 64. 2.B. ^ ) ; e.g. Matt. ii.9. Iboi \\{ he went ; verse 20. |i\^> Olmsu oocn ^ > " *~^7 ^OJOl who sought the child's life ; iii. 5. JOOU CJLio ZoCTI joaj all Judea went out ; John xvii. 12. AaOOl '^ I kept; h)hj the prete- rite ( 60. 1. b), and rarely ; c ) by the future ( 61. 2. b ) ; C ) of the Perfect^ besides cases noted in ( 60. I ) ; a) rarely by the future ( 61. 2. c) ; 6) by the participle (64.2.''B.b); 10 001 in the same person and number added to the preterit ; e. g. Luke v. 9 MOODS AND TENSES. 189 jOOl C\r*A jOlSiDZ terror had seized him; John iv. 8, oocn oi^ the}/ had gone into ; v. 13. looi JJ-yi^1 he had hidden himself; x. 22. |001 |001 he had been ; h) by the preterit ( 60. J. c ) ; c) rarely by the future ( 61. 2. d); E) of the Fm^m re besides cases noted in 61.1., some- times ; a) by the Preterit ( 60. 3. a) ; h) by the impera- tive ( 62. 2) ; c) by the participle ( 64. 2. C); F ) of the Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit ( 60. 3. b), more frequently ; h) by the future (^ 61. 1. b), some- times ; c) by the participle ( 64. 2. C. b). //. The Subjunctive ; A ) of the Present is given ; a) by the preterit of 1oc31 ( 60. 4. a ), very often ; b) by the future ( 61. 3. A. a ) ; B ) of the Imperfect ; a) usually like the indicative of the same tense, by the participle with (OOl in conditional clauses ; e. g. John viii. 19. *)| ^oAaOOl ^.i^r* *-^ CL^ ,oA^001 '^. - i"*^!' i/ye A;nei(; me, ye would also knoiv my father ; verses 39, 42 ; xviii. 30, 36 ; xxi. 25 ; b) by the future ( 61. 3. A. b), sometimes ; c) by the participle alone ( 64. 3. A. a) ; C ) of the Perfect; sometimes by the future ( 61. 3. A.c); D ) of the Pluperfect ; a) by the preterit (60. 4. c) ; b) by the future ( 61. 3. A. d), more frequently ; c) by the participle with looi ( 64. 3. A. b). in. The Optatice is expressed ; a)\)j the interrogative 190 THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. pronoun with a preterit or future following ; e. g. Judges ix. 29. ^r-A^ MCJl toil Olkllsl' ^j ^ oh thai I had {who will give over to me) this people in my power / Ps. iv. 7 ; lv.7; 6) by tlie particles aO^and SioLm] oh that, with a pre- terit following ( 60. 4.1lem.);the Future; e.g. Gen. xvii.18. ]a*P %aoA| oh that he might live ; or the participle with looi ; e. g. II Cor. xi.l. ouL ^oZuom ^;n>fnV^ *aoAl may ye yet hear with me ! Rem The optative is sometimes also expressed by ! or Q-^ ; 7 7 7 >lt^ ^ e.g. Ps.lxxxi.13. 1 iINV^p i V)S Q^ would that my people would hearken to me ; by verbs that denote a wish with a following j ; e.g. Exod. xvi. 3. tZ\.iJ^> ^001 ,^i,0 would that we were dead ! When the substantive verb denotes a wish, it is omitted ; e. g. Luke. ii.l4. I^L^U |Aa*0*^oZ glory toGod. Sometimes instead of the Hebrew n^jji n)^ occurs the almost correspondent J ^11 ^Sd ; e.g. Job xxiii. 3 ; but it is literally translated in Cant. viii. 1. jl!^ Vm| ^a^Aj Si3 oh that thou wert my brother. IV". The Imperative^ besides the cases under 62, is ex- pressed ; a) by the preterit of loai ( 60. 5. a) ; b) by the future, especially negatively ( 61. 8. B). Y. The Infinitive^ finally, besides the cases under 63, is expressed ; a) by the preterit ( 60. 5. b) ; h) by the fu- ture ( 61. 3. C) , and more frequently ; c) by the partici- ple ( 64. 3. B). m. TJie Persons of the Verb, 1. The third singular masc. and fem. of the active and passive conjugations is sometimes used impersonally thus r THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. 191 a ) the masculine ; a) of the preterit ; e. g. Heb. x. 34. ^onL ^p it pained you ; Luke x.34. wiOloSl Ol^ ^i^^M ke cared for him ; j^ ) of the future, Deut. vi. 24. ^ kSl^J it would he good for us ; Jer. vii.6, . r>^V ]ij it would harm you ; b) the feminine ; a) of the preterit , Ps. xcv.lO. 001 |j^ wi.i^ Aj}Ld it shames me, {I am asham- ed) of this generation ; Ps. xxxi.9. aJl Aoi it grieves me ; Luke xviii. 23. (yi^ A^;^ it pained him ; /3) of the future, Gal. vi. 9. ^ tl^l2 U it will not he grievous to us ; Ps. Ixix. 20. Olik ]p2> ^SoL whom it grieved. 2. In like manner in Syriac, the neuter is usually ex- pressed ; a) by the third person singular feminine of the verb, thus ; a) in impersonal phrases, as Lukb vi. 13 2 7 > , A ^ * OlyJ it vjas light ; John vi. 17. Aaan it was dark ; pas . 7 7 ^-n sively, Barh. 84,14. A^^A* ( the report was spread abroad, Assem. L 298. A.ll. OlL A.A..Z1 it was revealed to him , 481, 7 ; i3 ) in connection with the demonstrative pro noun or with adjectives as subjects ; e. g. John i. 28 ..7 "J^'a'* C' *uOC\ \m1L Aa^^o ^^x^OI this came to pass at Bethany ; i. 3 loai ]fj>* yal there was not any thing ; Ephr. L 240, F -'^^^ '7.. 7 -no -7 -n tQiD ->< '^*^ IjOl L\ZiM it seemed good to Moses ; passively, Assem. I. 380, 4. ^ A^VmZI JDjl it seemed just to us. Yet we also find for the neuter ; b) the third person singular mas- culine ; e.g. Isa. xxiii. 12. in\ 1 1 1 )] there will he no rest for thee ; Barh. 133, 8. 01^ r^JM it was said to him; X T I -n - 1> Assem. I. 362, 5. --i JDCnuAj ^| it shall he permitted to me, 3. When the subject of the verb is general or indefi- nite, it is expressed, in Syriac, in various ways, as in the English, thus; a)hj the third person singular ; e.g. 192 , THE PERSONS OF THE A^ERB. Gen. xi. 9. ]'fJD he calls ; (i.e. one calls, it is called) ; to which is also appended by way of explanation, after the Hebrew idiom, the participle or participial noun of the same verb ; e. g. Isa. xvi. 10. jsCU) ^ao^J the wine ireaders shall tread ( no more wine ; i. e. no one shall tread); or (JUf and (;^yt ; e.g. I Sam. ix. 9. Tr^yt locn ;Sb| he (i. e. any one) saza ; John iii. 4. |aco |;^t r^^? ^**^^^ P^^-l /^<^^^ c<^^^ one he horn when he is old? or passively Matt. xxvi. 13. ^k)Aj ?7 5/^aZ^ he told ; Acts xvi. 13. /ui looi IvmASo ^Z 1Zol^ there 'prayer loas wont to he made ; Barh. 58, 13, 15 ; h) by the third person plural ; e.g. Isa. Ixiv. 3. oZ. |J they ( i. e., men in general ) have not heard ; xlvii. 1 ; Dan. i. 12 ; Heb. xi. 3. woai ^VmALdj ^jJ^OI i^Aa^ they see (i. e. ^i^/^a^ any one sees, what is seen ) ; also with an explanatory parti- ciple or adjective; e.g. Isa. xxiv. 16. OiNs ] iJQl they fail- ecZ ; c) by the second singular ; e. g. Luke li. 4. ^;)Z p tvhen thou hringest ; I Tim. ii. 1. ^O'^ok) looiZj ^Aa^ thou of- fer est (i. e. that there he offered ) ; sometimes the verb is in the second plural. Matt. vi. 24 ; d) sometimes by the first plural ; e.g. Mark vii.27. V^'pJO nmi) (or by the infin- itive with ^, Matt. XV. 26. 0>V);V)!i:^o ^acoSoL xxii.17), that we (i.e. anyone) should take and cast; e) more fre- quently by the participle alone ; e.g. Matt.vii.l6. ,-a4q^ jSo.^ do men gather f v. 15 ; ix.l7 ; x. 29 ; I Cor. iv.l2 ; Barh.6.2. ^;So| they say ; 58, 9. R,EM. Here belongs filso |;iiD|ASD they say, it is said ; and im- personal phrases with an infinitive following ; e. g. Matt. xii. 12. ^^vO^V ,^Xa one may do ; Acts v. 20. om^^^ASoL ]]o v}e {any one) must obey. VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 193 4. When the Deity or those in high stations (e.g. Kings), speak of themselves^ the first person plural denotes the pluralis excellentice ; e. g. Gen. i. 26. pu| ,^U let us (i. e. I will) mahe man', xi. 7; Barh. 90, 9. -iqZo jCJl he- hold we (i.e. ij Justinian)^ have written ; 11. ^ )oAo r^ri'/^ to us (me) . Rem. Sometimes though for the most part only in passages translated from the Old and New Testaments, the construction changes from one person to the other, viz. ; a ) from the third to the second, or vice versa ; Micah vii. 18. ^Zq2| (Oll^ AX <^efe is no God as thou, who forgiveth sins, and remitteth the transgressions of the remnant of his heritage, and retainest not (compare Ephr. II. 284, A. B); Mai. ii. 15; Gal. iv. 21- ^qSqj L^L .ooouj rr^h r^l' tO^V *^ O'^] yjysri fjLoj, ol u-ro vo'/xov hiXovrsg sivai ; Rom. ii. 1 ; Matt, xxiii.37 ; h ) from the first to the third person ; e. g. Isa. xlii. 24, 25. tOOIiNs fM\ 01-^ ^.1.4^? ^^ because we have sinned against him, hath he 'poured out upon them (us). Here also belong the instances where writers include themselves, in the first person plural, in what they declare of their ancestors; e. g. Psalm Ixvi. 6. Old Ir^J ^^Z fhen did we rejoice in him. When several verbs having different subjects follow each other in the same person, it appears to be rather according to the Syriac idiom, not to indicate more particularly the difference of the subject ; e.g. II Sam. xi.l3. 67. Construction of the Verb with various Cases and Prepositions. I. Verbs with the Accusative. 1. With an Accusative are construed ; a ) Transitive Verbs ; e. g. Matt. 11. 6. .-lOlQjtl'pJ OOlj 194: VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. -'^^^ who shall feed my people ; iv. 16 ; even intransitives, having at the same time a transitive signification ; e.g. Barh. 214, 2. I^SQm fOOl J^Dy he rode upon an ass ; 215, 11. Rem. Here also belong such verbs as in other languages govern other cases ; e. g. rQ) to command ; Matt, xxviii. 20. ,^V)i01 to believe ; John xii. 38; Romans x. 16, ( with JD John ii. 23 ) ; (ll ^0 answer ; Ephr. III. 285; }iD that he put on our gar- ments ; *M^ Col. iii. 9 ; ^1 I Sam. ii. 4 ; Acts xii. 8 ; even passive verbs ; e.g. .^4^Z| Acts xii. 8 ; fcxCDoZl Ps. civ. 2 ; and /3) those denoting a want or excess ; e. g. Acts vi. 8. 1]..*jO yiaCLk^ looi ]]Sd he was full of faith and pow- er ; xiii. 10 ; Kom. i. 29 ; Mark viii. 36. ;m*jj Oliaj . f if he suffer harm as to his soul. Furthermore here belong ; y) verbs of remembering and forgetting, joii John xv. 20 ; Luke i. 72 ; pjZf John ii. 17, 22 ; \li Heb. vi. 10 ; and tin ally ; 5) verbs of coming and going to a place ; e. g. Matt. XV.21. >0j JLoQajAjL |Z|o he came into the region of Tyre Mark v. 38 ; Luke ii. 51 ; John iv. 5 ; \\\ Luke iv. 42 John vi. 1; ^0l Luke ii. 39 ; iv. 14 ; \^ Acts ix. 3 A*Ij John ii. 12 ; -Qaj i.44 ; ^CiScD v. 1 ; ^ xviii.33 ; c) several neuters also take an accusative, viz ; .2) in connection with a noun, as their object, formed !rom the same verb ; e. g. Judg. xiv. 12. IZ^^o] ^ to VERBS WITH THE ACCUSAflVE. 195 propose a riddle ; Ez. xvii. 2 ; Acts ii. 17. POVm |W ]^^" ^,\i to have visions dreams ; Matt. xiii. 24 ; Ephr. I. 251, C ; 253, A ; especially /3 ) when the noun is more accurately defined by an adjective; e. g. Matt. ii. lO. 1Aq> 12o,-m QarA* they rejoiced exceedingly; John iii. 29 ; Assem. L*362, 18 ; Gen. xxvii. 34. Xbjo'y lALlLV^^VAe lamented sorely ; Zach. i. 14. 10 001 , in the sense of to befall^ to happen to any one, also governs the accusative of the ohject ; e. g. Luke xiii. 2. tOj] fOOl (1201) , because this has befallen them ; Acts vii. 40. w0L001 (ik) what has happened to him ; Acts xxviii. 5, 6. 2 The following govern a double accusative ; a ) verbs in Pa,^ Aph., and /S7ia., Pe. of which takes an accusative, viz.; a) verbs of putting on or off clothing, adorning, covering with anything; e. g. in \\, iN| Mark xv. l7,20; Ephr. 1. 239, A. TAjJu^qo ^cjf.an^o he clothed them with garments ; II. 178, D ; John xix. 2. IjQy.ilj IAmJ a01CLkQD0 they put upon him, a purple robe; Ez. xvi. 10 ; i^) verbs oi filling up, satisfying ; e. g. Ephr. I. 527, A. ]ilmli t^Q^ A>\V> lAlSDjf ^Ae i^^^^ow; yi/feo? ^/e vessels with oil; Luke i. 53. fArni ^Inm |l^ ^/le hun- gry he fills with good things ; 7) those which denote teaching, or showing ; e. g. John xiv. 26. Vo^^Solo ^nn*^\ j Ae w;z7 /eac^ 3/0W aU things ; I Tim. iv. 6 ; John xiv. 8. "^ol ^Om sAo^^ t5 the Father ; verses 10, 32 ; h ) verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification. Here belong ; a) verbs of clothing, covering (also with r^ of the thing) ; e. g. Ephr. 1. 239, A. U^Ol ^QjV ;fl>f he 196 VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. girded them with girdles ; cm^^ to anoint^ Ps.xlv.7; ^>1 to sow , Lev. xix. 19 ; ^) verbs o^ filling up (also with and ^) e. g. John ii. 7. '^^ V^ ^f qSlo fill {them) the water pots ivith walfr ; verse 9 ; Barh. 212, 2 ; Assem. I. 332, A. 12; 7)verbs oi commanding ^ordering ^ (also with jiand ^\2hoi the person and thing) ; e.g. Gen. vi.22. OirOaj ^^ all that he had commanded him] Mark viii.ll. 121 OiS 0001 ^-b^1 they demanded of him a sign ; 5) verbs of showing or doing any thing to any body, or malcing a person or thing to he thus and so ; e. g. Gen, xvii. 5. ^.Aqou (a| / have made thee a Father ; John viii.53. ^a1] Lh\ rOl QlSo i^//ia^ ma^- 69^ thou thyself? Heb. i. 2 ; Assem. I. 3-46, A. 4. v. E. Al- so with an accusative of the material of which anything is formed; e. g. I Kings viii. 52. 1.^^^/^ lapL ^-ij1 ll5 he huilt of {them) the stones an altar ; s) verbs of naming, 1;jO Isa. Ix. 18 ; I John iii. 1. II. Verbs with Prepositions. 1. Yerbs are construed with 2 which in English are joined with m, on, upon, about, conoerning, etc. Here belong especially ; a) verbs which denote some state or emotion of the mind ; e.g. Luke i.l4. oi,\oV)n t^r^^ ^^^y ^^^^^ rejoice at his birth ; Barh.90,20; *^ y^^to have pleasure in some- thing ; Matt. iii. 17 ; Heb. x. 38; *^ oiLdZZI to wonder at; 7 Matt. xxii. 33 ; Luke ii. 47 ; *^ \^iSD to hope in ; Matt. xii. 21 ; John v. 45 ; Q ^LOkOl to believe on ; Mark i. 15 ; John ii. 11; .o jJ to look at ; John i. 36, 43 ; Barh. 190, 13 ; Assem. L 89, A. l7 ; *S L(jif:^ to be ashamed of ; Rom. L VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 197 16 ; *0 '^.^ to rebuke ; I Tim. v. 1 ; '\]o ibid, or threaten ; Matt. viii. 26; Luke iv. 41 ; Barh. 53, 10; *Q wmIt: to moc\ at ; Matt. xx.l9 ; xxvii. 81; y U L n my peace ^ive I to you ; Matt, viii.21,31. ^ - cuA *Q2)| permit me us ; Mark v. 13 ; Luke viii. 32 ; Acts xx. 32. ^^ 198 VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. loi^l] .onL pi / commend you to God; I Peter i v. 19; h) those of pleasing and displeasing ; e. g. John viii. 29 01^ fSiM} ^Ao if^^^ which pleases him ; Eom. xv. 2, 3 ; Heb. xiii. 16 ; or c) those that denote likeness^ similarity; e.g. Luke xiii. 18. louLj IZonSV) UiDj li^n\ to what is the Kingdom of God like ? verses 9, 20 ; Heb. ii. 17 ; Barh. 137, 12. aii Ajj loi thou art like him. Rem. Here also belong impersonal phrases, such as ^ ]] O it is fitting for^ and ^ Aji| equivalent to to have ; e. g. Matt. iii. 9 ; Luke xvi. 28,29 ; John x. 16. (with the accusative of the object in relation to tx^'v, II John 9. OlS L?i li^^O |o]]o ^JOT oZrog xoLi rdv ifOLri^a, xai tov uIov ;!^), and ^ A^ equivalent to not to have ; Matt. xiii. 21 ; Johnxiv.30. In the same signification occurs also ^ loOl ; e.g. Barh. 66, 4. IaLd CJl^ OOCTI '^tULl he had three sons. 3. With ,i>D are connected ; a ) verbs which denote to fear, flee, guarding oneself, retraining, ceasing, releasing ; e g. Luke xxiii. 40. Aj] ^\Zy lai!!^ ^ V' *2i( fearest thou not God? John ix. 22 ; Barh, 94,9 ; Kom. ii.3. ^0^2 tS\\ loi^j Oll^> ^JiO that thou shah escape the judgment of God; I Cor. vi. 18 ; x. 14 ; Barh. 170, 4 ; Matt. x. 17. Ojoijl] ]r^ ''*^ ^^ hcv/are of men ; xvi. 6, 12; Luke xii. 15; xx. 46 ; John xvii. 15. (au.2 ^Sd ^qj] ;4^? ^^^^ ^^^^ shouldst keep them from evil ; I Peter ii. 11. C7lA.^..> ^So QuO;aZ| \r^} abstain from lusts of the flesh ; Acts xv. 29 ; I Pet. iv.l. |0l4^ ^Sd 01^ i\ he csasethfrom sin; Barh. 102,9; Assem. 1. 42, 8; II Thess. iii. 3. \mj^ ^ ^oaoiomj he VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 199 will keep you from evil ; b) those of filling up ^ lacking, and failing; Luke xv. 16. Ioo^jva ^ OlCDp ]]SqSq^ to fill his belli/ t/nth husks ; Barb. 69,1 ; I Tim. vi.lO. IZoiiCUOl _lo 7 ^^ QI4 ^^ey came short of the faith ; II Tim. ii. 18 ; c) those of asking, beseeching; John i v. 31. OUlD 00(71 ^ >v*^ ^Aev besought him ; verse 40; I Peter ii. II. Rem. ^1d also expresses the Latin prce ; e. g. _k) A.Vn ^^ f/{g 6e/bre ; or per, with ^\l and nSm, John x. 1, 2. 4. With ^^ are construed verbs, which, in English, may be followed by abouty concerning, viz. ; a ) some which ex- press an affection of the mind; e.g. Matt.xv.22. - '^^ ^OlmjAI be merciful to me ; xvii. 15 ; Eom. ix. 15 ; xi. 32 ; Matt.vi. 28. ^oAjI ^^^ pi liafli^ ^ why take ye thought for raiment ; Luke xii. 26. ^ KtJ to be anxious ; Matt.v.22. >\l ^omoZf to rejoice over ; Rev. xviii.20, ^\l po to weep ove/*; Lukexxiii.27,28. ^ j^iioZ) to take counsel concern- ing ; Matt. xxvi. 4; b) those which denote povjer or authori- ty over somethmg ; e. g. Luke xix. 14. JjOl ^^iNs .^iW)i> that this person should rule over us ; Rom. vi. 14 ; vii, 1 ; Barh. 40, 6 ; Matt, xxiii. 35. ^nni\\ 1Z]j shall come upon you ; Luke xxi. 34 ; John xviii. 4 ; Luke i. 1 . ^OloiLl A\g^i IALj^j fear fell upon him ; c ) those which , denote a doing for or against^ or an occupation with some- 7 i V .I* -7 thing; e. g. Acts vii. 58. toenail ojoicoj ^^iNi] those who t/istified against him ; Matt. xxvi. 62 ; John i. 8. ^\l jOlflCiJ? IjOIQJ that he might bear witness of the light ; iii. 26 ; v. 31. ^ ^flOoV io accuse ; John viii. 46 ; ^ *oA3 to writA of, concerning. John i. 46 ; v. 46 ; Acts xxi. 25. ^ '^'\ and 14 200 VERBS AVITH PREPOSITIONS. ^Si to speak of, about; John i. 22, 30; xiii. 22; vii. 13 ; d) verbs of coverings protecting, or burdening ; e. g. Matt, xvii. 5. ^OOIa^I A^I |Z;^ariJ tin a bright cloud covered them ; Luke i. 35. - >*^.> Vv ^ V"^? OlNi i the power of the Most High shall cover thee ; ^^ 14^ and too have the same signification ; Jer. xviii. 23 ; 11 Sam. xiii. 25. -^ Av jo'^j ]] J 50 that we shall not burden thee. And finally ; e) several verbs that denote a charge, command or petition ; e. g. ^^ r^2) to charge one ; II Chron. xxxvi. 23 ; ^^ %QZib to prescribe for one ; II Kings xxii. 13. ^^ PbQ to pray for : John xvii. 9. ^\l ^li /o ask after ; Assem. I. 50, 6. Rem. Here also belong phrases compounded with nouns derived from these verbs ; e. g. I Peter v. 1. \(JC^ ^\l O,* ^QoAa cast your cares upon the Lord ; Barh. 77, 5. O^Ol j'^NV) ^\l lZo\ > fc^ they took care for the King ; Isa. i. 14. i\s 0001 ]Z;n.ljit they are a burden to me ; Job vii. 20. 5. With AjlO , %k\ >n and Ly >0 between^ are construed verbs which denote dividing, separating, distinguishing; e.g. Gen. i.4. poa>\ poiQJ Aa^d ^;a Ae separated be- i//)eeM light and darkness ; Euth i. 17. AxQ ^, and (Vm /o 6'ee, to perceive a difference between ; II Sam. xix. 35 ; Mai. lii. 18. 6. With jAo after, are joined verbs which signify to go (equivalent to to follow ) ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. OliAo Q^l] /Aey followed him; xii. 15; Mark x. 82; Matt, i v. 19. wiiAri oL follow after me ; xix. 2 ; John viii. 12 ; jAo .^aiS 1 Tim vi. 1 J ; II Tim. ii. 22. PASSIVES AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 201 Rem. More in accordance with the Hebrew idiom we find )Aq with verbs signifying to put away, destroy : e. g. I Kings xiv. 10 ; xxi. 21. General Remarks. To seerrij to appear, are expressed, as in Hebrew, by . il iSO in the relation of genitive or with the suffix be longing to the person ; e. g. Gen. xix. 14. 1 1 1 \n looi 7 7 .jOIQjAa* he seemed to his sons-in-law; II Sam. x. 8. y 1 1 > SO (he) seems to thee. When rendered more definite by the adjectives good or had, they are expressed either by ^ ;Si and ;i<^ , or *li21 without il i\n ; e. g. Acts vi. 5 ; Kom. xv. 2. 8 ; Gen. xxi. 11 ; Matt. xxi. 15 ; or in connection with i i\ \n ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240,F. looi }^Ji \k'fiD -y -^^ ^aS^ would this seem good to God f In the trans- lation of the New Testament, SoxsT is usually expressed by ^ VwASd ; e. g. Matt. xvii. 25; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii.17: Luke X. 36, To suffer, permit, are expressed either by , n<^ to com- mand, or hfM to cause (without the copula following) ; e.g. Barh. 72, 12 ; or they are expressed in such a manner that the thing to be done is implied in the imperative itself ; Barh. 27, 2; 114, 14. III. Passives and their Construction. 1. The active cause in passives is usually expressed by ^; e.g. Matt. vi. 16. ]fillVn^ ,OVmAj> that they may he seen hy men ; Luke viii. 29. OlS looi l^ he was caught hy 202 VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. him; Assem. 1. 89, 14, and 16. Co Oll^ MSdA1 there vjas a voice heard hy him ; Barh. 152, 11. Rem. Yet we also frequently find Sc, Matt. iii. 14. ^^liO) ^S^ZI that I should he baptized of thee ; v. 13 ; xx. 23. 2. Passives whose actives govern a double accusa- tive, sometimes retain one of them; e.g. Luke i. 41. fii^QD) H^0> A>\^/| 5^6 i^as yi^^cc? t(;i^A i/ie ^O'f?/ Ghost man who was Assem. I. 86, A. 27, 28. ii. 40 ; Barh. 32, 14. I^ob .m%A\y 1'^.^ a clad in Byssus ; 90, 14 ; 108, 6 ; 223, 15; . 3. When passives, especially in verbs relating to the mind, have an active signification, they are joined with the accusative ; e.g. I Thess. i. 2. tZo^^ aa^ ^pjASo ive remember you in our prayers ; n>iZ| to think, Rom. ii. 3 ; XV. 5 ; ^>oAl to recognize, Acts xix. 15 ; MiAl ^^ ^^^Vi Eph. vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 22 ; *..;..;2f to wish, I Tim. vi. 10. Rem. Here also belong such passives as 99Q..Z| to chew the cud, Lev. xi. 3,5 ; and hence also may be explained why participles passive of the Pe. ( 64. 5) take the accusative of the object. 4. Passives have also frequently a reflective signification ( 21, 2 ; 22. 2 ; 24.2 ; 58. A. a ) ; e. g. John viii. 6. .OlytZj A>jA^ ViQAu Jesus lowed himself down ; verse 8 ; Mark i. 7 ; I Tim. v. 14. ^yiO?P ^J^? ^ *..!L^1 those who are young shall marry ; iv. 13 ; ^\1a*Z1 to wax strong. Acts xix. 16 ; xxiii. 11 ; %Aii^Zl to hide, John viii. 59 ; ^aIqZ^ to turn around^ Matt. ix. 22., etc. Rem. Many neuters take a passive signification ; e. g. \^ to MODE OF EXPKESSING GREEK COMPOSITES. 203 err, Luke xxi. 8. tQl^Z (SOJ^ fx^ leXavri^vire ; ,n,a ^o 6wrn, >Q1S ^^i,ni xa< flrup? xalsrai ; ^\L] to/all, iii.lO. jQlfD >\L3 sig 'n'up paXksrat ; J^EU QL = fl'uv ; Rom. 204 PECULIARITIES OF VERBS. 1> 7 * I vi.8. CTlSCl MjJ Cu^^jCoiuLSv ai33|xwv ; Matt. ii. 9 ; or b) by an adverb of similar signification ; e. g. %Aji)) ^ ^ (xvtt, I Peter i.3; Uk^9) ^Sd tr^O| ava^sw^Caj '>;fAa^, Ileb. vi. 6. ^ar^ ^ = -^rpo , II Cor. xiii. 2 ; 2*k5Vj>ai^ ^ rpos/p>)xa , Rom. i. 2 ; Col. i. 5. 3. By another verb representing the preposition, which usually stands first, without any connective particle, in the same tense, * 7 number, and gender with the finite verb ; e. g. ^fO ( to come he- fore ) = "rrpo , Mark xiii. 23. 2l^| ALO^O 'n'pos/pyjxa, Acts vii. 52; Rom. hi. 9 ; xi. 35. This verb sometimes follows ; e. g. John xx. 4. 4. If the composite is formed from a noun or adjective and a verb, it is usually resolved into its components ; e. g. Mark iv. 20. p \Si .k^Ol^ xccpito(popov(fiv ; iii. 4. *ai*^> Of -'^(j) i*^^^^ otra&o'Troiv^tfai ^ xaxo-n'oi^o'ai ; Matt. xix. 18. ZojOlfiO jOlCoZ |J I^QA ou 4^su^ofiapTup^o'sj. Rem. It seems to be merely pleonastic, where in John iv. 4. ^isp^stf^aj is translated by ;nM fZpj 68. ^^e Substantive Verb, and some other Peculiarities chiefly relating to the Construction of the Vei'b. A. Use of looi , L^ and AaS ( 38). Instead of looi to be (with which, according to Qb. B. and D, the imperfect and pluperfect are formed), the Sjriac INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 205 also uses Lk\ , and in negative phrases LJ^ with suffixes, and with them also in connection with the former (looi), forms the imperfect ; e.g. John ix.24. looi uOloA^I he v:as; verse 14. Zooi OuAj^I they were^ etc. 10 001 sometimes stands pleonastically with the preterit without giving it the signification of the pluperfect ; e.g. Mark i.45. 001 ^\M he hegan ; Luke i. 8 ; John iii. 25. It is sometimes omitted as present or imperfect, according to 54. 2 ; or when it would be a mere copula between the sub- ject and object ; e. g. Matt, xxvii. 29 ( 65. III. Rem.) ; Luke i.27. It seems to mark emphasis after IJ (in the Philoxenian version Q-^ nowise)'^ e.g. John vi. 32. ^on\ *O0U |qSd loOl |J Moses has not given you; verses 38, 58 ; xiii. 11, 18 ; Heb. ii.5,16 ; or in interrogations with Jj = nonne ) ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 55. POI fOOl U is this not ? xx. 13 ; Mark vi. 3 ; Luke xi, 40 ; xvii. IT. Concerning |001 , A^f and Ajl!^ with ^ = to have not to have, compare 6Y. II. 2. Rem. B. Indirect Discourse. The indirect discourse is usually expressed directly, commencing with > ( = "iD <^'^' )? ^- S- ^^ohn iv. 17. ] Ko , A Lk^y ^^r^] t'*^* ^^^^ ^^^^ rightly said, I have no husband; verse 53; ii. 17; vi. 81 ; Barh. 51,11. AiSoif i^X p s he said; I (he) have heard; 135,10 ; 69,7. ]!] looi ]1' ]<^V>X ]rillDj ]SCU ^> 001 he svjore, he would (I will) he no King of the heathen; 223, 11, 12. Rem. Sometimes J is wanting at the beginning of the direct discourse (especially before 1 ) ; e.g. Barh. 131, 11, 12; 374, 13; 443, 8 ; more frequently '^Y ; e. g. Barh. 106,3 ; 183,9 ; 219,5 ; 206 243, 10 ; 486, 5 ; 543, 19 ; 596, 11. Compare Assem. I. 479, A. 24, with 480, 1. The indirect discourse also occurs; e. g. Barh. 79, 19, ]iy^ ^OOlL laaco ]]i CIl^ 0-;ii{ they said to him, the tribute is not sufficient for thee ; 94, 1 3 ; 97, 1. Sometimes the direct discourse passes over into the indirect; e. g. 276, 8 10 and vice versa ; 166, 19, 20 ; 513, 5, 6. C. Ellipsis Zeugma Paronomasia, and Puns. 1 . "When a verb has previously been used in the protasis, it is usually omitted in the apodosis, where it would proper- ly be repeated ; e. g. Matt.i.22. llSoAaj Zooij cilLd ^j Ijoi hut what has happened {has happened) that it might he fulfil- led; xxi. 4; John xx. 81; Rom. v. 20 ; I Cor. ix. 25. tnnrm> ^jL.4ai9) ^a^OI those who run {run) that they may obtain ; II Cor. v. 13 ; Heb. vii. 19 ; viii. 8 ; I Peter iv. 11; I John iii. 6. Sometimes the verb is to be suppHed from the context ; Matt. 27,25. ,^iNs OllsOj his hlood {come) upon us; Acts xxiv.6. ^ODQiQiaj ^| as it {is written ) in our law. Rem. The ellipsis must be considered as a pecuharity of the Sy- riac language, where the Philoxenian translation, omitting the J in the apodosis, adheres strictly to the Greek words ; e. g. Matt i. 22. ZOCTI CTL^ _k) (jQl rovTo as oXov yiyovsv ; John xx. 31. Con- cerning the omission of jLd| see B. Rem. above ; and concerning IP 001 see A. Rem. 2. Sometimes a verb, by its signification, can belong to only one of two connected nouns {Zeugma), so that to the other noun another verb must be mentally supplied ; USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL. 207 e. g. Job IV. 10. ^yCill] IIbo juilj IALdotj the roaring of the lion {is stilled) and the teeth are broken ; x. 12. 3. Paronomasia and puns occur but rarely in Syriac. The former is a mere imitation of the Hebrew original in Ps. xl. 3. ^Oy*Jo IV^CD ^OWJ? ( tlij^^^n d'^n-l :iii:T ) that many see it and rejoice. Puns occur mostly in names where the language does not require any such alteration to be assumed ; e.g. Gen. xlix. 8. fOjQJ %^ IjOOU Judah {thy brethren) shall praise thee, verses 16, 19. CHAPTEE THIKD. The Noun. 69. Use of the Noun in General. 1. Abstract nouns not unfrequently in Syriac take the place of adjectives and then they stand in the relation of genitive to the noun, with ? ; e. g. Matt. iii. 11. M>Q5> paO'rO with the Holy Ghost; John xv.l. lVr> l^yt the true vine ; I Cor. xv. 44. Especially does this union, as in Hebrew, occur with adjectives which denote the material or substance of which a thing is composed ; e. g. John ii. 6. l2)]o> ]lT.f stone ivat^-pots ; Heb. ix. 4. I^OI)) ]^IX10 208 USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL. a golden box ; II Cor. x. 4 ; II Tim. ii. 20 ; Barh. 11, 7, 8 ; 20, 10 ; 88, 2 ; 172, 8 ; 228, 7. IjCJIOJ? fjoSni a fiery pillar. Rem. Adjectives of material, however, do occur ; e.g. Barh. 59,4. JLaAjlmJ ]; i^rn] a brazen celestial sphere ; and in the same con- struction adjectives of quality with j prefixed, used for substantives ; 90x1) |AOa week of the white [clothes). Abstract nouns with J in connection with a pronoun, supply the place of the predicate; e.g. Rom. vii. 14. p| ;ffi*^> j p| 6m^ / am carnal ; or with a preposition prefixed they supply the place of an adjective to which a noun is to be supplied ; e. g. Heb. ii. 17. (ai-^rO in divine ( things ) ; Luke viii. 49. ^Lo *AJf bi^ay one of the household ; even with suflSxes, -iC710)(a9 ^ajfxovi^oiasvo^. Some abstract nouns, in the relation of genitive with J following, precede as nomen regens ; e. g. Barh. 170, 20. loAoj iVyfClbD Twawy writings ; 1*72, 4 ; 178, 5 ; 195,16. )o;iin |1Aa*> in the remaining fortresses ; 198,13. Here also belongs ^^S according to 55. B. 2. Rem. 2. Especially are adjectives or concrete substantives de- noting possession^ custom^ similarity^ etc., expressed bj way of circumlocution, by means of the nouns \!^ son ; 2;s daughter ; ^'\ia and (;iO lord^ master ; JD) and ^m^h prince^ ruler ; and A^jQ ^owse. In respect to the use of these nouns it is to be observed ; a) \!^ designates ; a) Oentile names^ inhabitants^ etc. e. g. Tit. i. 12. '{^^ Jlo Cretans; Barh. 167,1 ; Acts xxi. 12; IjZI ^lOi ol ivroVjoj ; Barh. 80, 17. lAla^So %aJX3 citizens ; 91,12; /3) the idea of race, species^ kindred ; e.g. Rom. xi.l4. VrCQO 'rO a kinsman ; Deut. xxiii.2 ; I Cor. vii.22. |){ja '^ID USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL 209 a freeman ; John xviii. 85. (Soi olIO heathen ; Micliael. Chr. 5. .JCCuxoiCFl ^ a heretic ; Assem. 11.248. ^hty\^ \^ a courtier ; Kev. ii. 14, 20. (Here also belongs Jaj^) ; 7) participation^ likeness^ {= cOv ojxoj) ; e. g. Eph. iii. 6. !. s - ? 7.. |ZoZ> waa tfu/xX^povofAoi ; I Thess. ii. 14 ; Acts xviii. 3 ; XIX. 24. (ZQlk)0| ;o l[t.Wcx^^ ; -Dan. i. 10. \1m \^ con- temporaries ; Phil. iv. 8 ; Gal. i. 14 ; ^) locality^ situation^ and other circunLstances ; e.g. Isa. xxvi. 1. \yOM \a a moat; Psalms cxxxii. 2. 1>0 9\^ a neck chain. And finally ; g ) the adverbial phrase 0iAl \i^ forthwith^ immediately ; Matt, xiii. 5, 20 ; John v. 9 ; xiii. 80 ; Acts x. 2>^ ; xxi. 82. h) Z^ plur. Axo forms ; a) rarely abstracts; e.g. Ii] A;^ circumcision; more frequently concretes in the feminine; e. g. I Mace. xi. 7. |>|a* l\^ one horn free ; or it denotes; /3) the product of anything ; e. g. lAl^O^ L\Ci grapes-, |ASiQ.a Z;^ (/i^TTi on sea-weed ; and tropically |jO Z;i t;oice ; Eom. X. 16, 18 ; Gral. iv. 20 ; and in the plural. Acts xii. 22 ; 7) implements^ clothing^ lAl^iO Z;i napkin ; 1> ^^^ ^;^ rm^ ; S) descendants ^ nations^ etc.; e. g. Luke xiii. 16. V00IJ0I ZjQ the Hebrews ; Matt. xxi. 5. ^CLai^ Z;i Jerw- salem, or its inhabitants. c) ^10 denotes ; a) mostly concretes ; e. g. Eom. xi. 84. jaiii ^is^ counselor ; Matt. v. 25 ; xiii. 28, 89 ; II Chron. xiv. 5. Kdqu*Z ^\iq neighbor ; (3) sometimes nations ; e. g. ]] qSqSd ^\iq an Ethiopian. In like manner ; d) l;So Luke vii. 41. IoqJ Ijio debtor ; Ephr. IL 860, C ; e) *o> forms ; a) principally concretes of masculine offices 2l0 GENDER OF NOUNS. e. g. II Sam. xviii. 1. 1a-L *ij a chiliarch ; Luke xvi. 1. fAj^ *Q) o/xovojxoj ; Heb. iv. 14. \ ^^000 *^j ap;)^isplO^ ; I Pet. V. 4 ; Luke xix. 2 ; ^) abstracts ; e. g. Luke xvi. 2. |ZoAjib3 A29 o/xovo/xia. la like manner ; /) ^mjS ; a) concretes of masculine offices; e.g. Luke viii. 41. ]AQ1D %A^9 app^itfuva/w/o^ ; John ii. 8, 9; Acts ii. 29; I Thess. iv. 16 ; /3) more rarely abstracts ; e. g. Matt, xxiii. 6. ])ZQiD jla9 flfpwroxa^s^pj'a. Sometimes it denotes ; 7) tlie extremity of a thing ; e. g. pSOQ^fiol ^a^j or^/?ce o/" ^ze stomach ; Ua.1 *aa5 aperture of the mouth, Finally ; g) LlO denotes ; a) the place or receptacle, in which a thing is found or kept; e. g. Acts. xii. 17. 1 r-CDl A.*^ prison; Matt, xi v. 2. jZuio Aji^ grave; Acts xvii. 19. ]iJy Li^ judgment hall; Luke xix. 29. lA!*i Aj^ olive gar- den ; Heb. ix. 4. ]V)mo AaTS censer (literally, house of in- cense); II Tim. iv. 13 ; ^) countries, cities, etc. ; e.g. Assem. I. 169,B.7, X-^OCly LMj::i the Boman dominions ; Michael. Chr. 10. \ls\ki Lkh Persia. Rem. Here, however, do not belong ^^OU Ajl2 Mesopotamia^ and 1' '^ LaJOi forehead, where Aa.Q signifies between. More rarely we find similar compositions with *2)( father, and y)] wo^A- r. Of the latter only occur |ma9) \1jd\ the crown of the head, and |jl10) JSOJ hydraulics. The Syriac also, though more rarely than the Hebrew, uses the names of countries and cities for nations and inhabitants ; e. g. Barb. 150, 12. cjjd*'^] Africans ; 248, 6. A^rytlZ Tagritians. 70. Gender of Nouns. 1. Nouns which in the plural take the termination of GENDER OF NOUNS. 211 another gender ( 44. Kem. 2 and 8), retain the gender of the singular, and in this case respect is rarely had to the termination. Here belong ; a ) masculines with a femi- nine termination in the plural ; e. g. Matt. xii. 43. OOUD AoA m1d> |Zo>Z| place in which there is no water; I Cor. X. 9. I^OOLm ^QJ( OjQO( the serpents destroyed them; VioSlI* ( from WIaT) Luke ii. 13 ; fASooi ( from UdoI ) Matt, xxviii. 20; 12qS (from ]cS.) Luke xxi. 84; IZoiau (from l>cnj) Matt. vii. 25, 26., etc. ; h) ferainines with a masculine termination ; e. g. John xi. 35. ^2| ^Q*^> ^aiQlSo> *ji001 tears came into the eyes of Jesus ; t4^ (from \k^) Matt. xiii. 30; BSo (from 1^^) xxiv.35; liio (from lAlSo) x. 30 ; ^-lia (from Xtli) Acts xxiv. 17 ; ^^N* (from lAi*) xix. 34., etc. 2. When the abstract stands for the concrete, or when the noun takes another than its proper signification, the gender in both cases, is regulated by the sense. Concern- ing the former of these cases, compare 80. B ; to the lat- ter belongs IALLd XoYoj= Christ; e. g. John i. 1 1. lA!i!^ looi ^oioZul it ivas the word; verse 14 ; or \xm Zqaa* (literally, beast of tooth) ^^ ovrip^pjCro^, Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2,13; xvii. 7, 8. QiD> a myriad {of men) ; Acts xxi. 20 ; Barh. 55, 9, 10 ; 334, 6 ; 895, 19. Ua/, in the plural, = inhahi- tants ; Barh. 159, 10; 236, 8 ; 548, 20., etc. 3. In Syriac the neuter of nouns, as of verbs, is desig- nated by the feminine ( 66. 2 ) ; e, g. Rom. vii. 18. " ^ lAi4 aya^ov, |A^>^ xaxov ; in the plural, Assem. I. 218. 212 NUMBER. B. 11. 1Z2hs0 lAOaAlL OiVnnl they despised the old and the new. 71. Number, 1. Some nouns, particularly those which, denote cohesive materials (liquids, metals and the like), form a plural only when they may be conceived of as consisting of several parts ; e. g. |Z;iflO WZey, plur. |,:^CD barley-corns; in like manner [^ from IA^a* wheat ; Matt. iii. 12 ; John vi. 13 ; I Cor. XV. 87 ; and |m.i o timber ; I Cor. iii. 12. 2. Some nouns singular have a plural signification {col- lectives 44. Kem. 7), and then they take JRibui 6. 2. As such they are joined either with the plural ; e. g. John iv. 30. |mJ( QQ2U0 there came out people ; or with the singu- lar ; e. g. John x. 3. Ol-^D }lSO Jll ^/ie 5^ee^ /iear his voice ; verses Rem. 1. As collective plural forms, the following sometimes occur, I^SQO tocust ; Michael. Chr. 63,11 ; 79, 6. lAliO (proper- ly ^r<) remainder, members ; 102, 5, 8. Rem. 2. As pluralis excellentice, the Syriac has, merely by im- rp7 7 ^X 7 itation of the Hebrew i-iJjl or *^0>| = n^^^j^ , Michael. Chr. 30. Pf pCU wftJOlpO / swore by the Lord. 72. Apposition and Duplication of Nouns, 1. A noun in apposition, usually includes a more accu- rate definition or explanation of the previous noun, as for APPOSITION AND DUPLICATION. 213 example in the names of cities , lA^pD, lAsj, "jAi^^, Assem. I. 349, 3. lAoj lAl^j!i: ]iOOifcj1 Aniioch, a great city. The noAin in apposition takes the number and case of its subject ; e. g. Matt x. 8. tmak) *uAk) Matthew the Pub- lican ; Barh. 82, 7. "Ui^Qj ^Ol!^ \^y IpAa the image of Baal {of a) god of the Babylonians ; 11, 8; 12, 2. I ' lM^ ^?] n\So ^io from Mekhisedech (from the) Ca- naanite. Rem. Sometimes the noun m apposition stands before the principal noun; e. g. Barh. 39, 11. JQISO'^^ V^T nfni Ae took for wife Roxane ; so too with nouns of weighty measure^ and time, in the genitive ; e. g. Rev. vi. 6. J0Oni>1OO lA^Z I |J^QD> ^/iree measures ( o/") barley. 2. The duplication of the noun denotes ; a) a ^rea^ Tzwm- her or quantity ; e. g. Ephr. III. 154. ijQj ]^'*^ Oir^ Aa| ^^QJ ^/iere are ?7za?2?/ fish in the sea ; h) the distributive sense expressed in English bj each, by ; e. g. Matt. xx. 9, 10. p-i> p-j a penny each ; Barh. 85, 6. ^^>an ,^i0 by heaps ; 424, 10 ; 165, 19. Especially in respect to numbers ; e. g. Mark vi. 7. _-jZ liZ it^'o eac/i ; verse 40. 1]Sd IISo a hundred each ; II Cor. xi. 24 ; c) it forms a circumlocution for aZ/, every ( 58. B. 2) ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 7. t>0> ]oOpQ xard toVou? ; Tit. i. 5. iLr^ pUr^Q^ xara 'ToXjv ; c? ) a diversity, variety ; e. g. Mark ii. 17, various diseases ; John v. 4 ; Acts x. 46. \ Ao with different tongues ; xxi. 34 ; xxv. 19 ; Assem. 1. 13, A. 6. v. E. 2^^^ 5^>5 ^? 1]sd]Sd discourses having various contents ; 191, A. 7. v. E ; 280. 214 THE EMPHATIC STATE. B. 13. V. E ; e ) a strengthening of the sense ( 77. B. b) , e.g. John vi. 7. ^*^wxSo WAo very little ; II Thess. iiL6. 73. TJie Emphatic jState. 1. The Emphatic State expresses the noun with the' article with less definiteness, from the fact, that in many nouns this form also denotes the absolute state ( 45. 1), which is no longer in use ; e. g. Matt. x. 9. Sometimes also it supplies the place of the indefinite article ; e. g. John iv. 7. ^'r^Q* -So (ZAj| ZZ| there came a woman of Sa- maria ; ix. 1 ; Acts vii. 37 ; xi. 24; even with r** masc. Ih^ fern, appended ; e. g. Luke xix. 12. ^ ir^v\ a man. Rem. From this should perhaps be distinguished the cases in 7 which r^ is used numerically ; e. g. Eph. iv. 6. 7 2. Hence to avoid any ambiguity OOi is also sometimes joined with the emphatic state in order to designate it as such. It stands either before the noun ; e. g. Matt. ix. 33. |;jsi 001 mSo the dumb sjoahe ; John xviii. 16 ; or fol- 7 -P 7 O 1^ lows it ; e. g. John v. 9. OOl Vr^yi ^ClJik>*Z| the man became whole. Rem. In the first case the absolute state usually occurs, when J follows 001 ; e. g. Luke xxii. 27. AiQjiiDj 001 the servant. 3. Hence also the emphatic state with j following is used in the relation of genitive ; e. g. Eev. xviii. 2. THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 215 IZlSo^ Uo5 ^? VZ>q4jo loljj l2-^ a haUiaiionof devils and a Jiold of all unclean spirits. % 74. The Construct State and the Genitive. 1. In the Syriac also the Construct state serves to denote the relation of genitive, more frequently, however, in the plural of the masculine and the singular of the feminine, where it can at once be recognized by its special form ; e.f. Matt. xi. 12. ^L^Oa JioQLi -i since the days of John ; xni. 48. |V> i wj,acQ the shores of the sea ; Acts xxiv. 16 ; Assem. I. 2, B. 1. Vr**o ^tS.1 Al* ^oi that is the thirty- first year ; 37^ 3, 4. JDO;i\o Al^SOQ m ^Ae 7?22ffe^ o/ ^^e cZeri^s ; 40, 4 ^OCJliaiiQjiCTi ^Or^ ^^^^^'^ deficient faith, literally, i!Ae deficiency of their faith. Rem. Yet the masculine singular of the noun occurs also before the genitive in the construct state ; e. g. Matt. x. 41. |lj ^QMd in the name of the Prophet ; xiii. 2. ]SqI ^aCD ^ on the shore of the sea ; verse 50. In addition to the nouns which supply the place of adjectives ( 69. 2 ) it also occurs in Qy. midst, and ^-a hand, etc. ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 19 ; Barh. 255. 11. ^4m} O.^^ in the interior of the palace. Here belongs moreover the use of the construct state in adjectives and participles ( 64. 1. B), followed by the noun with a preposition or particle belonging to both, by which is denoted either the genitive relation ; e. g. Luke i. 28. |a12 Aqa;2 blessed of {among) women , II Tim. iii. 3. lAyiJ^ . <^v| ,-Lo 1 1 1 i ni redeemed from the earth ; Acts, xxiii. 23. 2. Far more usual is ; a) the connection of the emphatic state as nomen regens^ with a following y before the genitive ; e. g. Matt. X. 5. ]I1a> ]jsj>o|jD into the way of the Gentiles ; verse 15. p^jj |Vnr>.o at the day of Judgment ; verse 42; xii. 42. ^iaiZ> lA^Vvn the queen of the south ; xiii. 11, 45 ; xxiii. 35 ; xxiv. 3 ; John viii. 47. loTL^^j |]So the icord of God ; or h) with a pleonastic suffix referring to the genitive following, ( 55. B. 2 ) ; e. g. Matt. xii. 8. ]LciJ ai'^ Lord of the Sabbath ; xi.2. |>aV)> .>mo *^v heart of the earth. Rem. Rarely, and chiefly in foreign words, J stands after the construct state before the genitive ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 22. pZoLj %M,k\OC ^^^^ deceitfulness of riches ; John x. 23. tnV>t\> |d()>fD| the porch of Solomon. But it is commonly used when one or more words are interposed between the nomen regens and the genitive ; e.g. Barh. 421.13,20. yiA>ol9 OOl '\Sl\ the region^ that is of Jerusalem ; or when several geii- itives follow each other ; e. g. Assem. 1. 83, B. 21. ,i^nrol> I'r^r^? U-J'^? loilL' V^ L^j Ifa? the convent of the Mother of God^ of the Syrians in the Scythian desert ; Barh. 81, 2. The nomen regens is sometimes wanting, and the genitive is then to be distinguished by J ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 8. ,-l->j f^? the Lords are we ; Matt. xxii. 21. Sometimes j is wanting when the noun forms an apposition with a preceding genitive ; e. g. Matt. xii. 39. \jLdl ^Q-ft? C\L\ the sign of Jonah the prophet. J stands before proper nouns, especially the names THE CONSTRUCT STATE AJ^D THE GENITIVE. 217 of countries and cities, when they thereby acquire a more de definite designation ; e. g. Matt. ii. 1, 6. 1>OOU9 ^Oil^ A^ Bethlehem in Judea. In some instances, especially in the super- scriptions of some Psalms ; e. g. Ps. iv, v, vi, ^ (^ auctoris) sup- plies the place of J ; very rarely elsewhere ; e.g. Barh. 17, 4. m ;n) \ p^joa the deliverance of the (i.e. by the) Lord ; Assera. T. 346, A. 25, 26. So too with _So, when origin or descent is indi- cated ; e.g. Barh. 372, 16. ]1J^'^ ^ lALi^ ^.lKr\J. .*->rp^ he took fifty cities of the Franks ; or when there is indicated a 7 7 7 . choice or selection from several ; e.g. 271, 1. %jiaiO(JQl ^^ ^k>.^ one of his slaves ; 270,18. Pi^JOZ ^iD \\jk.y^ many of the Turks. 3. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively; e.g. Markxi. 22. lailLj lAoiLcuai faith o/(i. e. in) God ; John ii. 17. )^Aa3> Olli^ ^7ze zeal of (i. Q.for) thine house; vii. 13 ; Hebr. xi. 26. ( iV>> CFlpCOxi ^Tid reproach of Christ (i.e. ^/la^ attached to hirn). Rem. Other turns of expression imitating the Hebrew are Isa. xvii. 2. ;aJLO;l> (ajQO cities of {about) Aroer ; Exod.xxii.lL )^;l0> OlASooSb an oath of (by) the Lord ; Ez. xxxv. 5. qOI^) \1Q,\ iniquity of {at) their downfall ; Isa.liv.9., etc. Not unfrequently is this genitive of the object connected with the preposition of the verb, from which the nomen regens is derived ; e. g. Barh. 53, 18. i^^sQDj |Zaiia01 the faith in our Lord ; Assem. I. 347,20. 4. Sometimes, especially when geographical references are made, the genitive occurs (as in English) where apposition would be more strictly correct; e. g. Acts vii. 40. li jij llif ^ from the land of Egypt ; xx. 6 ; Eom. xi. 8 Barh. 114, l3. ^i^^? 1>CL^ Ol\n\ the whole mountain of Lebanon. 218 DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES. 5. Standing after adjectives, the genitive is often used merely to define them more accurately; e.g. Luke xxiv. 25. |*^N wifAp aO |1 >\) w>, >mit Of fools and slow of heart ; Acts vii. 51. PpO i i0 o] ye stiff necked ; Cant. ii. 5. |ASQaa> ZoLija sick for love. Rem. Sometimes a noun in the genitive takes the place of an adjective ; e. g. John, xviii. 10. fl iV)i> cnjjf his right ear ; xxi. 6 ( 54. B. 2. Rem.) ; and vice versa the nomen regens ; e. g. Luke iv. 25. |ASLd>| -^yv^O itoXkul %^pa ; John ii. 12. In the first case the Philoxenian translation uses, instead of J, the explana- tory 001 and *a01, equivalent to i/ia^ is, namely ; e. g. OUj | ; I A > 1 > Vr> ^01 and J is to be understood as a relative, when it follows prepositions with suffixes ; e. g. Assem. I. 30, 17. (2)QOQjLa(> |00lSd m7A (them) the bishops. Compare 55. B. 3. 75. Designation and Use of the other Cases. 1. The dative and accusative have ^ for their common sign, which may be omitted before the accusative ; e. g. Matt. xvii. 4. ^^iSN^j^ A!LZ ,^iU let us make three taherna- " x^7p7p ^ cles ; Barh. 60, 9.^CU^| |o> (jl2)0)9 he raised a great 'perse- cution. No difficulty is thereby occasioned even when the two cases stand together ; e. g. Acts xiii. 21. ^\n ]^\ -001^ .jOOU he gave them Saul ; xx. 82. Rem. With verbs having a double accusative ( 67. I. 2) ^ falls :iway in both cases. The same is also to be recognized in the pre- .,eding pleonastic suffix to the verb ( 55. B. I) . Usuallv DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES. 219 ^ ( = ""tliS: ) stands before the noun in the emphatic state ; e. g. Barh. 14, 9 ; or before proper names, 11, 20. |ax.iJ^ C7ll^ he built Nineveh. For this, in Gen.i. 1 3, the Peshito has Al = J^^ (compare Ephr. I. 116, D), which moreover occurs in Eccl. ii. 3 ; iii. IV ; iv. 1 ; viii. 9, 17 ; Cant. iii. 5 ; viii. 4. 2. The accusative is also used adverbially, and then de- notes ; a) direction towards a place ( 67. 1, b) ; e. g. John vii. 14,35; viii.14; xviii.3 ; Barh.58, 18,19; 6) in indicating time it denotes ; a) the question, How long ? e.g. Barh.7,5, 6. ^.kloaa ,^iSn>| 1^4^ I^OT the rain continued forty days ; 3, 15, 16. ,^il 1'po ^OIqSl qLLIU they mourned for him a hundred years ; 24, 7, 8 ; 85, 19, 20 ; 195, 6, 7 ; Assem.I. 18, A.] ; /3) When f Luke i. 59. ]1i1d2> ISdqII Iocfi it came to pass on the eighth day ; Ps. i. 2. (' W^ |SQSa hy day and night ; c) in reference to measure and weight ; Hoiu long f How high ? etc. ; e. g. Barh. 38, 19. looi j^j] ^1 IALZ it tuas three cubits long; 20, 6; 179, 18. ^UD.. Mo J I ^aLk U^^ the snow lay four fingers deep; d) concerning^ in relation to, as to ; e. g. Barh. 37,16. \^^im looi lA^QD he luas heautiful as to form ; 17. JQI] |VjDQl2)0 |i^:^ he had small eyes and a small mouth ; 38, 4; Assem. I. 74, A. 30 ; 77, A. 22 ; 86, A. 25. Rem. In indicating time, How old ? is commonly expressed by \C^ or L'^ with the addition of the years ; e. g. John viii. 57. I " I y 7 i* ^V>.> j3 fifty years old ; Barh. 3, 20. 3. Derivative nouns also take the accusative instead of the genitive of their verbs, viz. ; a) participial forms; Heb, 220 THE CASE ABSOLUTE. xii. 2. ^ZqiSQaOI^ yjoUly* the finisher of our faith ; James iv.6 ; b) infinitive forms ; e.g. Kirsch.Chr.136,1. ]]-n m ^ >mi\o<^ni >t)^^on\ the conquest of Constantinople. 4. The vocative is distinguishable in part bj its connection ; e.g. Matt. XXVI. 89, 42. ti^naV) . | in| wy Father if it he - 2)ossible ; Rom. viii. 15 ; partly bv o], prefixed ; e. g. Rom. ^ DO 7 - P ii. 1. JAJ'rO o( man ; verse 3 ; I Tim. vi. 11 ; James V. 1. Rem. The Philoxeuian translation imitates in Greek nouns the vocative termination belonging to that language ; e. g. Luke i. 3, and Acts i. 1. ]]lof2 6]' ^ so'ipiXs ; I Tim. vi.20. 5. Finally the ablative is distinguishable by the preposi- tions, *o, ^, ^Ql, etc.. prefixed. Rem. Time, When ? is frequently expressed in a similar man- ner ; e. g. Gen. viii. 11. [m^j l*"^^ "^ eventide ; Prov. vii. 9 ; Assem. I. 37, A. 11. 76. The Case Absolute. By the case absolute is meant a noun, which, at the be- ginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be ex- plained by supplying, as to, concerning^ and the like. Here belong especially ; 1. the Nominative absolute, which ; a) either forms the subject of the following clause ; e. g. Gen. xxii. 24. ^G1 2)| Zf^O OlAO0j>0 o.nd his concubine she also bore ; THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 221 or b) is to be rendered by an oblique case, wbich a suffix to the noun, in the clause following shows to be ; a) a gen- itive ; e.g. Ephr. I. 242, E. oi'^cooj ]^V)0 looil p lajj 1 Aa.aAD if there be found on the skin of the body of a man a blemish ; I. 110, D ; Matt. iii. 4 ; or the suffix to the prepo- sition indicates it as ; /3) a dative ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 7. (Gu^ ^lib Gl}^ |i:LiGl.a lA^OIoSo i iNo to each one is given a g'ftfrom God ; Acts xv. 21 ; /) an accusative ; e. g. Ephr.I. 223, F. K*ouoci |lk> ^Lm ^l^-^ 13 ViqSjO we know not what has befalUn Moses ; ( 67. 1. c. Eem.) Ps. Ixxiv. 17; i) an ablative (with a following *0 and ^io) ; e.g. Heb. x. 1. . ^^J X^i'i OlO 1oOl A^f l^^AlS^ IcDQiQJ in the law is the shadow of the good things to come ; Ephr. I. 237, A. ]I;Sq!^ |Ld}Q) ou^ ^qqcdZ V \^\ ^^o ;ji.sh* ^ cf anything leavened and of honey, bring ye no gift to the Lord. 2. The accusative absolute ; e. g. Gen. xlvii. 21. \\Cl^ VrO ^!iO QjI ^1 ISdiLo the people led he (literally led he it) from one city to the other. 3. Cases with prepositions ; e. g. Gen. ii. 17. oilib ^QoTZ ]]' VAain?o' lAni? 1A^^^? U^V ^ o/ i^e ^ree o/ ^Ae knowledge of good and evil {of it) shalt thou not eat. . Rem. Sometimes, instead of the suffix, the precedinor noun absolute is repeated ; e. g. Esth. vi. 1 9. i ;*^oN ];^^^ . >mn^><^\ir> as for the man thus let him be clothed ; likewise with the pronoun ; e. g. Jer. xxvii. 8. 222 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 77. Comparison of Adjectives, A. The Comparative. The comparative is usually expressed by the simple ad- jective,with^So = prce following and before the object com- pared ; e. g. John viii. 53. tObV ^ tS( ^y tS\' ISol iooi;^] art thou^ then^ greater than our father Abraham ; vii. 31 ; xiii. 16; xiv. 12 ; xix. 11 ; Assem. I. 378, 19. w>IdV |A n\V> ^^ .kJ^ li4 my onother is dearer to me than the queen ; 872, 3. v. E ; Barh. 82, 20. f^/. ^OOlii) ^O (ASo) ZoOl JQa)] she was a cubit taller than any man. Rem. Besides ^Sd, sometimes also i^^ very, or p>A^ 7nore, equivalent to by far, is added to the adjective in order to strengthen the meaning ; e. g. Acts xx. 35. 'r^Lk t^OUj ^tl ^aiQDa4 ^DlCQJ) (la I ^iDhappier by far is he who gives than he who receives; Heb. iii. 3 ; iv. 12. The simple adjective is used as a comparative in stating the age of two persons ; e. g. Ez. xvi. 61. A^CQJj IZioi^Xd "lAaianS wai2aMi] since I have received thy sisters, the elder and the younger ; Barh. 27, 6, V. Rarely after the He- brew idiom, are we obliged to supply the comparative adjective from the context ; e. g. Job xi. 17; more frequent is ^iD = too ; e. g. Deut. xiv. 24. ^mSo] ^^llO %u01 1] ' jl ^ the way is too great for thee ; or before an infinitive with ^'= than that ; e. g. Gen. iv. 13. nnaV)S ^Sd Idh greater than that it can be forgiven. This construction with ^Ld occurs also with verbs of quality ; e. g. Lam. iv. 7. ]r\\^t ^ OjOmO Kv^2 ^Ld QaSJ they are purer than snow and whiter than milk. The adverbial more or less, in respect to numbers, is expressed by ^So ^ Aa and ^^ ^ ; Barn, 156, 2; Assem. I. 414, 3. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 223 B The Superlative. The Superlative, is expressed; a) by the positive^ with the noun following in the genitive plural ; e.g. I Cor. xv.9. \ M > \ti > tOGDQll the least of the Apostles ; or with *o in- stead of the genitive; e. g. Matt.ii.6. I'OOLi) ]^V the greatest of all evils ; b) by doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter stands in the relation of genitive in the plural ; e.g.Gen.ix.25. ^r^l pOl the meanest slave ; Exod.xxvi.38. Pau^QO vSO^O the holy of holies^ i. e. the holiest place ; Num. iii. 32 ; Bafh. 530, 3, 4. ].^^LLo t ^ i N .Sd the king ofkingSy i.e. the might- iest ldng\ c) by JO.^ and ;-A.a before the adjective ; e. g. ;n > V) i^L.^ t^iO the most precious wood ; Barh. 87, 3. Rem. To denote the superlative, use is also made of the words *,aLkj and llib; e.g. Barh. 170, 13. |ZQfiD| ,Maj the most excellent physician ; Assem. 1. 335, B. 4, 5. (SDaj)) |;iD ^Ae wo5^ w^m- ful ; more like the Hebrew, by (GIL^ ; e. g. Ps. xxxvi. 6. f >Ql^ 1oi!Sw the mountains of God, i.e. the greatest mountains. In verbs, I 7 a strengthening is denoted by i . 00 much ; e. g. Barh. 56, 11. .m^>Z]^jl.Zqd he was much disquieted ; or, by J^J many ( 67.1. c. 13) ; e.g. Barh. 6, 5 ; 135, 1. To be noted also are such forms as OiASQSLmJ, literally, whose wisdom (is known) for the wisest. 224 CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. 78. Construction of Numerals ( 50): A. Cardinal Numbers. The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with nouns in the following manner ; a) the object numbered pre- cedes the emphatic state plural ; e.g. Luke i.56. TA1^2 X^^r^-^ three months ; Barh. 133, 1 6. ^ZjZo ^rCQl \^Xm tvjenty-iwo years ; 4, 5. *aV>>0 ^lJLd (jlIa ^it'O hundred and five years; or 6) it follows in the absolute state ; e. g. Matt. x. 29. ^r2) ^IjZ /i^o oparrows ; xiv. 20. ,^il t<^QQ ;fiQl)iC ^6t;e/ye baskets ; John v. 5 ; Acts xx. 8 ; Barh. 135, 10. Rem. Exceptions to this rule, however, occur, tlie object num- bered standing after the number in the emphatic state ; e. g. Barh. 160,17. YfCiL ^i.a!L' IlllbZ ei(jht thousand slaves ; 121,8; 164, 4 ; or the cardinal, though rarely, stands as nomen regens in the construct state ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. jAl-jifSD Z^T^l ^e/i cities, (literally, the ten of the cities). Some nouns, such as liOQji, f Al* also follow the numeral in the singular ; e. g. Assem. I. 213, A. 21, P77 X7 77-> 22. pJDCLk fKtO ^juSOk* 0;iQl> ^!iD tvhen fifty-one days had pas- sed; Barh. 10,1 6. Concerning the designation of age by 'fd and L^d comp. 75.2. Rem.; Assem.I. 31,21 ; 377, 1 ; Ephr.I.195,D ; Barh. 50,13 ; 179,4; with the omission of ^^JJi ; Barh. 5, 12. ]]^ '^ .aSQjsjO ^AaO one hundred and sixty five years old. For the combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare 50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger ; e. g. Num. iv. 43; 1. Kings V. 11. Concerning suffixes to cardinal numbers, see 46. 2. b.Rem. B. Ordinal Numbers. 1. Ordinals are connected like adjectives with their nouns P. 7 7 in the same number and case ; e. g. Matt. xiv. 25. |Z;4^^ CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. 225 l ^^ ? (A..Li^> in the fourth watch of the night ; Kev. iv. 7 ; vi. 9. U^LiiOM lis^ the fifth seal ; verse 12 ; xvii. 11. 2. The cardinal numbers also supply the place of ordinals as follows ; a) the units, especially in designating time ; a) with the noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic state plural ; e. g. John xix. 14. As K^ ^ about the sixth hour ; /3) with the noun after the numeral, in the absolute state ; e. g. John iv. 6. ^2lJi A^ *a6oiAj>^ it was the sixth hour ; verse 52 ; Acts iii. 1 ; x. 9, 30 ; but more especially ; h) in numbers above ten with the noun preceding in the construct state ; e.g. Luke iii. 1. liaimSa^ Sim^ in thefif teenth year ; Assem. I. 2, A. 1. 2, v.E. |rCQllb IILd AiaQ in the one hundred and seventeenth year ; I. 8, A. 3 7. B. 19 ; 888, 8 ; 889, 1, 8, 5; 407, 10 ; or with j following in the emphatic state ; e.g. Barh. 4, 16. ]V)\s> tal^J lAlio in the ymr of the world one thousand ; or c) the J prefixed raises the cardinals to ordinals ; e. g. Matt. xxii. 26. ^)^> the second; X^'LLj the third ; verse 89 ; Luke xii. 88. A!^Z? o] ^IjI^ the second or the third ; especially in designating the years of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. lO, 14; 11, 1 : 86, U. Rem. Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the object numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state plural ; e.g. Gen. vii.ll. ^^AS 'W^D Lm AlAQ in the six hundredth year; and the years of the reign are given with ^o^J with a suffix ; e. g. Barh. 19, 9. OlS/j ^miZOAO in the tenth year of his reign ; 60, 8. In giving the days of the month, either ^d without U>Q4 is repeated after the numeral, before the name of the month ; e. g. Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E. ^li.lO li-OaiASAo on the IZtk of Ni- san(Aprii); 272,B.31 ; 399,19,20 ; 407,8,9 ; or, reversely, after the name of the month, before the numeral following it ; e. g. 397, 13, f' -r* 9 I 7 1 .i^ Old ]1Aq rrA'U* ;in on the 9th of June ; or with >OaxS 226 RELATIONS OF NUMBERS. before the numeral and the name of the month which follows with ID repeated ; e. g. 398, 7. ^QID ^ja'r^O ^,iniO ]LciM ^cL-Q on the 2^ th of December ; 274,30; or reversely, so that y^QjkJD stands after the name of the month, before the numeral ; e. g. 399, 14. OIQ ^rO^O ^>Z ^Qj.i:3 q1 xpk^ on the 22nd of Au- gust. This takes place even in designating the days of the week ; e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1. |*^aO h^ the first day of the week ; John xx. 19; Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E! C. Other Relations of Numbers. 1. Distnhutives are formed ; a) by doubling the cardinal numbers ( 72. 2. b) ; e. g. Mark vi. 40 ; Barb. 19, 14 ; h) sometimes by circumlocution by means of ^\o ; e. g. Barb. 41, 16. r*^ ^>2 ^5ol two each ; 17. 2. Numerical adverbs ; a) in answer to tb.e question, How many times f (Multiplicatives) ; a) by h^ and *o before a cardinal number following, wbicb. more 'clearly defines it ; ^9 7 7 e.g. Gen. iv. 15. fsnan ^^ seven-fold; Luke viii.8; without *0, Jer. xvii.18. ^jL ^ twofold ; /3) by tbe simple numeral with *0, Luke xix.8. Ilo^l^ (i.e. 1^1) fourfold; h) in answer to the question How often f a)with the signification of a cardi- 7 I 7 nal, by means of ^1 time^ plaral ^il*^1 times^ as in Eng- lish ; e. g. II Cor. xi. 24, 25. ^Ol 1^^ once ; ^^>ini ,ttV^n five times ; Matt, xviii. 22 ; Luke xvii. 4 ; John xiii. 38 ; by VAlil plural lAlQl, Asssem. 1. 484, 27, 80 ; sometimes by .A tirtie^ plural ^ A; Barb. 10, 19 ; more rarely by 11*>ol way^ or merely by the feminine of the ordinal num- ber , e. g. Gen. iv. 24 ; ^) in an ordinal signification, in -0 7 such a manner that either |i^l of the cardinal precedes with >, and is repeated after it in the plural ; e.g. AblZj |iai CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES. 227 ^J[5{ (also elliptically ASZj U^l or ^^jiii A-lIZj) for the third time ; or by adverbs of the ordinals in Zo, e. g. Jude, verse 12. Loi^lfor the second time. 8. Fractions are represented ; a) by special forms derived from tiie cardinal numbers ; e. g. Rev. viii. 7. ]ALo2 one- third; vi. 8. (in^O) one fourth; Heb.vii.2 ; h) by circumlo- c * > y cution ; e.g. Rev. xi.l3. rrCQl ^ j** one-tenth ; Epbr. 1.204, D ; Ez. V. 2. ^Qilib AlZ ^ lU** 79. Connection of the Noun ivith Adjectives, The adjective is related to the noun either as epithet or predicate. I. As epithet it follows the noun in the same gender and number ; e. g. Matt. xvii. ]. p^> |jQ4 an high mountain ; xvi. 4. IZ'H^yiO lAa>n lAo;* a wicked and adulterous gener- (i^ibri ; xi. 8. |^ i O > |AajJ 5q/if raiment ; John xi. 47. IZul,^ 1Z6Z1 mawy miracles. The same is true in respect to pronouns and participles ; e. g. Matt. xv. 8. licji \^ this people ; verse 12 ; xix. 1 ; Rev. iii. 8. ]aiuA2) ]liZ a?i opew door. Collectives in the singular are followed by the ad- jective in the plural ; e. g.. Assem. I. 78, A. 4. ^^4^ \^ IcoQku the people who hold to the law ; so also with nouns in the plural having a singular signification ; e. g. John vii. 88. IIa. ]1so living water ; Heb. x. 24 ; or in the singular ad sensura ; e. g. IS'um. iv. 5. ^SD^\Si-> Pk>I *j^f the vail which was spread out. Rem. The pronoun frequently comes first ; e. g. John xi. 47. V;^yt IjOT ^A^f 7wn ; Matt, xviii. 1 : xvii. 18. Adjectives are also used 228 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES. emphatically,especially in titles; e.g. Assem.l.25,A.l4. ^pD pL2Q4 5a'a1 the pious Ephraem; ll7,B.23.^LMa ^'fJi \au^rO the holy John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the demonstrative pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun usually stands between the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Ephr. 1 124,E. ^SOfQO IrJB^I 001 IjOIQJ this light first spread abroad; 127, D; or before both, 132, F. "l^) ]l^\V) 001 this great teach- er. ^\o occurs (as a noun) exclusively before the noun ; e.g. Matt. XV. 13. (pi| (Ao^J ^\o this whole planting, (with suffix, compare 55.B. 2.Rem.). A word, generally a particle, sometimes stands be- tween the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Acts xvii. 20. ;-*... |J>So |A^-^QJ strange words indeed. But very rarely the adjective fol- lows in a gender different from that required by the noun ; e. g. Barh. 454, 18. \m^r^ l*r*? (fem. lAm^r^) the hohj cloister. Or with nouns of the common gender, the gender of several adjectives following: one after the other, is interchanged ; e. g. Michael. Chr. 61. 1, 2^ 2. As predicate (with the substantive verb expressed or to be supplied) the adjective precedes the noun, which follows in the absolute state, or with a suffix ; e. g. Mark xv. 23. |)QSo OlO >4iL\*>> l^-^ '^^^^ ^^^^ which myrrh was mingled ; verse 26. 1A!^ Zooi |^Ao as reason was written ; Matt.xv. 28. tJbSZcLliCUOl ^01 |^> great is thy faith. In like manner the pronoun ; e. g. Mark xv. 26. JjiJOOLij pW) QJOl thai is the King of the Jews ; Luke ii. 12. |Z| ^QO}^ (jOl thai shall he for you the sign. Rem. Sometimes the adjective, as predicate, follows the noun, viz.: when several words follow which define more closely the signi- fication of the adjective; e. g. Gen. xix. 20. t^;o IjOl lAa;-0 Vr>A\ .ov|> |1!l..t^ falO a great multitude^ who said ; Barh. 88, 4. The predicate is also expressed by a noun ; e. g. I Cor. xii. 27. ^A>Sf)> tOAj| G1^^ ye are the body of Christ ; Eph. v. 30. 3. "When several nouns of different genders are connected, the adjective as epithet and predicate, usually conforms to the masculine ; e.g. Luke i. 5, 6. VLomlS. Oi'ZAjIo ]Ipl (Ol^ ^r^ OOCJl _a1^)1 tOaUjZ Zacharias and his wife Eliz- abeth both feared God ; verses 6,7 ; Barh. 106,9. Rem. Concerning the neuter the same rules prevail as in QQ. 2, and 70. 3 ; e.g. Assem. I. 36, 6. l^LiAoj wiOl that which has been written; 372, 19 ; Ephr. I. 241,B ; Barh.24, 18. ^AjuO) ^OlL he did that which was evil. % 80. Connection of the Koun with the Verb. Tlie Yerb conforms in number and gender to the subject; but to this there are many exceptions, which may be refer- red to the following cases. Compare Agrell Comment, de varieiaie generis et numeriin LL.OO. LundcE, 1815, 4. A. In regard to IT amber. Here it should be remarked : 1. That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as ^ ,^ .^ ^ ^, -'^; e.g. Barh. 9-4, 10. qLqV-CdJ2i!:1 llsbo'? fl^x* the Roman army 230 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. proceeded towards Persia ; 96, 9 ; ^^ ; e. g. Acts xxvi. 18. 0001 iV^N> ^i^ all who were with me ; Michael. Chr. 15,5 ; and its compounds, r ^ ^;e.g.Assem.I.39,3 5. QoAd"| ^m^Is all wrote ; ^^V)\^ ; e.g.Michael.Chr. 14,15. O'^lj ^^ all who said; *mjl ^O; e.g.Barli.277,6. oioiZ >a i\o > that everij one wondered; also (am; e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^OOUiio oiXd nVnf4 the vjhole multitude aro5e;lL.QflD;e.g.Barli.422,10.1)ytQCD oZ] a great multitude came ; Assem.I. 386,15,16 ; JSOI; e.g. John V. 3. (0UrO> i''^\V^ r^^ OOCn -jlLD) ^^x^OlO in these (pooh) lay a great multitude of invalids ; Assem. I. 483, 19 ; Barh. 95,6,7; 227,8 ; 312,7 ; lo-^'; e.g. Barh.211,8. 01^]^-^ .X)*r^s2^ the others fled ; 342, 19. According to the same construction are names of places put for their inhabitants ; e.g. V^Ql cloister; Assem.I.411, ]^ote B. 4 6. r^ V^^OQl v 7 jiOIOOp^ when the monks saw him. Rem. The same nouns also are found with the verb singular ; e.g. UjLja, BaTh.551, 13 ; ^^*^ 288,12, and its compounds, |\n ; e,cf. 309,14; ^V^\o; e.g. 314,2 ; ULl} ^ or ,l\n;e.g.373,l;also'i^l e.g.Acts xiv.4; pDl; e.g.Acts v.26;Barh. 301,9,10. In like manner, abstract feminines occur for concretes; e. g. (ZojUf, Barh. 490, 18. Ad'^I IZqaj] 01^ all men fled ; l^in* for prisoner; Assem. 1. 490, A. 31 ; lAla^ for inhabitants-^ e.g.Acts xiii.44 ; 12,^ for con- gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23. Still more remarkable is the construction of these nouns in one and the same period with a singular and plu-i ral verb ; e.g. IJIaJ, Barh.212,1. ^OlO^lO 1]1>1 ^^Oioill ^il an army conquered him and took him captive ; Jl3| ^\o e.g. 388,3, 4 ; Vioi; e.g. Acts xxi. 36 ; Barh. 371, 8. 2. Nouns with a plural form having a singular significa- tion ( 44. Kem. 6 ), are either ; a) in respect to form CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 23 I connected with the plural verb ; e. g. )al, II Cor. iii. 7 ^ V7 l>..7 18. lA^ii (2)|0 i{;iVA uncovered face ; Barh. 201, 1 ; Jjua*; e.g. John iii.lo. J^Sl^j III* CJl^ ^OOOIJ he shall ha,ve eternal life ; V.26; Barh.219,12 ; llso; e.g. John v.7. Qi^fZZV? |k5 |1L^ when the water was troubled; Barh. 194, 3 ; 268, 7, 8, 12; and I * V) ;e.g.Marki lO.fiV^^ OOjAflOf oupavo/ o'x'JqVsvoi; James v. 18. Trfi^ QOOU (^iOS 6 ojpavoj usrov edwxsv ; or h) more rarely, in respect to signification, they are connected with the singular verb ; e. g. Luke xxiii. 45. *uk.h] ^-^i A (ijZ ^/i vaiY was rent ; John i. 4. fOOl ].,>>< OIQ m him wub Zi/e; Num. xxxiii. 14. }-jl-Sd ^-^^ |oai Aa.^ ^Aere was no water there ; Luke iii. 21. (l^s a*A2)Z1 the heaven was open- ed ; as feminine, II Petr. iii. 5. ;>Qji;jD ^ ZoC31 Ol.Aal \*!in ojpavo; '^fl'av sx's'aXai ; Barh. 228. 10. 8. With the noun plural also is connected the verb singu- lar; a) when the verb preceding is use! impersonally; a) ^x . 7 9 i. * 7 .7 T A^l and A^Ji. ; e, g. John vi. 9. t t^ri aU1m wkOiQ^ A^j .&JQJ ^9^0 |p.lCD> he has five barley-loaves and tioo fishes ; xxi. 25 ; I Cor. xv. 40 ; Barh. 144, 8 ; with looi, John v. 2. lOf^fiOf jjikLQAA OIQ (OOl Aj| there were in the same fi,ve porches ; Assem. I. 852, 18 ; ^) other verbs relating to persons ; e. g. Luke ii. 18. U^*? it-SV^ (Zaj^** *al.jaZl there ap- peared many of the heavenly host ; Barh. 124, 11. ( 1* r^l 1la.A the Arabians made peace; 188, 12. - ai^ 1^>1 AaId there died four thousand; 177, 14; 839, 9 ; or b) when the verb follows though more rarely ; a) Ljt] and LjJ^ e.g. Barh. 148, 10. X>QAAiil looi A^t 1'^ U^Z. Chisum had five walls : f3) other verbs relating to persons ; e. g. 16 232 IN RESPECT TO GENDER. Barb. 11-2, ]0. ^\|j3Zl itvi many were slain; 125, 14,15. jH^^S^I (->~v-b ^he Arabians chose for Icing ; 190, 9. >^\Ci ^j ji - fAlap^ since the inhabitants feared ; 298, 17 ; 513, 3; 532, 19.* Rem. Some have attempted to explain this singular of the verb as the third plural pret. defectively written ( 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a. O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as Barhebrseus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing. On the contrary this construction is found in Hebrew and more frequently in the Arabic ; and to both of these languages, such a defective form of the 3 pret. plur. is unknown. When a plural is to be considered as distributive {one of them, or each one of them)., the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks this construction more accurately by r^iw^D, tOOUlD ^^^ or ^^ ^jJ^OI; e.g. Barh. 434, 12. OI>2]3 ^.^kIs ^iT.QJOl each one of them went into his country ; 101, 14, 15. r*' i^N*^ Qil^ ^ tOOIlliO each one of them had answered. 4. The dual, whicb. is used in four words only, ( 44), is connected with the plural verb ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 40. ^oocru ^jZ two shall he ; xviii. 19 ; xix. 5 ; Barh. 165, 19. ^OLiZjZ wftr^O and' they both brought forth. Rem. Sometimes, also, according to the sense, the verb in the singular is found with ^)^ ; e.g. Barh.396,12. ^'^^ Aq2)J> 01 p**! ^ib that it should be called Egypt ; 433,20. Similar is * 7 '^t"^T " Barh. 121, 11. ^;A!iO ^ZjZ Zj> there departed two armies. B. In respect to Gender. 1. Nouns masculine, singular and plural, sometimes take the verb, whether it precede or follow, in the feminine when they are masculine in respect to the termination, but not as to signification (compare 43. Rem. 2, and 70. 1. b). CONNECTION" OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 233 Kem. It must be considered as a solecism or a designation of the neuter when the verb feminine is found with a noun masculine ; e.g. Barh.527,16. IaSsO) iooi p when it was evening ; compared with Matt. viii. 16 ; xiv. 15 ; or Barh. 152, 14. ^scL^ ^ L6(Jl there arose a quarrel ; compared with Matt, xxvi, 5 ; Acts xxiii. 10. 2. Feminines take a verb in the masculine; a) wiien they are feminine merely in respect to termination (compare 70. l.a) ; b) when abstracts stand for concretes (compare 70. 2); e. g. ^aaJ, lAmaj/or mankind; Barh.236,8. yji oA^lD lAmaJ 1..alL ^minL there died about fifty thousand men; 548,20; 585,14. l2pCQl army; 581, 12. QmIdZ] |Z;nrni ^.a^OI these armies were assembled ; or (ZqmJLz) milita- ry for soldiers ; 607, 20. Rem. These nouns are also found with the verb feminine ; e. g. Barh. 341, 10, 11. ^iaj ]Ial JCQljZ y^ ^L^ there died about twelve thousand men ; 348, 15, 16. But the preceding verb masculine is to be considered as impersonal in such cases as Barh. 612, 14. |A2)| %QQIjiZ| there was occasion given ; compared with 579, 14. ZoCJl lAlDj lAal there was muchAOCcasion ; or 606, 19, 20. 1A-1k> OlZoi^ loOl he had fear ; compared with 136, 6. ]^ S.^ V^ lA\rr; A^2L3 fear fell upon the king. 3. Sometimes the nonn is connected, in the same sentence, with the masculine and feminine of the verb ; not only, a) nouns of the common gender ; e.g. Mark v. 13. U^oj QQ^iJ r>Vv n 1i\ai.4 ^^Cn these unclean spirits went out and entered ; but b) such also as have a determinate gender ; e. g. Barh. 268, 10. QoLmZIo 1 ff^<^^ auZjZ they both {mother and daughter) fell and were suffocated ; 260, 11, 12. 234 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. C. In respect to both Gender and Number. 1. Collectives feminine often take, in accordance with tlie meaning, the plural masc. of the verb ; e. g. Barh. 561, 6, 7. 0001 ^^ i n I'rl \Lam^\ the inhabitants had fled ; Gen. xli. 57. oZ| |ij( OU^ the whole people {country) came ; Matt. viii. 32. olaj wOT l^oi dllo this whole herd perished ; Assem. I. 53, 17. ^a^QQ p IAu^Sd Ollo AaIoZI rt// ZZ| the daughters of Zion are haughty ; Barh. 215, 7. Ol^ZoTD^ ^CTl^ f^Z] oZ/of his goods had been plundered; Ephr. II. 145, A. looi JQ^Ao lA^^Ao ^Olx-^ there were writings composed concerning them ; Jer. xiv.5. . nn jX-* . IA!^] ^/jg /iznJ^ ca/i^e^ and forsook; Barh. 368, 11, 12 ; 10, 9. c^OloLf^i.^ ASZ there were three eyes. Rem. Seldom are cases found, where the verb singular feminina stands with the noun plural masculine ; e. g. Job xxxix.13, 14. OlAlD JclQ* ^jlm.1S the ostrich leaveth her eggs. D. Construction cf sentences when there is more than one subject^ or where the subject is compound. l.When the subject of a sentence is compounded of a nom- inative and genitive, the verb conforms ; a) usually to the CONI^ECTION' OF THE NOUN- WITH THE VERB. 235 nominative ; e g. Barh. 228, 7. IjqSQ!^ ZaS>oj AalIZf there was seen the form of a pillar ; 613, 14. (lacaScj |Aly AiLdA#( iAe cr// of the jwor was heard ; 348, 20 ; Z>) the verb conforms to the genitive, when the latter contains the principal idea ; e. g. Job xxxii. 7. . ^'^ I Vo \j^y IfytOflo tJie multitude of years shall teach; Barh 96,8,9. ]Al-.pSDj ai||..aco A^2U a great part of the city was destroyed, ; 141, 10; 241, 10, 11 ; 188, 7, 8. OOOl ^^^oASo _ lAxSo ^Sai a multi- tude of the dead were buried. Rem. In the last connection ^O, almost always is found ; e. g. Matt. viii. 34 ; Acts xxi. 30 ; I Cor. xiv. 23 ; to which the verb rarely relates, as Barh.611,3. OlAloZ ^aOl^O VloAaJ all of his petitions should be granted. 2. When it has several subjects connected by and^ the verb stands as follows ; A) when they are of the same gen- der ; fl ) in the plural ; thus a ) before the subjects ; e. g. John xxi. 2. "jiooVZo \zi^ ^QlSoi lr**^1 00<^ ^OOuA^f ^^"JjAjO there were together Simon Peter, Thomas and Nathaniel; Barh. 19, 7. .AlOiO ^o{ oNf^Zj Saul and Jonathan were slain ; 78, 8 ; 193, 17 ; Assem. I. 30, A. 1, 2. ^ >in p \mli OlSoO -rr><'> ; >^r> when the clergy and the whole congregation were assembled ; Ephr. 1. 223, A ; ^) after the subjects ; Exod. xvii. 10. rsr\rfs jOmO ^ojOiIo "IsoSd Moses, Aaron and Hur, went up. But the verb is also frequently found ; b) in the singular ; a) before the subjects ; e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1. VZj>*l 5al'^0 VAJL-^i ^Xll'rJiO tl^ then came Mary Magda- lene and the other Mary ; Barh. 106, 4, 5; 121, 19 ; 159, 9; 160 13. 1j2qSD0 llao looi ^/tere arose famine and pest- ilence ; 193, 19; Assem. I. 272, A. 35, 36 ; Ephr. I. 216,B; 236 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 230,D ; (3) after the subjects ; e.g. Johiiii.2. ^Qml 001 ^]' ^'fOL] *aaiO,aSn\2o Jesus and his disciples were invited ; Barli. 111,10; Assem. I. 234, A. 5. v. E ; B) when the sub- jects are of different genders, the verb conforms ; a) to the gender of that standing nearest to it ; e. g. Barh. 106, 9. ^^fp (jUO I rO.t I ilO f^ when men^women and youth had assembled together ; 192, 10. \Lj\yyO pCL^ Oi\.tZ] mountains and islands appeared ; 195, 4 ; or h) the masculine is pre- ferred, especially if the verb follow the subjects; e.g. Barb. 74, 12, 13. 0001 ^-iri>Ak> oiAj^o ^cooi^coojofi Theodosim and his sister were educated ; 77, 7 ; 78, 2 ; Ephr.I. 253, A; C) finally, when there are several subjects, if the construc- tion commence with the singular of the verb, in the con- tinuation of the sentence, the plural of the verb is used ; e.g. Barh. 137, 14. QjD*1o' ^axo'J^O ]]iQ.I )>ao Gahala and his confederates arose and fled ; 155, 16. P-> OlZo^ *n*^1 QO^O (uLi^O the judge and the elders went put and brought. j^EM. The verb in the plural also follows, when several subjects are united by 5>ai with ; e.g. Barh. 197,5,6. ^<11 )Q2LjCUJ ^.O r>i<^ |jklDOJ> |/r>\ a. when Nicephorus with the Roman army returned; 72,2; 85,9. When there are two different subjects, of which one is a pronoun of the first person, the verb follows in the first person plural; e. g. Luke ii. 48. J2))Q4^ ^^dOfO p| ..\ _>001 ^*^ lt'1-^vQD I and thy father (we) have sought thee with much sorrow ; Assem. T. 173, B. 23 25. Yet sometimes when the subjects are in the first and third persons, the verb is in the first person singular ; e.g. Assem. 1, 347, 28, 29. |M^*A!iO0 \i\ ijkbu\ |1aJD rAj I and the Messiah are (am) one nature. PECULIARITIES RELATING TO NOUNS. 237 81. Peculiarities relating to Nouns. A. Ellipsis. 1. If the subject of a sentence would be repeated in the predicate, before a genitive for the purpose of defining it more accurately, that subject is omitted, and only the geni- tive is used; e. g. Matt. iii. 4. I^^ICD) oisanL looi *^oioAj] IJSQ.*) his clothing was ( a clothing of) cameCs hair ; John V. ZQ. ^lAQa) ^iD ^Ojj (ZojOl-flO a vntness which is great- tr than that of John; x. 21; xi. 4 ; Heb. iii. 3; v. 14. IZ;^;^ lA^QD^i I r*^y? ^0 those who are of full age belongs strong meat ; Col. iii. 22. Rem. This Ellipsis also occurs in designations of time and place, with fAli ; e. g. Assem. I. 394, 6, 7. cio Zboij \Lim ^^ JiOAil*^ >DOJOIJQCO a year before the Nicene council^ for (Ala VAi* ^^ ; 1- 11- lAlj CJliAo the year thereafter, for lAli VAi> 6\Sbh ; Mark xiv. 9. IjOI ^Z'pQg) lpZ2> ^iuif ^ (viz : jZ|) where-ever this my gospel shall be preached. 2. Sometimes the accusative is wanting with the active verb, when the object can be easily supplied from the sig- 7 nification of the verb ; e. g. 'rOj to plough, literally to drive (fjra the yoke -plough), I Sam.viii.l2. (in full,Luke xvii.7) ; ^ r-lLl to bring forth, Aph. pSo") to beget (U-J^), Gren. xvi. J ; xxx. 1; >nffll to marry, literally to take (IZAjI); Ezra. ix. 2, 12 (in full, Barh. 39, 11) ; w*.ii1 to cast lots, literally to cast (]ma a lot)', I Sam. xiv. 42 (in full, Ps. xxil 19); also nouns with prepositions ; ^03 to consider, literally to lay a '*^^^ in the Heart): Job xxxiv. 23 (in full, Acts v. 238 ZEUGMA AND HENDIADYS. J) to ship^ literally to go, (|Sn*n upon the sea) ; Mark vi 48 ; Luke viii. 23. Rem. Here also seem to belong impersonal plirases ( 66. 1, 2) like ^ ^r^, ^ AjpD to which may be supplied \mSli or VkiO) ; and ^ .^p to which may be supplied (ioL* To Zoi-jJ it is clear, and Aiiaa* it is dark, it is forced and unnecessary to supply llj| or jAS^Q^* B. Zeugma and Hendiadys. Zeugma occurs with the noun as well as with the verb ( 68. C. 2); e.g. Gen. ii. 1. ^ooil^ Olloo U'lo ]1sq the heavens and the. earth and all their host ; or Hendiadys ; e.g. Gen. iii. 16. >inii[)^0 * n > n p thy sorrow and thy conception, i. e. the sorrow of thy conception ; Job iv. 16. Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew; e.g. Isa. xxviii. 10, 13 ; and passages of accidental asson- ance ; e.g. Barh. 102, 18. "M^oao W ]rniVn \S not by persuasion hut by the sword. APPENDIX. T^ie Rendering of Composite Greek nouns. The Syrians render the Greek composite noun as well as the verb (compare Appendix to 67) into their language, in the following manner ; 1) by simple Syriac words of like signification ; e. g. I Tim. iv. 13. ava^vwCi^ U-^0; n-apaxXyjtfjff |Zq1Q ; i. 9. a(fsl3sTs \LjlJ ; avoVioj U-^ ; Matt, xviii. 28. tfJvtJouXo? ]Lxd ; or 2) by writing two words for one ; a) in the relation of genitive; e.g. Acts ii.23. 'rtp6yvu(fig lAir a Zq1d,.qSd; II Tim. iii.2. a^apitfroi |Zona()^ ^.^^SiD or b) by two nouns, of which the latter stands in apposi- THE RENDERING OF GREEK COMPOSITE NOUNS. 239 tion ; e.g. John xi.l6. trufxjxa^rjra; aWou ^oio,^Lm 1 ^ .CnK ? c) hj a participle and noun whicli correspond with the verb ; e. g. Acts iv. 13. a/pa.a/xaroi l^sico ^^r^ \f or by participles and adjectives and the noun with ^ pre fixed; e.g. II Pet. iii. 16. ^uCvo'rjroff P-OqcqL jzllHOL or 6?) by the pronoun and verb ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 8 a/afxoi \mJ ^001^ A^j ^^\1* If the composites are form ed -from adjectives and nouns ; 3) they are frequently re solved into their component parts, and rendered in the same manner as in cases mentioned above ; a) in the relation of genitive; e. g. Mark xvi. 14. (fx\y]poxoLpSia "J^S Za^mo; Col. ii. 14. x^ipo'/pa^ov ^oqk r4; Matt. xxiv. 24. ^/sutJo-rpotpVa* (ZoOrOj ja-OJ ; h) by the noun and adjec- tive ; e. g. Phil. ii. 3. xsvo^olla jQajDD {m.2Qs ; II Cor. xi. 13. 4'Su(^a'n'oVroXoj |J-yi? 1*j^a-^ ; 4 ) ^sometimes we can trace definite laws of rendering ; a) nouns, adjectives, and adverbs compounded with ^ag-, take ^^ ; e. g. Luke xi. 22. flravo'TrXi'a \Lk\ CPL^ ; xxiii. 18. jrajAcr'Xii&s/ ]alO 01^ ; Sap. xviii. 15. 'ff'avTo^jvafjLoj |a^So ^i-D> ; h) when they are com- pounded with a privative, the latter is represented by U'and ]]j ; e. g. I Cor. xv. 53. a^avatf/a \LoLa^ }]'; Eph. i. 4. a/xwfJLo? ^C^ ]]j ; Matt. iii. 12. aa^edrog ]aij Un Finally, in composites formed with tfOv , this is often ren- dered by 5^ ; e. g. Philem. verse 23. Cuvaip^ftaXwroV ^ou *^i^> ]1^ ; Rom. xvi. 9. o Cuvsp/o^ ^m-wv VAa 7 7 CHAPTEE FOUETH. P AETICLES. 82. Construction and union of Adverbs. 1. Besides the formation of adverbs described in 51, is to be noticed as a special peculiarity tbe expressing of them by certain verbs, which, either stand in the same tense, num- ber, and gender, with the finite verb, with or without the copula, or the infinitive of the verb follows with ^^ In this connection stand ; a) yS^UV to return^ and *aflDO| to con- tinue^ioT once more^ farther^ again; e. g. Gen. viii. 10. j^Ol uijfBO again he sent her out ; Ps. Ixxi. 20. ySi(y\L jLm2)2 thou shall bring me again ; Job vii.7. %xSQ2)CnZ U IijmwSqa they shall no more see ; Luke xx. 11, 12. iCDo'| Jr0 he sent again ; Assem. I. 203, A. 7, 8 ; Gen. iv. 2. ,^]SfiS AaCDol she bare again ; Barh. 152, 3 ; also by ad- ding pleonastically ^oL again ; Gen. viii. 21. 2iC00| |J |l>]] rnl\\wL ,^oZ / will no more curse the earth ; h) a.y^rol to make much^ for very ; e. g. Barh. 9*2, 14. ^i^fiol CONSTRUCTION AND UNION OP ADVERBS. 241 7 r ;Q-a he esteemed very much ; II Cor. viii.l6 ; II Kings xxi. 6. auJOi} , nsV)\ * i.yt ff> ] he did much evil ; c) ^aS lo end,f or wholly, completely ;e.g.GeJi.x'slv.\ 6. '^^^^^^^ ^Olm ]]" he had not yet done speaking ; d) ^^ to precede (always witliOTit tlie copula) for before ; e. g. ZjSd| b!^fO I have said before ; Acts ii. 31 ; vii. 52 ; Rom. iii. 9, 25; viiL 28,30, xi. 35 ; xii. 11 ; I Cor. ii. 7; Gal. iii. 8. Rem. More according to the Hebrew, seems to be the expression in Hos. vi. 4 ; '^O :>oJaLDj ll'U (^^'n d'l^tp^ btp) <^ ^^^^ which early is scattered ; Gen. xxxvii. 7 ; or II Kings ii. 10. Z^^ A^JDol (ii^t?b rr^tfpil) thou askest too great a thiny;com- pare Ephr. I. 519, D. E ; ^^^i^Stl ^^ II Chron.xxvi.l5,is expressed by wkye^l ; compare Jer.iv.5,and onward. If the finite verb already precede, it may be omitted in adverbial usage ; e. g. I Sam. xx. 41. - > 1 fy>| ,-*0> ^;2 QUO they mourned but David the most. 2. Adverbs like adjectives, are connected with nouns and stand ; a) before tliem ; e. g. Luke iv. 25. .>.itt> Xt^LHiDj] many widows ; John ii. 12. IASdgL* ^h^nfew days ; Barb. 78, 1 ; 105, 3 ; 106, 8 ; Assem. I. 30, 15, 21 ; 270, A. 6. V. E ; with words standing between; 284, A. 10. V. E. ; ^) more seldom after the noun ; e. g. I Cor. v. 6. ^5)wI!^D lU^** ct little leaven ; II Chron. ii. 9. ]m n -J^ much wood ; Barh. 80, 16. Zu^A^ ^ 1>QJ the fire placed under. Rem. Sometimes nouns represent the adverb by a following geni- tive ; e. g. Ephr. I. 219, A. ^m? I^^^ISoV ^^ JooiZuV IjqSQIO they had continually the cloud and the pillar, Particu- 242 INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. larly should be noticed ; ^^ Vk^^CI'^ almost ; or _Ld ^^ ^<^ ^\^^^^ >Z| ^SjO, %ji..t a ) partly^ etc. 3. The repetition of the adverb indicates ; a) a strength- ening or increase of the meaning ; e. g. Gen. vii. 19. ^4 ^^ ?^*^^ ready ; Matt. iv. 24. >n iiin very 5acZ ; John vi. 7 ; Barh. 65, 14. ^i-i^io ^iSnn and 84, 17. jAq )Aq Z>?/ degrees ; h) sometimes a diversity is expressed by adverbs of place ; e. g. I Kings xx. 40. )aj^O \2l^ here and there. % 83. Use of the Interrogation^ Affirmation^ and Negation, A. Upon the construction of the interrogation, it should be remarked ; 1. That the simple direct question is distinguished ; a) either by being preceded by an interrogatory pronoun or particle; e.g. Luke xxii.27. *^S Qi^D iv ho is the greatest ^ ^ r^^ M^ what has he done to thee f verse 10. - > ^ > ^ wfc-MAaZI \lQu\ how were thine eyes opened f verse 19 ; vii. 35 ; Assem. 1. 33, 15 ; 179, B. 25. lakliV^ V m 0001 ^li^r^ whence know they thisi or h) by the position of the words employed, the prominent word in forming the question being generally placed first ; e. g. Matt, xxvii. ll. MjOOUj |a\V) OOlAJf art thou the Icing of the Jews? Assem. I. 33, l7. V^^ y^ A^l is it thy wish f 2. A question with U usually contains an affirmation ; e.g. John iv. 35. 1?^*^ fif ^iH U^>T >Ai^j ^-^f ^oAjf l3 say ye not, that afUr four months comelh the harvest ? INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 243 xviii.26 ; but with ISiA it embraces a negation; e.g. John v. 45. ^Oal XA -yii4^ V]i ^oAjI ^-^nco ^ol believe ye that I shall accuse you ? x. 21 ; xviii.35 ; or a doubt ; e.g. Matt, xxvi. 22. ^-fio Ul fcol Lord is it I? John ix. 27; xviii.25; so also with *xO ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240, F, *xO looi \^^^ |a;io i1 iSn vjould this please God f Luke xviii. 8 ; xxiv. 18 ; John vii. 85. Rem. The direct question is also found with ]>( (apa), Barh. 131, 12 ; with U^ for U^ 119, 10. 8. The indirect question is indicated bj t] = whether ; e.g. Matt. xxvi. 63. loil^j Ol'^O liV> OOl bS\ /| whether thou art the Christ the son of God. The disjunctive {whether or (uirum an) is marked by o] in the second part ; e. g. Matt. xi. 3. ^LcqSD 001 ^;>*l]'oVl2]? OCT OCT*^^ll (^rt thou he who should come or shall we look for another ? John ix. 2; Assem. 1. 87, B. 12, 13; 377, 20, 21. Rem. The affirmation or negation of a question is usually expres- sed by a repetition of the leading verb with the personal pronoun ; e.g. Assem. I. 375, 7. O'^l ZJIdV? ^'r^ *1>1V ^oAlSC* L'^\y ^r^Q-^ 1SQ have you heard^my brethren^ wliat I have 7 V ? 7 p.. ;: 7 said ? and they answered^ yes, all ; 10. OSOO -^ (J Of tr*^ . ^\My is it true or not ? and they answered it is true, i. e. yes ; sometimes by another verb; e.g.Matt.xxvii.l 1. Z;!!*! Li] thou hast said it, i. e. yes ; in the negative with the same repetition ; e. g. Assem. I. 378, 7, 11. Sometimes only IJ == not, appears ; e. g. Assem. I. 33,19. w^l ]] jSolo and he said, No, my father. B. The 'negative particles ]] and oli (and nonne f ) are distinguished from A-I.S by this latter forming the negation 244 PREPOSITIONS. to A-1, and with nouns, adjectives, and participles ( 68. B. 5) or with suffixes ( 38. 2), it includes the substantive verb. Rem. IJ is repeated in the latter of two negative clauses ; e. g. I Cor. xi. 11, 16 (but the negative sense is lost when the parti- cle is to be taken affirmatively ; as in Matt. v. 25 ; Luke xxi. 34). To adjectives and participles it gives a negative or privative signifi- cation ( = un, in, -less) ; e. g. Eph. i. 4. ^qSd |J spotless ; Rom. i. 23. ^\cu*ALd ]] imperishable. Before nouns it signifies nothing less than ; e.g. Deut. xxxii.21. *V>\ |J nothing less than my (God^s) people. Before the future (equivalent to an imper- ative) it is prohibitory ; compare 61. 3. B, and 62. 3. Doub- led(ljO -_ UO or iJo U ), it signifies neither nor ; John viii. 19; ix. 3. 84. Prepositions, 1. "When prepositions come together, in many instances ; a) the signification of one of them is only apparently lost. Thus for example, ^^ ; a) before prepositions, denotes the direction from a place whose position is more closely defined by those which follow ; e. g. Assem. I. 4G, 21. 1,^ l^P A.-mZ _1^ out from under a rock, 1. 37,19 ; p) after prepositions it denotes a removal from the place more closely defined bj those Avhich precede ; e. g. Assem. 1. 54, 7. ^LfL So AmA^ -aOloSDCD theg buried him under the Churth ; Barh. 200, 16. I'Alaj:^ ^ 'r^il before the city; 72, 19, 20; QQ^ 13. (jQ* ^io \Ok-^ from beloiu^ (i. e. above) the walls ; figuratively, 31, 17. li!D>0> ,0Ollo ^ ^il^ above all ex- cellence ; one of the prepositions is ; b) merely pleonastic ; e. g. Eccl. X. 14. OljAo ^ after him ; Assem. I. 36, 22. PKEPOSITIONS. 245 j^Zoik ^ from thee ; 87, 1 ; Dan. v. 24. ^OIOSd^ -Sd ie- /ore him ; Barh. 65, 9. ]a\V)S 2q1 to ^7ie if%. 2. Several of the prepositions have a peculiar consecu- tion ; e.g. betwixt arzc? between^ ^O * * I n; e.g.Matt.xx.l7. OOl^O %aaiQ1 i.O between him and them ; frequently with- out the copula, xix. 10 ; ^ AjlQ ; e. g. Barh. 60, 13. wiCnioy t*r-^ ^-^ between Ear an and Edessa ; 75, 17,18 ; 83, 15 ; 146, 13 ; rarely ^ ^ ; e. g. Barh. 60,8 ; from to, \ lSD'r:k-^;e.g.Matt.i.l7 r0^^ fco^^ ^CT'of ^ /ro/w AbroJiam to David; in more general (''^jsignations also with- out toA; e. g. Barh. 99, 17; 105, 7. 8. Besides the cases mentioned in 65. B. 3. b) preposi- tions are repeated with several nouns which follow after one another, and depend upon one and the same preposition ; e. g. Barh. 82, 10 ; 104, 11, 13 ; but the preposition is quite as frequently omitted after the first noun ; e. g. Barh. 6, 1 ; 40, 12 ; 66, 6. Rem. As special, idioms, are to be regarded the following ; o) *0 sottietimes stands for ^ (sv == s/V) ; e. g. Luke ii. 3. looi ^ll OlidjT-LQQ - 1^'^*^ each went to his own city ; iii. 3 ; Barh. QQ, 16 17 or serves to designate the value or price of a thing, equiva- lent to for ; Barh. 64, 6. ^ilk) ^ ^ >0 ^^l}^ for tioo hundred and fifty oholi ; 149, 8, 9 ; 191, 1, 2 ; 193, 19 ; h) \ denotes direction towards a place ( 67. 1. b. ^) ; with numerals, with ]SOA preceding = about to ; c) Zgl^ and ^Q-i show, some- times a possession in a physical and intellectual sense ( = penes) ; e.ff. Job XV. 9. tZoik loOl l]j which stands not in our power ; 23. 14; c?) -JiO forms adverbs ( 51. 3. a) ; expresses the pronouns amjhody some ( 58. B. 4, 6,7), and sometimes indicates the di- rection to a place ; e. g. Assem. I. 485, 28. U^yi ^ toward* 24:6 CONJUNCTIONS. morning ; 1. 29 ; e) xy^l often occurs before a duty or obligation ( 67. II. 4. b) ; Ezra x. 4. It may also in respect to signification, be considered as a preposition ; /) |J J without ; e. g. Barh. 227,5. IJ..J PjO Hr'l \1} without hands and without feet. 85. Conjunctions. The Sjriac language, in common with the other Semitic dialects, is very deficient in conjunctions ; but affluence of periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of Avords. Hence in sjriac, upon the one hand, the periods are wanting in variety and continuance ; and on the other hand the connective particles which do exist have many significations. In general the following may be observ- ed : 1. Those conjunctions (e. g. ivhen^ then) are frequently omitted, which, in the protasis indicate the relation to the apodosis, and the two members are united by and ; e. g. Gen. xix. 23, ^ 4^0 ^^ ^iSoi when the Sun had arisen^ Lot came ; xliv. 4. Rem. Moreover the following fall away ; a) O {asyndeton) after verbs of motion ; e. g. Matt. ix. 7. ^1 1 ^oi he arose and went ; Barh. 25, 1; 197, 19 ; especially in earnest discourse ; e. g. I Sam. XV. 6 ; h) oior ; e.g. II Kings ix. 32. ^jISoicflSD XtULl ^>Z two or three eunuchs ; c) J more in accordance with Hebrew usage ; e. g. Isa. 1. 2. ^mS\ L^Q b^L\ flV)\ wherefore was, I came, {when I came), no one there. On the other hand is often repeated [polysyndeton) ; e. g. Barh. 51, 20. ; 'PdZIo AaIdo |Vr>^\ .o\mr> ^dOO he died, was buried, arose, and went to heaven ; 82, l7; 38, 5, 6. 2. As correlatives, conjunctions are used doubled in a CONJUNCTIONS. 247 sentence ; a) the same word ; e. g. o o and ^df aY as well asj both- and ; e. g. Assem. I. 291, A. 10, ll,v.E; oX^oX either^or ; Barh. 112, 4 ; 223, 4, 5 ; ^V^l wheth- er or; e.g. 21 7, 13; or 6)different words ; e.g. liDOl j^f like as; Assem. I. 75, B. ll, 13, v.E; 374, 23, 24; with J llilil preceding; Ephr.I. 214, E; UT ^X although yet; e.g. Barh. 91, 12, 13. o. The conjunctions > == that^ thereby^ or Pj = thai not^ are usually connected with the future ( 61.3. A) ; e. g. As- sem. I. 515, B.32 ; Barh. 213, 6 ; but in as far as they have the signification of since^ because^ (quod), they are connected with the preterite ; e.g. Matt. ix. 8. %2au> loi^)] rt^^^m they praised God, because he had given ; 12, 41 ; 13, 11 ; Barh. 24, 9. 4. Concerning the use of particular conjunctions, the fol- lowing may be noted ; a) 6] is sometimes used in comparisons (=^ ^) ; e. g. Matt, xi.22 ; xix. 24 ; and likewise b) ^] in comparing one thing with another of the same species ; e. g. Isa. i. 7 ; Job xxiv. 14; Assem. I. 75, A. 1. v. E ; 168, B. 29 ; with numerals it signifies really^ about ; Barh.104,13 ; c) o!^ if^ ( ^ T]^ sav ) denotes, in doubtful cases, the relation of the subjunctive ; tf = Gi^ ^' i^ cases of certainty, denotes the indicative, and also occurs in indirect questions ( 83.3); it is negative in those passages containing asseverations under oath, yet only in those which are translated, and which, according to the Hebrew idiom, are without any negation ; with a negative (1 X )] ] or ^ U ], it is affirmative(compare 355^ and {^*3 di^? Gesenius Lehrg. p. 844) ; e. g. Cant 2. 7. 17* 248 CONJUNCTIONS. x'r^^ (\o ^'r-i-lZ ^1 wake not, rouse not ; d) j (for the further use of which see ^m-, % 69.1 ; 73. 3 ; 74. 2.; 78.B.2) a) from particles which it follows, forms conjunctions e. g. > y^just as, Assem. I. 34, 17 ; so thai, Matt. ii. 13 J Urul just as, John viii. 28 ; Ephr. I. 214, E ; > ^uALof (of time) as, when, Assem.I. 485, 15 ; J *jOIS since, because, Barh. 112, 7, 8 ; 160, 12 ; > j^, 39,7, and j hlL ^, As- sem. I. 213, A. 25, afterwards ; > OlAlk^'rO as soon as, 1.218, 27 ; ? fco (of time) luhen, 1.485,20 ; j Vi^, Barh.160, 16, and > ^\l, 158,12, smce,hecause ; j P^r^ until, //m^, (including the terminus ad quern), Ephr. II. 125, B ; 242, A ; lio'^ > ^ai^ 50 w?/c/z jJ/ia^, Barh.193,2 ; ? i*0^^ ^ Wiew the house is vwrthy ; Mark viii. 3 ; Luke vi. 7 ; John viii. 36 ; after ^f, Matt. ix. 21 ; ]]'q!S^ Mark 13, 20 ; e) the copula O also denotes a) that^ especially after verbs of sending^ entreating, commanding, etc ; e. g. Assem. I. 77, 23, 24 ; Barh. 11, 18 ; 97, 8; 105, 1 ; 152, 5 ; 221,2; it forms ^) the apodosis ; e.g. Barh. 39, 7.8; and is y) equivalent to hut ; e. g. Barh. 11, 16; 16, 9 ; ^) it sometimes supplies the place of the comparative ^| ; e. g. Job V. 7. Also the Hebrew Qb^b^ is translated by the fre- 7 T quently occurring ^\J^ yet, nevertheless. INTERJECTIONS. 249 86. Interjections, 1. The Interjection which denotes an imprecation or cry of distress, is usually connected with ^ following ; e. g. Eccl. X. 1 6. * i ^N i-aO looe to thee I ii. 1 ^. ^0^\ ^0 woe to you I Matt, xviii. 7 ; xxiii. 13-16 ; xxiv. 19 ; Ephr. II. 135, E. 1jOOI-a? I'^SSnS ^o woe, to tJie king of Judak I 274, 1). |Al . i *^ atASoA fcuO woi' to those who meditate deceit ! 351, 0. ^jJaOOinN (aO ; or with --^^ appended; e^g- pO ^^woe to mt! Ez. XXX. 2 h^ClL^ Olo] woe for the day ! sometimes with ^^ ; e. g. Jer. 1. 27. |001->.-\S %aO woe to you I or ji, Amira p. 449. fjOl jAlli^ ^!^ OlOf looe to this generation. Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual ex- pressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be taken in the accusative ; e. g. Judges xi. 35. *a2;z:3 oio] alas^ my daughter I Rev.xviii.10,16,19. Rem. Sometimes 0| occurs as an ordinary exclamation, with ^ as a sign of the accusative ; e. g. Barh. 333, 3, 4. As a particle of exclamation sometimes also occurs u| , properly, verily^ truly ; compare Amira p. 436. 2. Concerning the construction of particular interjections, the following may be observed : a) loi lo ! behold^ is frequently pleonastic; e.g. Ephr. III. 149, B. ]^<*^ |]Z loi 12^J^ 001 ^^-aDCT IL^ the mortal body is thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of a period it serves to give animation to the discourse ; e. g. Ephr.III.247,C. ^^>01 ul*;^ loi lo ! our brother (member) is separat'id ; in designations of time, like the Greek ^(5ii, it signifies now^ already ; e. g. Matt. iii. 10. ^>QjJ:q |..;j |ol [jjLk(> Ir^^ ^*^ the axe is already laid at the roots of the tree ; Num. xxii. 28. ^iin] A^Z loi already the third time ; As- sem. I. 369, 30 ; with j ^ following, since tiat: e.g. Acts 250 PECULIARITIES IN" THE POSITION" OF WORDS. X. 30. Ij] ^K? ^ 1^ since that I have fasted; Col. i. 4 ; preceded by 11 (loi Jj , from which comes Q^) oj^s nonnef e.g.Matt.v.4G. ^r^^ 1?^ *-^ loft*^^ ^Si\ loi |] do not even the publicans the same? verse 47; xiii. 27 ; h) *mj>* far be it, with ^ of the person and j before the fu- ture of the finite verb ; e.g. Matt. xvi. 22. *j;-!aD ^^ .mxi IjOl j^Jk lOCriZj far be it from thee, my lord, that this should hap- pen to thee; Assem 1. 341, A. 30. IoiSLq ioaajj ^ ml* far he it from us that ive should deny God ; 375, 13. Some- times the participle follows ; e. g. Assem. I. 51, 12, 13. r X p c or t^'gin^ _^ *CQj^ l>j far be it from us that ive should deny ; the verb follows in the fnture^with ^| preceding (^Qjj^ com- pare 85. 4. c) ; e. g. I Sam. xxiv. 7 ; or in the infinitive vrith ^ ; e. g. Gen. xliv. 7 ; c) -i.odi hail! (= ^i-itDi^) with sufiix plural, and the noun following with ^, to which the preceding suffix relatesr e.g. Matt. V.3. .Ka0;O ]l.omV>\ .OOLi^o^ hail to the poor in spirit; verses 4-11 ; with a word interposed; e.g. Assem. I. 95, A. 3, 6, V. E. \zi^ ^QlSa j^S *2)V >-^Q^ hall also to thee, Simon Peter ; frequently absolute without ^ ; B. 3. v. E. ^^m 6Vwi^A.oa4 hail to thee Sichem ; 96, A. 17, 19. The Hebrew }j^5 is, in the Peshito, expressed by ]-J ; e. g. I Kinsrs xxii. 12. APPENDIX. Peculiarities in the Position of Words. In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very easy and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual ooi and ;Sd| are interposed PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS. 25l between words, which, according to their grammatical connec- tion, cannot be separated; e. g. Exod. vii. 7. ; *^ (r>-Vo ,^il 1 001 ^jLLIdl Moses was eighty years old ; Luke v. 3 ; Exod. V. 16. OLD)} _!^ . ;V)| p*l\o and hricks^say they to u^,make ye. The same is true ; h) of personal pronouns, having the signification of fOOl ; e.g.John viii.33.iO0lja(> i>> oilJl we are Abraham's seed ; verse 37 ; Ileb. vii. 28. f*< '<*^ (fiDOSOJ ( r^QO ^0^.010 |0L r^ 001 27 Z5 > ^Q^J i^ui'tlL.. he should go openly into the city. Comi3are \6l and IcTl U" ( 86. 2. a). EXERCISES SYRIAC GRAMMAR, AND A CHRBSTOMATHY. PREPARED WITH REFERENCE TO THE TRANSLATION OF UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON. NEW YORK 1875. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, By E. HUTCHINSON, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. PART IV, INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. The following Exercises are designed for beginners, who need something simple, and at the same time, something which will lead them into a thorough knowledge of the grammar. A small portion of Syriac, perhaps a page, should be se- lected and carefully analyzed in reference to all the import- ant phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in res- pect to each word should be critically examined. Perhaps the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout the page, searching the grammar and other helps ; then trace another, and so on, until every peculiarity shall have been examined. Thus the most important facts will be strongly impressed upon the memory. The great difficulty, especially with beginners, is, that they often attempt to investigate too many subjects at once and thus do not obtain clear ideas of any. There is fre- quently a great inclination to press forward and translate rapidly. Hence, many important subjects of investigation are entirely neglected, Superficial scholarship, is the un- avoidable result of such a course. That nothing may escape observation, a few general di- rections are presented to aid the learner in making his analysis. In mentioning those points, which arc to be ex- amined, the exact order in which they occur in the gram- 25i INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. mar, has not been followed, but tbey have been so arranged, it is hoped, as best to facilitate the progress of the student ; and thej are intended to embrace the most important phen- nomena necessary to be attended to by the learner. Before commencing the examinatioif the pupil should be directed to the Introduction of the grammar, that he may become somewhat acquainted with the history and literature of the Syriac Language. The grammar should be studied rather as a book of reference than as one, which must be committed to memory. The student, at first, should consult it as an aid in analyzing. At the commencement of the an- alysis, he will feel the need of assistance, and that assistance he must find in the grammar. When he there discovers a principle of the language and perceives its application in parsing, he can easily retain it in his memory. By the time that he has carefully studied the Exercises and Chres- tomathy through, he will not only have a considerable knowledge of the language ; but will have most of the gram- mar committed to mem/)ry^ with but very little effort, and no loss of time in learning rules and principles, whose ap- plication he does not perceive, and which consequently are apt to escape from the mind. After the pupil, in the course of his analysis, shall have become somewhat familiar with the grammar, he may recite it regularly through, and it will not be an unmeaning nor an uninteresting exercise. The general divisions, in the Exercises, are marked by the character T, to distinguish them from similar divisions in the grammar marked . Smaller divisions are inserted under Kemarks and Explanations. GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING. I. Find the Guttural Letters on page first of the Chrestomathy. Yid. Gram. 1. Rem. 3, 4. II. " " Aspirates f or on what letters Kushoi and Rukok are found. Yid. Gram. 1. Rem. 4 ; 5. III. '* " Diacritical Points, for which the vowels are de- signed to compensate, formerly used instead of Towels and for other purposes. Yid. 2, 3, 4, and Rem. lY. " " Lmig and Short Vowels. Yid. 3. Rem. 3. Y. " " Simple and Mixed syllables. YI. " " Pure and Impure, Mutalk and Immutable vowels. Yid. 45. A ; 48. A. YII. " " Dipthongs, Quiescent and Otiant letters. Yid. 3. Rem. 4 ; 13 ; 14. ^ YIH. " " Lin^ce Marhetono, Mehagyono and Sheva. IX. " " Linea Occultans. Yid. 8. X. Find on what syllables the Toti^ is to be found. Yid. 9. XL Examine the Marks of Punctiiation. Yid. 10. XII. Find Rihui. Yid. 6. XIII. Read the Sjfriac. XIY. Translate. XY. Examine the Changes of Consonants assimilated trans- posed dropped added and exchanged. Yid. 12. 256 GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING. XYI. Find the Changes of Vowels thrown back exchanged transposed dropped and added. Vid. 15. XVII. Find the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformatives and Prcfor matives, Yid. 16 ; 36 ; 46. XYIII. Parse. In respect to Verhs ascertain whether they are Simple or Compound Their Conjugation Voice Regu- lar or Irregular Active, Passive or Neuter Number Person Gender Mood Tense Conjugate and Injkit them to the Case, Mood, Tense, etc., where they are ioxmdi Rule. Yid. 19., etc.; 59., etc. Nouns ' Signification Suffix or Prefix Adjective or Substantive Derivation and Formation Declension Person Number Gender State Case . A^id . 43; 70; 44; n; 45; 73; U; 46; 47; 48; 50; 77., etc. Pronouns What kind Person Number Gender Case Suffix Rule. Yid. 16 ; 17 ; 54., ttc. Participles Derivation Active or Passive Conjugation Rule. Adverbs Primitive or Derivative What they qualify. Yid. 51 ; 82. Numerals Cardinal or Ordinal Gender Decline To what they belong. Propositions Suffixes What they govern. Yid 52; 84. Conjunctions ^What kind Suffix or Prefix What they connect. Yid. 53. 1, 2 ; 85. Interjections Primitive or Derivative. Yid. 53. 3; 86. EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXERCISE FIRST, ViD. Gram. 1. Rem. 3, 4. H 1. Find the Gutturals on the first page of the Chrestomathy. 1. Select all those letters which are ever used as Gutturals; thus: loioilloilloioilloTllailloioiloilcn lloioi] loil^oioilioiTljaloioioiloiA* loilj^lVoioiHcnoiT*^! oijs* Hlcjioiin loiloij^oini oilaiioiloi]oi]aicn]cyil Hoiioilloicjiloilloillilitcjilin 01 Ol 1 1 I t 1 Ol EXPLANATIONS. a) The above are all guttural letters, but not all used as such in the text from which they are taken. h) The guttural 1 resembles the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks, 258 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. being a scarcely audible breathing from the lungs. 1 has always a feeble sound. The Galileans pronounced 1 and ja like i^ of the Hebrews. An Arabian would pronounce 1 as a sort of vowel sound like a. It is a kind of soft breathing (comp. Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar, by Conant, 6). The Greeks express %** as well as \ sometimes by Spiritus asper, and sometimes by y. Usually -m is sounded like M with a rolling of the palate. 01 before a vowel is our h (Spiritus asper); but when uttered after a vowel, it has nearly the sound of h in Korah, perhaps a little softer, as in ah ! oh ! It is difficult to ascertain exactly the sounds of these letters ; still it is important that the learner should fix upon a definite pronunciation of each. 2. Find those letters which are here used as gutturals. ciibj^oioioicTiaioioicnoiGiGioi oi* EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 3. word 8., Cl is a guttural, as it would in Hebrew take a composite sheva, and it has no vowel of its own. (Some would perhaps prefer to call 01 a regular movable consonant, and consider 1 at the end of the word as otiant, and O as quiescing in ) h) Verse 3. word 4., 1 is a guttural for the same reasons. c) Verse 3. word 6., ** is a guttural for the same reasons. d) Verse 4. word 6., 01 is a guttural being movable. It be- longs to the second syllable of the word, being preceded by a vowel ( 15. 4. d). The other cases may be similarly explained. Rem. It should be remarked that there are some other guttural letters on the first page of the chrestomathy, which should be con- EXERCISE FIRST QUTTURAL LETTERS. 259 sidered merely as movable consonants. It is true that all gutturals are sounded, and might be said to be movable consonants (com- pare Gesen. Heb. Gram., transl. by Conant, 23.2). Still we prefer to make a difference between gutturals and regular movable con- sonants. The latter, though guttural letters on page first, are the following : 3. Find those guttural letters which are regular movable consonants : loilloioiloioillcnoiloioijajaloi oim^oiaj*! Gi|aic7ijsAailcFi^aiGiailoi EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 2., 1 is a regular movable consonant, and is sounded nearly like the vowel , and does not quiesce in its vowel. In dialects kindred to the Hebrew, ] melts in- to the vowel far more readily than the sound of the Hebrew ;5^ melts into its vowel. Still 1 retains its power as a movable consonant. It is very common in Syriac for a guttural let- ter to take a long vowel, where in Hebrew, it would have a composite Sheva. This seldom occurs in Hebrew (vid.Ges- enius' Heb. Gram, by Conant. 23. 2. Rem. 2). b) Y. 1. w. 5., 01 is movable, as it does not quiesce and is not otiant. c) Y. 1. w. 8., (not a guttural) is movable, as the pre- ceding letter is not sounded, and the following one is quiescent. d) Y. 1. w.lO., 1 should be considered as movable though its sound so melts into the vowel, we can scarcely perceive that it has the power of a consonant. 260 EXERCISES m SYRIAC GRAMMAR. e) y. 1. w. 11., ] is not movable, as it quiesces, though 7 seldom, in ( 13. 1. Rem). /) Y. 1. w. 11., Ol is movable for the same reasons as others above. preceding it, belongs to the previous sylla- ble (comp. t 5. 1. f ; 15. 4. d). g) y. 3. w. 2., Ol is movable as it is a suffix, and = ^ of the Hebrew ( 13. Rem.). h) y. 9. w. 9., 1 is movable as it has a vowel of its own, though it so flows into the sound of the vowel that it is scarcely perceptible (T 1. 1. b). Rem. It should be remarked that two of the guttural letters ] and 01 are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes as otiant letters ( 12. A. B. and Rem.; 13; 14). EXERCISE SECOND. 12. Find the Aspirates or in what letters Kuslioi (*jL*ao a hard- ening^ and Rvkok (*^0>) a softening are found. 1. Those which are ever aspirated ( 1. Rera. 3). joAjsruoo jQi J A>2j2>5>o:d,.jA 2. Find those, which are aspirated on page first (5. and Eem. by Tr.). EXERCISE SECOND ASPIRATES. 261 EXPLANATIONS. a) Yersel. wordl., A is aspirated as it closes the syllable (5. 2. Kem. c. a). b) Y.l. W.2., A is aspirated as it follows an open or sim- ple syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c, and 15. 4. d). c) Y.l. W.4., A is aspirated, because a letter, which would in Hebrew, take a vocal Sheva, precedes it ( 5. 2. Rem. c.b). d) Y. 2. w. 4., s^ is aspirated as the preceding word ends with 1 (5. 2. Rem.a). e) Y.3. W.2., r is aspirated as it follows an open syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c). f) Y.3. W.4., o is aspirated because it follows a letter which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, ( 5. 2. Rem. c.b). g) Y.3. W.4., r is aspirated as it is preceded by a letter which would in fiebrew take a composite Sheva and would of course be vocal (5. 2. Rem. c. b). h) Y.3. W.5., Si is aspirated as it follows an open syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c). i) Y.4. W.7., ? is aspirated as the preceding word ends in 1 (5. 2. Rem. a). k) Y.4. W.7., Ci is aspirated as it closes a syllable (5. 2. Rem. c. a). Z) Y.7. W.4., > is aspirated as it closes a syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. a). m ) Y.lO. w. 4., r is aspirated as it follows an open sylla- ble ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c). 3. Find those which are not aspirated' EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., i is not aspirated as it begins a word ( 5. 2. Rem. a). 18 262 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR h) y.4. W.I., d is not aspirated tliougliitis preceded by] (J5. 2. Rem.a), because it begins a verse. c) Y.Q W.3., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a let- ter, which, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and which has no vowel ( 5.2. Note by Tr.). d) For the pronunciation of these aspirates see the Alph- abet^ and 1. Eem. 8, 4. Rem. Q when aspirated is sounded Hke v^ and when not aspira- ted hke h ; f like th in that^ when aspirated, but otherwise like d ) when aspirated is sounded like ph or /, and otherwise like p A when aspirated like th in thin^ in other situations like t .. is sounded like g hard whether it be aspirated or not * O when aspirated is sounded like hh or k with a rolling of the palate ; in other situations like k. In general the aspirates are pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. referenc- es above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant, 6. 2. 3. and Note by Tr.). EXEKOISE THIKD. 1 3. ( 2 ; 3 ; 4 anc? Rem). Find tlie diacritical points for which tbe vowels are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of vowels and for other purposes : VA^ 0010 VAik 001 li^ *j]L looi "Zooi looij looi ooio looi 12] J^ 001 looi 1 2l> looi J\i looi* * The aspiration of .. would be indicated by the rolling of the palate. EXERCISE THIRD DIACRITICAL POINTS. 263 EXPLANATIONS. Rem. 1. Diacritical points sometimes mark particular tenses and persons of verbs ( 4. Rem.). Rem. 2. The vowel system of the Syrians began to be introduced in the time of Mohammed. Then and even after the system was completed by introducing characters from the Greek vowels, the ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by many writers. They are now seen in the more ancient writings. Rem. 3. The diacritical points here presented and others, appear in ancient Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubt- less, directly from the oldest editions of the Peshito. The several editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels. Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound. As later editions have appeared, however, those points have gradu- ally been omitted and vowels substituted, though, some remnants of the old system are still left (2; 3; 4). a) Verse 1. word 4., 1AL The diacritical point under \ according to the principles laid down byLadov. deDieu,indi- cates the vowel We have then here the vowel and the ancient diacritical point for which the vowel compensates (4.Eem.). 6) y.l. w. 5., 0010* The point under 01, according to Amira, indicates (4.Eem.). c) Y.3. w. 2., *^]o* The point under wi indicates, ac- cording to Ludov. de Dieu, the vowel (g4. Rem.). d) Y.3. w. 3., looi* Diacritical points are often placed under and over the radical letters of verbs, sometimes to dis- tinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels (vid. T 3. Rem. 1). In the imperative and infinitive it may- be wholly omitted or inserted underneath (vid. 4:.Rem.; al- so compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram. 14). 264 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEKCISE FOUETH. 1 4 Find the Long and Short vovjels ( 3. Bern, 3). I. Find the Long ones : ftpppipxx p p p I -h p -n p p p OP 'r,i>p-^'r,pi\x*,^ppp^^p^^Of> ^.CP'npoPTi'n PPt>*^P0pt\0 9^ pii9sPP-*>r. fiP*,P^pt

^ f-u. |ooi a*oU J\ .iA Qj |joi .ja 1 I* ocno qj (jcji ja> om p ajO qa ]i ]]' looi 1. U r. 'A. n I6i a. ^ oi ]i XIL ml 266 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. OJOI \L QJ |301 wiOl (a P 0C31 lOOl QJ |j01 1 (J Q-J jjOl EXPLANATIONS. Rem, A simple syllable terminates in a vowel sound, and that vowel sometimes has a \owel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syll- able terminates in one or more movable consonants. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a vowel. X a) Yerse 1. word 1., ^\Ci is a simple syllable as it ends in a vowel sound, althongli it has a quiescent ; * has a vowel of its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable (vid. 1 5. 1. Eem., and 15. 4. d). b) Y.l. W.2., w] is simple for the same reason as last, the syllable ending with ^ and not with A (vid. 15. 4.d). c) Y.l. W.2., oA is a dipthong and should be considered, we think, as a simple syllable because O coalesces in the vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a regu- lar case of quiescence. Some may regard O as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew, under similar circum- stances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. ^4. 2. Rem. ; Ges^.n. Heb.Gram. by Conant, 8.4). d) Y.l. W.4., So is simple (vid. reference above). e) Y.l.w. 4., ]jt^ is simple, 1 quiescing in /) Y.l. W.5., OOIO is simple, the last o quiescmg. g) Y.l. w.lO., 1 is simple as ^ which follows Olaph has a vowel of its own. h) Y.l. w.ll., (o is simple, Olaph quiescing in , though it seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid 13.1 Rem. ; compare 1 1. 8. e). i) Y. 3. W.2., Vd is simple, | quiescing in and . being otiant. EXERCISE FIFTH MIXED SYLLABLES. 267 A;) Y.3. W.5., I is simple as is a long vowel and 2) be- longs to the next syllable (15.4. d). V) Y.4. w.S., ^A is a dipthong and ends in a vowel sound as wi melts into the vowel to such an extent that it can hard- ly be considered as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew. We choose then to place the syllable among siraple ones ; -i.l in verse 4. word 7., and -ol in verse 7. word 8, are similar instances (vid.T4.2.Rem. ; To.l.c). m) y.4. W.6., QJ is simple as O quiesces in making it a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (l5.4.d). n) y.7. W.3., q!^ is simple as 01 belongs to the penult syllable and follows a long vowel (15.4. d. ; compare ^ 1. 2. d). 2. Find the Mixed Syllables : Ajla ZqL A^i ZqL ^ 01% 'Zooi iOy oij csL^Ci .001 oj iLd joi jl 01 C) \^ )> ^ ois* ^ m-jj JOI \>.i lo *-ja ^SD Oly Q-J> JOI ^\l 'H-yt ^y 1-Si3? 501 J^ril .A-l Olj r-a Oi_l EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., A..a is mixed as it ends with a con- sonant sound (vid. T 5.1. Rem.). h) y.l. w. 9., Zal is mixed, ending in a consonant sound (vid. 1 5. l.Rem.). c) Y.3. W.2., Olr is mixed as 01 = ^ in Hebrew and is of course movable ( l3. Rem.). d) y.7. W.7., ^? is mixed as is short when o does not quiesce in it, and* the following consonant has no vowel (vid. I5.4,and3.Rem.3). 268 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEKCISE SIXTH. 1 6. Find the Pure^ Impure^ Mutable and Immutable voiveh (45.^; 48. A). 1. Find tlie Pure vowels : 0fitkitr'nyv7r7P'r>77fytt7e EXPLANATIONS. Rem. a pure vowel, is one with which no consonant colesces. An impure vowel is one with which a consonant coalesces. 7 7. ^ a) Verse 1. word 2., is pure* as the syllable oA is a dipthong (vid. 3. Kem. 4 ; also Palfrey's Gram. 2), and O does not fully quiesce in !_, though it so far coalesces that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant. Still as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so, (vid. T" 4. 2. Eem. ; T 5. 1. c. and 1 ; Gesenius' Heb. Gram- mar by Conant, 8.4 ; compare 15. 4. d; also T 6.2. Rem., and T' 6.1. Rem. V b) Y.l. W.9., is pure as o does not quiesce in it, being a movable consonant and ^ preceding being pronounced with a vocal sheva. * It is also mutable ( ^ 6. 4; b ). EXERCISE SIXTH IMPURE VOWELS. 269 c) Y.l. w. 10., is pure as Olapli does not quiesce in that vowel. Olapb. is here a movable consonant according to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.l. Rem.4.;also Gesenius* Heb. Gram, by Conant, 23.2). d) Y,3. W.5., (the first one) is pure f as 1 being a movable consonant does not quiesce in _L (vid. last referen- ces). e) Y.3. W.7., is pure as O is movable, cri being sound- ed as if it had Sheva, and forming a part of the syllable. /) y.3. W.9., is pure and immutable as 01 does not quiesce in it, being a guttural (comp. Tf I. 2. a). g) Y.4. W.5., is pure as wiA is a dipthong (vid. a above). h) Y.7. W.3., is pure as Ol is a guttural. i) Y.7. W.9., is pure as Ol is = ^ in Hebrew and is of course a movable consonant (vid. 13.Eem. JL is also mu- table according to the general rule (T6. 2. Eem.). 2. Find the Impure vowels : 9vPP^px!>i>P p-nppOPP^O EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., and are both impure vowels as they have j> quiescing in them. f j_ is also immutable ( ^ 6. 4 ). 270 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR. /) V.l. W.3., is impure as 1 quiesces in it (compare T 6. 1. e). V c) V.l. w.ll., is impure asOlaph quiesces init,thougli it does not often quiesce in that vowel ( 13. 1 and Rem.). The other cases are similarly explained. Rem. As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mut- able and those which are impure are immutable ; but there are as in Hebrew many exceptions (vid.^ 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i). 3. Find the Mutable vowels (compare 1" 6. 2 Rem.) : ' ^i _ _ .^_ _ ^ EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 10., is mutable (also pure, according to the general rule (vid. ^ 6. 1. c ) as it is in a simple sylla- ble (compare T 6. 4. d). b) Y.S. W.2., is mutable as it has no quiescent and is long. c) V.4. \v.2., is mutable as it is in a simple sylla- ble. 4. Find the Im7nutaUe vowels : I, Jl, I o * ^ JL I p p 1_ _ p p X P . r, I p X p p P ^ X P p p f> p P 7 9 - I ^ ^ r p p 4^ > P X p 7 7 X P p 7 P p X P p P p p ^ P 7 7 ^ " 9 I 9 v p p r 7 v I p j;_ _-_ _L-1 EXERCISE SEVENTH DIPTHONGS. 271 PPP P0900I0C0P EXPL A.NATIONS. Rem. Those vowels are immutable,as in Hebrew ; in which either a vowel letter quiesces; or from which a vowel letter has fallen away; short vowels in mixed syllables which would inHebrew takeDaghesh forte; and vowels immutable by nature. a) Yerse 1. word 1., are both immutable as well as impure, having quiescents. b) y.l. W.2., is in a simple syllable, is pure, and cannot properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces with it to some extent (vid. T"4.2.Ilem. ; T5.1.c; TfG.l.a). t c) Y.I.W.4., over So is immutable by position as li\i^ is derived from Wd a ^1L verb, and the i^ is in reality doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea occultans. This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and makes, as in that language, the preceding vowel impure and immutable (compare 48.B.Feminines), d) Y.l. w.lO., is short but in a simple syllable ( To. 1 . g) and consequently not immutable. e) Y.l. w.lO., (the first one) is immutable by nature (48. A. Masculines) ; it is sometimes, however, like all the other vowels, mutable (vid.g 15.1.b ; 45.2.b) as in Hebrew (vid. Stuarts' Heb. Gram. 127). /) Y.l. w.ll, is immutable as 1 quiesces in it ( T 6. 2. c). g) Y.o. W.I., is immutable as it is in a short mixed syllable. 272 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEKCISE SEVENTH. 1 7. Find the Dipthongs, Quiescents and Otiant Letters {^S.BemA ; 13; 14). I. Find tlie Dipthongs ( 3. Kern. 4 ; Palfrey's Gram. 2) : 7 7 7 7 " 7 7 7 7 O... 0-1- 0.^1^ O.. 0.1- ji... .k.. ji o.^ EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 1. word 2., o is a dipthong as o is in the same syllable with JL without fully quiescing in it, though O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be consider- ed as ending in a vowel sound (vid. T"4.2.Kem.; ^"5. 1. c and 1 ; Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant, 8. 4). 6) V'3. W.4., o is a dipthong for the same reason as last. c) y.4. W.5., A is a dipthong as a unites with _ but does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above). Rem. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels ; but in Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in Syriac. 2. Find the Quiescents : - . ^ iioi ^1 ni -1 ou - 1- - u innn-oQiioaia)ann] a EXERCISE SEVENTH OTIANTS. 273 uiu EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 1. word 1., * is a quiescent as it unites with the sound of the preceding vowel (13.3). 5) Y.l. W.2., o is a regular quiescent letter; bat does not here fully quiesce, though it forms a dipthong and so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending with a vowel sound (vid. TT.l.a). c) Y.l. W.3., o is not quiescent as it is a movable conson- ant, 01 not being sounded. The following | however qui- esces in the preceding vowel. d) Y-1. W.5., o (the first one) is movable as it would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva ; the second o quiesces in_L e) Y.l. W.9., Q does not quiesce in as it is movable (vid. 16.1. b). /) Y.l. w.ll., 1 quiesces in though it is rather un- usual (13. l.Eem.). g) Y.3. W.2., ( quiesces m > * 3. Find the Otiant Letters a) Yerse 1. word 2., *^ is otiant as it is a part of the suf- fix and is not followed by ooi (vid. 14. 2. b). h) Y.3, W.2., - is otiant because it follows a quiescent. 5^74 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEECISE EIGHTH. 1 8. FindLinece Marhetono Q^(J\'^)^ Mehagyono (]la...OlLD), and JSheva, where iJiere is no accumulation of consonants. 1. Find instances of MarTietono and Mehagyono : EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 5. word 7., > ? Here is an accumulation of con- sonants, and to indicate that they could not all be sounded con- veniently, Marhetdno (or a horizontal line) would regularly be placed over > In this case the J would in Hebrew take silent Sheva. J must of course be pronounced with a vocal Sheva (vid.7). Rem. 1. There seems to be no instance of Mehagyono on the first page. A.T.IIoffmann in his SyriacGrammar gives (AXisa) as an instance. The ^ is to be sounded as though a short e followed it (vid. 1). Rem. 2. It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when t here is an accumulation of vowelless consonants,but under no other circumstances, though silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as in Hebrew. So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only when there is a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though when there is no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs. 2. Find instances of Simple vocal Sheva : EXERCISE EIGHTH VOCAL SHEVA. 275 EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 1., O would, in Hebrew, take a vocal Sheva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid of a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva. This can- not be considered as an instance of Mehagydno, for there is no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels (vid. 7). According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians did use the Sheva and pronounced consonants ac- cordingly, as in Hebrew (vid. 5.1). h) Y. 1. W.4., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal She- va like d under a (vid. references above). Rem. We find no characters to indicate Sheva and seldom any to indicate Marhetono and Mehagyoiio, still we are to pronounce the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we should if they had actually appeared. c) Y.3. W.5., a is pronouncod with a Sheva. The pre- ceding syllable being simple^ 2) belongs to the final syll- able. d) V.3. W.9., oi makes a part of the first syllable of the word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva. e) Y,Q. W.3., is pronounced with a vocal Sheva as it constitutes a part of the penultimate syllable, being preceded by a long vowel ( 15.4). /) Y.9. W.9., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal Sheva (vid. last reference). 3. Find tlie silent Shevas, where there is no ac cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels : A2A2^oiZi^oioi,i:ii5?oi;>^oi^m? EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., A would regularly in Hebrew take a 276 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAM^IAR. silent Sheva (vid. Conants' Gesen. Ileb.Gram. 10 ; also ^S. 2. a. b and Eem.). h) y.l. W.2., O would in Hebrew take a silent Sbeva, be- ing a movable consonant at the end of a syllable ; but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel, that the syllable may be con-, fiidered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not take silent Sheva (vid. T" 4. 2. Eem. ; comp. references above). c) Y.3. W.I., Stakes silent Sheva as it closes a sylla- ble. (T) V.3. W.2., Ol is a movable consonant at the end of a syllable being equivalent to jtj in Hebrew and takes silent Sheva. e) Y.3. W.9., CJl is at the end of a mixed syllable with a short vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid. T"8.4:.d; I'G.l.f ; comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, 22. 3). /) V.4. W.5., u forms with the vowel a dipthong. It would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant and take a silent Sheva ; but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable con- sonant and does not tnke a silent Sheva (vid. ^4. 2. Eem.; 18.3.b). g) Y.9.W.5., - takes a silent Sheva as it is preceded by a short vowel and ends the antepenultimate syllable. 4. Find instances of Composite Sheva : 01aOIO1G1G1O101G1O1G1G1O101G1* a) Yerse 3. word.3., Ol would in Hebrew take a compo- site Sheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid. Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Conant, 22. 3 ; T1.2.a). h) Yerse 3. w.6., ** takes composite sheva for similar rea- sons as in the case above. EXERCISE NINTH LINEA OCCULTANS 277 r) y.3.w.9., 01 does not take composite Sheva but silent Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva (Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,22.3). (/)Y.4. W.6., 01 takes composite Sheva (vid. a above). EXEKCISE NINTH. t 9. Find instances of Linea Occultans (8) : 01010101010I0101010101* EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 2., 01 is an instance of Linea occultans, indicating that the Ol is not sounded (vid. 8; 12.1. A. and B., also Eem.). h) Y.l. W.3., 01 is another instance of Linea occultans. The horizontal line under 01 shows that the letter is not to be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The othe cases are similarly explained. 19 278 EXERgiSES in syeiac grammar. EXERCISE TENTH. t 10. Find on wliat Syllables the Tone rests ( 9) : ZuA w*l" loCTi Ld 0010 So wV looi Zol '1 '1 Jf ]6ai ooi Ld oi v^l fooi Zua Zq^ ik \^ oi^ (ooi i 1 1^^. lOOl SDr Cl> Ol-TD >s jOOl >* .OOl QJ 1 0010 QJ QA JOl ^ QA U Ol-D (OOl J >J ^ ^ OISD* ^1 Ol 1 0> JOl \^ QJ *J. ^LO Olp U 001 loOl QJ I JOl ^ Q-J w1 lOOl ^.. Q-j ; JOl ^A-1 Ij 1^ iQ jooi :i.o oiy (001 10 U oui EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., Aim istlie final syllable and takes the tone because it ends with a movable consonant ( 9.1 and 2). b) Y.l. W.2., w( takes the tone, as o in the final syllable oA is not movable (vid. ^4. 2. Eem.; ^8. 3. b ; 9.1 and 2). 01 and t^ are not sounded. c) Y.l. W.4., li> is the penultimate syllable and has the tone according to the general rule (9.1). ' d) Y.8. W.2., Olc is the final syllable and takes the tone because oi is movable. EXERCISE ELEVENTH MARKS OF PUNCTUATION. 279 e) Y.3. W.5., I is the penultimate and takes the tone. 2) belongs to the last syllable (15. 4. d). /) Y.4. AV.5., tOOi takes the tone because it ends with a movable consonant. g) Y.o. W.3., Qm is inserted above as receiving the tone according to the general rule, though it is somewhat doubt- ful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or ultimate syllable (9. 1. Rem.). Euphony would seem to favor the former opinion; there is another instance of the same kind in v.7. w.3. EXERCISE ELEVENTH. 1 11. Find the Marks of Punctuation (10) : * A. * * *>* *. EXPLANATION'S. a) Yerse 1. word 4., is a mark of punctuation more gen- erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps to our comma. It is used so here (l0.d). b) Y.l. W.15., denotes the full close of the period. c) Y.5. W.4., '. indicates the end of the protasis (^lO.a). d) Y.5. W.7., is supposed to indicate the longest pause of any mark of punctuation. It is sometimes written thus :: (PO.c). c) Y.B. W.5., / indicates the end of the apodosis(vid.10.c). 280 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEKCISE TWELFTH. t 12. Find instances of Hihui (6) : EXPLANATIONS. rt) Yerse 3. word 4., " over the word is an instance of Ribui indicating that the preposition has a plural suffix ( 6.]. Rem.; 16.0). h) V.4. W.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over which it is placed is in the plural number though it is ren- dered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only in the plural form (44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect to V.4. W.4. c) Y.4.W.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of tho noun as above. EXERCISE THIRTEENTH. 1 13. Head the Syriac : Yerse 1.. B^rishith aithau vo meletho v^iu m^ltho aithau vo l^voth aloho. valoho aithau vo hu melHho. EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 281 V. 2., hono aithau vo vVishith lvoth aloho. V. 3., kul bidheh lilivo vVel'odhau opMo hhMho hh^voth niedh^m dahlivo. V. 4., beh. hhaye lili*vo. v^hhaye aithayhuu nuh*'ro dhavnaynoslio. " / / / / / / V. 5., vliu nuh^ro v^hhesliuko manhar*. v^hheshuko lo adhAeli^ V. 6., lihvo varnoslio dheshtadhar men alolio v sliin6h yuhhanon. V. 7., liono etho l^'soh^dliutlio dlinashedh al nuh'ro. d^kulnosh n^aymen b'idheh. V. 8 , lo bu b^vo nub^ro. elo db^nasbedb al nub**ro. / / / / / / V. 9.5aitbau VO ger nubro dhasbroro-.db^manbar l^ulnosh / - . .. detbo polmo. V. 10.,bolmo bvo. volmo vidbebbvo.volmo lo yadheli. EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 1., ^'t^ is tbe first syllable, O not mak- ing a syllable of itself. Tbe answers to tbe Sbeva in He- brew, and is pronounced like a very sbort e. Z*) Y. 1. w. 2., J is perbaps best pronounced like ai', tbougb tbe a sound is scarcely perceivable. ^ In oA, o bav- ing a beterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so melts into tbe vowel tbat it can bardly be considered as a 282 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRA^TMAR. movable consonant (vid If4:.2.Eem.). ,01 is not sonniod as it takes Linea occultans (8) and the w is otiant ( 14. 2). c) V.l. W.3 , loqi* 01 is not sounded on account of Linea occultans, aiid o becomes vocal by beginning a syllable. d) Y.l. w.lO., I is pronounced a. Olapb so unites with the a sound that it is scarcely "perceivable in pronun- ciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a regular movable consonant. It is at the same time a gut- tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks (vid. T1.2.Ilem.). _ 7 e) V.l. w.ll., |0 _L is pronounced broad and hng as it has a quiescent (glS.l.Kem.). /) Y.3. W.I., ^^ is pronounced thus : kul, u taking the broad and short sound. The _!. is short here as it has no quiescent (vid. 3. Rem. 3). g) V.3.W.2., Oi,..a]o bidheh. 1 quiesces in _L, and ^ is otiant. Ol is a movable consonant though a guttural letter. h) V.3.VV.4., vVel^othau. ^ must be sounded with a vocal Sheva (vid. T^8.2). r being preceded by a vowel is as- pirated. - as well as Ol {s otiant. .. r> 7 - i) y.3. W.9., (ooij dahhvo. ^ is movable and pronoun- ced with the first syllable. _L has a broad and short sound. y ) Y.4. W.5., wiA thay . is short and broad as it has no quiesceri't though *a so melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. T 4. 2. Rem.). ' h) V.6.W.I., fooi hh70. 01 is pronounced with Sheva. is vocal and l quiescep in J_> EXERCISE FOURTEENTH TRANSLATION. 283 EXEECISE FOURTEENTn. 1 14 Trarislate Literally : Verse 1. In (the) beginning was (the) Word and he (or- it the) Word was with God and God was he or it (the) Word. 2. This was in (the) beginning with God. 3. Every (thing) by (the) hand of him was ; and without him also not anything was which was. 4. In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was (lit. lives were) (the) light of (the) sons of man. 5. And he (or it) light, into (the) darkness, shin- eth (lit. causing or permitting to shine 23.2.(2.^), and (the) darkness did not comprehend it. 6. (There) was a son of man, who was sent from God, whose name (lit. the name of him) (was) John. 7. This (man) came for a witness, who shall (should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that eve- ry man might believe through (the) hand of him. 8. He was not (lit. not he was) (the) light ; but (came for a witness) who might bear witness concern- ing (the) light. 284 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 9. For (tliat light) was (the) light of truth, which shine th upon every man, who cometh into (the) world. 10. (He) was in (the) world (lit. in the world was) and (the) world was by his hand and (the) world did not know him. EXPLANATIONS: .IX a) Yerse 1. word 1., Llm^^S^* In translating this word, the is supplied. There is no distinct character in Syriac for the definite article. It was originally expressed by the noun in the emphatic state ; but this is by no means uni- versal in laterSyriac. There are many cases, as in Hebrew, in which the definite and indefinite articles have no word nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied in translating (45.1). b) Y-^- W.2 and3., looi ^(Jiotu] was. The substan- tive verb (OOl io 6e,in connection with the other substantive verb Lk] to he, (third person masculine wiOloAjil) forms the imperfect tense, was (38.1,2). c) Y.l. W.5., oqio* 001 is a pronoun of the masculine gender. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered (55). As the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine and feminine OOl might be considered either as neuter or masculine and may mean he or it (43). d) Y.3. W.3., fOOi is rendered i^"a5, and is in the imperfect without aOioA-il (vid. 65.B.a). e) Y.3. W.7., i.001 is rendered was, same as last. The same is true in respect to |oai> (v. 3. w.9). /) Y.3. W.6., TrM and y>jLk) (v.3. w.8) should be taken tof^etlier. The first means amj and the second someiUing or EXERCISE FIFTEENTH CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 285 thing. Taken together they should be rendered any Itiing. g) Y.4. W.2., (.JuAA is rendered life. The noun always takes the plural form though it usually takes a singular meaning and has sometimes a singular and sometimes a plu- ral verb. Here it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.i, a verb plural. w 7 h) Y.5. W.4., SouLo is a participle ; but it is used instead of the present tense of the verb (64.2. A. andRem. ; also T 18.5). i) Y.Q. W.3., >?Alj means (lit.) is sent; but with loOT it forms the imperfect tense. EXERCISE FIFTEENTH. TF 15. Find the Changes of Consonants Assimilated Transposed Dropped Added Exchanged (12). 1. Find those which are changed by aesimUor lion : All of those l^.tters which take Linea occultans, are in re- ality assimilated (vid. 12. and ^9). 2. Find those whicli are changed by transposi- tion : EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 6. ^vord 3., JjA^lj is in the Ethpa. conjugation 286 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR. and and A are transposed, the appropriate plaoe for A be ing before* (12.2). 3. Find those Consonants wticli have been dropped : inniinnnv* EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 4., lAj^ is from ]]!sD, const. A^k3 1 is dropped. 6) V.3. W.2., aip-.i]r:) 1 final is dropped to give place for the suffix. c) V.8. W.7., Zooi^ 1 is dropped to form the feminine (87 Table). 7 7 . d) YA. W.7., )a1 aiiOi* 1 is dropped before the second J. e) V.o. W.4., jOULd* ] is dropped after the preforma- tive ^* f) Y.7. W.7., and v.9. w. 7., ^Ai!ij 1 is dropped be- fore l g) y.7. W.8., ^-ScuoiJ. 1 is dropped before So* 4. Find consonants wliicli are added : a 1 ^a\o lA o 1A 1 woio 1 o 1 ] ^^oio lA 1 ^oio Q 1 iD 1 Ol O ^C310 IZjOlloll ^OOU 1 ? 1 O IidISdoII oiV?1 A"! cnLl jjI j woij o 1 en 1 J J 1 1 .-oio IjljkjljllciloliD 1 01 1 CFl EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., L^^^d* a is added as a prefix. EXERCISE FIFTEENTH CHANGES OF CONSONANTS 287 h) Y.l. W.2., wfcOioLf. 1 is prosthetic (38.1). ^aio is a suffix. c) Y.l. W.4., IA^Ld* a is added from the construct state and 1 is added because the word is in the emphatic state. d) Y.l. w.IO., laCL 1 is added at the end to form the emphatic state (^18.^). e) Y.2. W.I., V>cn* Perhaps 1 should be considered as ad- ded here because (JOi seems to be a kind of emphatic state of #01, thougb we have omitted | above as the word usual- ly appears in the emphatic form. /) Y.3.W.6 ,]r*^* l^is added to form the feminine. ^)Y.3. W.7., Lo^* Z is added to form the feminine. h) Y.4. W.2., V-l.iKj 1 is added to form the emphatic state i) Y.4. W.5., ^ocyuA^I* ^oou is added in the course of inflection and "j at tlie beginning is prosthetic (38). k) Y.4.W.6., lioiQJ* 1 is added to form the emphatic state (118. .V). I) Y.5. ty.3., loQA>ll5 1 is added to form the emphatic state. m) Y.5. W.4., )OULd So is a preformative occurring ia the course of inflection. n) Y.5. W.7., ouij?!* 1 is added in the Aphel conjuga- tion. o) Y.6. W.3., >?A1? A and 1 are added in the course of ' inflection (comp. [15.2. a). p) Y.7. W.4., >ai m./i* J is a preformative. 288 EXERCISES IN SYR [AC GRAMMAR. q) y.7. W.8 , ^-SLfeOU* i-iOU is added in tlie course of in- flection. r) V.8. W.6., >ai.m.J>* J is added in the course of inflec- tion. s) Y.9. W.9., ]V) \\\ 1 is added to form the emphatic state. 5. Find Consonants exchanged for each other : There are no cases on page first. 1 is often exchanged for 1 before 01 and vice versa. Other letters also exchange with each other (12.4). EXEECISE SIXTEENTH. 1 16. * Find the changes of vowels ikrovjn bach exchanged trans- posed dropped and added ( 15). 1. Find those which are thrown back : ___ __ __ ^ ^ EXPLANATIONS: a) Yersel. word 2., wiOToZuV JL is thrown back from ^ tol(l5.2.A.b; 13,1.8). h) Y.l. W.7., .-iOTO^l same as above. EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 289 c) Y.l. w.ll., loiiLo. _L is thrown back from ] to d) Y.3. W.2., ai|a(rD* ^ is thrown back from | to a on account of the suffi'x. e) Y.5. W.4., jOUSiD* ] the characteristic of Aphel is drop- ped and its vowel -^ falls back upon the preformative of the participle So (23. 1). /) V.6. W.3., J>A1>^ JL is thrown back from 1 to > g) Y.IO. W.8., ouipl* ^ falls back from , to ^ (36; 1 18.37), as the vowel _!. of the original form ^j-^ is dropped and a suffix appended (T[16.2. e, and4i ; ^18.37). 2. Find those which are exchanged : I 7 * 7 -w 7 . for , for , for . EXPLANATIONS: n I V 7 a) Yerse 3. word 2., oipp3 is derived from p is dropped and _f_ added in the course of inflection and ^ is thrown back from 1 to Q (T16.1.C?) the .word here being in the suffix state. Some would prefer to say that is chang- ed into JL, (116.4. c and 5. d). h) Y.4. W.7., \m\ im? is changed into in the con- struct plural (45.2.a; ^18.1). 7 ? * c) Y.5. W.4., >CTUiD In the second syllable, is changed into , as the third radical of the verb from which jOULd is derived, is Eesh (23.1). f> 7 7 > * d) Y.7. W.8., ^-SOaCTU is derived from ^N ischang- ed into , and in the last part, into m passing from Peal to Aphel. But it is better to say that is dropped 290 EXERCISES IS SYRIAC GRAMMAR. and added in one case, and dropped and added in the other (lfl6.4.h; 5.r). e) V.lO. W.8., Ol-lr ^ is derived from ^i , and has the appearance of being changed into Jl. on account of the suffix (86.A.Rem.) ; but _^ is dropped and JL thrown back upon *a (116.1..7 and 4.&; T18.37). 3. Find those vowels, whichi are transposed : X -Js *> Ov ^ 9v EXPLANATIONS. jOlQj from JOU or JOOIJ* with O is transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the first part of the word (vid.T'18.?/). The other cases are all similarly explained. 4. Find those vowels which are dropped : pyp7P7707I'^'^-n75'P y 7 1 7 EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 2., .-aioZU| -has an additional syllable ^qio ; but the original vowel is not dropped as a quiesces in it making it immutable (vid.l5.3 ; 48. A). />) Y.l W.4., lAi^ is derived from jJlD, construct Ai^ JL is dropped to form the construct state and _!_ of the con- struct state is dropped in the emphatic state because the ad- EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 29 1 ditional syllable | is added (vid.15.3; compare ^16.5.6). c) V.3. W.2., CFijuV-O is derived from r*^ is dropped and from the emphatic state, is dropped to give place to the suffix (compare % 16.6.d). ^ . . . 7 7 d) Y.3. W.6., fr^ is the feminine form of ^a** is drop- ped (vid. 116.5.7). P p ..7 7 X e) V.4. W.7., t i i i in n is dropped from the plural ab- 7 solute of jlIQ in passing into the construct state (vid. 15.3, andEem.; ^I6.6.z; T'18.1). /) V.5. W.7., OlDJjl is Aphel of j^jj with a suffix pro- noun. In taking the suffix, of the verb is dropped and of the suffix added (vid. Il6.5.m ; 118.7). g) V.7. W.B., lAojcJiCQ^ is in the feminine emphatic state, "^ p It from the noun >OlDD, and, in the course of inflection is dropped (vid.li6.5.p; ll8.17). h) V.7. W.8., ^SOaOU is a verb from ^Sd], and is in the Aphel conjugation. In the course of inflection, in the first part of the word is dropped and in the last part, and other vowels added (vid.T[16.5. r; ^f 18.22). i) V.9. W.5., p^J is compounded of ? and p^* The latter 7 7 , is a noun in the emphatic state from ; falls away in taking an additional syllable (^15. 3) to form the emphatic st?.te (vid. 1 16. 5. .9 ; 1 18.32). h) V.9.W.9., ISQ^ki^ is compounded of ^ and ]V>S>S, em- phatic state from ^a^l is dropped in forming the em- phatic state (15.3"^ as an additional syllable is received (^ IQ.b.t', fl8.36). * 7 I) V.IO W.8., ail,-a is a verb with a suffix, derived from 292 EXERCISES IN" SYRIAC GRAMMAR. ^r-rf* In taking the suffix, is dropped and falls back upon the first radical (36 ; ^"18. 87V 5. Find those vowels whicli are added : r0077f7l'^rfi7f>r*s0779 oro7'>pi>rpvp7or'>i f7P 700 f I 'ts ff It EX PL AN ATIONS 7. .X 7 a) Verse 1. word 2., wOToA^l is added in the course of inflection as a part of the sufformative of the verb. h) V.l. W.4., lA^Lo is in the emphatic state from the con- struct state AjikSo* is dropped and added (compare ^ 16.4.6 ; 11^. d). c) Y.l. w.lO., ]oi!^ is in the emphatic state, but as it al- ways appears in this state it is perhaps better not to place (at the end of the word) among the vowels added. ct) Y.3. W.2., Cir-jito is derived from f^* is dropped and a new vowel, , added. Then from the emphatic state Ip-^I, is dropped to give place to the suffix with which _L is added (vid. 46. 1. a ; compare lf 16. 4. c ; T 18. m). e)Y.8. w. 4.^ >jigo,\\oo is from yl!io is added with the suffix. /) V.3. W.6., IfAA is the feminine form for r** is drop pc'd and ^ added. EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 293 ooij, is assumed over > to aid in the pronunciation (vid.T"18.^). h) Y.4. W.6., 1)0103 is derived from JOU or 90au* is added in the emphatic state (vid.TflS.?/). i) V.4. W.7., fal jinn at the beginning of the word is assumed (vid.l5.4.6). The remainder of the word is com- pounded of aIO and }aJ|^ The former is in the construct plural, andjin passing from the absolute to the construct plural, is dopped and added (vid. 15.3 and 4 ; Tl6. 4. e; T 18.1). k) V.5. W.3., pQaj>Q This is from yiQAA* though the emphatic state is the more usual form* _L is added. ,7 7 I) Y.5. W.4., )ailliD. This is a participle active, Aphel, 7 7 , from >OlJ. The first is assumed, forming a part of the preformative (vid.^ 1 8.5). -, ^7 m) V.5. W.7., OlOjjl is a verb in the Aphel conjugation from ySy* is assumed in the preformative. is also assumed with the suffix (vid.Tl6.4./; Tl8.7). n) V.B. W.2., \^\^ is in the emphatic state and is ad- ded (vid.ll8.9). o) Y.^. W.3., >jA1? is compounded of j and the verb j>Al" Ethpaal from 5p is added as a part of the pre- formative. The first _!_ is assumed in the course of inflection in Ethpaal. p) Y.7. W.3., lAojOiai^ is in the feminine emphatic state from ^a\sa* In the course of inflection and are added and i. is dropped (vid.l" 1 6.4.^' ; ^IS l7). q) Y!J. W.4., JOimJj is compounded of the relative j and ' 20 * 294: EXEIiCJSES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. the verb jOIQQJ, Apliel of joiflo^ is assumed in Aphel in the course of inflection (vid. 18.18). r) V.7.W.8., ^SOkCTU is a verb in the Aphel conjugation from ^S)0|* In the course of inflection, in the first part of the word is dropped and added, and in the latter part of the word, is dropped and added (T16.4. A ; Tl8. 22). j'rBJ is compounded of j and I>;* The latter is a noun in the emphatic state from ;s or yfM* If considered as derived from the former, _I_ is dropped on ac- count of the additional syllable (l5.3),and, in consequence, M} having no vowels, y takes the new vowel JL (15. 4. h). _L is also added to form the emphatic state (vid. Tf 1 6.4. i ; 1"I8.32). t) Y.9. W.9., |Sq\s^ is compounded of i^ and ) ^\s , em- phatic state from V)\s is dropped in forming the 'em- phatic state as a syllabic is added (15.3), and _L is assumed (vid.Tl6.4.^; 1" 18.36). EXEECISE SEVENTEENTH. 1 17. Find the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformaiives and Preforma- lives {%\Q; 36; 46). 1. Find the Prefixes : CiOQCiCiQ'iCiQ'iOCiQy^y'i^y^y EXERCISE SEVENTEEXTH SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES. 295 ^ I L o o o o * EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., o is a prefix preposition. h) V.3. W.2., iD is a prefix preposition with the vowel thrown back upon it. c) y.8. W.9., > > is a relative pronoun prefixed to the verb, and, two vowelless consonants occurring together, _L is assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need no explanation. 2. Find the Suffixes : Ol.. t^OIOi Ol_ (TL^ 01 01..^ Gl_ G1-. * EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 3. word 2., OL is a suffix pronoun with its union vowel. * ^ b) Y.3. W.4., wiOio., is a suffix pronoun added to a prepo- sition, though the same form when attached to Lt] is a suf- formative. Rem. We use the terms sufFormative and preform ative to indi- cate those letters which are suffixed or prefixed to words as neces- sary appendages in order to form particular conjugations, tenses, moods, persons, numbers, gender*^ or states, according to the course of inflection. Such are mere formative letters and properly consti- tute a part of the word to which they are attached, while suffixes and prefixes are appendages which have more distinct significations of themselves, and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to which they are attached. 296 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 3. Find tlie PreformaUves : Lo V ^ T -J -^CTU -J Ld EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 2., 1 is, strictly speaking, a preformative , but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through all of its changes and does not so properly come under this head as it does under "consonants added" (^15.4.6). h) V.5. W.4., ^ is a preformative added in the course of inflection. c) V.5. W.7., I is a preformative added in the Aphel con- jugation. d) Y.^, W.3., A ^ are preformative letters added in the Ethpaal conjugation. e) Y.7. W.8., jOU is a preformative added in the Aphel future. 4. Find the Svfformatives : EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 1. word 2., *^OTO is a sufformative as it forms, according to the inflection, the third person singular mascu- line preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached to the original noun Aji heing. h) Y.l. W.4., lA is the sufformative ending of the empha- tic state, or rather 1 is the ending of the emphatic state EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH PARSE. 297 and A of the construct from which the emphatic ia formed. c) V.3. W.6., 1 is the emphatic ending. d) y.3. W.7., I takes the place of 1 and is a formative letter in constituting the feminine gender. e) Y.4. W.5., ^OCTU ig a sufformative found in the course of inflection. /) Y.4. W.7., 1 is the ending of the emphatic state. g) Y.6. W.2., ] is an emphatic ending. EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH. t 18. a) Yerse 1. word 1., Ajju;Q is compounded of the pre- position ^ in and the noun AjljuS beginning. O is a pre- position governing i\jLA^> in the ablative case ( 75.5 ; 52 ; 84). L^y is a denominative noun (41) from the root M^j principal^ chief, head (Hebrew "^jj^'-i Chaldee '^J&^l ) formed by adding to its root the formative letters Ll. (^39.2). The vowel is added and aids to form the syllable Lk (15.4; 13.3). LamI^ is of the first declension as its vowels are im- mutable (48. A) though it is somewhat irregular in its in- flection (see its plural) third person, singular number(44). 298 EXERCISES IN SYKIAC GRAMMAR. Aa.ju>, plural (AA.mj)^ The two points over h in the plural compose Eibui. The point belonging to y still belongs to > and at the same time is part of Eibui (6.2.Rem.) feminine gender as it is the same as in Hebrew and is transferred from that language (43.2.Rem.2). It ends also in lA a feminine termination in the emphatic slate, | being the regular em- phatic termination (vid. last reference and 45.3. Z>). In the absolute state the form is A^ifcaJ, emphatic 1A.*^J ( 45 j in the ablative case after the preposition Q and governed by it (75.5). b) Y.l. W.2., ^010Aa| is an auxiliary verb from A ^ I to he (vid.Lexicon). A a*) is formed from the noun A^ being, vritn a prosthetic ( uOloAu'| is irregular takes the noun suffix wOlo_, as it is derived from a noun, though that suffix is here to be considered as a suffiarmative (T 17.4. a; T 17.2. Rem.) neuter ( 66.2 ; 19) singular number (88.1.Para- digm) third person (38. 1. Paradigm) masculine gender (vid.last reference) indicativemood(65.1 ; compare (18.4) preterite imperfect tense,as looi immediately follows(18.4. Rem.; 38.2;68.A). Inflect to the person where it is found. First person common gender *^A^1 (/am), second masculine ^Zul {thou art\ second feminine > i n hLk\ {thou ar^),' third masculine .-lOloA^I {he is) (vid. 38.1. Inflection). It agrees with its nominative lAl^ji, though of a different gender (80. B.2). c) Y.l. W.8., looi is a substantive verb signifying to b(' (38.1) a ]]'verb(38. 1) irregular (32)neuter ( 19) third personsingular number. When used with another verb it has the effect of Yau conversive in Hebrew 38. 1) EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 299 masculine gender and used here merely as a jielping verb to the preceding, in forming the imperfect tense(38^). d) Y.l. W.4., IALSjD word is a substantive noiln, derived from ^iSio to speak^ forming in the absolute state (^Vn (yid. 39. 2. h, third example ), construct state A\v> emphatic IaIsd first declension (45.feminines A; 48.B. feminines; T" 6. 4. c). Decline. Singular (vid.above) plural absolute, ^!io, construct Aiio, emphatic IASid ( 45. 3) third per- son singular feminine emphatic state nominative case to looi wiOloLr(80.B.2). e) y.l. W.5., 0010 is compounded of the conjunction O and the pronoun ooi* o is a copulative conjunction (53. 1) a prefix (53. 1. Rem.). It connects the two nouns. 001 may be translated by he or i\ as the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine and feminine (T 14. c; 43) a personal pronoun separate (16) third person sing- ular. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered in transla- ting (55). For explanations of the next three words vid. supra. f) y.l. W.9., Lcl^ wii\ a preposition governing (oCL (52; 84). g) y.l. w.lO., loi!lL God taken from the Hebrew ^j:^'' and that probably derived from ^jj^ God. niii^ is a de- nominative noun taking the Syriac emphatic terminanon 1 is the ending of a large number of Syriac nouns, s )m'^- times indicating the feminine and sometimes the emphatic state (43.2; 45.3). Some nouns always appear in the em- phatic or suffix state ( 45.1.Rem.). loilL has the form of 300 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. the emphatic state. It is a substantive noun and may be 7 declined like 2^it (Decl. 1. 45.masculines A) ^third person singular-masculine-emphatic state ablative case and gov* erned by icA (75.5). li) Y.l. w.ll., IotlLo* O a?ic7, is a prefix conjunction oon- tinning the sense, foi-^ God^ is in the nominative to loqi ^oioZul (80). For further explanations vid. supra. i) Y.1.W.14., ogi is a pleonastic pronoun (vid. si/pra). y) V.l. W.15., IALLd word^ is in the nominative after 1bqi^qioLf(80; tlS.Z/). k) Y.2. W.I., (JOl this^ same. It has the form of the em- phatic state though it should be considered as one of the original forms of the word. The forms are ^01 and poi (17) a demonstrative pronoun ^singular-masculine-nomi- native case to foqi woioAji] (80) used as a noun. Decline it (vid.17). I) Y.3. W.I., ^^ all^ every ^ each, (58.B.2.(3r,7;) a pronoun used as an adjective (58.B.2.5) the noun thing to which it belongs being implied declined according to decl. 1. of nouns ^third person-masculine-absolute state. The im- plied noun would be in the nominative to ] OCT; or ^^ itself might be considered as a collective noun and in the nomi native to loOl (80. A. 1 and Eem.). m) Y.3. W.2., CTpi^o hy the hand of him or by his hand Q is a prefix preposition governing jji] The whole word 7 is compounded of the preposition Q by, the noun r-> empha- tic f,-i| ha7id,SLnd the suffix CT. of him or his. ,-*!-. is a de- rivative noun (39), from r- and takes a suffix (Hebrew ^n EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. SOI Chaldee^^)-2nd.declension-singular. Absolute and constr.^, emphatic Ipiljpluralabsolute^ri), construct ^,^1, emphatic Mr-^l third singular masculine (45. masculines B) abla- tive case and governed by O (75.5). Oi., is a suffix pro- noun attached to the emphatic state and f falls away (46. 1 . c)-third singular masculine (16. Table) genitive case (54. B.2) and governed by p.]l (16 ; 16.B; 74). n) Y.3.W.3., (ooi to he is here rendered was, the imperfect being sometimes thus formed (65). It agrees with ^i^ c) Y.3. W.4., ^aiOrl^20 and without him compounded of the conjunction O, the preposition ,S\o, and the suffix pronoun wiCTlo^* O and^ is a conjunction as above. ,sSo without is a preposition with a suffix. It governs its suffix wfeOio..* *aOiO-. him, is a noun suffix - plural (16.Table) third singular masculine ablative case and governed by ^^ (^75.5). j9) V.3. W.5., Pal also not, neither compounded of U not, and Si\ oho. si\ is a conjunction(53.2.) and continues the sense. U not is an adverb and qualifies Lo(j\* q) V.3. w.^., Ir** one, any one, a certain one, certain, any, from r^, is a pronoun (58.10.a and b) or a numerical adjec- tive (50.2). Here it has the sense of an indefinite pronoun singular feminine and belongs like an adjective to the noun ^]j^ (58.10.a). ?')y.3.w.7., Zoc?l to he from looi* 1 is changed into Z to form the feminine (l9.Table). Imperfect and parsed like 001 (vid. n. supra) 302 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. ft T> s) V.3. W.8., ^r ^ ^y thing, has a similar meaning to that of (p>* above ; but has more the sense of a noun. It is sometimes used in the same manner as |rM (58.10.6). It is used here as a noun meaning ihrng, and I^m belongs to it, as tlie pause between |oOl and ^^^Sd is one of minor impor- tance (|f ll.c; 10)-third singular feminine-absolute state- nominative case to Loot (80). ty r 001 J which was compounded of (ocri and j > which is a relative pronoun ( l7.2) is in the third singu- lar nominative to looi* u) Y.4. W.I., OL^iD in him, compounded of a in and Ol- hii7i, O is a preposition, governing the ablative (75.5); OU is a suffix pronoun ( iG.Table; 52.Table)-third person singular in the ablative case and governed by ^ ( 75.5. compare 54.3.1). v) YA. W.2., t .* > life, is a verbal noun (concrete) (40Ta- bleA). It occurs always in the plural form(44.Eem.6),gener- ally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon; 80.2)-deriv- ed from ]aM to Zwe-appears in the emphatic form,like other plural forms mentioned(44.Eem.6 and45.Eem.)though this is its usual form. It is an anomalous noun having no regular declension-third person plural masculine (45.Eem.)- nominative case to locJl (80.2.6). lo) YA. W.4., Jaj^O and life compounded of the conjunc- tion O and, and \m.*^ life. This is parsed like the same word above, only it is in the nominative to a plural verb (80. 2. a). EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING 803 x) Y.4. W.5., ^OOuZul was, literally were third person plural masculine, and agrees with ^lil in gender and num- ber (80.2.a; vid.also c. and d. supra). y) y.4. W.6., 1>01QJ light, is a verbal noun from JOU to shine an infinitive form in the emphatic state like U^QO from ^54^) (^ 40.Table, II. A. a). Infinitive absolute you, Sou or joou, emphatic state 1>01J, IjOU, "IjOIQJ. The So which appears in the infinitive is here dropped (compare 39.2.6.and 40), though the emphatic form is the one in whicb it usually appears-declensionIV.(45.masculines,D)- third person singular-masculine-emphatic state, and in the nommative case after ^oouAa], but used as the construct be- fore J of the next word (74.2.a). 1) Y.4. W.7., ] ! a m > of the sons of men, a composite noun (41.1)-compounded of >, .iJ^ and \mS\* j o;^ is a sign of the genitive case, which follows (74.8). aIO sons, is ' . . . y from \^ son, primitive anomalous. Singular absolute ;o, construct ;o, emphatic |;o, plural absolute ^^ i m, construct ..7 _ (> 7 wkJJD, emphatic |>m (49.masculines)-third person plural- masculine-construct state(in form and because the next noun is in the genitive)-genitive case, though in the construct state, as sometimes occurs in Hebrew (vid. Stuart's Hebrew Grammar, 434. 5), governed by j (74). ^aj man, is from %ju], the 1 being dropped (12.3.a)-derived from theHebrew word 'Cjij}^ man (Chaldee tJi^JS})-^ primitive noun-declension ], but somewhat irregular (vid. Lexicon) third person singular as it has not Eibui, though it has the same form which appears in the plural-masculine emphatic state abso- 301 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. lute and construct ^mj], emphatic \mS\j absolute plural ^AJf or |Aj|-genitive case and governed by tlie preceding noun lid (74). 2) y.5. w. I., OOlo {v]d.supra e). 1f> ^ jOi QJ Ujht,\s in the nominative absolute, with the participle >0lllk5(76.1). For farther explanation of the word vid. y above. 4) Y.5. W.3., pQA*jwOm(/7i6)iarArries5,is compounded of the preposition a in, and PQaaj darkness. ]dqjlkm is a sub- stantive noun (the Hebrew form is ^lajfl, a verbal noun) declension fourth ( 45. masculines D) third person singu- lar masculine-emphatic state-ablative case and governed by =>(75.5). 5) V.5. W.4., jouio permitting to shine-a. pB.Tticiple from, the irregular^, active intransitive verb (20.2) JOU to shine (33) -in the Aphel conjugation ( 19 Table; 19.B.4 ; 23.1)- an active participle (19.B. 4; 23.1). It is used here for the third person singular of the present tense(64.2.A.Rem.) and rendered the same as though it were a verb (vid. Trans. ^I4)third person singular. Conjugate to the place where it is found. Preter. Peal JOU, preter. Ethpeel JOuZf ( l9.Table II, and 21.1), preterite Pael hou (l9.Table II, and ^22.1), preterite Ethpaal joiiZf ( 19. Table II, 22. 1 and Eem.), preterite Aphel JOTjf (19. Table II; 23.1), future Aphel JOUJ (19. Table II; 19.B.2,5; 23.1), imperative Aphel 50ijf ( 19. Table II; 19. B. 1; 23.1), infinitive Aphel ojoiii (19.Table II; 19.B.3 and 9; 23.1)participle active EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 305 Aphel JOULo (L9.Table II ; 19.B.4; 23.1). It is found in the Aphel conjugation-active participle masculine gen- der, and belongs to HoiQJ ( 64. 1. A), or is absolute with it. 6) Y.5. W.5., PQa_>jO and the darkness. O is a conjunc- tion as above, and ]aoa,M is in the nominative case to Ol-3jj( For farther explanations see 4. supra. 7) Y.5. w,7., (JVJ:ihi\ comprehended iV, is an irregular ac- tive intransitive verb, composed of ^>j and Ol_ Irregular- active voice-intransitive (19.Tablel)-indicative (65.1.B.b) -Aphel preterite. The usual form is j^ij ] When the suffix is appended, the final vowel of the verb is dropped (15.3) * and the last consonant forms a syllable with the suffix Ol- It is in the 3rd.person masc; Pealj^Jj, Ethpeel ^>jZ|, Pael * 7 7 7 ^^ * 7 *^>>, Ethpaal j^jJm, Aphel ySy\ and agrees with its nom- inative ]anji !>> The suffix Ol- is a personal pronoun third masculine singular-accusative case (54.B.l) and gov- -^ -7 erned by *^>?| 8) Y.Q. W.I., looi vjas^ is a Lomadh Olaph verb Peal active voice-3d. singular-masculine-indicative mood-present tense (32.1) and agrees with 'iaa*^ (vid. ^18.c). 9) y.6. W.2., "U^T^ son of man, is a composite noun (42. 1) compounded of \Ci son and ^1 man. \^ is a primitive noun anomalous singular, construct (vid. paradigm 49. masculines) third person masculine nominative case to logi* ImJ ^otw, is a noun derived from aj] man prim- itive declension firs1>-third person singular masculine-em- phatic state-in the genitive Case and governed by ',0 (74; 1[18 1). 306 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 10) Y.6 W.3., >>As(> who was senilis compounded of ^ who^ and JjA*! ivas sent, j is a relative pronoun-third singular mas- culine, a prefix, and in the nominative case to hiL] (17. 2 ; 56). J>A| is a verb in the Ejhpaal conjugation pas- sive voice regular third singular masculine indicative mood preterit imperfect tense (60.4), and agrees with its nominative > Peal J>, Ethpeel i>A(, Pael 5>#, Eth- paal 5>A1 In Ethpaal and the other passive conjugations M is transposed (vid.T15.2.a). 11) YS. \v.4., ^So/roTT?, 0^ is a preposition and governs the ablative case (75.5). 12) Y.6.W.5., fOl}^ Godj a noun declension first third singular masculine emphatic state ablative case, and gov- erned by ^ (75.5 ; ^iS.g). 13) Y.Q. \v.6., 01Sq his name^ compounded of SQ name and CVhis. SQ is a noun from ^9 anomalous third singular masculine. Absolute and constr. singular ^, em- phatic pi suffix state 0lSQ (vid. paradigm, 49. mascu- lines). JL of the absolute state falls away in the emphatic state, and from the emphatic is formed the suffix state by and adding 01 (46.1.cz) nominative case to loCJl wiOloAaj 2vas (implied). In reference to jooi wiOloA^I (vid.T"18. b and c). 01- his, is a suffix pronoun, third sing- ular masculine (l6.Table)-genitive case (54.B. 2) and gov- erned by SQ(I6; 16.B; 74). 14) y.6. W.7., ^.i-xQa John, a noun proper-anomalous- third singular masculine, absolute state-nominative case af- ter loOl wftOloAA]* EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 307 15) V. 7. w. 1., poi same, this a demonstrative pronoun, singular, masc. nominative case to ]l] (vid. ^18. k), 16) V. 7. w. 2., ]l] came Lomath Olaph (]]) active voice-Peal conjugation-pret. imperfect-3d pers. singular, masc. indicative mood and agrees with poi (27 Tab.; 32). 17) Y. 7. w. 3., IZojoicoli/or a witness compounded of ^foVj and |Zojoioo witness. |IojOifiD is a noun derived from the verb joifio ^o witness. The form ?oiflD appears as a noun of the 2d declension. Absolute and construct ?OTCD, emph. IjaiflO (45. masculines B). The feminine absolute has the 10 joico* In many nouns Z is inserted before the final 1 in the feminine ; O with Z is also sometimes inserted (45. 3 and Rem. 3) as in this word. It has the form here of the emph. feminine. That indeed seems to be the usual form in which the word appears 3d pers. singular, dative case and governed by ^ (75. 1). 18) V. 7. w. 4., )cn,m i> who shall (should) hear wit- ness compounded of j who, and >ai ,. m i shall (should) hear witness, or cause to hear witness (23. 2. a) >a i . m 1 is a verb from joico to heget, to hear witness-A-ph. conjugation-active voice-regular (26)-intransitive. 3d sing. Peal jOifiO, Ethpe. joifloZJ, Pa. joiflo, Ethpa. 'OiooZj, Aph. pret. ?OlCD(, Aph. fut. jounj-fut. tense, masc. gender. 7 In the fut. Aph. 3d. masc. usually we find - in the last sylla- ble ; but sometimes as here we have - (23.2, where are ex- amples, with 1 in the last syllable. Compare 19, Tables I and II). The future tense is here used in the sense of the subjunctive mood imperfect tense (61. 3. A. b) and agrees with its nominative ? > is a relative pronoun-3d 308 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. pers. singular, masculine-a prefix-nominativ^e case to ;J._mJ(1fl8.0. , 19) y. 7. w. 5., vOk to, against, on account of, q/-pre- . ^* *- ' position governing pOlQJ . 20) Y. 7. w. 6., 1>C71QJ %A^-verbal noun from JOU to sAme-declension fourth, Sd pers. singular, masculine, em- phatic state, ablative case and governed by ^ (1[18. y). 21) V. 7. w. 7., ufci^j-compounded of ? that, iib all^ every, and *jl] man-} is a conjunction (85. 3 & 4, c?)-prefix connecting? 01 OiJ and ^-SD^ou* ^O ever^/, a?^, is a pro- noun, but here used as an adjective (58. B. 2. b. a) and belongs to ^ai For declension, etc. vid. ^18. 1. *-*! ma7i is a noun from wAJJ declension first, but is somewhat irregu- lar-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to ^^ V )>C7lJ. For further explanations, vid. ^ 18. 1. 22) V. 7. w. 8., ^ SO iOU migJit believe-a. verb doubly irregular, ]zi and ^, and is placed among the defective verbs (35. 2. c). In the Aph. conjugation. Pe. ^1, Aph. ^i2-fcOl, future Aph. ^iQ-CFlJ-active voice-intransitive- 3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with its nominative -*! (comp. ^18. 18). 23) Y. 7. w. 9., OI^Jq through or hy the hand of Mm. For parsing, vid. ^ 18." m., where the same expression occurs. 24) Y. 8. w. 1., P not, is an adverb and qualifies looi 25) Y. 8. w\ 2., OOI Ae, is a personal pronoun separate- 3d pers. singular masc. and nominative case to looi (comp. 1fl8-)- ,. . , . 26) Y. 8. w. 3., fOOi tvas-axi irregular verb agreeing with ocji for its nominative (vid. ^18. n). EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 309 27) V. 8. w. 4., IjCJIOJ UgJd-Si noun and nominative case after loai ( vid. ^18. y). 28) V. 8. w. 5., (]] 5i^^-a conjunction, a contraction of U not, and ^1 if ; it continues the sense. Following this and preceding the next word, there is something implied; after |J f supply jZojoim-^ ]l] came for a witness, the same which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three words of this verse, vid.^18. 18, 19, 20. 29) Y. 9. w. 1 and 2., looi uiOioA^] was-a. verb and agrees with IVoiQ-J understood, IjCHQ-J Vjoi that light, being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^18. h. & c. 30) y. 9.' w. 3., ;^t/or, is a conjunction continuing the sense. ^ 31) V. 9. w. 4., (>01Q-J ?^(77i^-a noun-nominative case after fooi ^oloLl (vid. ^[18. y). 32) Y. 9. w. 5., P'r*? q/" #rw^/i-compounded of j of, and )^ truth. ]yr is a noun derived from the verb >;* to he coTim/icec^-declension first (vid. 48. A. decl. 1. Kem.)- singular. Construct and absolute, 'r or >;, emphatic h'r* forming the emphatic state, from 'r* _ falls away on ac- count of the addition at the end (15. 3), then -? pre- 7 senting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel - (15. 4. &)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after > j'r*j fjOlQ-J is an instance in which the abstract noun \y\M has the sense of an adjec- tive, and the phrase is properly rendered the trite light. 7 y 33) Y. 9. w. 6., >Ol-J.-isDj which shineth, or having shone- compounded of >ai l ^ shineth, or having shone, and > which. jouo-Sd is an Aph. participle from Sou, absolute 21 310 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PAKSING. with J (^18. 5). > lohicJi, is a relative pronoun, nomina tive absolute with >CTUJ-Si> (76. 1 ; ^[18. 3). 34) V. 9. w. 7., *A^ Nn\ upon every man, compound- ed of ^ upon J ^ every and ^ai man. V^ is a preposition governing the accusative or dative. ^ is a pronoun used adjectively and belongs to *-! (vid. 18. I). .*! is a noun in the accusative and governed by ^ (If 18. 1, 9, 21). 35) V. 9. w. 8., IM? who comes, composed of > wJiOj and ]l\ comes. ]l'\ is a verb-Peal conjugation, present tense, and agrees with its nominative j (T[18. 16). 36) Y. 9. w. 9., |V^ NnN into the t^orZd-rCompounded of ^ intOj and pO-^ the loorld. ^ is a preposition governing the accusative. ]Sn , \s is a noun from ^^N second declension. Absolute and construct VAs , emphatic t ^ Q^ ^* In SiQ-^ the final vowel falls away in the em- phatic state as a syllable is added (15. 3)-3d pers. sin- gular, masc. accusative case and governed by i^ 37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven precedinoj words are ex- plained above). Cl-i,-a knew 7n'm-compounded of OU hiru, and ^r hnew, ^r is a verb with a sufl&x pronoun at- tached* to it-derived from the Hebrew 2?ii to know, doubly anomalous. -^ and ^-Peal preterit -3d pers. singular, masc. indicative mood and agrees with (^Q-J^i^ By taking a suffix the usual form is changed. The common form of 7X1 7 the Peal preterit is ^r - falls away and - falls back upon the first radical when the verb takes a suffix (vid. 36). Ol- is a suffix pronoun with its union vowel (16. Tab. a) 7 -3d pers. singular, masc.-accusative, and governed by (54. B. 1). CHRESTOMATIIY. CHRESTOMATHY. FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. John i. 110. looij (1 iin? ])cnQj ^oouA^f U^o |oai ]^^ cis 4 : Cn2))| |J pQAjaO *. )GUlO POAM^ |)G1QJ 0010 5 P 7 -X T> aj p P7 '^ ,77 '^ ^pp 7 P ^^ou ,.ai\n> 1)'oiqIj ^"^ >oimj; V^o>oia^ ]1'\ Ijoi 7 Ijoiqj ^ jcjicQjj IJV Ijoiqj looi 001 O's Y2T> .aAnS jouSdj . 1r^? Hoidi -h-^^ looi ^oioLTo P' iLolio . looi oi,la]-i V^^^o loOT 1 SnSsn lo 314 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. Matthew ii. 1 10. 3 ^j msq* ail y^mV)\ ^l]o ]L^y^^ ciLdod oiSoi :>a^9o| cnloo ^LiiZZ]o pllo D>0)ai 5a.,^V ^lT 1-jV ^1? JLjolaL o2 ^aouioZujiislj CHRESrOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 315 Mark xiv. 3242. .^CJlOpiSoi^A^k rSD|0 .,J^lCOr*i U'r^ASDj 1pi||AS0y^ oZ|0* 32 0'rilZZ]o ]a>01 OQg > VZoSqI |k?^ ^a^^lS OlS ^aOI ]Lp )>jjamk) ^y "jooi y^Soo ]i'1 ^^ ^^JO VVAo jdoo* 35 Ulo* j^j gl ^A^j >aiIq^ fi UJ Ijot ^mo -xiSd 'rT^j 3: ^Q^Z P> C^tO O'pilZZi* O'rlZASD^ |AlS Ir-*^ Am^Os] |] 38 ^llo* 01 ipVp^UI l^o^i^o U^^ l^oi vpnmi\39 ,>j^T *ooZ 1Z| ^010* ^1 |A1Sd wioio ^. ^oZio 1. P "7 "P I 7 > 7 7 o> 17 7** ^.4J^j- |J0 ^001 ^r^Cljk ^OaLi.laA) \>4^ ^inV)> jS .Qj] ^OOll pSDJO ^oJ^l A!lZj (Z(0* . oil ^C'r^Op JliD OOOl 41 loio lAi* ZZlo IZ'pM A^J^ om^^ZZIo \uLak) oaSoj loi ^(Ij oSdod* UI^j ^ootu'[-1 ]aj]j oi*b 5>qSAaSd J2 * jA y)NaV)> 001 jd;) Luke xxiii. 18 27. X 7 . ? 7 lAi^.^o Zooij .m>m5cpl ^^4^? W o6\* l^V^rA^ ,9. 310 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 2o^oaiSQi ViIsd ^> ^oZ* Or*^! AuTi looi lijD> |]4^o I 7 . ? 7 * 0^ 9 ^ P -X I *P 23 ou^ 0001 ^^lo . toi IJns oooi ^^innZ ^j ^qjoi^" * POID wi2>)0 .OOl^) ^OOl^O |0O1 ^AlO ^0UJQ1CP> II oail ^ooil l-*o* .ooiA!i|i looi'Zj .oa ^'j ^o^iLa* T>7 7i>i7 f>0 WO* I7*R*.' olU? 001 l^lcol Zu^ looi "isoj U^^o .mmfciDl ^^>4^> ^6 , 01^ ^LoqLd po* .ooui.n A 5>ciLl ^j ^oi\ wiOloll qSQ00 *. lAa'rO ^ ]L]i ] 1 1 i>QO ^\V^a\ OpKil Pv *P? .'^P **i -"P 7'9X 27*1] QflD oijAri looi Ulo* .^omaj oijAs ^^? (sludi 7 OP y 7 -T>7* pr ^OloSs ^i^O .Looi tr^^? r-^1 ^^ *U^? 7 -n 7 Luke xxiii. 33 42. P7 v7 P 77P7^P. ^%5'' 33 .^jZ *^01Q21D1 . lA2l3-rO Vr^^? Ir^ fAooA oZ| jOO -iNp 7 * T7 tx y J>.P.X"7P -X Pt7 OUkJm) ^ r^0 OlLxSOi ^ r** * |Am^O ^jOl ^QJOl^O 34>.. ]] .OOlijk ^Cm ]^'\ OoOl 'rSDl ^QA^ ^? 001* o m.Xv GLiiiO)(0 wkOlOA^J a.wJ^O ^r^^ M^ ^^^f* t, 7 I'7 -nP y IX Z " 1^^* 35 OlO OOOl > o > <^Vr)Q , I^KiO ]SD1 ^J loOl ^(O* JCDS) CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 3n G12 0001 ^^tMlOSOO* *|0l2^> Ola*^.. (>. .^Vnix *(Jaj Oil ^in;oV)o oiZol ^^^'rO ^.^ V^o > ^, f)fol I ff7p7'^:>^ 107 K 7^ i> P Zu|* ^Aaj VmI Vjoou) "lalSD 001 AjI ^ oil ^-^lo* g Aa|LD001)0 ZujjOi *.0Uk3^\llLiAD)VDA2,l^>l001 7 P -x 3 '^ * 7 -^ P *^ ,. I P 7 7 9 x ff -n ^^r'nil .QJOl ^.^? r^* V?OCJU> ]n\V) QJCTI ZuV^TilO 39 ^lo*AOialilooi ^p^ '.oiSoioooi ^^nA . > 1 Amlr^ *<7 7 ^'^ J>7P7 1 . 7* 012 IPO* ^ ^1 X^O ^a2U I^ * |m>iV) 001 Aj] ^1 40 AjI *2)|j . Aj| \yM> joi-^ ^ U ^ I oil 'rSDlo oi;o* -i 7 -P 7 xpi77 px r -n ^u-. ^OOl ^Q*J ^1 ZU^JP ^1>*0* .U-r^ M 012 41 Oil r.m U jlflDJ 5>0^ ^J pbl ^'rSZI tr^^lj *^lo P^-X7 ^^**^'' " 7 7 i\ v.* 7-K . j^^oalSQo Aj I (Z] J tSD ^;k5 *aj.^p>Zl <^0(n\ '^lo* 42 43 Luke xxiii. 43 53. loOlZ .kIlSQI llk}a^> * A ij( 'r^l ^^^1 ^QM^ oil 'rSsbl* 7 p.'>P y ^P y i\ .. 7 X p 7 7 ^ I^QAm 1 0010 A tlA ^| ^> ^001 L^^ *> ]m.^*** |aSQ0* . ^^A M*A1 IkJjJL ]lJ I Olio 45 7 - p p ..p p * p 7 7 * 11" ' ^^ ? .-rSOfO (SD) fjQ2 ^QAa jlOO^ OlAl J^ ^ UOaOI) (1>Z46 ftp 7 'ft77'ft'>P vp *P 7.. I p ^> \\^ yO* VqIsO '^"I 1 JOI . *xja0> W y>]fiO ^p*|2 *jl21 47 op T0X7 '1PP7 77 P 7 * f *. * lijOl A^Vr*r 'r^lo loil]] M>n OoOlJ ^,SO ]j0;^10 318 CHRESTOMATIIY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 48 0001 ^i.^AJD? ^aAj] ^MlD .001^0* *]0GI \cLk^] In^i \^^^'^ p Qiiaoi looij ^ySD ow p 1>oi iZvwJ^ 'O^P-X-XU-X 7 xp -x X7 49 ^OlQlOpi ^OOlLo IcLmOJ ^ OOOl ^aSAa^O* . .OOU^^ ^U'O 'tJ^^^ ^ CnSDl a001 ^Zl> ^Ai] taJO V!)QAji) -^ "?*'"*> - 7 '^ 7 7 *P 7 .t* p. .. 7 50 ^ . V4q^Q3 ^SlTDOi Olkl> y>* ^? I'r^M* <* ^^Aoi wOCJl OOP 017 PPP P7 'X xpi PP loCT lnfnV)o ..oou-LQmlo ^ooulsll Iboi :>qS^ -R? P7X p 1 pp k''''''k^*t''t 52>5i]o ',*cdq4^^^^ ZcA ,^^5 ]joi* IcnlLj |Zon\v^l Tip pp-^ 7 -n7 T> 7 -x-^ -n7 53 oiSomo IjAoj Kjlm^ oiopo oiA>*lo* ViQAa> oi;.^2) P I -n ^i 7 "''* p I p 4v V>\ loOl ^^LmSdLL] NSuJ^r^ *Aj1 Uj OOl Vr^13 ]yQCi^ ZuTHQ Ol) Acts xvii. 2232. Tc.pT7 'n7 7-n P7 px7 "'' P7 22\'^jZ1 lr^\ 'r^l ^CDO.^ *fiDa>|:5 ^CDQ^QS) ><10 pO* 7 ..-R I 7 -n ^ X I 7 -X 7 -X p "^ P ZuKn*] ^Qr)ALia> A^r^ A^ooi lv^o Aaooi ^pALo >. 7 PI Q 7 ' t ^ X7 9 PJ ooi Ov^Sx 1^-^? ^-^^k looi v^^Aoj \1h^ ]L^ pp7iP7/*..7 P7P7rPP ^ ^ -R U |u,Lt ^Ij (Jn^CJUD .]l'l?0 l-^^^? Vr^ OiOOlO Oli r I) is 7 PP7 ..7X -K 7 7 f f> CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 319 .. 777 X P4, -^ P<'^7^*^ P0 7 *7 y 7171X -n 7x7 **. * 7*7 ^1 ^Zulo ^1iSilZAk)0 ^IjuuM *rK. 001 OlO* ^JiO rM28 7 4v -X - * 7 * *^ 7 "^x 7 i> p..p ^OIQ^ OOI OIISD) O'riol ^Q^> |V^>nM ^ [mS\ ^|> P'Xj) -x pi7 01: r ox .7^ %' IZoiiDolo ]=^\..> t2)]a^ 0I ]SD]ml ol iaoiA? 77 P-X '^ -n - 7 9,%^ \m^ m^" 0Pfi7l>7 X oil UcLiA.4j 'huo U^l* iZoOllL ViiDj (AJ'r^> lAlpi^O 30 ^Qyj> fltL oioj IldoI 5>ai^lj ^*5yl4^* %ooAj ]soj ^5ys ^i . I 7 7797P 77 p*>i PkP7 7 7 1..i i -RI77 * *^ e 7 Q 7 I 7 K n -n ..I ff *oooi ^ > ^ > ^ v> ^ooiik) *.|A^i^ LaJOi ^y \t^ak.o np 7P7XP ^ 75 7 i.j^ * >l>ai^>^i^iiSV) ^>*1 ^^ 0001 ^'riol ^oouLoo "Romans vi. 1 10. 77^9*. 70 I 7 .pi>7 ''_^.. Iff^PP jAjiZZ IZqo^j 1Aa4>j^ 010 looj . -rSolj ^5ui5oi U^^* 320 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSL iTING. Hi *.wiC7iQL^|) (AAjaosAr:) (A^iD A.>^ ^ |M>>a^ v^qa^ ^O) 5 ^^21 ly*xOl -H^O* *>^ Ur^ l-"^**^ ^:^ ^1 ^^ n-n ipr opro. - 7 pv 7 -^7 loaU OlAV^iOn )| (isoi *.oiZqSd) IZoSDr^ CflSOl P T77* -r -n^jipxy 7 7 -K 7 10 6 ( ^ \>4^Ajj OlSQl *2IO>l| JOaAl ^'rlli? '^y ^luJLpi* 771^ T> IP. 7 ti" ^ 9^ "^ ^ ^t *" "k" ^' 'n7 pi 7 I ip. ?> pi -n t\ * 0pi 7 n'-ip >-A^x.p I 7 -^7 air:) ^AaSd P IZqSoo *Z1so (J }oZo .iZuib A.>^ X 777 '" '^ 7I7^ I 10001 ..A^ ^.A-M>o .^1 Ih^ AjlSd 0(71 lAif)\ 'pi.. Zul^>^ p 7 < CoLossiANs iii. 1 15. P7 5 77'n ""' ^ " ^ P I 7 7 -" P 2U'ki? "O Q1)Z1 ^\Aj* .loil^J ]liV>i ^ ^Zu 8 .lail]al,i^>^ ^^JuM OiOOlJ U^ASD VjulaSD) ^uASdIo* >. " 7 7 I.p 17 P .X '>7 -X ^ 5 .QO^lDjOl \UJD01 0A.ii^f=^ jjj.iQJLQ oiSoi ^a\..ZZ l2ano\\o .VAm^lLy^olSl^o tZQii4Ucuj{ .U'l^? 6 01].. O J ]l] ;a-. ^^01 ^4^* ,\fDLSi AAj^J ^01 *a01J CHRESTUMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 321 *^ y -riff* 9 ^ 9 X ff e..f T 00 7 IZoJLk^ |ASQajH>\0> ^a^OI ^Ollo ^niV) CUj^aJ] ^> Ul r*^ r** r*^ r^ ^OOOlZ |Jo* t2ll4 jJNSnV) ])JCL. y 7 PP-X rp7rjrr*?7 't'lo A^j p* ou-r^^j (ZqLd^ |A^r>^ Z^a^ASdj |Zh^ onn\o* n PP-X IS 7 1\ -cy f> I-7 P P 7 p.. 7 7 I ? \zuMOyo Isom'j .lria^LaO 1*^,^ loil^j l^n.. >^1 ^"{s-kaoi P-Xj a^k 17 m.i>* X X '>PJ'X T7 m.(> J *. X 7 P^O) Zo'ra.^0 IZokkoJo .IjLkA) ZoninV)0 lZoV)imno i-R 7 7 ^P7 71 7 ^77 X 7 PI 7P77PP-X '"''' Si I^dom ^oiLd ^i\cn >Qio* onan* ^oAj| *2)| liaoiu 77 Pi 7 "?7 ^'j''^ X7^PP >*> ^ ^jJ ] I aV)? CFlSQ^O* (ZO'H^o? M3W CLiOOlJ l3 n 7 , 7 7 7 7 *" ^ lC * *'"'' 1* - Revelations v. 1 10. pp OP 7 ">P 7 T>i7 T*y V^Ao .^coqjojZ ^ ^A^j o6i> oii.V)* ^ Aiwo* i 7*,7 X7P Ti -^ 7 * X7 uOioAu! QiSb .fiD) iJno ipSD? VjAIa-m p]Jk5 A^u*o* 322 CHRESTOM.VTHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING spo* *oilu> ]i4-^ |;aV)No JsAal ^Aaiol 1qj 7 P 9 7 7 f> O 7 y P -R T p Vk % ^ " X^ 7*-n.p 7 i< !> l> -x -K. 17 7'^_'^ 17 tvP 0> lypp-R -7 ik'*^ P 7 i> '7970 p OCT hO>> Vr^^ oux :l>ooi^j lA:s*p ^? ooi tij] ]oi toi P7 7 .^^ *^_'"P..' ''t'' PP. 7 7-n 7 T> X pi 7 -ftp p-n Tp ^7 r> 7 7 O 7 ^0 7 -ni7 7 -R.. I7P 7 xiN4.p PP.. 7 77.. -np DlJa^O (>Au^ ^OOUSD pM ,w\n\ A^l p Vr^I? ^^OlOlDrO np IP7P7 PfV " 177 -HI7 *> ! 1* I -R..P 7 7-R7 *"''' '''" ''"^ ^^^4^ cilji) ]LdAm^ ,^t^^\o *.|r:^AiL^ ,nmV^\ ^^A^l lAo'^ \o ^ ^A^? P^r^ Icn^U ^ Air^io AfioiuZlj 1^.. w 7ipp''yl V'7 9*. P7 PP"" 10 ]r>Vvn ^JS^j loiL]] ^QjI Z^TilO* IALDoIo ]SD10 U^O p7 7 X 7- -R.. p CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 323 Revelations xxii. 1 10. J 7 -X 7 X 7 '"7 P 7.. 7 x i 7 PX '* *P07 ^7 7* -Filliff 'W..7 (jAj ^\00* ]SQSm> IZouDdIJ .*(m>o^ . .mr)c^"(^n ^Oli^j^ ' -K P i 7. 7 7 P ? 7 *^ -n * A .(ooij oio Vr^l ooijo |oi^> ^cdqjojZo *^ol loou U G1^) ]20*r) ^VkJO* ^^OUJQJliQAJ 01^9 Ti^O ^ l>aiQj50 'L;*j l>oiQjj UcjQCD ^ooi-ik looiJ Uo .^ooZ .QOLSOJO ^OOIJ^ JCJUiiD IoIjL Jj'rSDj ^SD /|mSQ> !?i)i7 PP 7 -^1> "^P I 7* -^..p n.. p . oi^aj plJSDi^ *^ wiJ)r* V^^? U*oyy |oi-^ ti-fk) ^,jiJD IooiSd^ ^jlj ^-Aoi oiL^j ],n\l OiOAjlai 9 p 7 P -X 17^ -n" 7p 7PP ^ 7 P ^""^ ^ iT7 TiO-ftp 7P 7P7.P'> P PP A!.Sd po :^loi li.**o MSq> 001 ^TmOi \i\ *alo* poi s 7 P'7 7 .. 7 -h P 7 * t" '" "^ ' ^^ ? 001 p1J!^> *^oiq^.j ^jO y..iV)\ Alaj Zuv^o p] .9 X P P P X 17 1. C ' C -i" -T ^ * j^^ajlAlO ^U wV^ -ilJ^ 'r^lO* ^-i^Ol^A^ (001 IOmIDjQ 1^ 9 7 .* '^ 'loA09 |]SQ^ ^*r4^? ^^01)0 ^X^Sn s/^A'i W1)0 /^Zu] rt .V XT'** T^** 'X '^l^ "X. y ti ^ (?P^ Q P ]Zai^j? ]]Sq1 :>ooAjaZ |] uA '^lo* . ?Q.^ loilU . poi lo 7 X 17 1> P 7 Ni '7 P P P P 7 ^OIoAj] ^n^'r^)) 'ri^. U^l OOI .^JOl ]*dAo> 321 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IX TRANSLATING. Revelations xxii. 11 21. 11 .JDa^ ^^^ 'IK? ^ .*S0Z ^QU ,^QSV)) 001* ^0 'K 77-KPir v T> '"^',*" I7PI7 i2|cn* .jiioZ ^r^Aj (AJriDo *:)oZ ^^^u iZon^^na^^io yj\ y^Loi ^-^aiiA ...iDi .A^j l^lo AIl |j1_1Z1 (, 7 ? I 7 -^ * I p- 7 I 13 (>Vn,o 001 .OZO *21-S^ ]j( pf* Ol^^? fr^Iii *a010A-i(> J'i .QJOl .QjI pAiSC3l4* |V>\o 0010 ]ma> 001 .(ji'rwl 0010 .^OOll^J U4^C^ lOOUJ ]iaji| Olla> Py5Cil ^r^il? -no i>.p Ov 7 y P ?"* ' *?" *..P 7 (Tiio ^>aa9) ^o IpAa i S'g)0 Uq^do ^Ujio }*-h^o iG onl o>oimSn\ \>A.>> ]D|]LQ-ik Zj^s ^qa^ p]* .|ZqX ? 7 17 P'^ -K '7 7xp^P P'i P t^ " ^1 roj> ]mi.. o V,m 001 *-iA^l W .IZyL ^^o ^^^oi I -> P 7 P v PP 7 .7 P I 7 P 7 .7 17^-Ad1 lAloO P^OJO* .K2) OOl '.(mwi^ JiQOQD 001 np .7 TNi-77'^P 71 ^7 P -7 P "la. J 0010 UVj loitj OOIO OZ ri>o]j MSQ? OOIO ,]l ^ 71.. 7P '^f" ""P P7'> y*' ? 7.. 7 -n X "" 1^ . "^ C* i^-K AiJ P P ^ 7 -P. -x X 7 ^^mi ,^01.1-^ ;>Qa.CJ ^Aj| ^(j poi MdAoj |ZQa.Q]> P -n PPPP 7 0X79P.. 7 7 PP7 19 ^ ^lo* Ijoi XciLzia ^tliAdj IZowid ^oioli loi!^ oiAiSqI |oi}^ >^ij .fjoi IZoi-jQjj }oAa> (J^ ^ 5^u p.. X7 P 17 .ppi i> T>.. 7 p 7 ^njAa? lAmajD ^^oi lAi^rSD ^Loo ]jum> ]miO ^lo 7 PP X "ftp-B 7 .77< PPPp7 20 ^U^ WUl ^l ^i^oi joimlDj 001 ;Sd1=^ ."(joi IrsAaiD 7P X *.'*7P -n-X 7 Ov-nppp 17 21 iQl "Ufc-i-aV) ^QA^ ^'rSOJ OlZon*^* ^Q*j ]ji'^ IZ .^-ilol X7-RX7 4, , ^jir)! .]ii.*^^ ^ooij^ CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IX TRANSLATING. 325 Psalm xlv. 1 10. ,>ia\ :]alSQl ^^ioi i^]o ,yL(, Ua^iAa ^jltA ^]*i ^ JQDJ :]il ^*A^Q*0 j^JJOl* 'Vr^^l .^.'i\n ]'^ifif>4 lA^r^ ^aSai IZoooi) ]ii2qLdo ]AsQ)9 IaXsd ]oV^ ^^ZomZ . olgu ]v^Snso ^ i 1 i 1 *^>\< * tj^juicajo , ^>v>V ^\sl IcFili. .^.i>?QS^ : ]"^\V)> >acnnnn','\s'o> e A >ipr> n 1Zqq.i?i ASOwj* t >^Znn\V)> 14^* l^'Jka U^^i 7 jaA^ IZorAij t*iwAk) : ^^oi!^ loOL .^.KaV> |joi!^4^ .]]q:^ Z^* : ^Qjir** *-ZcA ^o 'U'-'' Bii^oi ^ j^-i^orilo Psalm li. 110. ..>vn ^r> lAmloo :Aj14m >^>QuSn ^* .^^lao^Qjl^ 326 CHRESTOMAIHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 6^> AjI* :*jlLd1 ^jLjAi4r:) Ioi^mjdo Ai^^Z] ]]qisj 7D0)'<' :wkjAl>0] ^ASOILm) lA>rnnr> Aj^. lA^QOiD o . : joL] ]^Z ^o cjini ,iii\\>'i ]djI]o Isjopii - Av 9:*iS wiZnS'ocf) ^GiLso *^6i^ ^ y^^] y^Cl]* Psalm civ. 1 10. 1 IbaiO lOkl : ^ ^'r^ ^Ot!L Vr^ Vn^ ^1 ^u^'^^^' 2*^1 UiO* o^ASD : Uo^'r^ 5^1 UCJIOJ *jlQoZ]0* ,an\ 5]]> oujiiASiD ^IijI^Z]* : Ir^ 1)QJ ^0iQimSiAk30 6 ^ouAxmi Uo-i'r!^ )^1 V^oaiZ* : ^^q1i1 wiJ^oiZ 7j^.*iQii>l]o^o ^-i^'ri;^Z|o^* :"lliDQkiDlja4^o sAioZjliZlo lAioa oAmjo 1jcl4 nnSm* :^-i^oi)ASd 10 t^ inSoilD l?Q-4 AiaQo ]1^q Uo^i^ Z>,ji^ CHRESTOMATHY. KOTES ON THE READING LESSONS- After having analyzed the first page of the Chrestomathy, and thus given a specimen of the manner in which the learner should proceed in reading his first lessons in Syriac, it will only be necessary, in re- spect to the remaining pages of the Chrestomathy, to explam the derivation and formation of the most difficult words which there occur. Thus the student will be thrown upon his own resources, and be induced, it is hoped, to assiduously study his grammar. EXPLANATIONS. Matthew ii. 1 10. 1) Yerse 1. word 3., r^^l is a verb in the Ethpeel conjugation, from r-i^* 2) V. 1. w.t., wilOQa^ is compounded of O a preposition and a10CLa a noun of the fourth decl. construct plural, from ^Q-i 7 -> ? * 3) Y. 1. w. 10., oZ] is a verb from ]l] Pe. pret. 3d. masc. plural (vid. 1fl8. 16). 7 * 4) Y. 2. w. 5., ^^a1t is a verb from |V*** 5) Y. 2. w. 10., -tfinV) is a verb m the mfin. pret., from jv-CD 6) Y 3. w. 5., ^l221 is a verb in Ethpeel conjugation, from ^0\ or ^1 7) Y. 4. w. 1., .la is a verb in Pa. conjuga<;ion, from *Aia. 328 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMAIHY. 8) Y. 4. w. 2., tOOllo-from Lo and takes the noun suffix-3d masc. plural. 9) Y. 4. w. 3., .-i^^-constr. plural from *Sj 10) Y. 4. w. 1, \>)ASsD-is a part, from \]m . 11) Y. 4. w. 8 and 11., ]6a\ jSJ'Asb* These two words indicate the imperfect tense, the latter word being a passive parti- ciple ( vid. 64. 2. B.a; 65. B. a). 12) Y. 6. w. 6., *jA-001 is a verb in the second person from |OCn 13) Y. 6. w. 12., *5QaJ-third, masc. fut. Pe., from *n2LJ 14) Y. 6. w. 15., ->aiOi \p is a verb in the fut. with suflBx, from 15) Y. 1. w. 8., M-Jipb is compounded of P-1 and d (vid. Lexicon), 16) Y. T. w. 10., -iVmZI is a verb in Ethpe. pret. from ll>* It) Y. 8. w. 6., Q^l is a verb in the imperative from ^ll (vid. 28. 1 and 2). '^ 7 -n 7 18) Y. 8. w. Y., n*^OS, imperative from *^OS 19) Y. 8. w\ 12,, jiC31jLJ0A**.a(j is composed of *aOU-meaning /im-3d. masc. suffix, y that a conjunction*-and JOA*xS| averb 7 in Aph. conjugation,2d. plural, from t >T 20) Y, 8, w. 13., o2 is a verb 2d. pi. masc, (vid. 28. 2. Rem.)- p * imperative from (2| /o co77?e. 21) Y. 8. w, 14., wiJOlOM is a verb from (Om 2d. masc. plural, imperative, with a suffix pronoun (vid. 3t. table of verbs IJ with suffixes ; 3t. 3). 22) Y. ID. w. 5., CLir^is a verb from \r>^* 23) Y. 10. w. t., \Lay is an adjective noun, fern. sing, construct, from t^) *In connection with the preceding word P^; it forms a compound conjunction meaning when. (vid. ^ 85 4. d. a). NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 329 Mark xiv. 32 42. 24) V. 32. w. 4., ]1'^ALd> is composed of ]l*r^^ and J The relative J with the preceding pronoun should be rendered that which (vid. 56. 3. a)-^;iASjD is an Ethpe. pass, participle, from 25) Y. 32. w. 8., oaZ-imperative from ^tl ( 29. 2. Rem). 26) Y. 32. w. 11., "t^LSC-Pa. act. participle from tl. 27) Y. 33. w. 1., O^IQdASq^ is composed of the prefix preposi- tion and the verb infinitive Ethpe. 28) Y. 33. w. 8., QQlZAi-^O is composed of the conjunction O, the prep. ^^ and the verb in the infinitive from *OQl or JO^ 7 7 OLor;^. 31) Y. 35. w. 9., (n>'mV)-Aph. fem. participle, from n 32) Y. 35. w. 10., 'r^T-Pe. future, from 'r^* 33) Y. 37. w. 5., ^^^^? is a participle, plural from ,iaV>? and that from the verb ^^^? 34) Y. 37. w. 15., b'riZASD-infinitive, Ethpe. from )Q1 or 'A* 35) Y. 38. w. 2., qS. ^ra2/-imperative, Pa. from 1^^* 36) Y. 38. w. 4., ^qSsZ {yQ)shallmter-'?Q. fut. 2nd. plural, from ^SLorV^i. 37) Y. 38. w. 8., In I \^\ willing-SLCt part. f. Pa. from %)Q4 38) Y. 40. w. 9., .OCJllLii their eijes-from \ij^ with a plural suffix pronoun. 39) Y. 40. w. 10., Tr^-Q^ heavy-SiU. adjective in the plural, from 17 ^ 10 7 X 40) Y. 40. w. 13., ^^^r* knew-from ^r 41) Y. 41. w. 8., OMuuZZlorg^^ye-Ethpe. imperative from ***QJ or 330 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 42) y. 41. w. 14., ^(l^tMl^ being betrayed-Eth^pe. participle from 43) Y. 42. w. 2., ^Uj future of ^ll to go. 44) Y. 42. w. 6., y>\ V) betraifing-Aiph. participle from !^\ii Luke xxiii. 18 27. 45) Y. 18. w. 1., Qi^ cried out-Sd. masc. plural, from lio 46) Y. 18. w. 6., *jiau.-^QO take him away-2n6.. masc. plural, imperative, with suffix pronoun (vid. 36. E table of suffixes). 47) Y. 20. w. 8.J IjmJ-future from I',* to release. 48) Y. 21. w. 6., .-iai^aQDI cnJ with a suffix pronoun. 50) Y. 22. w. 21., ^aiQjLQ-^l*l-/ will let him ^o-future, Pe. 7 1st. singular, with a suffix pronoun, from Ql X > 7 7 51) Y. 23. w. 3., |^*^oZ with OOOl urged-a part, from jQDZ 52) Y. 23. w. 10., *jOLilJQ21)P (that) they shall crucify him- 7 pret. Pe. fut. 3d. masc. plural, with suffix pronoun, from 2ID1 (vid. 36. Table). 53) Y. 24. w. 4., loofZ should Z>e-future of ibcjl 54) Y. 24. w. 5., tOaiAjLj* (according to) ^Aejr fife^ire-a feminine, sing, noun, with a plural suffix (16. Table). 55) Y. 25. w. 16., ^Oll^Q* their wHI-sl noun with a suffix plural from . lO 56) Y. 26. w. 2., ^-\or>V> leading or causing to lead away- Aiph. part, plural from nSHa y * 7 -^ 57) Y. 26. w. 4., 0,.>*1 /ai^ Mc? o/-from h^| NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 33] 58) Y. 26. w. 13., ^4J might carry-Mnre from ^. 59) Y. 2T. w. 8., xr^r^ bewailivg-Aph. part, from fOy Luke xxiii. 33 42. 60) Y. 33. w. 5., ]I*r^^ calkd-Ethpe. pass, participle, from 1 JjO 61) Y. 34. w. 7., ^Ql^m fargive-imi^eTSitiye, from -<^^^ 62) Y. 34. w. 16., Oiiiillcii^^-Aph. 3d. plural from lioi. -no p 63) Y. 35. w. 1., ^\o ^/aTi^^iwfi'-participle from ^OO* 64) Y. 35. w. 12., VlfAjU to o^^^r^-plural from ^>*l-with the prefix prep. Lomad. X 7 y 65) Y. 35. w. 13., .~i-m1 saved- Ai^h. pret. from 1jl>** 66) Y. 35. w. 14., ih*i shall save-Ai^h. future, from m-m* 17 7 67) Y. 36. w. 1., ^-i^MpQSO- mocA;i7?^-part. from A*1^ 68) Y. 37. w. 8.,Vki1 save-imperat. Aph. from m-m 7 7 * 69) Y. 42. w. 3., wi.lap>Z'| re?mmher ww-imperat. Ethpe. with 7 suf. from J3? Luke xxiii. 4353. 70) Y. 45. w. 3., ^fif}^ was rent-Eth-pe. part, from Ij-* 2 is transposed and changed into ^ ( 12. 2. Rem.). 71) Y. 46. w. 3., yio voice-mill a prefix preposition. .. X 7 72) Y. 46. w. 7., )^r*t^ ^^^o % Am ^i;)pMzo'-Ethpa.part.fr'omvaSQ*. 87) Y. 26. w. 8., .OOCru shall he, with ^J^ should dwell^Ye. fut. 3d. plural of the defective verb (001 88) Y. 27 w. 2., ^^>S*^ ^ee/cw^-participle from h^iS* 17 7 89) Y. 27. w. 4., ^^ I ^nsV)^ seeJcing, feding-Fsiel pass, participle -R 7 from t'^ns 7X7 7 90) Y. 28. w. 4., ^^ > > > o?^r /i/e-pl. absolute form with suf. ^ - 7 from |i 7 T I -R 91) Y. 28. w. 5., ,^1 iNilZAk? our moving-Ethi^e. part, and suffix from ^01 or ^1 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 333 92) y. 28. w. 6., ^A^l-ftrg-lst. person plural from A*] * 93) Y. 28. w. 12., t who with 3/<7!*-compose(l of tOO you^ \ with and > wJw. 94) y. 28. w. 16., ^01 Q^ our offspring-from ^OIQ^ with buffix pronoun. 7 10 7 Of 95) y. 29. w. 8., ^^1 >ni M our debt, from *^i n with a suflBx. 96) y. 29. w. 9., 'rODQk) to /AJTz^-infinitive, Pe. from rico* 97) y. 29. w. 15., Ja.^. .. wri/^en or ^mre?i-participle, Pe. from 98) y. 29. w. 16., IZoiSooliD by art, from VZoiliol . 99) y. 30. w. 15., .jQoAj shall repent-Mnre Pe. from *OoZ or *oZ X 7 p 100) y. 31. w. 6., tOplj that shall judge-Mnre Pe. from tj with the prefix J X 7 101) y. 31. w. 14., %jl1)|0 a7id showed, made knovytir-A^h. from 17 ^ 102) y. 32. w 8., ^..Qa.SqSD moc/aVio-participle, Pa. from *OQiD Romans vi. 1 10. OOJ shall remain-Pa., future from |QO 104) y. 1. w. 8., jAjZZ 5A/Z Se a52*w^?i^-Ethpa. future from )Aa 105) y. 2. w. t., 1*J^J 5^^// /jf6-future Pe. from ^Lm* 7 7 106) y. 3. w. 6., ^A^^} who were baptized-^ret Pe. 1st. pi. 7*7 com. from r^Q^ with the prefix > 7 -A lot) y. 4. w. 1., ^;i:ioZ| are bu.riedr-Ethipe. pret. 1st. pi. com. 7 from ;A0 * \ 7 108) y. 4. \v. 14., wiOlQOljo/i^w/k^Aer-a noun jn the suffix state, 334 NOTES ox THE CKRESTOMATHY. 3(1. masc. singular, from %Ci f with the prefix > 109) Y. 4. w. 20., jAcnJ 5Aow/e-future Pe. from looi. 112) Y. 6. w. 1., ,^1 iSr A-TiMTw^-participle, witli a suffix from 113) Y. 6. w. 5., lO>lf is cruciJiedr-Ethpe. pret. from *2LD1 114) Y. 6. w. 1, ^^)^Aj> ^Ai 5Ao?*/^^ Je rfe^^r^j^/e^-Ethpa. from ^^s4^ with the prefix j * 7 I * 115) Y. 8. w. 6., ^SlLiGU Jg/igre-Aph. future from ^Sd^ * 116) Y. 8 w. 10., |j1j%A^)!/Z fe-future Pe. from ]1m. IIY) Y. 9. w. 13., .^^Amk) beiTig powerful-Ethpa. participle from ^^-^ * 118) Y. 10. w. 9., *a-M living-peirt. Aph. from (xa** CoLossiANS iii. 1 15. 119) Y. 1. w. 1., QikO ^ed-unperative of JIS* 7 7 '^ 120) Y. 2. w. 2., QI9Z) lei your affections he ^Zacft^-Ethpe. im- perative, from {Ly X 7 7 ^-R .. 7 121) Y. 3. w. 4., tO^> > 2/02* r /z/e-from |i > n with a suffix pron. and the prefix O * 122) Y. 4. w. 9., tOi^tZZ (ye) ^^^Z/ ^^^'^^r-future Ethpe. from \- 123) Y. 5. w. 1., oAjlLdI 7nortify-Aph. imperative from Lk!^* X .. 7 P 7 124) Y. 5. w. 3., 0'^iV)>01 your member s-Bn&ix state, 2nd. masc. plural from V5>01 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 335 125) Y 5. w. 11 and 12., -i01 ^ClJ* These pronouns seem to include the substantive verb (comp. 54. 3. a). 126) Y. 1. w. 8., ^-fcjaaoiALo turning or having turned-Ethpa. from wOaoi 12t) Y. 8. w. 3., QwwAJf put away~Aph. from mOJ or ujJ * 128) Y. 9. w. 2., ^OOOlZ i/e ^AaZ/ 5e-future from looi 129) Y. 9. w. 3., ^A.j^.r^ h^f^t <^6cwV/z^participle Pa., from 180) Y. 9. w. 7., tJkClQM^QM put off, cast ai/jaj^imperative Pe., from fciK^s It takes a suffix. 131) Y. 9. w. 12., ^Oioaaboi his deeds-suS. state, plural from 27 r. ^ . , f^L^J who being renewed-Ethi^a. part, pas- . rJsi with the prefix J -n p 1 ' 133) Y. 10. w. 6., 0U;Q> w^ crm^e^ Ai7-from |JQ with a suf. pronoun, with the prefix j .^j-I^-mO ^?2^;? Z>e/M/'e^-plural from f*^i*^A* with the prefix O v 7 7 y 135) Y. 13. w. 1., ^AaOOlO and ^/^-frora 001 with the verbal termination-2nd. pi. with the prefix O 136) Y. 13. w. 2., ^^IdjJOiHiD forbearing-Fa. part, from ;ifiD 137) Y. 15. w. 1., OlSl22:lb*0 and his peace, from |SdX with suf. pronoun, and prefix O 138) Y. 15. w. 4., ^QDLClC3^your hearts, from \Ol^ with suf. prou. ^ I -h 139) Y. 15. w. 6., ^oLt'rOL] ye are called-Eih. 2nd. plural from -n 7 140) Y. 15. w. 10., ^^)a Sd thanJcful-psiTt. active Aph. from 1U. 336 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. Revelations y. 1 10. 141) Y. 1. w. 1., 2a^1>jO atid I saw-X^\\. pret, 1st. sing. fr(ni IVm with prefix 142) Y. 2. w. 10., oaAalQ^ to open-Va. infinitive from o^As with prefix !^ * 143) Y. 3. w. 17., CTU1m>V)\ to look on iV-infin. with suffix from ll-M with the prefix ^ 144) Y. 4. w. 2., AaOOI zV w-formed from A^l and 001, ] being dropped. The phrase, including the word precedmg and the one followmg, means literally, it is weeping much. 145) Y. 4. w. 7., .^i^AsI was found-'E\h^. from 146) Y. 5. w. 8., UlCiZ literally thou shalt 7eep-2nd. per. fut. masc-put for the unperative (vid. 61. B. a). 141) Y. 6. w. 6 , ^\oy to stand. ^\o is a participle from ^OO (vid. 64. 3. B. Rem.). 148) Y. 6. w. 8., ]rtVnj slain-psiss. part. Peal. fem. from *mnu 149) Y. 6. w. 21., ^9>A(> who were sent-M. per. f. plural, ,77 Ethpa. from J> Revelations xxii. 1 10. 7^7 if '' 150) Y. 2. w. 23., wiOlQs'p^O and leaves of it-from Izi'^i with a suffix, and prefix 0* 151) Y. 3. w. 4., looiJ shall 5e-future of looi -X 7 152) Y. 3. w. 14., wiOUJOmSOmJ shall serve him-fut. 3d. masc. > 7 ~ plural, Pa. from oftios with a suffix. ,77 153) Y. 5. w. 16., JOllI^D causing to shine- Aph. part. masc. from >ou. N0TE8 ON THK CHRESTOMATHY. 33T 154) Y. 6. w. 15., OiO>V>\ to sAow-iufmitiYe, Pa. from iuCLm* 155) V. 8. w. 13., rM ^rnSoN to woj'ship, to ;>raMe-infinitive, Peal from rve^ * 156) Y. 11. w. 1., ]\i^ shall be filthy-fat. Ethpa. from \L* 15t) Y. 14. w. 15., toSsi they shall enter in-fut. 3d. masc. Peal from ^\l 158) Y. It. w. 4., \L co7;ie-imperative of |Z( ,7 7 , r 159) Y. 19. w. 3., JfJ^ shall take away-Feal future from >^^ 338 NOTES OX THE CHRESTOMATHY. POETRY. "We present a few specimens of Syriac poetry, taken from the Peshito Bible, published by the British and Foreign Bible Society, in 1826. It will be observed that the text does not appear in a rhythmical form, nor are there any divisions into verses. The Peshito or literal version was made near the close of the first, or beginning of the second century, while the divisions into chapters and verses were introduced in the thirteenth century. Points, in addition to Rihui, will be noticed over and under particular letters. These are intended to mark the occurrence of Kushoi and Rukok. Psalm xlv. 110. 1) Yerse 2. word 9., ^JOlL^^ therefore. This is composed of the conjunction m-^Sd and the suffix pronoun JJ01 Conjunctions as well as other particles often take suffixes. 2) Y. 3. w. 1., 1SD)| cast (gird)-Aph. imperative, from poi* See a sunilar instance in Matt. xvii. 2t. Psalm li. 110. 3) Y. 2. w. 1., lyefi^l multiply-im])QVdiirfQ, Aph. from LwCD used here adverbially in the sense of vary much. 4) Y. 2. w. 2,, * i 1 > .1 i ! wash we-imperative, Aph. from v^tO* with a suffix pronoun. NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 339 5) V, 2. w. 7., %A.ia> cleanse ?M-imperative, Pa. from p> with a suflQx pronoun. 6) Y. 3. w. 8., ^^niSnn in all time, always-from la all, ^] time and the prefix preposition, Q in. 7) Y. 4. W.8., D>>lZ> ^A<2^ thou mighlest he just-Ethpa. 2nd. sing. raasc. future from 0>1 The preformative falls away as the coa- j unction J precedes. 8) Y. 6. w. 7., waAAl>0| thou Tnakest me to know-^xxidi. sing. pret. Aph. from ^pi with a suffix pronoun. 9) Y. 9. w. 7., I \ llot owMmperative Pe. from VaI* Psalm civ. 1 10. 10) Y. 5. w. 1., ^A| ^prepared, laid-Ethpe Jrom JJLO* 11) Y. 5. w. 4., CJUJLDALO-participie with a suffix pronoun from 12) Y. 7. w. 7., ^A^OljA^ hastening-an Ethpe. participle, from 13) Y. 9. w. 6., OUOmniO and (that) they should Twt arcer-M. plural, Pa. from tCQO with a suffix pronoun, and the conjunction O preceding. SYRIAC LEXICON, jof, ]o]] suf. *jjd1 a father, pi. |OL.r::)| |^aio( parents. rS| to perish, Aph. to cause to perish, to destroy. ^ojQ ( to be sad, to be disturbed. ^ iioj Abnil (name of an idol). ^cn;:Dl Abraham. lUi I m. a reward. 12^.'| a letter, a writing. pj I an ear. O I or. 0( ! (mark of the vocative). AjJDoI namely, that is (from 0| and AxO). VZoiliol skill, ability. VALDOJ^f. a nation. ;j^o1 Ophir (a proper name). -kCn>0| Edessa in Mesopotamia (a proper name). X^kio] a way. 1A >)o1 the law book of Moses, the Pentateuch. ^qXjo1 Jerusalem. ^ll to go, to go away. \L] brother. rjJ\ to hold, to seize, to lay hold of. U'r^\ the last, the end. ^*rJsl, Iju'r^jl another; fem. lA-^'r-jal, pi. m. ^>*1, C -X I Jjl4sc1u^| an Egyptian. Aat^SJOyj-il Adverh, like the Egyptians. Ipi"! hand-in Hebrew ^ . ]pi1 who, which, fem. of P-**!* y^S\ SO as, according to, as to, {secundum) nearly, > j^| just as, therewith. ]n-al where? > P 1 there, where ; p >(] whither ? P-a | ^iD whence ? Q^^l where. 342 SYEIAC f 'J r r t 7 SO , . 7 7' ^1, tlQ-il how? > Usui that. ^^iNil pi. they, ,-jil truly, certainly, yes. (JL1 who, what-Uatr^ at what. .n m I Isaac (a proper name). ^^^I'jXfiuj Israel (a proper name). |;Qji{ honor, a mark of esteem, a solemn procession. I 7 X A "! it is, ^Lk\ I am, etc. MP I serpent (e;)^i6va). pMwD ( at the same time-together. * 7 IN vJD"! to eat, to consume. U^ii-^Vjust as, ? l-^^T of such a quality (qualis). (.a \n\ n| a stranger, a guest 1j( but, yet (aXXa), if not (J 0). IJ I to lament. Tai! God. |aC31-^ godly. iZooi-^ f. divinity, the godhead. P 7 ^7 ^>,irnn \^ an Alexandrian. ^alL Olaph, the first letter of the alphabet. LEXICON. ^l-^ to learn, Aph. to cause to learn, to teach. ]'ny\ a ship. vv to constrain, to compel, to urge any one, i vv. op- pressed. U ^-^ oppressed. JSdI mother. pkiD] Amida in Mesopotamia (a proper name). I 7 -n 17 ,^ i. V) |, |1*V)|, surely, firmly. 7 -n 7 -^ 7 ^1 Aph. ^^.OiOl, fut. ^SOiOU to believe. c 1. 7 Ljk\\ iV)f Adv. constantly. ;iD I to say, to speak. 7 T \fi\ a lamb. 7 -n wALd1 (with > following) if. i> 7 p1 I, pi. ^1x1 we. ^Q 3 1 m. ^-J1 f., that (^5 J.cc.) X X 7 Cll 1 5-^ I Antinum (a proper name). 7 '^ vM^Jj Ethpa. to sigh. AJf man, a certain man, pi ^AJ( and (aJ( SYRUC |ZqaJ| humanity, as concrete, mankind. L iV m. *aA jV f. thou ; pi. ^oAj^m. ^""AjTf. you. |ZAj] a woman, a wife. (ZoflOl a healing. l-^Va bound, pi iV^l ^^ a prison. VrJQ^^l stylite (according to Assem.) - ^mimfcvCO! sedition. n .. 7 * |4q4^1 <^il of cinnamon. P -X 17 ^ (ZQl4'r4co! a soldier. ISDjLaCDl external appearance, dress, {dyyiiLa). pASOi^CDj hypocrite *2)1 also, |J2)| neither. ^1' 1-^V face, ^\-l SM over, wi^U accordmg to, towards. |2)QQQ.B^j a bishop. 7 It %Si 1 to be anxious, uneasy. ^li^il [Lay] four. p i-n -ft ]n^i1 heterodox. LEXICON. 843 p Vii] a lion. ISOj) I Arius. 7 J^ %OQy%i J2DCLk)| Areopagite. JJQO>| a ruler, a chief man. OPT V&l0)l a Syrian, a Gentile. p 7 -n-ft l4o ty)>1 an errorist, a heretic. .miflO?] heresy (al'^so'jj). JU| earth, land, country. I to find, Ethpe. to be found. pDQ ^ 2 As I the six days work, the creation. p -n fZl to come, Aph. to lead, to bring, to conduct. 7 7 ff 7 JL], (jZ) a place, a region. *Q in, from, through, to. filNti:^ a possessor of a bath. X 7 1 ^"lo, tcU^ a pulpit {(Briiia). *> 7 ^Q-. pQ hence. ZoiS to be ashamed, Aph. to make ashamed. 7 * ]ZZoiQ shame, disgrace. ).^qLq2, wiZq^QjO a counselor. [_Sq QDQ a agreeableness, amiableness. |jQQ awkward, uneducated. su SYRIAC LEXICON. jVO Pa. mock. 7 y *\^ to deride, to 12; M Q (from IZ; A*1 end) finally. ^^.4^ to cease, to destroy. ^4^ to conceive. |i4o pregnant. 7 7 among, between. m. (AflUJS evil. m. an evil person-pi. ^AjlS, flOain malice. >^Q > n Besoe (a monk-proper name). A * A " ' Aa^ = A 1 1 Q between, by ; hi I Q ^ out ; ^i'cnj AaJD Mesopotamia. -ft p 7 i> p > .. Aa^, (AaA a hoase, (a^O) AjlQ the Roman dominion. ^*jwJiAj^ Bethlehem (a proper name). Ibo to weep. ,ili TTlthout. >.7 ,.., ,.7 falO pl. m. sons. MUf - - 1*^ o 7 Cmst. tl iin men, lit. sons 7 of men. ;Q is always used in the sing, for son. IcQO to despise. Part. P. ]miD despised. x I 7 g)ni Nirno Basilius (a pro- per name. kO% ^ 17 |ZnV)imn f. joy, benignity. I'^C^O m. back. ^QQQ to perfume. IVnmn odors. JIQ to seek, with ^iD to entreat, to demand. ^9 p -ft |*^*^ | NS*^ enemy, an adversary. 1 Al!D the seekmg, the finding out. , 7 J ^a to take away. r^^ m. small-l^^fcO feminine. fZo;^^ a small matter (for the Adj. small). I O *^ to explore, to discover, Ethpa. with 2 to contemplate, too a gnat, a midge. fO, V^ sou. li\lji^ *jio au inhabitant of the city. 1^ to create. toj^oik Barabbas (a j^roper name). 7 ^;o;o a Barbarian. 7 7 t^j;o Bardesanes (a proper name). |Aj,!o houses, pl. feminine. 7 5^; O to fall down, to bend the knees, Ethpa. to receive a bene- diction, to bless one's-self. SYRIAC I V >0'^ but, yet. *mJ;o Etkpa. to become man. iti^'r^ man. lo;0 the lightning, brightness. ]l'r^, lya a daughter, pi. Al5 |JoA:D, f A^oAiD a young woman, a maiden. 5Z\0 after, ^-OjAq afterwards. ^Ao jAo soon, (literally), shortly thereupon. IjLi, l^t an arrow, dart. )iQ.* to choose, to select. U^i-yi a side, a part, f^i-y\ |J-Sdcd> the wrong side, i. e. an enemy. p^. the choice. 1 ALjl1.. a formation, a creature. ;^., Il^kt a man, a person. ^^nn . Gethsemane (a proper name)"! *2)-.P^. 2)p,t to blaspheme. iir.. to meet with any one, to happen to any one. Q-. in the midst, Qve^ within. ^>Qyk a troop, a multitude. EXICON. 345 (2)>Q.t m. blasphemy. M-JQ.I shame, disgrace. ]-i>Q.. Guria (proper name of a woman). I^JOLy circumcision. 54**Hy to laugh, to mock. f^for. lJ-.i to uncover, to discover, Etkpe. to be discovered, to be made known. l^yt to rob, Ethpe. to be robbed. Zu]ll^yi public, free. p..i^y Gahlee (a proper name). [y > \.t a revelation. .^ij;^.. to engrave. |Zo;AV)yt an accomplishment, perfection. ,SCU to fulfill, to finisb. Vri=if^ mighty. VUi Pass. Fart. IWm hidden, unknown. |.iJ. to lend. jni-. , |Ql-t race, family (/^vog)^ offspring. jaaco.* Aph. *CDm I to lie down. ;!- to scold, with Q (.i^^t the north. po^t a bone, a hmb. 346 SYRIAC LEXICON. > mark of the Genitive ; Rela- tive Pronoun; while, that, there- with, in order that. 7 .>xfD> to offer. Fa. the same. p It U*^y an offering. *^y to carry, to take, Ethpe. to be conducted, to conduct ones- self. ^. J to lie, Fa. ^^i ? (Za\.. J a falsehood. {dClJ gold. |;O0> behavior. I 7 ,-iO> David, sometimes written )OCFU> (a proper name). X -p -X ^0 . ^0>, poj, jAaoj, place. X ^11 J, ^) to crush. ^^.**> to fear, to worship. 1> I 7 * 1A^> fear, terror, ]J\, Z\LjsjJ superstition. IP t> 7 Q^j an evil spirit, the Devil. po^j to be possessed of an evil spirit. * \y aj a word accompanying the Fossessive Fron. 16, nSn? who is my, or my. 5,A-L> thy, or who is thy. ^> but (^i). -^0 97 ^JUj a Judge. (la) judgment. * This is formed from ^ and V^ , Vid. reference above. Tr. 9 7 ^^> Daison (the proper name of a river). 10 7 \^y a cloister. *P 5 7 Wr^^ ^ monk. |Zql;j> monastic life. X 1 7X > O iAa> testament (^laS^jxr]). Pj, jloj pure, clean. ^0 X 7 P> Pa. jlO? to purify. 7 pj to remember. ^>, and ISdj the blood. (ZqSdj a resemblance, an image, a likeness. X^^} similar. t) "7 .. 7 U^? Constr. St. wiiDj value. ^J to sleep. ^ 7 y A V) > sleepmg ; Matt. viii. 24, pi. . ..X 7 7 ^12iD> to weep. 7 jliOj Ethpa. to wonder at, to ]je astonished. ^y to judge, Fass. Fart, ^j judged. PmJj the feast of the appearance of Christ ; Epiphany. *!> 7 [xn^ the beard. ^jj Aph^jyy to comprehend. jlij an arm. 7 v*)j to encounter, to speak with any one. SYRIAC Toi lo I fjOl Fa. -fc)Cn to lead, to guide. IjOl this, she, PronSChal., ^j^n)- T ^JOl members. 1)J01 honor, glory. OOl m. *a01 f. and OOl m. wiCTI 7 f. that, the former ; > 001 who; ) ^OL.^ since. looi to be {Verh Subst.) Fut. loou^ X -x CLiOOl he, she. X ^ 001 them. ^0 -x joaooi customs, deeds. ^r^OI there, then. ii" ' '' P-a^Ol a temple, a palace. y/n iVn ,rri faith, belief, doc- trine, Ili^Q* ^^-"'^ the sav- ing faith. ZoOOl in like manner. ^^o^Ol therefore. ^--DOl, U-^^ so, in this manner. ^Ol, ^OlL hence, for, there. j^Ol Pa. to wander, to go forth, to walk. \^ they, these. .01, J JOl m. IjOl f. plur. ^QJOl m. ^xJOl f. this. LEXICON. 347 p-ftJOl advantage, pleasure. 7 ^01 to return, A'ph. to lead back. D>0)ai Herod (a proper name.) p>01 here, hither. ^01, t^OI now, at present. 1o the letter Yan^ and. ^1 to redeem, Fut. ^p. Fa. T> 7 ^1, ll^l time, pi. liSl Acts xvii. 26. y *"7 17 y7 1 Aiai , ^Z?Z> or ^^ 1 ,1 ni r^ALii-i twice ; ^-^1^1 ALZ thrice ; y)'r-^ ^ ^1 before. 7 ' ^-.l to grow dumb, to put to silence. )qji)1 just, upright. *-)jl to be just, wOjl it befits, it "is suitable, it is becoming. lA-a Ojl agreement, corres- pondence. "JAdjI alms. Zul;jiOll Adv. carefully. >011 Bth'pa. to beware. ]*jwa01 praise, show, splendor. .rr>.Air>^ Zenobius (a proper name). 348 SYRIAC LEXICON. Viol. ^01, ^i to move, to be restless. 1^01 a moving, a dance. iSiO\ hyssop. ]ql1 honor, splendor. PV*! a weed, ^1 to arm. PI to conquer, to vanquish. ^9 7 [.mJD] a conqueror. |;.A.k}l a song. ^ species, kind. .A.J1, PftJl m. fornication. IZo^i fornication. >ail, 1>Q11 little, JOIV^ U? not small. 7 ..Oil to cry, to call, |'^>ni cross. 7 %2lQ] to crucify, to torture. IjU* free, l)iK;2 free. >0* ought. hfc.*Q *^ * quiet, concealed resi- dence. %C X 7 X .. I 7 tO a n K> beloved, pi. iniQAj^ I 7 n > n K Habib (a proper name). .? 7 (;^Aj an associate, the other, any one. 7 >*^* to enclose. Kh^ a feast, a feast day. ^U* \r^-y\^ lame. j-M m. (rJs f. one, a certam one, % P 7 7 any one |n0 ,^ Sunday. I or fpja, wftr_ja to rejoice ; ]L^J 1^0 ,-K> to rejoice very much. f^LOpAA rejoicmg. >pA* mutual, reciprocal. (Oj-^*, I^OpM gladness. h^r^ joy. Mr** the breast, pi. suff. Luke, xxiii. 48. , 7 Jr^ to surround, to flow around. |JJC71 honor, majesty. 7 P >^jfj^ around. ipM to renew. 7 *.. 7 fZ,-M new, 1)1. lZrK II 7 Q>*, Fa. aCU to show, to in- dicate. % 7 ^Qa love. |irnV)Qjsj perseverance, patience. P;iCLm injury. (I XI to see Ethpe. to be seen, to appear. 1 01 M a vision, pi. \lO\l* an apparition. P X x\A^ June. 01.ja to bind. \^\j^ bond, union. (ZVjsj a view. 14^ to eiT, to sin. |ai4>^ m. sin, crime, pi. )-n^, fOl^Ak and ^Ol^AA* TAj4a* f. sin. lA^M wheat, pi. 14^ . M-M to lire, Apk. %mj^] B._ja and | > t life. (It always has the plural form but gen- erally a singular signification. p 7 ..107 ni i m. a debtor, pi. ^^in* i fZOLi-M living creature, an animal, a monster. I 7 ^\jLJvi, |Ja.x a force, an army. ^ > > to strengthen. .A\i > and pA^jLjsj strong. f *^> linen, fine linen. ^ X 7 ^ l> X 7 S0'*^"% (V7>nM wise, plural I .. I 7 ^ - ..17 ,V.^>. and |V)>n* ]ASQa*A wisdom. 7 fjja vinegar. V^Q- \> a gnat, a fly. 7 4 -^ to mingle, Ethpa. to take part, to associate with any one. >Q.klLj, ]V>i\m sound, healthy. 7 vIa* to wash. SYRIAC LEXICON. 349 ^>Q-Lm to dream, Etkpe to re- cover. ^'nSki for, instead of. ASo** Ethpe. to be angry. (AS^AA anger, wrath. |A.|^Aaa a sigh. ^1a* we, us, pi. c. from p| i*^! i a heathen, an idolater. JXUa, %DQjsa far be it. X 7 ^mi vehement, strong. 7 ^aCU to envy, with *0 I^Lm to cover Ethpa. to conceal oneVself. A^l^i^M dihgently. 7 ',Su* Aph. to blush, to be ashamed. # 7 {^^ the back, the loms. >Qja to be white. \^ to see, to look out. ^\j^, ^'r^l to curse, to detest. ^77 j^ja Pa. to liberate. ^ ^ " '' pi^ a magician, a sorcerer. 12-H^ f. from l2-r>ll finally, the end, enough. ]jlk endurance, suffering. ^QA, po>i darkness, pi ^-^QA>I Eph. iv. 18. ^Aa* to mark, to seal. ]LcAaa a seal. 350 SYRIAC LEXICON. t^u. ioili a rumor, a report. .^4 ^4/- go<^d. Adv. very. ^u.i4 Part. P. m. sealed. iLo^ seal. ^q4 P. t^iJL^ to be ready, to be willing. jlOQ^ the pious, the good. (jAqq^ happy, blessed. iooid^, and lioo^ kind, family, offspring. |Aj-^q4 vine, branch. l^ iQ ^ readiness. (CQ^Q^ a part (tomus.) .ao^, ^^ to swim over any- thing, to overflow. fjQ^ a mountain. ^)Q4 distress, misfortune. }. .1 M - 04 that which is con- cealed, |!Lsq4s secret. X 7 -x 7 Q *^ (j , fZonn ^ goodness, excel- lence, benevolence, grace. .^Xia^ to order, (Taccsiv). |mn^ an arrangement, order, state (Tafjj). 1J4, | i \^ a young man, a youth. |AaX4 a girl, a maiden. n ! ^-ik^ to carry. nN(^ Ethpa. to be dispersed. lsb.4 foul, detestable. 1^1 (t unclean. ]Zo^lfc> uncleanness. {14 to wander, to wander around, to forget, with ^ to fall from something, to apostatize, Aph. to mislead, to deceive, to cheat. |Zoi\^ error, heresy. ^Ql^ to taste, to taste well. ^.^ to be laden, to bear, Aph. to cause to carry, to bring. p {^Zi2Ll=^a^) *2lI to over- run. Aph. *2l41 to overflow, to fill. JCnZLi, Ethpe. ,mi^^Zl to ac- quiesce, to obey. J^ to chase away, to drive away 7 y 7 -^ JZi'rL to strike, Ethpe. ^'rLl] * ySi'fi a leaf. ^0 .P P ()j, tVi fine, suitable, proper. i>- 7 JCLk^ to wish very much, Ethpa. the same. ^^.ilu to lead, to lead away, *oaU9 pi. Jews. %QQ1 >10CU Jovmian (a proper name). 9 7 . '^ -^^^^ John (a proper name.) ^aCQQji Joseph (a proper name). Si 0>\qji Julius ( a proper name ) . P 7t -X IP01 >\0i Julian (a proper name). (l*^\0* a doctrine, teaching. ^Q-a, "Isiol day, ]^^in 7 -kP !> 7 by day, ^iDO*, JlSDQa to day. z now ; >00 ^n daily. for T ff r M-SOLft a Greek, A^] JOi Adverb. in the Greek manner, accord- ing to the Greeks. ^>Za, P>Zq^ use, advantage. *0 P II Ml ^ hermit. 1 ^ to bring forth, Ethpe. to be born. 1'r-Al birth. 15 9w #7 >0 N> a small boy, a child. \SiQ ^ a teacher, a learned man. **n\ i to learn, Aph to inform. |V) i the sea. |V) * to swear, Aph. to cause to swear, to swear to. P I 7 |1 iV) the right hand, the right. *P -x p (^QIji a suckling, a baby. -> X %lQ.a Aph. to add. jl to increase rapidly. . 7 nonS> Jacob (a proper name). ^P 4^ {so ^ one who takes care. ,1* to burn. IP 7 pOa flame, holocaust. X 7 p 17^ ;in>, |;>n* illustrious, honored, great. jD;a to be great, to increase (in respectability). 352 SYRIA C LEXICON |ja^ a mouth. jlu'r^, fAlui'pi a tent. ^Q*^ Jesus. Aa being, essence, -ft I ^Aa to remain, to dwell, to settle, to sit. ^Sd ;_^A^ more than. fZo^^Zu superfluity. >Li to win, to abound. 1p to prevent, to rebuke. i p, (il^p passion. MjIo justly. "I Zojp justice, righteousness. ^]o a stone, a rock, Cephas, or Peter. IZp f. a rebuke. 7 *r^D perhaps. 7 fD as, during (pleonastic before the Fart.). iiOlD a priest. QJOlO the priesthood. r*jQa shame. .9 7 .-ft .. 7 ^r^OQS m. a star, ^^. pQ2QD Matt. xxiv. 29. I'^Sdqo a priest. ..QOQO, \nD m. a cup. (.*.> QO a cell. y^SDJQD a throne. ,.i M> 1 JElkpa. tc laying on the hand V .3 each. blush. ^7 IX -X I JjL JQ ^O'pi^ the or extending of W ^ 7 \s._o all, every, , w^ l^i-Lo a dog. ^ i\o, Pa^ a crown. ISd^^D every thing, any thing. I'ALo a bride. pbo how much, how much more. 7 ;lQO to be amazed, to be sad. \lD to give a surname. (AlO a fellow servant. \zilD bosom, lap. 7 10 to assemble, to collect to- gether, Ethpa. to be assembled. (lO an assembly. |CC0 a cup. IcQO to conceal, Pa. to cover, Ethpa. to hide one's-self. pus, |>mo, I* mo concealed, p .. 7 |ll2 famine. 7 ;10 to deny, to refuse, to desert (with ^)* 7 7 p where, p^ there where. IP to feel pain, ^ Aap it pains one. lip. \jk\D sad, sorrowful, Etkpe. to pass by, to go. OUp, Ibup infirm, weak. IP Aph. to announce (x>]^utf<''e'v). |la.4^1Lp a christian. ^p to involve, to roll up, to pass by. I^Dp a roll, a scroll. \1mD a collision, a shock. \^SiMD Ethpa., w_21 A-O^l to humbly entreat. ^to to write, Aph. the same. loAo a writing, a book. ^5\o flax, linen. laAo a shoulder. hlo to remain, to remain behind. tf not, no ; V? lest, without. ]ri!^ heart. -^^ ^ to arouse, to che^r. "[lAoV dress, a garment. 12q^Li.l^ a decision, reliance. .^V to hold, to take hold. ;^V outside, without. i^AV to clothe, to cover. IqL Pa. to accompany, ^Mj?0\o only, alone. lV)n>\ bread. ii^, 111!^, lliS night, pi. ^oN I \ &c. ZuL it is not. ]j L an insane person. ^"Mlover, up ; ^ ^Jyil before, besides. f^"^ ^ to eat. t3onn\ opponent. ^\ ]i^^ tongue, langunuv. ]Sd that, what; J ]Sd when. I'r^]^ word, discourse, a part of speech. )j|Sd a handle, a covermg. IvnoVn spring, fountain. liJopiSD a blessing, a benedic- tion. U-^, IA^-wSd scroll, volume, roll. y r^s^ freely. 1 1 ^ V*^^ a wise man, pi 364 SYRIAC (jj^fio an altar. Vr^i^b a desert. IZaJ;^,! redemption. (pijlD a cloister, a chamber. n ^r-^Lo thus, thence, therefore. P-ifSo, lAlji,iD a town, a city. ^f^ something, ^,.liD P nothing. ^AiMbJr^ eastern, JwJr^ the Eas't. (s'rio a song, a hymn. JiSD^Olk) believing, with |;-ft^ orthodox. ;jOlk5 prompt, ready. fAcjOloi a gift. X "K 7 ^qS^, P^. *OiV> to deride. ?, -x |>qSd myrrh. ]2Qk) death. ^^..-J^ to strike, to prick, to bite. |Zq>j.Sd a blow, plague, pi. 9. i> 7 |Ja.wwSD weak, humble. ^m^Sd on the morrow. ]jQaAiiD a tempest, pi. waves. 14^ to go, to come, to arrive, 3/. Fret. Z^ \s4^ from, of, over, on account of; J ^\^ while. LEXICON. ]\ i sf^V) a heretic, a seducer. Ajfaii^V) secretly. *0 .. 7 I* V) water. Aa.^) to die, Aph. to cause to die, to mortify. , 7, 7 jAjlId distinguished, excellent. POOLO humility, modesty. *0 17 PinV) affable, modest. v.riV) now, immediately. P-> 17 |ZoninV> lowliness, intelli- gence. 7 7 ,i^V), ^*io to be depressed. 1J--LD to be full. Fa. to fill, ^%e. to be filled. t> Tt Ti -n U Ld word, saying, plur. p ! }oP-J^ an angel, a messenger. fI\V) a captain. ^ i-^ Sd to advise, to consult, to reign. y^^, "^a-Ai a king. |Zq ^>> So a kingdom. \\\ V> to speak, to converse, l^kJ Abs. word. IALLo jEmjpA., word^Z. Uio. {la^Vo a teacher, a learned man. IZaiajiLD learning. Jj^SqSd speech. SYRIAC LEXICON. 355 ^Sd who ? y ^ V> that,* which, QlLO who is this ? 7 ^iD certainly (f^sv); it often is superfluous. ^Sd of, from, on account of, since ; LaL ^ from, of; ^-i t J Ol afterwards, hereafter, with sufiP, ^alo of us. U^what? (u >lV) a faithful servant. lZ;iSD a candlestick. IAjlSd a part. |LQj;n>mV) patience. |inff>V> poor. VA^jQkHk) f. baptism. l^LjiD, l2;S,Vn a hollow, a cavern. * p p 7 I 1 r>m ; Sd to fall off, to cast away, to make free. P 9k 7 |Zoj;1d a falling off, an injury. k 7 t**;V) bold, impudent. Adv. |4^r^ a garment. p I 7 i;^;!^ bitter, sorrowful. lAriiOjLb a chariot, a throne. P PP 7 ^>j;Sd that which relates to Christ. ^^iS;V) a flock, an assembly, a community. Pr^^ a messenger. * 7 .nV) to anoint. ]^SV) changable, variegated. [>> >^ complete, perfect. * P P 7 |i^Vr>^Vr> a deacon, a minister. iZoiaiQASD the oflBce of a dea- . con. ]aiV> a person sick of the palsy. 1A^;aLd a position, a bed. 356 SYRIAC l2aim.iA^Ai f. obedience. 7. -vASd to extend. t>*ALD time, a period. ^liOy* )ASd an interi^reter. lA^l-^^a tZASg necessity. ^ZjZASo a catechumen. J. )ini m. a prophet, Matt. i. 22. jZOim f. prophecy. Zo;-*-^ drawing out, patience, suffering. I 7 ;-iaiJ shining, bright. , 7 JOU to shine, Apk. to light, Ethpa. to be bright. f JOTJ a river. 1 90101 m. light; from JGU to shine. -mQJ, vmJ to repose, to be ap- peased, Apk. to lay aside, to put away. .jsjQJ, paQJ rest. P -x *o p *> *apQ_J, (apQ^ a stranger, VA^pOJ f. also Neuter. iOQj, >QJ to sleep. * P P -x ^i-DQJ distribution, expending. 1>QJ fire. LEXICON. I LO ;jP abstemiousness. (JjjJ a valley. A*jJ to go down, to descend, Apk. to lay down, to take down, to bring, to deliver. IAjjJ m. a garment, pi. -^.AaiJ, 2i4j to drop. 7 *r^ to take care of, to watch. (ZQmwjlJ f. lenity, meekness. .7 11 (l O ^ l Nicoea (a proper name). ^, 1^ a yoke, a bow. ^m guilt, injury, crime. 7 fn^1 to augment, to honor, to sacrifice, to slay. ^ 7 J]0OV)1 law. 7 *^m^ to take, to receive. IP *. -n JQajCQJ temptation. ,QJ to pour, Ethpe. %DanL'\* 7 orf)1 to ascend. Mi]aJ refreshment. ^5siu to fall. 7 n<^1 to go out, Aph. to take out, I 7 >ni*^ J spread. Jjtaj the soul, reflexive, self. I ^ to fight, to attack 7 fcS ^ to plant. SYRIAC P-M ^ a victory, an exploit. X I ^^i^i^ 3 Nesibis in Mesopo- tamia (a proper name), P^-i^ victorious, superior, clear. ^QQJ Ethpa. to be avenged . %Sim to adhere, to follow. \cn to dig, to dig out. lij {:pl. IZAjf) a woman. pAj a downfall, a curse. pb|ia3 silver, money. IZlflO a bushel. JiUCD an old man, Adj. old. t m i ncio dense, extensive. |A!idflD an ode, a song. ^l^IiCD to be satisfied. 7 ;^iflD to believe, Pa. to declare, to forbear, Ajpk to suppose. 10 7 ;*^fr> hope. ^*X0 to multiply, to ipcrease. IN -wflO to worship, to honor. IZpwi worship, honor. (jQ-wflO a cluster. I 7 ^^9 X 7 iyi fO , I f ji.t no much. Adv. very. ]Zo | >.t Cr> a multitude. 24 1\^ LEXICOX. 857 , 7 JrflO to order, to arrange. jOlflD to testify, to witness, Aph. to die as a martyr. (jOlflD Emph. of >OlfiD a witness, a martyr ( =fxa^'ru^). |Z,OjOlCD testunony, witness, mar. tjred one. QflD a multitude. JlSLi QD offense. **om to long for something, to take pleasure in. UloQflO thought. |n\orn reception, ascension to heaven. ^QD, ^.D to place, to inter, to add, ^^;2 to shut, l^]k) to write or compose books, Mftji;:0 to punish with death, Ethjpe. to be interred, to be buried. jCOjJQfiD synod (tfuvofJoj). (l^JQ CO indigence, poverty, need. PI^QfiD a deed, an occurrence. *7 J . Pa>QD Syria. ^^jQflD Adv. Syriac, in the Syriac. 358 SYRIAC LEXICON 1a-)QflD a Syrian, Adj. Syrian. .SUkCD to pull down, Fa. to destroy, Ethjpa. to be dispersed. |i4QD Satan (a proper name). 1;4^ a side, a page. 7 7 ;niCY) to bear, to endure, to tolerate. ^iflO the laying on (of hands). lASifY) an assembly. |2LiuD a sword (^I'fpos). (QD to expect, Pa. tinco to wait. IZoS^ro transgression. n!:^CQ to ascend, -x ^QCD, iOQCD to place, to lay upon, to commit. y o 7 *,i^CQ to support, [tkSil to take refreshment, to tarry. JJ-SQCD left, wrong. UcD to hate. tlCD hated, mean. .niCD to need, .Oa.ICD Par?. P(255. Pe. y ;^QD to make, to do, to visit (the sick). I ^aDD a scribe, ^Z. ^ r^^^, 1 rSlCO. li >^m, l^Oa-aoo a ship. 2iD, |;aD a book. "lAaur, TJ^.l'Zoaa) the mouth, the lips. y w*;CX^ Pa. to dishonor, to violate. IjlL a feast, a feast-day. 7 i^il to do, to perform, to yield, to make something (with a double Accusative). IP 7 r.. 7 r^i m. servant, _p/. ^^fi,*^S, ^ .. 7 (,m Mat. xiii. 21. IP v* P jaQl creator. 7 ;..il to pass by, to pass over; with JD, to pass around. I .p -^ Aaj^iQl Hebrew, Ad. Hebra- ically. ^^, ^^ shortly. Myul, lA^^ a young cow. jl until, ^5u^rllJ not yet; ILDjI until, y "t^r^ until that; p -K ikP p-^ ^, jjjl time. ,7 )pl Pa. to support, to aid. (Zpl church. ^Ql to act unjustly. ^Ql, pOl unjust, sinful. 7 Pol wicked, ungodly. SYRIAC I (pSDQl a habitation, an abode. iVfJ^ tleatli. (oJQ^ an answer, an alternative song. JDQl, Qi Ethft. to be troubled. iZqI^jqL uncircumcision. >al or ;i to watch. )^ to blot. jpoA custom. ,-jlI, M-fc^ eye. ? 7 ;ji^ to arouse, 4?^- to stir up. f^-i* a guardian angel. \yik oyer, to, against, on account of; > \y^ because. fZciDQ^ avarice. Ul, lAll cause. |AXi an altar. Acts xvii. 23, ^1, ^^ to go, with *0 to go into, with ^^ to carry on pro- hibited intercourse with any one, Eth'pe. to go into, Ajph. to lead, to lead into. ^^, Emph. |^V>S world, race, generation. 7 ^Ql with, above. '>a\ \ihi a nation, pi. ^-i^lioi, r^Ql to suffer one's self to be dipped, to suffer oneVself to be baptized. EXICON. 359 ^0 ^ (r^l dipping, baptism. IjQiQl a pillar. |)Qi01 an inhabitant. fJSoi troul)le, labor. fSQl to dwell. ]ll to hear, to answer, Ethye. to converse. (ZQaCLlL piety. (r-kJ^ one who is dead. tlii a cloud. ,^irf>S twenty. / lai P<2. to inter. |1 > \ aversion, opposition. '^ 7 ^ '^0\ Pad, to inquire. |;o:^ a root. 7 *5;i to flee. ^Al to avail, to prevail. HAl prepared. Part, (put for the future). ]na"Al ancient, old, f. I'Acu'Ai. I. 7 %0 I. 7 fuAl, {-piAl rich. 1)la fruit, 'pl. lila* 7 ^^2) to meet, to happen to (with r^, Vry^ bo^y. 360 SYR I AC iOSi* wjaQS, .-*) to blow, to sound. SD Q^oa Paul ( a proper name ) . ^LM.^Qa work. Vooa, ILdqS mouth. jj^DOa a command. 5Q2 Ethpe. to be unwilling. }ai.t )Q2) a tower {''f^^yos). ^L1)Q) a reward, a recompense. JlOjaa redemption, salvation. i" " '^^ {ljQ2i separation. fcQ2), *a2) to remain, to come to any one. 1aQ2) doubt. ^' P -x tQQ2> an explanation. ^Lj^a a phial. "laQCDQ-LiLS) a philosopher. *DQ4^ KSi Pilate (a proper name). \aijjSi mediation, entreaty. ' 1> P -X I 'fioHiD'rJjSi a servant of the clmrch. \Zi2i cheek, jole. ^i^jla to divide, Eihpa. to doubt. >j.,S>a, Par^. .xkS^} to work, to serve. |l2) to return. Fa. to answer, ^j?A. to lead back, to make known; Eikpe. to turn one's-self. LEXICON. 7 17 7 jifn^^l^ an apparition, an en- chantment. (AaIs) a limit, an end. 7 fcCQCQ2), .m<^ to free, ^^^. to permit. tCQ2) a lot, a portion, pi. ]flCL2 IZo^ia a work, labor. ^P X 7 ( fJZi, Fa. -> ^ to free, to deliver. 7 pQ2) to command, p . pp \O0\Si a redeemer, a deliverer. P P -x p t.*^0;a salutiferous, saving. n CD;a Persia. \aS^'^ a Persian. 7 ^;a to recompense, Ethpa. to be rewarded. P -X 7 \2iO flZi face, presence. .-D;2) to preserve, to deliver. 7 ^;a to separate, to divide, Ethpe. to be divided, to appoint. L\2i to break. ^^Mi to extend, to spread. t4*'^ just, right. T, 7 nn<^ to interpret. ^ Lsi, IS^.Aa a word, a matter, (As, PiAa wide. %ajA2} to open. 13^ JP^- 1^- i^lo^s, images. IpAa an idol, an image of a false god. 11^ to be filthy. 11^ vile, filthy. ^ . to be willing, to wish. fZoO^ will, -io-O^, lmlJ, ^ V) of one's-self, freely. {jjOi t wilhng, ready. ^l will. f1 iD . will, purpose. lot* to thirst. iOO . , iO^ to fast. ISdo . days of fasting, fast days. |ljO a figure, a pretence, ll . to incline. Pa. to pray, with ^*5y-l to pray for any one, to bless. - 7 ]]., ]a^. inclined. -^Vr Ethpe. to be crucified. l^Q^* a prayer, an entreaty. SYRIAC LEXICON. Sfil |^t\ a cru.ss. )S^ a figure, an image. VfSi early time, dawn. ]> Ethpe. to be separated, to burst. * r r * \nn Fa. to receive ; ^^.^idAcdI to happen, to come to pass. ;*^0 to bury. ];^D, 1>Q*^0 a sepulchre. ^OjipO ^V) from the beginning. yj^O for, to, ? Wr~^ ^-k) ere, before. >^,o |*V)r) the first. P xV ^JL^r^ holy. loo to remain, to stop. \laao a reception, an entertam- ment. [MJQQ holiness. ^QO, >CLD to stand up, to stand, Aph. to erect, to set up, to conclude, to appoint, to de- termine; with^ l^;o pre- ceding, to make war with any one. .Q^'r^^QO a church-yard, bary- ing-ground. 362 SYRIAC it' ^ JJojao* IJajao a servant of the church, sexton. ^flPOTifeA^COao Constantine (a proper name). V "^ . Pi 900 a town, a city. ^ftJ.a)ao a Cyrenean (a proper name).. VAsQID truth. (j q4^ 111. a murderer, a robber. \^ ^^ cunmng, ingenious. ]j4^ slaughter, murder. ]V)/n a league, ]V^ -0 ZojD consecrated vhgins. lASCiJD resurrection. \L\ lO a song. ]m>n a tree, bark, a book. IjAaO Cithara, harp. 1>0>A.i-D a player on the cithara. ^'ix3, (j-D a voice. ^iKo little. .QDO; I No the clergy. T^^li) a bride. JJLO to acquire ; A'ph. to grant, to bring. 1>.10 a pen, a reed, po^fej^ a centurion. U;QD Csesarea (a proper name). (l) to call, to cry. LEXICON. ^7 X s * 7 7 P-O0>(l3 Cappadocia (a prop- er name). |*mr) cassia. (^ to name, to call, to choose. n; n to approach, to draw- near, Fa. to conduct, to bring; IN -^ (m^) to sacrifice. yo^'^ war kCOcA^^O'rO a crystal. I 7 *^i;n near. p p '^ P-k;X} reading. |Aj;) a field, a country. ^P 7 p;0 a horn. |A<^,o;o calvary. ^P t 7 inn a priest, an elder. 7 ^) much, great, loud, chief; 2) ateacher, jE;7ip>^^."lij Als ,.. 7 7.-7 'pl. ^S> Const.pl. %A^i* ts> to grow, P, C..J to wish very much, to desire, Ethpa. the same. 7 , Vyi J to be angry. ^j, (J^J foot. SYRIAC XI..) to stone. jA.t) to mark, to feel, Aph. the same, with JD to perceive, to remark. \I^yO a wish, a desire. IP to go, to chastise ; with and without IV) 1*^ to ship. [ZiOyj a persecutor. ^^0)9 persecution. 7 , ^^U\y to hasten, to tremble,jEMpe. to be afraid, to be terrified. AapDOClJ Roman, Adv. roina-:- cally, Latin. ^01) to run, to hasten. fu. 0> anger, misfortune. wkaO) m. spirit. P -x , JjaO) f. wind, breath, spirit. |>ltO> spiritual. "iP P -x , JZLiaO) bowel love, bowels of mercies. ]1m6) distance ]1mOj ^Ld from a distance. X T 7 ^0> Aph. ^Q li] to raise up, to elevate. IijlSoo? a gift. P P -x, paiO) a quarrel. ]LoOJ a cloth J a rag. LEXICOX. 3(53 PID909 a prince, a person of rank. ]iQ0> a sign. y)t M> beloved. ^Q jsa) to love, Ethya. with ^^ il to feel compassion. PCLm9 _p/. compassion, beneyv" leuce, love. IASOmj love. 7 2Lm9 to lie, to float. 7 , t n t> to be far distant. U*^y smell. ^J spittle. (lAa) the first named. |Aajiu>, Aa.Aa9 firstling, begin- ning, pi. (z\.i^^9* ^p p J pai:^Aa9 the high priest. *p p ^ pjij) a person of rank. v02> to ride. - 7 ^j Ethpa. to feel inclined, tr be moved. ^>, ]Sd> f jASDj high, loud, pi. JSD) James iv. 6. \hh to lie, to be placed, Aph. to cast, to send; with *n\n to administer; with IaL3 to lose life. 364 SYRIAC LEXICON. ]k)j. * r jSdj Part. P. thrown down, given up IALdj hills, Luke xxiii. 30. ]Zoffi>V)> patience, long suffer- ing. fmSDj evening. nr>rf>) to sprinkle. Jlj Pfl^. .jlIj to obtain again, Ethpa. to be reconciled. ^^ PsDQl J mournful, deeply moved. JjAj a herdsman. p p p * ^A^9, p.kA9 sense, mind. ^1) Ethpe. to be angry. JSOIJ thunder. rOi to dance, to mourn, to lament. *P 17 )l^9 sinful, a transgressor. 7 , ^S) to make a sign. oa^j to be inflamed, to rejoice. ^* , 9v * 7 jOJ^ym Sapores (a pro}3er name). Ijl* an evil spirit. s^ to entreat. Pa. to ask ; with ^\l to ask after some one. p * > ' * lAiL*, 12]J- entreaty. ^t#, ^^A^ to reconcile, to calm. |Z.Q^a* nearness. | ii *^ captivity, destniction. | >*^ praise-worthy. |Aain a vine. 14^* a sceptre. v>.ri to guide, to lead. 7 -p 7 X 7 >1^Q*, |sn seven, ^LTl^ seventy. nn to leave, to give up, lo permit, to let go. IAqji a week. J-i^Oy^ an uproar. |a> >! restless, uneasy. *rs^ to kindle. ^w* Ethpe. to be moved, to be indignant. \r to throw, to precipitate. Jr P^. to send, Ethpa. SjA, is sent. , 7 901A to awake. QM to be worthy, Ethpe. to be considered as worthy. (Qa, ^Qs equal, pi. ^Qs* IP, p ^ )01oa renown. ploQ* praise, renown, glory. ..a, v.1^ to wash. * 7 *01 OS to free, to tear away. i4-s>Q* dishonor, shame. ]^\ iQs change, exchange. (So\(T consummation, end. *^Qm, v^ to despise. }l^a power, authority, right. [OQM way, street. (?a a wall. -x U)QS beginning. pp ^ XiSOM confirmation. P>^Q gain, advantage. P -x p f jq4 awkward, stupid. IfiuL* despised, small, inferior. %A*J^Mpl. f. ^oii^s present, Jp^. *^ I to be able, to find. wiAs to send, to put away. ]]*, >\ to cease, to rest. . I N , I i N rest, ^ V*-^, ^*lV) sudden. ] iN* an apostle. v^i^ Pa. *4^ to be able, to be powerful. ^QA* to approach fulfillment, Pa. to fulfill, to complete ; with ^\l to salute, Apk to deliver up; f mOj to give up the ghost, to die. SYRIAO LEXICON. 3^5 T f ]V)S jpl m. ]Sq^ peace i1Qa heaven. t^ a i V)^ Samosata (a proi^er name). i NSfT to finish, to complete. MS>Q to hear. ^QlSfi* Simeon, Simon (a proper name). A^bOs to serve. IaSQa the sun. \1M Pa. to go away, Ol^icA or OljlD ZoL to die. * p *p p M-, HJJ* insane, foolish. ll, lAl* year. p - ^ (rlA torment, pam, torture. ^, ]! tooth. ]l i1 sharp. (1* ^iJA;>a. a1A| to relate. \1l, lAli an hour; ]i\liD p 01 O forthwith. Ul jest, play. \jJZiM beautiful, good, fern. pi. |Z.V*^ also the neiUer, good- ness. R66 SYEUC ^\^. ^Q* to hear, to take; A])h. with ^Ld to go away. \\ an inhabitant. ];* to dwell; with ^\l to besiege, Pa. to begin. J^\, \^\ generation, bio- graphy. L. ;* a light, wax light, a candle. lAo. -. , y^^ a spectre, an ap- parition. P*r the remainder, the rest. y^,'f Ethpa. to be convinced. 10^7 . x*P I 7 'ru'rS true, Adv. /L-ij^^'p* truly, really. IP, y'r^ truth. A six. L4cuL Adv. silently. .^A s to be silent, to be dumb. L t> 7 l^ilZ a merchant. ]k)ol2, .^otijolZ Thomas, (a proper name). ^0O\g^olZ Theophilus (a proper name). LEXICON, I 12. \ML not clear, dirty. 2; dregs, that which is most objection- able. ^i^Z to demand. 7 7 ;,iZ to carry on trade, Ethjpa. to win (by trade), to be added ]Z)QSdjZ wonder. pioolZ an abyss. |;uOlZ wonderful. J 01 Z to be surprised. o'Z r^r-last letter of the Alpha- bet. J-iOL or *oZ to repent, to tui'P, to return. %aOL again. 01 oZ to be astonished. pb-iJoZ interpretation. fZoZ repentance. jiDQjsAZ a limit, bound. ZlmZ, ZomZ, Ajla*Z under, t^L ^iD from below, ^li AajA^ under. P 1- 7% (Z*V)tZ shame, IZq^uZ repentance. OoZ to urge, Part. ^jl^dL, Luke XXV. 23. iJZ to hanff up, to raise up. SYRIAC tSL Jvh^I snow. fZo-aLJSZ the Trinity. pSo^Z to make a Scholar, Ethjpa. to be learned, to be a scholar. 1)V)\Z a scholar. ASZ,/.1Z2LZ7w. three. OIIsDZ to wonder, to be astonished. IouIdZ wonderful, remarkable. y)iV>Z, I SnV)Z honest, genuine. ]j1dZ/. eight. ^iDL there, in that place. pZ to repeat, Fa. to narrate. LEXICON. 36T Ja^oZ great, strong. Xlyt'^ to explain, to interpret. ^-^>Z, ^-aZ^Z two ; ^ i'Zi the second. 1^)Z right, true, faithful. H'Z a door, a gate. |A.^jZ mind, opinion. I AjaQ^Z a hymn,a song ofprai.se (AaSQsZ service, attendance. VLsZ/. \LMLm. nine. >SZ to narrate, from |jL* |Aa1Z a narration. Additions and Corrections TRANS LA TED FROM THE SECOND EDITION OF UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON. NEW YORK 1875. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS PART OF THE WORK. A indicates the Second American Edition, the first figure or figures following, refer to the page of the same edition, the next figures, to the line ( always counted from the top of the page), and the next figures indicate the word or words (always counted from left to right), in or after which, the correction or addition is to be made. For example : A. 12. 4. 6. indicate American edition, page 12, line 4 from top of page, word 6, counting from left to right. When there are references to Notes or Sections, N. is inserted for the former and for the latter. Additions and Corrections. A. 18. 28. 4 After the word "east", in Translation, add : "(i.e. Dortherly)". A.20. 11. 6. Before "Syrian", add : ancient ". A. 20. 16. 2. After "186", add: "Notice of a late work on the modern Syriac tongue (cf. R'ddiger, Chrestomathia Syriaca, p. 138, ff.), is found in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. v., no. 1., p. 1-180, under the title: ' Grammar of the Modern Syriac Language,' etc., hy Stod- dard, 1S56, from which we learn what a transformation the ancient Syriac has received, and what new, foreign elements have been incorporated into the modern language." A. 21. 35, 1. Instead of the sentence in translation beginning with : *J More recently," etc., add : " whilst there is now (1857) in press a copious and elaborate Syriac Lexicon, whose author, the highly meritorious Bernstein, has already distinguished himself in Syriac literature by his Syriac Lexi- con attached to KirscJts Chrestomathy, (Lipsiae. 1836), which will be a most essential aid in the study of the lan- guage. Bernsteinh great lexicon contains the results of the most important investigations made by the old Syriac Lexicog- raphers, and with that work Syriac literature in respect to lexicography of that period, closes. * A. 21. 39. 2. After " Sieffert", add : " and Jidtf?^er". A. 2L 41. 12. After " Syriac", add : "monumental". A. 23. 39. 3. After " 4 ", add : " Ed. XL 1691". * The first number of Geonje Henry Bernstein's great Lexicon was issued in 1857, but, I regret to say, that, for want of sufficient encourage- ment , the learned lexicographer was not able to proceed with the work, ^- 25 374 ADDITIO.SS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 25. 1 8. 4. After " Testament ", add : " Georg. Henry Bern- stem^ liexicoa Syriacum Chrestomathiae KirschianiB denuo editse. Lipsia. 1836-8. A. 25. 29. 3. After "Bernstein", add: "Lipsia. 1832. 8vo. A. 25. 36. 8. After "Syr.", add: "jEmil. Rddiger Chrestoma- thia Syriaca (Glossario explanata). HalivS Saxonum. 1828. 8vo. A. 28. 23. 2. Instead of the first five lines of Rem. 2, in Trans- lation, add : " In respect to the above named joining of indi- vidual letters to each otner m a word, it should be remarked : that the letters, ^ , y^, a*,^ ^,a. , a,SQ,l,m,a,n, and & , in the middle of a word, may be joined to letters on both sides of them, while (,,,01,0,1.,^,;, and A , can only be joined to letters preceding them ; but if one of these let- ters ('l,;,Cl,Q,]., ^,;,A) precede the letters ? , J , i ; or 2 J no connecting line is inserted between them. So also, > , ) , and Z, at the beginning of a word, are not joined with the following consonant. The final letters^ ^,^,.,^, take or reject the connecting lines, m accordance with the laws of uniting letters by lines. When I at the beginning of a v;ord is followed by \ the letters are written -^ ; but when inverted they are written U , consequently, when two words, the first of which ends with ^ , and the second begins with f , they are united by means of the twisted figure XJ ; if another 1 still occur in p-r, connection with ii, the latter is placed after f, e. g. jj], A. 29. 18. 7. Instead of " the gutturals ", add: " ] and L". A. 29. 24. 5. After " 01 ", add : ", being not strongly guttu- ral,". A. 29. 27. 11. Insteadof the sentence bep-inning: "from 500- ADDITONS AND CORRECTIONS. 375 900 ", add : " For 500-900, which reach beyond the num- bers designated by single consonants, tens, from 50-90, were used, and, like hundreds, were designated by points placed over the letters, o. g jb 600, 2) 800 ". A. 29. 30. 2.- After the word " units ", add : " ( which mark, in hundreds, tens and units of compound numbers, falls away again, e. g. 0112)1, 1855)". A. 31. 4. 1. Before " ( For ", add : " Sometimes Q was origi- nally retained by Ephrem, e. g. 'ioo 0pp. Syr. I. 34. 1. 2., VqO III. 590. F. 1. 5 ". A. 31. 5. 5. Instead of " three ," put : "four". A. 31. 9. 7. Instead of " In foreign words it quiesces in Q", add : " In foreign words Q quiesces in ". A. 32. 3. 2. Before " seems ", add : "( corresponding with the Hebrew mappik)". A. 32. 18. 2. After 1773", add: "and //. Ewald Ueber das Syrische Punktations system nach Syrischen HandschHft- en, in a Treatise on Oriental and Biblical Literature, Bd. Gottingen 1832. pp. 53129". A.. 32. 29. 3. Add: " 12. 3.", after " 8 ". A. 33. 2. 6. Instead of the remainder of the note in Transla- tion, add : " Yet it cannot be denied that, in many cases there is a real resemblance between them. In respect to the use of both points (Kushoi and Rukol), it is universally admitted, that the letters named (aspirates), wlten in the middle of a word, were originally dependent, for their aspiration, upon the vowels immediately preceding, which emit the softest possible breathings ( = -7- vocal ) flowing over, as it were, to the aspirates. The consonant of a closed syllable immedi- ately preceding, forms the opposite relation, according to which the hardening comes in through Kushoi. Hence this mark (Kushoi) more frequently occurs in the middle of a word as the initial and Jinal letters sufficiently make known, in respect to this law of the language. The first (initial let- ters), in continued discourse, are dependent upon the prece- ding words ending in a vowel or consonant. In the last jlQ ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. final letters) even, the vowel or consonant makes its influence felt. Hence these points occur in accordance with the fol- lowing rules : A. Rukok occurs, a) at the beginning of a word, v/hen a vowelless consonant, belonging to the syllable, precedes the aspirates, e. g. cA^aj, .^Ao ; b) in the middle of a word after a preceding closed syllable with a long vowel, e. g. ]A. \^ ^ Idqaxx*; or, when (the relations being the same as before), the following syllable begins with a vowelless conso- nant, (vocal sheva), and no aspirate follows, e. g. IAj^Q^IsZ. Nor is the same relation of syllables lost when a helping vowel is received in the middle of a \vord, as in IAD'^L for "jAo;!. When there is an open syllable, with 1 quiescing in or , e. g. ^QOp , r^fj. Rukok occurs; c) in the final consonant of a closed syllable with a short vowel pre- ceding, e. g.. ^^-^21 , ISdOaa ; d) under D in the suffix of the 2nd. person plural after a preceding closed syllable, e. g. "A y QOISd , ^A.-k21 ; and finally, e) in the middle of a word after a consonant supposed to be doubled , e. g. lA^So (from ^SiSD ) ; VASqI* (from i^lSG>*). * The author here seems to regard the termination | of these exam- ples, as formiug a syllable of itself without the addition of A and O- This view is against that of Gesenius in respect to Hebrew (vid. his Hebrew Gram. Ed. by Rodiger, 15th Edition, Leip. 1848. 26.1), where he affirms that, with one exception, every syllable begins with a consonant. A. T. Hoffmann, in his elaborate Syriac Grammar ( Halaj. 1827. lib. 1. cap, 2. 3. 1), affirms that "in respect to the origin and division of syllables, the rules of Hebrew apply in Syriac," with which opinion all Oriental philologists, no doubt, will agree. Furthermore, "[Thiemann, in the first edition of his Grammar, recognizes this principle, in his example given in 5. Anm. Ru- hok, c. . Instead of saying : " after a closed syllable," he should have said, " after an open syllable". This principle he has stated, with an example six lines farther on. The instance evidently comes under Kushoi, being stated in almost the same words aw the first instance (marked a) under Kushoi. It must have been an oversight of the learned Professor. Tr ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 377 B. Kushoi, on the contrary, occurs, a) in the middle of a word after a preceding closed syllable, e. g. %^oLu ; d) after prefixes which form closed syllables by taking the helping vowel , the initial letter of the syllable before taking the prefix being vowelless, e. g. **x2U0 ( wm.2U); |r)A:ii^ ( h^^ ) i ^') after dipthongs, which are considered as constituting closed syllables, e.g. Aa.^ , \LjJ^ , U^llD, |A.*JLd^ {-^ except- ed); also in the plural suffix of the 2d. person, e. g. tO-^^, -n . 7 ' "^^ ; d) over those consonants in Pa. and Ethpa. of regu- lar verbs, as well as the nouns and adjectives derived there- from, whose middle letter is supposed to be doubled, e. g. K . 7 7. 7 7.7 '7 7 // 7 **/ 7 . ^ > ^cil , >Aji , >A^21, sA^Sd ; VLi , e. g. >*oj, .ruTil, .nnSZl; /' . X..7 in ApJu and Ethta. of verbs Ql (in O and 2)), e. g. ^-i-3 1 (from ^), j;ila.2>| (from ..CQa); .a.2) and JQ, where ( is changed into O, e. g. ^oZo"} , ^Do] ; or in general, where ir II the first radical letter falls away, as in verbs wi^ and ^, e. g. v.^J ( i^M^. for ^^U ), ..oAj ( from *!dAa ); even in nouns, as jiaCilD; so also, in those particles compounded with ^5iO in which .falls away, e. g. t-iSsD, ^i-.2l!sO; finally, in deriva- tives of verbs Ml, as p^l, even when Q has been inserted and the aspirate follows, e. g. JoQa* (from ^a* ), L.Oj (from *vi5), I^Ql (from ^1) ; or according to the Hebrew p :^7 . ^ analogy, e. g. |Zi.J (=in"1^5^) ; ^) when a word closes with two vowelless consonants, as in 2d. Sing. Pret.^ the final letter also takes Kushoi, e. g. t^^. In foreign, (especially 378 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Greek) words, without reference to the division of the sylla- bles, tiie following letters take it; 2) which corresponds with 0, a with TT, i) with K and D with x^ ^- g- >aP oSi^Sn=^ == UdiJKpilog] ]D'rZi(Jl ~ b tnapxog, etc. The importance of this mark is apparent in ancient manuscripts, which have no vowels ( cf. Lud. de Dieti^ p. 25. tf. ; Ewald^ a. a. O. and i?cr;zs/^gi, Lexicon Syriacum. Lipsiaj. 1836. 8vo.). Rem. 2. Id like manner, a point over ( in the middle of a word after an open syllable, indicates that that letter has the full force of a consonant, e- g- ^\m , ^JD. Also when the same mark is placed over Ol in (001^ Cn is not sounded. The same is true in respect to oi in all compounds with \ ' . 1 01 , particularly when the latter has a demonstrative signification, e. g. ZqOOI , ^\^6i , Isjoi , etc." A. 33. 22. 7. After -'- consonants", add : " in unpointed writ- ings". A. 33. 24. 2. After "word", add: "In the noun masc. this mark is especially useful for distinguishing the emphatic plu- ral ( 45. 3) from the same form of the singular". A. 33. 29. \2.^AitQv''praised'\ add: "(Ps. XVIII. 16}". A. 34. 8. 7. After "^ 16. c", add : " In respect to the use of Ribui in the 3d. pi. Fret.M isdoubtful,in many cases, whether such use should be considered as really in accordance with the rules of the language ( 20. 1. Rem. ; ^ 80. 3. Rem.) or an oversight of the transcriber (cf. Bernstein Chrestom. p. 3)". A. 34. 15. 1. After " Kushoi", add: cf. ^ 5. 2. Rem. 1. B". (The information to which this reference relates, is found on p, 377 Translation, second edition. Tr.). A. 34 18. 1. Instead of the Translation, 7. to Rem. 1., add : " When the Syrians wished to indicate that a vowel was to be received in order to aid in pronunciation, or when such vowel was to be avoided, as in case of Kushoi and Rukok employed to mark the softer or harder sounds of consonants ( 5), they placed small horizontal lines over or under the con- ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 379 sonants where such vowel was to be introduced or avoided. When there was, in Syriac, such an accumulation of vowelless consonants, that the introduction of a vowel, selected without reference to the etymology of the word and forming a short euphonious syllable, became necessary, a line, called Meluigyono (from \yjp\to reflect)^ was placed under that word, indicating the place where the voice necessarily hesitated from the diflSculty of pronunciation. The new vowel introduced after such con- sonant was usually , but sometimes , e. g. (Aj^a*> {dehh^lto^ making a kind of diaeresis. But when the voice was to hasten over* the same consonants without the least audible vowel sound, a line was placed over such consonants called Marhetono (from ^(SVi to hasten)^ e. g. |Ao>l zedJcrto.'''' A. 34. 28. 6. For " only", put " immediately". A. 34. 32. 4. After " 11", add : '' Ewald, a. a. 0". A. 35. 2. 1. Instead of " 8.", read: "This mark is similar to Marhetono^ and should not be confounded with Meluigyono. It is a line placed under consonants indicating that the latter have scarcely a perceptible sound, and, from that circum- stance it takes its name. When placed under 1 before 01 , it indicates a softening of 1 into a sound very nearly repre- , e. g. jOH elyidh. It is scarcely believed that a regular consonant, taking this mark under it, entirely loses its sound, consequently the mark under the middle radical letter of the imj^erat. Ethpe. and Ethpa, i^\^L\) can scarcely be considered as indicating an entire loss of pronun- ciation. No confirmation of the supposition that a conso- nant with this mark under it entirely loses its consonant sound, is found in the occurrence of the mark under J , e. g. ]Al* , "|Ala,.SD , where it is thought to indicate an assimila- tion, as it does in L'^ and in the imper. %43ai (from 4^'). This mark indicates an entire loss of sound only when placed under | and 01 , such loss of sound being particularly pei- ccptible when | precedes ^ . (cf 12. 1. B. a ). 380 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Rem. Since this mark should not be extended, as it has been by some, to the impcrr. Mhtaphal, and Eshta., so it follows that it is to be considered as extending only to the marking of the imperative of Ethpe. and Ethpa., lor, were it to extend farther, the influence of a rapid pronunciation might, in a measure, counteract the utterance of the fullest known sound of ihe letter under which it is placed." A. 35. 19. 2. After "^7", add: ",the difficulty of pronunci- ation is relieved,". Also put " and " after " antepenultimate". (Nos. 1. and 2. are transposed in the new German Edition, and the Rem. is placed at the end of the section. Tr.). A. 35. 25. 11. After "final", add : " after the falHng away of ^," A. 35. SO. 1. Insteadofthelirstlineof 10., after "divide" iQ line 2 of Trans., add : " The Syrians, according to ancient tes- timony, before their manuscripts were furnished with vowels, and when only a very simple system of accentuation, similar to that of the Hebrew, was known and used (cf. Etmlcl, a. a. 0.), divided". A. 37. 25. 11. Omit in Trans, from line 25. word 12., " with", to line 27. word 4., and instead, add : *'; c ) with ^ in^ll togo, when it (^) begins a syllable in the course of conjugation, in which case, the vowel belonging to it, falls back upon the middle radical". A. 37. 31. 1. Instead of Rem. in Trans., add: "Rem. This mark (Linea occultans) also occurs under ] in nouns, which are derived from those mentioned under a above, as (ZqIajsaI , (ZQAJf. It also occurs under Ol in 001 and -i01 , where they are pleonastic ( 55. A). It does not appear IP OGl when it is absolute and has the signification to be, to become, or to cotne to pass''\ A. 38. 16. 8. After " occultans", in Trans., add : " by contrac tion in a word". A. 40. 21. 4. Before "is", add: ''sometimes". A. 40. 26. 4. Instead of the last four lines of 14. add, before "where"; * c) in nouns like ^I'^n wines, >i\i rest , >jl^vZ[ yesterday. But a is sounded only when followed by 001 , e. g. 001 -i^O, pronounced bekyu, and in the emphatic state ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 381 of nouns terminating in ]-. So it ought to bo considered as well established that w4 without such a union and declension as we have named above, may be enunciated at the end of a word as a weak and slight consonant sound. The same is true of cases mentioned under a) above, where Q and a oc- // cur at the end of verbal forms, vrhere, in verbs |j they form the dipthongs au, ai and oi^ e. g. Q-Li - '^.i , - "a A. 41. 31. 3. Before "c)" In Trans., add: " the vowel being moved forward.". A. 41. 32. 6. Omitfrom"when",line2. B.,to"In,'Ma8tlie, and add : ".when a suffix of the Ist. sing, and 2d. and 3d. pi., is added ". A. 41. 33. 5. Before "In", in Trans., add: "In other posi- tions Q takes its usual place, e. g. \^CiOr\ ^ ^^LoQoL." A. 42. 25. 8. Omit from fine 10. B., word 9. "This", to line 5. B. w. 8., " Finally ", and add : " In the verb this aux- iliary vowel under the first radical with a fleeting sound is in Fret. Te. (3. f. and 1 sing.) Al^^ j A^4^; or, before wk at the beginning, e. g. JdLm, t'^Ni; or at the end of verbs ]] , e. g. wi^tZ] , J>^ ; with the exception of the imperative Ethpe. and passive part, Pa.^ and Apk.y where it is and, with ^, forms the dipthong aij e.g. t-i.^^Z], *aA.^ (emphat. state f. tAi\..V)) , " A. 46. 12. 15. After " 12. 1.", add: "In the 1 pi. ^L*, and 7 7 more frequently ^mjI occur in the Actis Mart, orientail, of Maruthas (vid. Tom. ii. p. 327., lin. 14 ) ". A. 4G. 30. 6. Before " On ", in Trans., add : " The Suffix 3d. 382 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. m. Sing. i-aOlQ-i., enclosed in brackets under a. in the table, has been introduced and accepted by some Grammarians without proper authority, and it might be omitted, as its exist- ence is not proved, from the fact that there are numerous ex- amples of the form ^G1Ql.i. in Ephrem (cf. Bernstein^ Chrest. Syr. Prsef. p. xxi). A. 47. 2. 3 Before "In" Trans, instead of 4 lines to "Only", add : " Monosyllabic nouns, which lose their vowel, and dis- syllabic nouns, which lose the vowel of the second syllable in the emphatic state, like derivatives of verbs \j with ( and wk take it again when receiving the sii^x 1 si?tg, and 2 and 3 plural. \ passes into ^a and the latter is either movable or quiesces in (cf. % 4G). In the plur., m., a , which is y peculiar to the pi. suf, coalesces with the termination w^. of the const, st. ( 45), e. g. yL^oidD (from . i '^SV)), so that these sifffixes may be considered as added directly to the last radical ". A. 47. 7. 1. Omit from " In ", Trans. 7linestoEem. and add : " The femin. noun, on the contrary, takes suffixes of the sin- gular form, in the sing, and plur. number, in such a manner, that, with the preceding union vowel omitted, the vowel ar- rangement of the empliat. state sing., is received with the falling away of ), e. g. OlA^oAiD (emphat. state (Z^oAtd) ; the others (I sing, and 2 and ^ pi) are attached to the form and vowel arrangement of the construct state, e. g. .jA^oAo , 9. 7 -X 7 ^ .QdALoAo {const. St. A^oAo). The plural, with the suffix of the sing, form only, takes essentially the form and vowel arrangement of the const, state (ALoAtd) , where the ending A forms a closed syllable, and thus the plur. cannot be mis- taken for any other form, e. g. *jA^oAo, vf A\oAo , etc." ADDITIONS AKD CORRECTIONS. 383 A. 47. 26. 9. After "it", add: " is taken substantially for amj- things or ". A. 47. 27. 7. -After "us", add: " (cf. Synt. ^ 54. B. 4. Eem. A. 48. 7. 6. Instead of, "with both plural suffixes", read: ^^ plural suffixes of both genders occur with ". A. 48. 17. If^Omit 8 lines in Tr., and read : " Rem. The wz*c. sing, form .Gl is very frequently found in the poems of Ephrem and always stands before the noun. It is used thus P 7 9 J in Ephr, I. p. 370, e. g. X^ ^01 for pOI tA^ , also in I. Sam, xvii. 55. In Assem. B. 0. III. 75, it occurs between the noun and adjective. On the contrary (JOl can precede or follow > " ' the noun. Also JCT /em., for fjCTI , occurs in ^j^Ar. III. 590, before the noun. In the sing. (IjOl fern.), it is united with w X y -k" " OCT m. and *^C51/. forming QJOl and t-aOlfjOl j and sometimes ^ I 0^ *pi 0C3 and *a01 precede, e. g. poi 001 ^e7^ ikisj (jOl wiOl e2;ew ^/^w. More frequently in comparison, is the Chaldee ftV^ (from ^^ and ^^i Nv = V^s^) used in connection 7 u V t\ y with >L1, e. g. ^Aa"| >wlj, also ^-JiCTI y^lj swcA (>/. III. E. 1). 2. The Relative for all genders and numbers is 3 , tr/^, td7/i2c/i and ^/ia^, whose proper position is at the beginning of a word (as a prefix). Immediately following a word, it raises the interrogative idea and constitutes the interrogative pro- noun. After ,-Sd , 5 forms either the general idea of the rela- tive^ as y -!sO any one^ who^ who, or constitutes at the sumo time, the demonstraMvej that J as j P-l thatfU;hichy > |r>| i/ia^ 384 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. which, "i y^\\^\ (gen. c.) tJiat, which, j preceding _ Vo , ex- 7 presses the genitive of the indirect question, e. g.-Lo Jwhose^ etc. (cf. 56. Syntax)". A. 49. 2. 7. Add: '' Ephr. I. 347. E. 7". A. 49. 7. 3. Add : ", and partly by the simple personal suffix with its case marking it ". # A. 50. 11. 3. After " Future ", add : ("indicating an action finished and unfinished)". A. 54. 3, 3. Omit: "and imperative". A, 54. 5. 5. Instead of " additions", in Trans., add: "marks of persons ". A. 54. 6. 3. After "and", in Tr., add: " marks of gender and number ". A. 54. 6. 6. After " end ", add : " The imperative has the marks of gender and number, in common with the/w^wre". A. 54. 17. 5. Before "is", add: "and has forced itself into use, ". A. 54. 35. 11. After "P/eiJ." omit to "But" in last line, and with preceding ( = i^) does not seem to be derived from the pronoun ". A.. 55. 13. 4. After " syllable", omit the whole sentence. '/ // A. 57. 2. 4. Instead of " \^ which", add: " *^^ ( 29) and i^ ( 30), of which the latter throws ". A. 57. 6. 1. Insteadof the-first six lines of Rem., add : " Eem. In the inflection of the pret. Pe,, verbs Med. E. [intrans.) retain , where, in verbs Med A., stands over the radical syllable, e.g. A!L*j.j, ^oAi^*jw; . In the 3d. r:i. pi. (all the ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 385 prct.) the paragogic form .C^4^ is sometimes found. Hut 7 7 7 7 the forms of the 3 y/. A4), ,-^4^, ^1^^ adduced by Buxtorf, are not confirmed by Syriac Grammarians. In respect to ^^Q = C^^a , ^^^ ( 3. pi. m. and/.) cf. 6. 1." A. 57. 19. 7. Before "sometimes", add : ( ^-\p and ^lp)." A. 58. 28. 13. Before " first ", leaving out The ", add : " On account of the falling away of the third radical letter, .in order to aid in forming the new syllable, the,". A. 59. 24. 9. Before "are", add: ^^ qw en io i\\Q absolute St.* m. together with the other cases named in the Rem. of the preceding ," 7 A. 60. 3. 9. After "press" add: " \^ to kill many (lit 7 more), from v.^^ ^^ ^-'^'^ ^^^' (c^- Bar-Ali and Bar-Bahlul * 7 7 in Bernsteins'' Chrest. Pref. p. xx) ; *n1 and ^OqI to kiss, with a similar reference to single or repeated action ". A. 61. 15. 4. Before " Aphel ", add : <' Pa. and". A. 63. 2. 5. After " Patriarch ", add : '* ; or such letter is trans- T, 7 posed, e g. ^t^ fcaTTjyopetv ". A. 63. 14. 12. Before "2)", add: "(a/w^with Q , derived from Ma^ , however, occurs in the Charkl. translation of Luke vi. 30, and in the ArJis Mart. li. p. ] 16. 4)". A. 67. 5. 1 1 . After " imperat ", add : " transitive ". A. 67. 6. 5. Before "e. g.", add : '" with a strong sound of the voice ". * It will be recollected that participles are considered as nouns, and have the absolute and construct state (vid. 63. E). 2r. 886 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 67. 9. 1. Instead of the first seven lines, read: "Rem. The imperat. Fe. of '^] , like the jore^., retains , but the imperatives of the verbs *2l^ , 5 the verb \'\\ , (according to 12. 1 and 15. 2) that ^ is so often used at the beginning of a syllable, is not more fre- quently united in the same syllable with ] , and is not sounded, Lin. Occult, being placed under it, causing the ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 387 following vowel to fall back upon 1 . This is the case in the '*. A. 69. 6. 11. After "vowel", add: "(3/. and 1 sing.pret.)'' A. 69. 9. 5. Instead of remainder of Kern, before " Only ", 7 7 r read : "Only .^OIa to give (for tiDOU) makes an exception to this vowel mark. Here, especially in ihQpret.^ a crasis of the first two radical letters is found, in which case wa, accord- ing to the regular formation, is vowelless, consequently, in the 3d. m., 2 m. and/, sing.^ and in all the plur. where Ol , with Lin. Occult, occurs, the vowel of 01 falls back upon wa (Aooiu , waAooi-* , Q:DOL*, etc). But where, in the regu- lar inflection, the first radical has its peculiar vowel, especially in the 3 /. and 1 sing.^ crasis, with Lin. Occult.^ does not occur (AiDOLi and Aoou). But when the two forms last named take suffixes, the crasis returns again, according to 36. Here also the first radical remains vowelless (the vowel of CI being thrown back upon it), e. g. OlAoCTU , she .7 -n has given him (AoOLi). In the 3 plur. m. and/, Lin. Occult. X 7 falls away again, e. g. OIQOOLa they have given them up 7 (QSCTIa). Upon the connection of this verb in the fut, and injin. Peal, with ^^ = Itl!: cf. . 35. 2. 6. " A. 69. 21. 10. After "^'*, add: " by dropping the first radical ". A. 69. 28. 7. Instead of " jll ", add : " ^10 ". A. 70. 2. 5. After " verbs ", add : " consist in the quiescence and changing of ] into ji and ". A. 70. 9. 8. Before " ", add: " in order to relieve the pro- nunciation ". A. 70. 21. 1. Instead of the next 14 lines to " Ee.n.", add: 388 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 1. According to the analogy of the regular verb, Q, f verdsaL, quiesces in , in the imj^erat. and fut. of Fe.j \ ^ >0ao, ^QQJ; the prei. and irifin. of the same conjuga- p p p // I tion takes XLO , >onV); and in ve7-ds .jkl , with i in like manner, is retained in the pret.^ imperat.^ and fut. Fe. LmId , y^AO) , i>QjbCQJ , while the infin. with belongs to verbs Ql . The preformative of the fut. takes no vowel. Only 1 of the 1st. sing, takes , ^00*1. In the other conjugations Q passes into ^ ( , of course, is the usual vowel in Ethpe.^ Pa.^ and Aph. of the regular verb), and either quiesces in , in Ethpe., Aph. and Ethtaph. (pronounced the same as Ethpe.), e. g. y) * o2Z1 , ^-^ ^1 , iiO (emph. st. m, or fern, abs.) ; but, in the part, pass., it follows the regular form- ation w^ith ^ quiescing, e. g. ^^1 . For Fa. and Ethpa. we sometimes find the conjugations Falpel and Ethpalp., e. g. iO^ioi {Ephr. II. 20. D. 6), ^^-ioiZf, ^lljlj (from A. 71. 13. I. Insteadof the two lines beginning with "some", add: "there are, however, several verbs, originally Ql , which 7 77 -n retain Q in Fa. and Ethpa., e. g. jj Pa. JOJ Ethpa . jOjZ] . ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 3S9 The verbs ^a^ > ^^0 follow the same rule in their forma- tion. There are two verbs nearly resembling each other which are distinguished by their signification, #02 [to accuse) ^ 7 7 1* ^ ^A.oZ( (to be present)^ from ^. Some have double roots, 7 9 7 7 7 e. g. JQ^ [to blind), from JOl {to be blind), and ;jl1 (^o z^;a^-e up), from ;2k (^o wake). It is only very seldom that the dou- 9 7 ble root has the same signification, e. g. jai and *jaOJ (^o 7 7 7 7 breathe), from which are tjaO) and .-m-aJ to permit to breathed A. 71. 32. 5. After ^'convinced''', add: "or to permit to con- vince themselves ( = Trel^es'hai), Ethpe, or". A. 72. 8. 1 0. After " verbs", add: " and those in which 1 either quiesces, passes into ji ,or falls entirely away. The". A. 72. 10. 1. Instead of the first line and second to "the", add: " 1. In respect to the general formation of the tenses and modes, the following should be remarked. Final ( either quiesces in a preceding vowel ( or ), or passes into ^. The". A. 72. 21. TO. After "P^.", add: "(except Fe. of verbs II B )". A. 72. 24. 2. Instead of the sentence beginning with " The imperatives", read : " Therefore, we have here the addition of the imperat. Fe. to the imperat. ending of Ethpe., e. g. 7 I ^\D.M. ". I 7 * A. 72. 26. 9. Before " some", add : " ; Ethpa. .^i^iA* | to be named {Acts 1. 23)". A. 73. 2. 1. Before " The" add : " instances of false punctua- P 7 - tion for U-.Z] {Ethpa.y\ ^ 26 390 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 73. 3. 1. After "and", omit next word, and add: "an apocopate form f OU ". A. 73. 10. 1. Instead of first line "to the pret", add: "A. In which cases, t^ , arising out of | , may be either movable^ or quiescent, as can be readily perceived by a comparison of these with the regular verb \ a) %jl is movable in verbal for- mations where, in the regular verb, the third radical letter be- gins a syllable ; b) it quiesces, on the contrary, where the tbird radical closes the syllable. Consequently belong here under a\ (Also in lines 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, from top in Trans, omit "in)". A. 73. 16. 10. Before"; and", add: " (also the eraphAovm of the masc.^''). A. 73. 21. 7. After "cases," add: "(also in Fe. of verbs II ^)". A. 73. 23. 1. Instead of " B. ] falls away in", add: * B. ] falls entirely away without compensation, before the forma- tive additions Q and ^ , or those which begin with Q and ^ as tQ and ^ . Accordingly belong here". Omit " in," in lines 24, 25, 27, 29, words 10, 7, 10, 11 ( countmg from the left), in p. 73, and lines 1, 2, 4, T., words 10, 12, 3, in p. 74 in Trans. A. 74. 5. 7. Before " e. g." add: "(more nearly approach- ing to the sound of 1)". A. 74. 7. 2. After " appears" add: " (cf. the Heb. nii ninjn^jjn)". A. 74. 23. 1. Instead of the first two lines and a half, to " sometimes ", read : " When ^ and jl movable occur to- gether, as in the verb V^a* , for the sake of euphony, jl, falls away, if these letters are separated from each other and not in the same syllable. This is the case when the verb takes a preformative and the first radical is vowelless, e. g. injin. Fe. IjISo, forU-**^"'*. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 391 A. 75. 10. 5. After "verbs", add: "consist in tlie falling away of the first radical letter and". A. 75. 12. 1. After "^j9^.", add: '' and Ethtaph.". A. 75. 13. 1. Before " The", instead of the sentence extend- ing to the Rem., add: "A/^^^. and imperat. with occur even 7 - 7 in transitive verbs^ e. g. OQQJ , ^CD , in respect to which the former is only distinguished externally from the pret, by being placed over the preformative. Two forms (jAj and ioZu) with 5Aj, are in use and afut. with , e. g. \>i^ {Ephr. 11. 228. E. 1.), forming the verbs j^ , ^2LJ, ^Aj , (cf. *SOU 35. 2. b)". A. 75. 19. 10. After "descended", add: "In respect to re- It 7 P tainingthe characteristic 1 in Aph., e. g. \zi\y from ^OJ, com- pare 23. 1. Rem.". A. 75. 25. 7. Instead of the line to "away" read: "A contraction of the last two radicals, takes place, by which the vowel of the stem syllable falls back upon the first radi- cal". A. 76. 4. 5. Instead of 12 words from "takes", to "away", read : ",in its approach to a regular formation, requires a di- vision of its monosyllabic stem and inserts 1 between the two radicals". A. 76. 16. 1. Instead of the seven following lines, add: " 2. l^he part, pass. Pe.,retaining the middle radical, is inflected regularly in a fuller form on account of the last two radicals bemg separated by the insertion of the characteristic a, be- tween them, e. g. %m.fcID> . All of the modes and tenses of Pa and Ethpa., (whose middle radical, it has been thought, should be doubled) are also regularly inflected, e. g. ^CQXJ , QCDjL| . 392 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Hence we fiod also the forms Palpel and Ethpalp.^ c. g. -y\ki J , "WKV' ' Ei^^P^' seldom conforms to the first formation, e.g. mCD>Z] {Heb. IX. 13) ; ^XmZ] {Barhebr. p. 508) ; >mimaZ| from ^COa ( 7l55ewj. i?i6/. Or., 11. pp. 13G. 139)". A. 77. 17. 10. After "formed", add: "according to some". A. 77. 18. 1. Before " zV/tp^ra^.," add : " (properly by the eli- sion of ^)". A. 77. 20. 12. After *'^ai", add: " part. act. ^Gll ,2yass. A. 77. 21. 8. Before "c)", add: "The infin. Pe. ^cki mentioned by Ainira^ p. 362, is diflBcult to explain". A. 77. 28. 6. After "46", add: "(for looif Matt, XVII. OOl] ". A. 78. 1. 1. After ^^ passive'\ instead of the rest of line 1, line 2, and line 3 to " while", read : " ] being retained throughout 7 all the modes and tenses, quiesces in , as in verbs 3 Gatt. (vid. ^ 13. 1. Rem. ), while its vowel". A. 98. 23. 12. After " Pa.", add: "and Ajyh., retain". 7 . 7 A. 100. 26. 2 Before " (compare," add: "e. ^. >/rv^ o^\ infin. Aph. from ^'jl , Ephr. 1. p. 8. E. 3.". A. 106. 5. 1. After "it", add: "(in both cases corrected m the London ed., thus, OU^mJ and CTLiL2iD>*| )". A. 106. 21. 6. Before "In", add: "in consequence of which Jk becomes movable". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 393 A. 110. 15. 2. Instead of "loou," read; "loiJ ". A. 122. 5. 9. For " ^JOl^," read: "^aL ". A. 123. 20. 10. After "44", add: "Rem. A special versa- tility of the language is apparent particularly in transferring Greek composites to itself. This versatility is generally quite evident from an analysis of composites in respect to their elements and relation to the genitive (cf. Synt. g 81. Appendix). The following express the concrete idea : P-X I 7 7 7 li*xOa* ^jZ opOoSo^og- ; loilL L^ ^eoroiwg ; (cf. 2 Tim. III. 2, 3; Acts YII. 51). Coticrete co7)iposites, marking the \^ ' idea of companionship ( = gvv ), are expressed by |;nt m. (companion)^ \L\d^f., less frequently by pa| brother ^ e. g. |LOn lg> (x| aviK^vyddeg. The Syrians express univer- X *, I 7 sa/zVy ( = Trai^ro ) by ^^ placed after it, e. g. ^^JD r>-^l ^^^- roKpdrisip \ ^ibD 1 ^So iravrodvvaiioq \ multiplicity {= iroXv) is expressed by w*^ , e. g. toQ.^ **ytffl TToXvfia/cap ; P 7.. 17 7.. 7 I 7 UliDJ -k-yjhfiO iToXvTLiiog {Johu XIL 3) ; PiJ] i]j^wflD (?/) TTOAviTOiKLXog. In reference to compounding something of a general nature, cf. Acts X. 34; XXIII. 23; 1 Cor.Yl. 9. The same is true when abstract ideas are expressed, e. g. yia ; jcoaSOJ ^jZ SevrepovofiLov (cf. ilfa^/. XIX. 8 ; Eph. IV. 2; Co/. 1. 11; III. 12). Of this kind are compounds with i^fu preceding, e. g. ]; i.'?^Of)| Lo^J^^Zi ruiiocpaLpLov \ with 7 J^-^ ppi 7 -n litaog preceding, e, g. ]Sdq.*j OlnAs) ; or |V>V?i Al^So fiearj^fipta {cf. Mark XIII. 35 ; i^ei;. XIX. 17). The idea 7 7 7 7 of climate is expressed by vMJrSo wa^^. , and transposed, by 7 7 7 7 * ^ *jk.O^. wi-wJ^Sd northeast. Negative nouns are indicated by )9-l ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. p . I f Jj preceding, e. g. |Al,- jJ ignorance \ (Zo^^Oll P careless- ness ; IZom^^ U disorder {ara^ia) (cf. ikZa^^. XIII. 58 ; XVII. 20) ; an object entirely negative and its nature for- 7 eign, is expressed by |j ? , e. g. ^Ql ]] > ovac e^j^o^ (= Dj? jjjfi) nothing less than this ; by a negative circumlocution^ e. g. Zoi 1 \ 1^ tV)t'j w?a7z;^ of affection {daropyta). The same is true in respect to adjectives and adverbs, cf. Agrell Supplem. p. 78 A. 124. 7. 3. After 'Manguage", add : "like the other Semit- ic dialects". A. 128. 15. 11. After "stejt?", add:" U^^ve^wi^ {Ephr. 1. 8. D. 2) , ViLoy a /ie/-rf of horses (Ephr, 1. 25. X). 5), Uoi'j* a/oo6^ (JS:;3Ar. 1. 121. E. 5)." A. 130. 21. 1. After "should", add: " (as in the London ed. of the New Testament) " A. 131. 2. 5. After "etc.", add: " although the form ti'l is also found, and, according to Bar AH, the si?2^. MO]^^ lies at '^ p.. the foundation of ]jOV*j.". A. 131. 9. 7. After "food", add: " but Q in the m;?^^^. ^/. falls away again, e. g. (AAOPiD.". A. 136. 6. 11. Erase "V", and, in line 8,3d word (after "11"), add: "and V". A. 136. 11. 5. Instead of the next eight lines to "movable", add : " while the other suffixes with their union vowels pre- ceding ( >^-., ...k..^^ etc., ) are generally attached to the form of the ewphat. state, e. g. y V)^\ , OljOlCD, etc., which circumstance is explained by the fact that it relieves the pronunciation made difficult by an accumulation of vowelless consonants. The same rule holds also in monosvllabic nouns, ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 395 which, in the emphatic state^ lose or (of the ahs, state) ^ e. g. >Qa , emph. (Sos , with svff. iV?p , ykl* (^j^IIi , 7 II t^ ^\d from ;ii) etc. Nouns derived from verbs U with | , e?7z;?A. 5i^e ^i. [decl. V., e, g. li^, emph. ]iS^ ), allow wi in the iSw^. ( 1 sing. 2. and 3. ^/.) to quiesce in , e. g. - *^^^ , ^QDaX^ , w^hile in the other suff.^ a is movabley\ A. 140. 7. 9. After " syllable," add : "(in the emphat. sing. and in all the plur.y\ A. 143. 12. 6. After "2)", add: "and this law of the lan- guage is applicable to a\] feminines^\ A. 150. 5. 1. Instead of " denominative adjectives", read: " adjectives derived from noims,''\ A. 150. 22. 1. After "Rem.", add: "For 1A , the form 1 As"! occurs with prosthetic f when preceded by the copulative O ( lAalo ), or by j for marking the ordinal number ((A|5 the sixthy\ A. 150. 28. 7 Instead of the next 14 words, including "fern- 7 7 inine", read : " ( or ^Z^k) dual from IZ^D ) 200 ; the other hundreds were formed by a unit preceding, in the/ewj., united with a word having I^Sd in the sing. (\\^t^L) , or by a unit separated from a word in the plur. having ||Sd f'ZolSo aIZ 300, etc.". A. 151. 4, 9. After "word", add: " ( each having a double gender)". A. 152. 25. 1. Instead of 8 words, from " so" to " here," add : " truly, yes, so, U not, oL (from OCJl jJ) not, \a\ here, there (^h\ farther, there, yonder), \d here, there, at that place, p where, only there where, ^LdZ at that place, there. 393 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Rem. The prepositions ^ and Vn united, indicate motion to or from a place, e. g. ],:i^ there, \^^from that place, ^Ul^ farther thisivay, ^01^ Vn from that place, thence, l\ only there whither, VnA\ thither, to that place, Vr> /- SD from that place, thence, ]ol forms many corapounda, e. g. 1 P 7 9 *kC> 7 ^;^C71 (tote) then (referring to time), at that (time), OCH , ^lOCT! so, of this kind, ^JOI (from loi and |o with the changing of the former into jOI ) fi-^re, there (referring to place), therein, \JjCl^ there, pjOl ^^r\ from that (time), to that (time), ^sDZjOI ^/i very same, \mC\ (from loi and "{^^ hour) now, \mO\ ^^ frotn this time" . A. 152. 27. 6. After "M ," add: (AI]!), ^J ". X f X A. 153. I. 8. After "again", add: " ZoiZulZ ^/^e third A. 153. 2. 7. After " to-day ", add : " Kem. All Gentile TZOMws also take the termination Aj"| with C^ preceding, e. g. 3. The manner in which the want of adverbial forms are supplied and expressed in the Syriac language, by nouns, ad- jectives^ pronouns and other parts of speech is liberal and various. Here are to be considered : a) adverbial forms ex- pressed by substafitives ] a) merely by the abs. stat. sing, with- out a preceding preposition, e. g. t^^O (want) not, Gl^3 ^\o entirely : by the emph. stat., e. g. {l^l always ( all time) . P I *. (;.iQJ long, |;^1 ontJds side ; by the^j/wr. ahs., e. g. ^CD*,*Qi ^ r p manifold; by the constr. stat., e. g. ^-B'^r*^ around ; by the *. p p -x /ew. a55(?/. sing, 0.11^ f^ freely, Jlmj^ ^ver?/ ti?ne ; by the emph. p y Stat, fern. e. g. |Al^l always (all time) ; by the constr. stut. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 307 fern. Aooj instead of ; by the emph. plur.fem. (Al^l some time^ inuch time. Also more frequently by > following, e. g. J (Zqq>;^ almost^ nearly. Also we find used as adverbs \ [3) nouns with a preposition preceding (especially ID) in the X 7 7 abs. stat.^ e. g. >tO,.Q somewhere^ ^^V^ formerly^ once^ \\^ ^ . . ' ^ ^^^uLd immediately y swiftly / in the emph. stat. e. g. (jj-AO ^ .i' 7 ^ " " P >. truly ^ (jQir:) unjustly y (Ij;^ ,]aCi.^^ , ju^Q^^ privately ^ (^^fm quietly y in the /?/z^r. Pr^O sometimes \ aho fejninines X X 7 Ow X 7 in the absol. st., OSX^Glfd speedily , OJaOIVO cautiously ; in P -X X 7 the emph. st.^ (ZoSi 1^ s///y/ with > preceding e. g. |Alj sooHj PiDQA ^\Dj rfazYy ; with ^ preceding and j fol- P *. -X P 7 lowing, e. g. > tljo|J against, 5 *O0,^ somewhere, > I^^^a^ finally, J |n>jO^/ar (from). Also with ^So preceding, e. g. iN _Sd immediately, \^0j _So whence; with vA, e. g. JQI.. ^^ ?eea/" ^0, ^Q2) ^^ ?^ear z^, c/ose by ; with yu] , e. g. ]CQ2}Q^ ^a] straight as ; with a preposition preceding and n P -X 1> 7 following, e. g. IsD |idjQQ^ near to something, _Sd Q^ik^ within something ; with the preceding preposition doubled, e. g. Qy^ SiO within {laoi^ev), \Cl^ ^iDivithout (e^cj^ev). The same relations are also found ; b) in adjectives, numerals and P I 7 P X 7 pronouns, Q.g. t^^^j *--vv^ (also ^^4?) t'e?-j', ;jiAa more, more so, >Cli^, 9a^^0 only, pw^j, (r**^| at once, f(i..l0 and I,..** ^Sd immediately, pDO 7ioi^ much ? ].lV)JS and Ql2sD z^7z?/ .? jlSQlD lioiv, 5 |Sd yLA\just as, J OOl yi^l as tlumgh,even as f/', J w01 >4.*( so as, etc. Finally adverbial forms are 898 ADDITIONS AND COPJIECTIONS. expressed ; c) by verbal forms^ e. g. infin. f30iL again^ or by the partic. e. g. ^^>jwk^ , ^m.So ^So almost. Cf. Agrell Suppl. p. 259 flf. and Append, p. 52. Upon the manner of expressing adverbs by verbs^ cf. Syntax 82. 1 ". A. 153. 16. 6. After " ek?J ", add: ]4^| eZra, y.4 Ta;^^; A. 153. 27. 9. After ''ID", instead of the next 7 words to " which ", add : "(in which is contained the idea of being, in- cluding, or being in something, or mediation through some- thing, the allot.) ; j (properly the relative., indicating the drawing out of something, the hanging from something, the genit.) ; ^ (indicating direction towards something, relation to something; therefore dat. and accus.). These preposi- tions ". A. 154. 10. 3. Before "the", instead of the next five lines to " among ", add : " the preposition ^ preceding, draws O to itself in the simple forms \>^5Q^ and ^r^QJ^ and retains the same (O) before the suffix in nouns^ taking the suffix 1 sing. 2 and 3 pi. m. and/, without a union vowel (cf. ^15. 2. B. c. and fol. table) ; but before the other suff. w^ith the union vowel, this peculiarity does not appear, e. g. jlItioqI^, OT^nn\, etc.". A. 154. 15. 9. After "with", add: "(containing the idea of a common union with or accompaniment to something, from :>aSDi)". A. 154. 15. 11. After "by", read: "(containing the idea of adding to something, an immediate consequence)". A. 154. 16. 2 After "to", add: "(containing the idea of adding to something by approximation, from *jiQ^)". A. 154. 19. 10. After "for", add: "(containing the idea of changing or changing with something)". A. 154. 20. 11. After "under", instead of next three lines, add: "( the findingunder something, from AwJ) ; with ^ (in which is contained the idea of going down under), undei ; ADDITIONS AND CORRECTION'S. 399 ^!^ (the being separated from something, the removing, from P 7 9 Ll!iD)fro?n; jAq (standing fast in the order of place and time) after; b) substantives with prefixes^ e. g. VV^<^r>x (movement in an opposite direction) against; ^^^Q^ (direc- tion forv^^ard) hefcyre ; 5 AfiQI!) after ;". A. 154. 27. 6. After " over ", instead of the next 4 words to "against", add: "(relating to motion upward; hence ^^.^ , direction from below {sursuin)\ ^^.1^ ^Sd direction to a place , pft (the adding to and agreement with something) according to, to, with, ". A. 156. 9. 7. After "be it be it", add: "(also ,lo ^j tl = elre Se elre) ,11 /|o wJwe not, or ]j ^J 1(0 = el 61 fiTj ; ^1 if too, if too indeed, although, 01 (=g(;i ti^) if not, after ^| nevertheless, J |J 1 with ihQ future following, ^ Ul with the infin. following, except that, ."I jJ] or ]j Q-^ x 7 r p P -n ^ if not ; >Qm.^O Q-^ 2)1 U "| wo^ ow/y but also ;". A. 156. 9. 14. After "lest", add: "with i\\e fut. following lest^ before a noun, without ;". p A. 156. 11. 7. After '-until", read: I^^O before, ere, or after particles, e. g. ? '^ I , 5, even as, as if, j p.^^ ( so as p p 7 7 (Ka'hdg), that (iva), Uj p..2Lfe] ^/^ai tzo?, etc.;". A. 156. 14. 4. After "/^eV", add: "of which the last two in the Charklensian version of the New Testament, correspond with the Greek [lev de". A. 156. 14. 4. Add a note: "Rem. The frequent use of both the last named particles ^JLd and ^ j for uniting the two parts of a sentence without expressing a direct antithesis, i& a 400 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. peculiarity of the so-called Charklensian version of the N. T., which literally follows the Greek text, but very seldom em- ploys the classic Greek. The particles Sd and uj named above, evidently precede parts of sentences or simply serve as marks (cf. Synt. 85, and my Treatise de versionum N. T. Syriacarum critico usu. Berolini 1850. 4. p. 12 ff.". A. 156. 15. 1. Instead of the next four lines, read : " 3. Inter- jectionSjfor the most part, areonomatopoetic {dvoiiaTonoiTjTucd)^ e.g. O I (with ^ following), Oiol , ^o] , .o] O f ah/ (with " or ^Sd following) , ^0 , -lO] , "jiaO (= Tjij^ , ^-jf^) with ^ or ^^ following, alas/ (also abbreviated %.a.^.*0 woe to me/) ]ai , loiO (= j-;5p| , Idov) lo / wkOU ai / ha! (= stop). They are borrowed from other parts of speech, X '^ 7 e.g. %)0As1, .jiqL (= js^:]3, :]i) 0/ if it were / ( loould X P II that it ivere /) Ql^O (also ^ and p = jj^^ quceso) pray / \l, plur. QL {imperat. from \L\) well/ ^Q^ plur, QSDQO up/ .0^ he it far off/ ^jlOQ^ hail/ (with plural suffixes and ^ following before the noun). Cf. Synt. 86. "Rem. In respect to jcn and JOIO in the Charklensian version, corres- ponding with Idov and naX l6ov in Greek, the same rule holds as in res. pect to aev and Se named above. But this peculiarity does not very often appear in the Peshito," A. 157. 12. 11. After "lY. 5", add: '' Assem. III. P. II. 348 ;". A. 157. 16. 11. After " Kirsh.", add: " Chrest." A. 157. 18. 4. After "accusative", add: '' Ephr. 1. 123. ipi PO I -n 7 -X y 7 7 D. 3. Lj]LJi^L iOjl \j,'^l] lc3i!L? Uci^?o l^^^? J^ *-01 cn^ ^I^dAcqLd this, that Adam was created in, the image of God, we know, from a threefold, reason ". A. 158. 1. 1. Instead of the next eight words, read: " Eem, Separate personal pronouns are also found similarly situated ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 401 without beiDg emphatic, e. g. Ephr. 11. 209. D. 7. ]>01 Zooi P OlZuUD p(> \y.iO is not this Babel which I have built ? I. 312. A. 1. They are emphatic when following and oftener before ihQ verb^ e. g. Barh. 399. 15; especially when *i\ is placed between ". A. 158. 2. 9. Before " Upon " add: ''Ephr. I. 308. E. 3. ySli:^ \l\ *al ]j| ^ll I also vnll go with thee ". A. 158. 5. 12. After "38" read: " e. g. ^y^r. II. 220. D. 2. 3. (Aj^Sd *a01 1;^;* ^Ae tvord is true ". A. 158. 9. 6. After "64", read: ''Ephr. I. 392. C. 3. *a01 (.kJi.1 ^) uiOl ^^ that is manifesV\ A. 158. 19. 2. Before "or", add: ''ActsN.^I. ^a* IjOlO) 7 .-h ? I X ^Lm t 7 . 7 P oAjI OISQI jOAjIj |S2D 50 /o7?^ way you be with me; Acta Mart, orientt. II. 351. 20. 21. " A. 158. 21. 10. After "15", add: '' Eem. The substantive X verb is often expressed by OOl , after a personal pronoun, e. g. ilfa. XXVI. 25. ^jJO'y 001 ]j1 ]!^ Sir, is it I? Also *s 7 7 * P in compounds, as QlLo z^^/io is ? Ql!sO t^Aa^ w ? Q^^ he is good; Q^ji'rCi he is blessed ; Luke X. 41 ; 1 Cor. IV. 11 ; X. 22; Rom.Ylll. 37". A. 159. 2. 14. After "133.1", add: "^c^^s III 14; Ephr. I. 85. F. 6. 7." A. 159. 4. 14. After "are'*, add: "4. The neuter pronoun (cf Agrell App. II. p. 23) is expressed ; a) by the fe?nininej it' 402 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. ihe pronoun take both genders^ e. g. jBar^. 264, 9. Zooi ^(j " - p p * -ft -cn that wUich has happened J- 569,9. \kOU\ fjOl J zf/^/ws happen; Assem. I. 372. *j.oAdZ| ^OlJkT) ,-jAoi aH this is written; b) by the masc. when t\\Q pronoun takes oniy one gender^ e. g. ^Issewz. I. 375. vm^AaJ) ^Ld z^,'//.i6^ has been found; Barh. 439, 14. .Q^ ]00U U^ tf^J>^ has hap. pened to you ; the neuter pronoun is seldom expressed by the masc. whea it takes both genders^ e. g. Xw^e VII. 7 ; VIII. 18; XIX. 26; Matt. XIII. 22. B. Suffixes, 11\\Q pronominal suffixes of the verb mark the accusative^ sel- dom the personal dative of other languages, e. g. Assem. III. 7 7 P P.I. 179. >Tr. it happened to me. Also (001 maiksthe ac- cusativej e. g. tIc/s VII. 40. *.0Li001 plD M.^^^ which hapi^ened to him^ what became of him ; XXVIII. 5. 6. Some- times also the arcus, is marked by a preposition, e. g. ikfe^f. XXVI. 39. wiJf^U (rrapeASerw ot' tjaoi; ) ; it is also some- times found in connection with ^ID , e. g. Barh. 219. 7 Rem. But the verb JDOIa ^^ 9^^^> ^^^^ ^^^ belong here, as in this sig- nification it is only united with a personal dative. If, therefore, we find 7 ^ A " . >i A om. in Jwd I. 15, it does not mean as much as > .\ A^OLb, thou hast given to me; but the suffix, according to the original meaning, to P 7 set, to place, to misplace, is the personal object in the accusative ! , iA*"^m^ should be rendered thou hast placed or misplaced me. The LXX_ have rightly translated endedoaal fie thou hast given me {of the house) i. e. a dourry. Therefore the auxiliary signification to reward, to present with, is here, to lead by the hand. This relation is not found in the Old Testament, e. g. Isa. XXVIl. 4, compared with Uphr. II. 65. E. and Zach. VII. 5, compared with Uph\ II. 296. B." A. 159. 14. 8. After ^'proper", add: "when they stand in place of the adjective ", ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 403 A. 159. 16. 4. After "ornament *', add: "^joAr. 11. 22 I.B.I. 4^ P I 7 f jQO> IAa'^ ^ over thy holy city; 227. C. 4, 5 ; 11. 339. (J. \b,7', I. 130. E. 7;. A. 159. 30. 9. After "him", add: '' Ephr. I. 349. C. 4 ;". A. 159. 32. 6. After " 14", add: " 42G. 8. a\^\i the r eport by him ". A. 160. 9. 6. Instead of' and", add: '' Ephr.l. 340. B. 8. pi 9 7 7 >iL^) y.^ ^1 OjJQL JIOOl so also they makeit {directly) With thee; I. 131. D. 7. ^-iui j ^^LCL^J P^^l even as vnth us, "When an aJjeciive is united with a noun ihQ possessive follows the latter. If the possessive stand before the noun, it takes the place of the substantive verb, e. g. Ephr. II. 220. C. 2. |Zq21 k^^Lo y.-^? thine^ O, Sir, is the victory. So with J following, the possessive pronoun signifies the same^ e. g. |.^\V)> ai^) the sar/ie kings; Atsem. I. 28. lAl^pLO) \^ ^* * . ~ ' ' Gl^) the same city ; or it is used as a relative^ e. g. Barh. 07 ' t" ^ 429, 2. GISDjOJ Cll^) whose name. With a preposition pre- ceding it means se/^, e. g. OlA^r^ in themselves ; Ephr. II. 7 X 7 204. F. 7. ^^> ^ ourselves. With a jorcpoizYzm preceding and a 5^^^a; added, it stands in place of the substantive pro- nouns, mine, thine, etc., e.g. John's.. 14. *i\i> ^D from n I 7 I 1 mine; I. 11. OlAjr^ to his ; Assem. I. 375. ^^> ^^ from ours. The sense is similar when preceded by a pronoun sep- mife, e.g. B ith. 254. 10. ^^> ^^01 ^^D from thine; 526, 11 ; 425, 14. 5; and fully absolute as in Luke XV. 31. 001 \^J^) >A.^j? ^,V)\oo a'ndwliat is inine, that is thine ^ John XVII. 9, 10. The repetition of the suffix occurs ". A. 161. 12. 1. After "Rem.", read: *' Here belong also ^ -X - abbreviated forms, e. g. O^N for 001 >^ ; Assem. III. P. I. * 293. TrSo aa^ to thee, Lord'\ 404 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 161. 14. 7. After *' city ", instead of " XXII. 19, und ', read : " *-iCl does not often appear in such passages as Assem. III. P. I. 363. loilLj ^Gl ]L^acl3tS, to the praise of God, The same is true also in respect to ". A. 161. 26. 8. After " 14", add: ''Bark. 452, 14. OlJSOiI, CI ^2U he gave (him) his wine himself ; Ephr. II. 217. D. I. Also, according to some, the suffix also stands between words, e. g. EjJhr. I. 84. B. 7 ^IDOnSiN *a01 c)(o OlZ^ she also asked it (him) from Jacob. \^ also stands after the verb be- fore a mere personal suffix^ e. g. .Sar/z. 324, 3. Olbi waiOr^] they took him prisoner ; even when it follows the 52{^, mark- ing the nearer noun, so that there is a double pleonasm, e. g. ^^ir. I. 314. C. I. ^0\C1^ OIJ^ ^010)^1 J ivhich had sus- tained' (h\m, h\m)Barak; III. 567. D. 7. 8." A. 161. 27. 7. x\fter " pleonastically ", add: "as personal dative ". A. 161. 28. 5. After " &c.", add : "which pecuharityismore frequent in Syriac than in Hebrew. The following belong here ". A. 162. 5. 13. Before "sometimes", instead of the rest of the Eem., read : " sometimes this peculiarity of speech is found in connection wlthjl^^^ wander, e. g. Ephr. I. 1. C. I; |ls to be quiet ; Ephr. III. 584. F. 4 oA.:i*| to find, e. g. Ephr. I. 184. D. 3; ILdj to be similar, e. g. Ephr. II. 339. B. 7; i^ii ^0 make, e. g. Barh. 217. 10; |4* ^^ be foolish, e. g. Kom. I. 22; even with (OOI, e. g. John I. 15; Ephr. I. 8. E. 1. Ol^ fOOl (aSD9 ^ as it was evening ; often in con- nection with many verbs, in which the idea of a kind of draw- ing back seems to lie, e. g. ;*Scir) to believe ; John XI. 31 ; 7 I 7?Ar. I. 82. A. 3 ; 266. A. 3 ; Vi^ to know, to comprehend^ ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 405 e. g. Ephr. I. -265. C. 5 ; 84. B. 6 : U^D ^o venture, o. g. I. 7 348. F. 1. ^ry\io happen to ones self; Ephr.l. 125. C. 3- ^llil ^1^ tOCTl-l ^aJi,_.j wJdch is accustomed to happen to one from time to time. The same is true m passives, e. g. covered; Ephr. II. 20G. E. 3. Ol^ r^^) he was born; II. 227. D. 4. 5. .OOl^j ]L.>* OlLd Ol^ J^AAaJ your whole armytvillbe surrendered; Ephr. I. 21. B. 6., etc.* A. 162. 18. 8. After " honor it ", add : "; Arts V. G ; VI. 12 ; especially when the participle is separated from the first {verb); e. g, Ei^hr. I. 81. D. 2; III. 591. A. 7, namely, when simultaneous actions are associated. Sometimes alsu the sujjix tOj] is attached to the first verb, e. g. Ephr. II. 152. P. 5. ^0;akJO .QJ*| yIiSa3 /^e m overwhelmed and {they) dead:\ A. 162. 22. 13. After B", add: ";IL153. A.4. '. .A^\ .OOlZoZ;^ zAe {your) heir of the children of God ; even when this genitive is a pronoun, e. g. Ephr. I. 83. B. 4. 5. fjOlj p ^ 1 - 7 m^nh^Kn SoXa to perform matrimony {whh) her. The ple- onastic sz^a: is attached to two nouns, taking the gender of the first, especially if the noun is masc, e. g. jE^jt^^r. I. 6. F. 3. P77 77^ I 7 ll^ljO t.ki^^> tOOlAjiJ^ \y.l concerning the creation of the heavens and the earth ". A. 162. 24. 7. After "Rem. 1.)", omit the next word "(and)", adding : ", e. g. Ephr. II. 217. D. 6, 7. "{pjj oil* j -n 7 J 7 OiAJ'P ^Z';Z the two horns of the ram (but the suffix to the preceding noun may fall away, e. g. JE^o^r. 11. 221. B. 5; 233. C. 5) ; also here belongs the repetition of the suffi^^ 27 40G ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 162. 28. 3. After " people ", add : indeed both ^ and ^^j after the noun^ sometimes take suff.^ e. g. Ephr. I. 318. B. 7. ^\>*J 01^3 tOOlX^) vSQI all the people feared her '^ ". A. 162. SO. 6. After "4", add: "; ^ absolute united with a svff.^ indicates the whole^ e. g. > i\^ I wholly ; ,^\o 2^"fi wholly. In the third person, the demonstrative pronoun often precedes ^^^, e. g. Ol^ poi this (he) wholly ; OL^ IjOl r/iis (she) wholly ; less frequently is a pronoun placed alter ^ , e. g. Barh. 568, 10. 11*^ ]jCJl OlliD ^/iis w;/io/c ^mc. As a collective ^*^ is united with a sing, and plur. svff. Be- fore numerals it forms a distributive^ e. g. Barh. 440, 7. ];Q1 ^ mc/i ten; l|kD ^ eachhundred ; 516, 2. .^-lAA A ^ eac/i sia;i/i year^ all the six years ". A. 163. 5. 5. After " sin ", add : " Ephr. 11. 227. B. 1 ; -iD , e. g. Acts XXIII. 6 ; Ephr. I. 7. D. 8 ; 117. C. 3. 4 ;" A. 163. 6. 11. After "tyrant", add: ''Ephr, II. 217. C. 8; I. 6. F. 6. |l.kD> oai> >>S concerning her being \ ". A. 163. 7. 7. After " 19 ", add : ''Ephr. II. 217. A. 4. From this connection of the suff. and prep, we understand clearly the substantive character of the prepositions. "We also find this usage still oftener employed in connection with a nou7i P *. 7 preceded by a pronoun^ e. g. Assem. I. 40. 21. jZoa > p p ^ ^ai> Gl^^nn\ against this monster. Also ; ". A. 163. 11. 1. After "feast", add: " i^/^Ar. II. 217. D. 3. 4. This repetition is particularly apparent in the use of ^Sd and ^i^. Its foundation lies in the noun with a demonstrative pro- noun preceding, e. g. Acts VIII. 35. IX. 21 ; Ephr. 1. 308. D.6. P . * " 7 P P ti 1> ()00U) \^CiM poi ^^ OUSd owjJ of this root of Judah ; c) also some words often stand between this pleonastic sufj\ ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 407 and the following noun qv pronoun with the same preposition^ e. g. Ephu II. 232. C. 7. ll^iliJ tUSD -^-^1 OlL .liaLo ^/ie/e ^^e angel commanded (him) the prophet (cf. Agrell. Suppl, p. 206); Ma^^. XXVII. 4. ^ |Ld ^ rl 7rp5? ^/zac; /oA XXI. 22; Assem.l. 405. ^ aO *a.1 wo to me! III. 1. 118. ^^ *si\ ^j _j^ AjiI to we also had ; Barh. 597. 4. After an oblique case of a noun ov pronoun separate^ the 52{^. of 3d. person, either pleonastic or for the sake of perspicuity, some- times follows, e. g. Barh. 78, 11; Assem. II. 372. 11. Ol^ loCTl )jGlL 1u had; sometimes the suff. of 1st. and 2d. per- son appears, e. g. Barh. 542, 11. 12. jk^ %iT lOgf he permitted me to drink to myself. So also after the Accus. of the j9ro?2. separate, e. g. -4ss. III. P. 1. 96. CTI-^feo IjoiI if/m (him) he killed; Barh. 342. 11. OITMOJ IZAj] ^Ae ivife he took (her) ; ". A. 16. 22. 2. After " these ", add : " Ephr. I. 39. E ;" A. 164. 4. 5. After "signification", add: "when occurring after them ". A. 164. 14. 3. After "8", add: " >Z( paOi ]^imJ U^f? tJie wind blows where it ivill; > (LdQjlO ivhen ; Ephr. I. 86. f ^ 7 7 V \Q 7 A. 1. N^ 'r'^? |Vnr>>*^ when he sent thee (is sent). Some- times J stands before the interrogative adverb, e. g. ^^p^r. L 83. A. 3. OUaJLO y.;2Z| |V^O> fOOl IVm hQ saw how his possessions had been prospered ". A. 164. 18. 11. After "14", add: "1.39,2.3. .OOUOlSci _1dAo U> 2677iOse name we have not written; Barh. 141. 15;". A. 164. 20. 8. After "31", add: '\ Barh. mi. i. Oil 1 001 Ljk\ Oli^ *2i(j that which also had \ \ 408 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 164. 24. 1. After "sent", add: '' Barh. 23. 4. 161, 9. Qj] tr^l lOfOSj ivhom we have taken prisoner in war-^\ A. 164. 26. 14. After " God, etc.", add : " ; or simply as in Barh. 54, 7. OlOj in which; also with one or more words between them, e. g. ^55. 11. 260. 17. ]] jZu^ ^*^ fOlj ^OlO a) 2;z td;^ic^ wo Iwuse is left standing ". A. 164. 27. 1. After "Rem.'*, add: "The preposition may be omitted where the sense is easily understood from the con- 17 7 ^ v nection, e. g. Barh. 165, 5. v. E. AaOOlj flO] Oli^OO during O "i"^" " 7-07 the whole time in which I teas ; 94. y^Sf)]) |A>V>^r> (Alao during the first year in which I was Idyig. The bare relative^ especially when in the neuter gender^ without a sujf, follow- ing, marks the accusative^ e. g. ^d^'i ^\o all which he had 7nade ; or the relative precedes the mark of the case, e. g. r> 7 7 p-np77 Barh. 43. 12. 01iri]^j to which time; 137, 5. looi Vkl^^) which belonged to the Arabians. At the same time it (the rela- tive) includes, together with itself, the demonstrative^ and so * 7 7 may stand after the jr^7?osi^io;2, e. g. Barh. 361. 14. 01^01^^ to 10 7 those who were with him ; 91,5. >Vr) rt \ iq those who stood *> p 7 bij ; Assem. III. P. I. 238. *)! 13 > ^^ up>on that which is not becoming ; hence in general as follows : > ^^ therefore^ X -h 7 because; J ^\4^ because; j jAo afterwards \ A. 165. 1. 2. After "strong", read: "^5sm. III. P. I 92. p I 7 PI ,.A.Q2)j whom I have commanded. " A. 165. 7. 3. After "Arabians", add: " Barh. 518, 5. ^1 ^;Ld(> / o/" whom they say ; 533. 14. {1^^* U? -^ajoZ ^/ww, t^/wse religion is unknown ". A. 165. 14. 9. After "170,5", add : "Also by j preceding the above named pronouns, e. g. oai> , .aO*) either alone ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 409 or 80 that j also follows, e. g. Barh. 314. 14. (OOI OlSDlj ^ 17 1 OCTlj /^e it^/w 2d;a5 tc'ith him ; w*-^j .-lOlj the one who very 4w 7 ^ r p \^\vas rich); farther oai> 001 m., t-iOlj "-aOI/, e. g. Barh, 465, 4. Zooi ^019 *aCn he^iolw was'^\ A. 165. 23. 1. After "Rem.", add: " The same is often ac- complished even by the svffix^ c. g. i?rA. 303, 15; 138, 10. 17; or merely by the copula^ e. g. i^ar/i. 559, 9; Luke III. 16. Ol'rColo rjvedrjae {q,1 AgrclL p. 219)". A. 165. 25. 5. After "sat", add : 5 ^ 001 Ephr. I. 82. E. 3; and tjOl olooi Ephr. I. 119. B. 4.". A. 166. 6. 6. After "signification", add: "After a preced- ing noun in the construct statc^ it indicates the genitive^ e. g. Barh. 504. ilOl ^aSoqIh^ in those days; 596, 14; 388, 2. eOJOl Zoai...i2> ^/m /o%. "Without a preceding noun it indicates the genitive by j preceding it, e. g. /oArt iX. 28. OOI J OlrASQ^^Z disciple of this ; JJOIJ , e. g. i?a?7^. 256. 8. ]>01> ^ e. g. 102, 3. {dat. and accw5. by ^ )". A. 166. 7. 6. After "47" add : ";Ma^^. Y. 17 ; Ephr, I. 1. D. 3. |Zn^V>NV) fjOl .aOI even ^/^zs doctrine ; it (the demonstrative pronoun) also corresponds with the Latin /ticce, X -n P P e. g. ylc^s I. 11. ^QA* poi ^/m 7e5z^5; Ephr. I. 312. D. 5. 7 y: t> oiil rr) |J01 this Sinai \ JohtiXlX. 19. In Ephrem it often 7 Stands evidently for QJOl , that is (hoc est), e. g. B. I. 312. P -> 'X 7 9 D. 2. 5. Ql] f'jQ^ *a| QJOl i. e. also the mountains shook. Rem. 2. The neuter is usually expressed by the fem. form though some- times by the masc., e. g. J/a^f. YI. 25 ; XIII. 13. (jOl ^^4^ ^*^ rovTO. " A. 166. 14. 12. After "thou", add: ''-.Ephr.ll. 10 A. 1 ; I. 128. B. 2. 4;" 410 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 166. 15. 4. After "*^," add: *', after the nou7i in tliu emphat. state," A. 166. 16. 6. After "hand", add: "e.g. Ephr. II. 10. A. 1 ;" A. 166. 19. 10.~After "prepositions", add: ''Ephr. I. 128. 13. 4. ^iiOj |JiD fjS^ by whose words i? .QlD and Jl^ are used in respect to things, e. g. Ephr. I. 389. A. 8. tOloL ichy ? C. 2. .Qk) \y^ wherefore ? Acts V. 24. (301 w^OI ]iSd w/m^ is this V A. 166. 22.1. After "Rem.", add : " Thezw^m- %^^ P-| (t^-^o zAere zw- 7 7 p y ? 1* 7 deed?) J j Ola] , e. g. ^jo/zr. III. 593. D. jcCLiVraL Olki..iZ5 P *. 7 P 7 ^ ISdqS n^MJD t*1 whose lips can adequately describe Paradise ? In indirect questions (laf and |pA| are found with v follow- P 7 P 7 7 * ing or preceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. E. 2. (SdQ-i (1.^(2) OlO P 7*77 PO '* 7 on which days; I. 24. D. 6. Wj 1q*jJ> ^j]]o IZqo-m Aa^ locn Aji( |1jj ^7/ u'hich he showed what peace existed between the animals and Adam; also without j , e. g. ilia^^. XXIV. 42. .QO'rk) 12] lAlS 1p|o at lohat hour your Lwd X 7 _ . P ' _ , doth come; and QlSo with (OCTI implied, e. g. Jb/m XVIII. 38. \y^ QlLo ^^;/^a^J w ?n^^? VII. 20. Moreover flk) , relating to person is found, e. g. Bojrh. 223, 2. Aj| jlSC) I -n P P P ~ tvho art thou? 399. 15. i>Qurmk5 looi ]iSd> 7^^ t^'/io ^t'as from the beginning. In respect to the relative meaning of the interrogative pronoun arising from j following, of. 56. 1 ". ADDITIONS AND COllRECTIONS. 411 A. 166. 31. 2. Instead of "in", read: "by the suff. of;" after " person ", add : " and ". A. 167. 1. 3. After "e. g. ", instead of the next 21 words, 10 "by prepositions", add :" .001^ to one's self ( si&i) -^ Barh, 77, 5. {.H^Sd tOOlJ^ 0V)iO| theT/ chose to themse/ves a king. The separate pronoun of the 3d. person usually pre- cedes the accusative^ e. g. Barh. 54, 15. ^^^^O 01^ 001 he killed himself (selbst)." A. 167. 4. 5. After "themselves", add: '' Ephr. I. 349. C. 6;" A. 167. 11. 3.~After "myself", add: " i^;?^/. I. 237. D. 2 ; 11. 208. F. 5. 6;" A. 167. 15. 3. After "9", add: ''{Ag7ell. Sujipl 210 ) i \2iOfXSi (TTpoacjTTov) Assem. 1. AS5 ;''\ A. 167. 15. 8. iVfter "6'*, add: '* sometimes ]L exhtence, X 7 e. g. Assent. III. P. I. 77. tOaiZu >,iV^'^ who even love themselves; also without a suffix, e. g. Assem. III. P. 1. 98. (A* LQ^^a even contempt. PsOQlO signifies real sub- P 7 ) > 7 Stance, the thing itself, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. jl)|> OISdQIOO 7 7 -n *v ].Vn^- oiSsDQiO Jf/se rea/ Jieaven and the real earth ( even both)''. A. 168. 7. 13. Instead of the next three lines, add : "VII. 24; > _k) (ocrn? dV), e, g. ilfa^?. X. 33; Mark VII. 16; i?arA. 195, 3; 198, 12; ? ^ \^, e. g. Assem,. I. 235; j (? 7 P 7 P 7 v W 7?i, > Ir^l/., e. g. i?arA. 113,7; 598, 14; j ^l^] ^, e. g. I /oA?^ III. 3. The neuter is expressed by > ^D , J ^ , e. g. /o^/a XV. 16 ; J Ud ^ , e. g. ^cis III. 22 ; IV. 23; J :>OrSD (ortav), e.g. Jia^^. X. 27 ; > Vo^^^ ^\D {boa av), e. g. John XVI. 23; Birh, 107, 13; j U^^ ^, e. g. Barh. 600 {ult.)] J ]jl .^, e. g. Assem. II. 172". 412 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 168. 15. 9. After " 18; by\ add: "even united with a fem.^ e. g. Barh. 129. *iiJf |ZAj] a certain woman \ aj| 7 PPP7P7P i-js* , e. g. Asseni. I. 32. {^1^(2 %m.l\ ^^ 2q-^ to some oivner of a bath\ b) by _lD r-*^ , e.g. i?ar/i. 127. 8. ^" r^0 X 7 ,^>V>Qa on a certain day /". 7 7 A. 168. 17. 10. After "5", add: ''Barh. 167. 15. ^^010^] ^!iD 5Wje owe o/" his brothers ; d) by ^^ having reference to something including both gender and number, e. g. Barh. 241. 16. 5>0jLd UdI a certozw jt7eo/?/e; iz^/je XL 36. :>Ojk) p p p pip I Alio a certain part ; e) by ^-^^ w^., f^>l\^ /. (by con- cealing the name = 6, ^ 6uva)\ Barh. 187, 12; 219;" A. 168. 19. 4. After "27", add : "; also by \ziO^^ relat- ing to persons, e. g. Assem. I. 11, 22. Sometimes this idea is contained in the 7ioun itself, e. g. ^O^d to a certain place ; 7 ' -i" ^ Barh. 250, 16. jl^l a certain longtime; (Aj^l once^\ A. 168. 21. 6. After "15;", add: "also doubled, e.g. 1. Cw. XI. 1 8 ; 5) elliptically ; also ". 7 Q A. 168. 28. 12. After "good", add: " Also by ^^ ]] or U 7 iK P ^ rA* , e. g. Barh. 284, 8 ; 613, 1 ; ^ U or ]] ^ , e. g. * P -X P ^ar^. 347, 2. 3; finally by *aj] ^ P ". X A. 169. 12. 10. After " 11", add: " also without M, e.g. 7 p .. I p J5a?7i. 359. ,iCnnV)'i ^^>.bi| certain of his friends \^\ A. 169. 17. 7. After "20", add: " Eelating to things n-n '^'^^p ^^ isfound^ e.g. iw^elX. 17. 5>0,iD J.*^ some crumbs; or dovhled, e. g. ^kiJs XXV. 19 (rti^a); ^Sd X>pS!0, e. g. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 413 Bar/i. 347, U. 01 A^. ^ ^^ some of her fingers^ With the same signification ^J^l (an indeclinable collective 7 " 9 7 noun) occurs, e. g. Barh. 217. \mJI ^^1 some several years; P 7 V 204, 1. lAlilil ^1^1 sometimes; and ^i:^, e.g. ^ar^. 385. P "7 p 1 4. f Aa2U ^^2) some men ". A. 169. 27. 3. After " 18 ", add : " or by f^ .OOUlD , e. g. Ephr. II. 36. D. 4 ". ^ A. 170. 2. 5. After "32 ", add : "Also -^C31 -i^Ol occur, e. g. Ephr. II. 232. B. 3. 4." A. 170. 5. 2. After "5", add: ''Ephr. I. 315. C. 2;". A. 170. 7. 10. After "other", add: "with h^ or *mj| pre- ' P 7 t, P P P 7 ceding, e. g. Ephr. II. 217. A. 7. 8. Ol2-rn>* ^ \^\ ]^0 and the one (horn) was higher* than the other ;". A. 170. 9. 3. After "another", add: Barh. 570. 4;" A. 170. 10. 4. After "10", add : ''Ephr. I. 227. E. 5;" . A. 170. 12. 5. After" 24," add: "Ephr. I. 40. A. 6;". A. 170. 12. 10. After "37", add: "Ephr. 11. 316. A. 8. ^- 7 ^ "7 f> -i" ^ {aorOj^ (2)Q^ ^Id from. 07ie end to the other ; with |;Lm added, e. g. Ephr. II. 339. B. 4. ^k> GFI'^fHix^ lAiON 7 I |Aj^/row ow^ house to another] or with ^>*| added, e. g. B. 5. (la^l (;!iOQl^ |;SDai ^V) from one dwelling to another'\ A. 170. 15. 8. After " burden", add : " ^OOUSO is even found doubled, e, g. Acts XVII. 32; XIV. 4; even as an accusa- tive^ e. g. Mark XII. 5 ; and oailV)\ with the mark of the case, e. g.Barh. 114. 14; 145. 4. 5. v. E.". 414 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 170. 16. 1. Instead of the next 4 lines, add, ( after " llem.") : " One another^ corresponding with the Greek ri/l/l/}- Aoi, is represented by (r^ reciprocal, in such a manner that a preposition, corresponding with the same, precedes, or is join- ed with it, the latter being seldom without the preposilio?i, c. g. Ba7-h. 260. 1. 2. f>7A* Ql\d] they consumed one another ; 7 by ^ , e. g. Acts XXI. 6 ; by ^1 , e. g. James TV. 11; 7 7 by i>Ql , e. g. Luke IV. 36 (we also find |.x doubled, e. g. /o7i?2 XIII. 14); sometimes by the preposition merely with a suffix, e. g. i^owz. I. 24. .0010 among each other ". A. 170. 21. 10. After " e. g ", add: '' Ephr. I. 308. B. 3;". A. 170. 23. 5. After " same ", add : Ephr. II. 350. 0. 3. 4 ; with a preposition preceding, e. g. Ass. I. 117. |Alm!D OlO 7 P 1^ OlO m i^Ae sawze 2/ear ;". p ? A. 170. 25. 5. After " ;?ro72ow7i", read :" 001 and |j01 m., - p ^Ol and IjOl /. ". A. 170. 26. 1. After * Rem.", add : " e. g. Barh. 508. 14 ;''. A. 171. 1. 7. After " blood ", add: ^^ without the prepositio7i before the noun being doubled, e. g. Barh. 159. 11; ". A. 171. 2. 12. After "year" add: "^y^r. II. 453. C. 6. {.aO^D> .OClXiJ their specialinquirer \'\ A. 171. 4. 8. After "43", add: "; by }l1, e. g. ^1 ive ourselves; \ind do. (will), e. g. 76'/^?^ V. 30. ZojD. ^iD 7 w>.aa3 by me myself ; VII. 28, etc.". X -x A, 171. 6. 11. After "2.", add: "; and Q^OOl, e. g. Acts II. 33". A. 171. 7. 10. After "fern.", add: " (=- r^r ), generally plac- ed after the noun ". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 415 A. 171. 22. 11. After *' 18 ", add : ; of what sort (gualis), is only expressed by ZoLo^ after the image = like as ;e. g. Ephr. I. 393. C. 1. U^4 20^5^0 like goats. " A. 172. 20. 14. After '' receive"*, add: "68, 4; ". A. 173. 19. 10. After "angry", add: " (?) the pret. ]ooi often stands for the present^ e. g. JbA^z XL 4. jOOl '=kort ; MaW. II. 6. AaOOI = et; 1 Cor. VI. 19. .oZuooi =eare ."' A. 173. 25. 2. After "20", add: "otherwise very seldom, e. g. ^ar/i. 413. 1. 3. When one commits murder, e. g. -^ 7 Ol Aa^O / s^a// ^i?/ some one ; ". A. 174. 10. 1. After "sometimes", omit thirteen words to "Eem.", and instead of them, read : " , though seldom, the pret. denotes merely the optative ^ e. g. Assent. I. 38. yll he may hear thee\ often with the optative particles ^aoA*] and ^Q^ would that {utinam)^ or, *aO q!^ e. g. iwXre XIX. 42. waAlf^ WL.D Q_^ O, if thou hadst yet known ; ". A. 174. 14. 3. After "under c", add: " *OOU _So (prop- erly *i:iOU ^So ) O that, transferred from the Hebrew, njrii 1^ ; also C1m Unvoice thee (God), belong here (cf Hahn C'hrest. 100, 3. 7).". A. 177. 4. 8. After "say", add: " The auxiliary word can is more frequently written in connection with the part, of P 7Iifp7t>7 I^Ld, e. g. Ephr. 1. 133. . 5. jZIj AaUj-pwIj U^2^ "PP 0? P-X 7 ;u-M, U lA-iOl-i^ fZaliD,^ in no other icay can we be benefitted by the divine image ". A. 177. 7. 3. After " 2," add : " ; B. The optative (cf. Agrell. p. 31), e. g. Barh. 183, 4. v. E. \J\l may he live ) the king) . 290, 4. V. E; Assem. I. 168, 15. v. E. looiZ be it so ; III. P. 416 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. II. 465, 8. >f^*r^^ ^^i (God) be Uessed. With > preceding, e. g. Assem. II. 118. 5. 8. IcOmJ loillLj that God may be gracious ". A. 177. 10. 4. After "not", add: " Less frequently we find P- 7 -P V T, 7 ISolj for V J e. g. Assem. II. 259, 24. fr^c^ Z ]<^V '> believe ?wty A. 177. 11. 12. After "11", add: "; and negative, e.g. 7 T> p -X i?ar^. 366, 5. v. E. %^01jZ IJo *OQD ^o owi but haste not.'''' A. 177. 21. 5. After "XV. 4.", add: "; Ephr. I. 124. D. 3". A. 177. 25. 4. After " B.", add : " , and the>^. is found cor- responding with the genitive of the Latin gerund, with j pre- ceding, after a preceding noun^ so that by this means, the idea of the fut. is more accurately expressed, e. g. Assem. I. 40. He takes pleasure |VjJ) to see ; or 33, 1 7, in the 2d. per- son (OOlZj to remain {that tJiou shouldst remain) Barh. 367. 7 1 7 7. 8; 245, 13. ^^r^^? U^l the time to bring forth. Very seldom without ? , e. g. Assem. IL 308, 19. 20. Cf. Agrell. SuppL p. 38 ". A. 177.26. 3. After "finally", instead of "the"' add: "a periphrastic ". A. 177. 30. 9. After " 35 ", add : " Ephr. I. 19. F. 7 ; '\ A. 178. 1. 12. After "36", add: "; Barh. 435, 11. iS) by ^77 the fut. following with ? , e. g. Assem. I. 481, 22. (rAJj (JOID I 7 ^Alj the priest shall begin ; 37. 17; Ji^Ar. L 197. D. ; 312 A. 4; in the plur., e. g. /o/^tz VI. 15. Also y is sometimes wanting, e. g. ii:y^r. II. 152. F. 4-6. plk) ^aAlj -OO-f^JO .QJ I )^aSiJ that the king should strike and destroy them ". A. 178. '2. 8. After " expressed ", add: "in both cases". A. 178. 4. 7. After "receive", add: " ; Ephr.l, 82. D. 3-5 psi 7 ^x x7v^a.X OlL lOZilJ 0001 ^^r-a-Ai ^a^nV^\ ^i^J 1l^)Q-C5? -oi ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 417 her, to whom the gifts (presents) of all the people should come ; 131, D. 3; Z>) by i\\Q fut. of looi with the part, following, Q.g.ActsY. 15. ]Z) looiJ) uALd] ivhen he came {should come); XVII. 26.". A. 178. 5. 1, After "Rem.", add: " Sometimes the idea in- eluded in the Greek 6eI is expressed by r^ j g- ^^^'^ ^^ VIII. 31 ; XIII. 7. 10 ; Luke IX. 12 ; XVII. 25". A. 178. 13. 2. After forth ", add : "The>#. with j ^ pre- ceding, corresponds with, the Latin gerund in do, e. g. Assem. II. 408, 3. 4. He permitted to bring it ( the ark) forth, is ex- -n 7 pressed by Oioajj ^iD ; III. P. 1. 120. 6. he was weary of lying, by jQaoJj ^iD ; with OCT! or *aCl inserted between, e. g. III. P. 1. 484, 22. ^DO'r^j ^6\ ^ by fleeing. The fui. also is found in cases, where, in Latin, the superlative is necessa. ry after verbs of motion, e. g. Assem. I. 32, 6. ^QUj in going towards : without ? , e. g. ^55ew. I. 380, 24. v. E., Zok)! ^l] 7 7 " I I taillgo to die', Barh. 373, 8; h^ l^V^? /o?* that reason he comes to help ; sometimes with the copula O , e. g. -4c^s XV. 36 {AgrelL pp. 39. 40)". A. 178. 24. 10. After "go", add: " This union oi the fut. with the paragogic imperative of the Hebrew, sometimes cor- responds with the imp. 'ni , parag. XX2b 5 ^^ ^"^ Ephr. I. 320, I" T, E, 5. ,^i.>>S ^A.'^NV)] wAj| %^L let him be king over US', 321, P I 7 I 0. 6. 7. \m^\ ^ wiOOl 12 ^'e//, ^e oz^r master', II. 316, A. 2. 1 " 7 i> ]l >SV>\ -yiaQjs*! \L well, I ivill show tliee the spring ". A. 179. 2. 6.. After ''infinitive'', add: Ejohr. III. 566, B. 6. 7;^ A. 179. 16. 6. After "5. .", add: "Also the /^^. of (OCTl with the part, following, expresses the imperative, e. g. Assem. III. 418 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. If*.* 9 P. 1.347. 2. ^V*^ ,OQCU let them hasten-, 53. 17. \il focru he may relate ". A. 180. 1. 4 After ''9 ", add: '' Ephr. II. 203. C. 6; 231. F. 2. 3; I. 389. A. 5; Barh. 409, 14. 15; 517, 5. v. E ;". A. 180. 5. 5. After " 6 ", add : " also before the infin., e. g. Acta Mart. III. 293, 9/. looi >SilQSD oSS^V) ]] he, by no means, spake] Ephr. I. 40. C. 8; III. 369, D. 1; Acta Mart. II. 347 ; 348, 1 ;". A. 180. 7. 3. After "7", add: "; even in the comparative degree, e. g. Acta Mart. 11. 347, 23. 24. (OOl ^ml ^aSV) * p *v GU^o] his wickedness becomes continually more aggra- vated."" A. ISO. 14. 11. After "seen", add: "; even, so much (adeo), e. g. Acta Mart. II. 337, 5. 6. "^j] ]L^lD J ASqSd so much, if I die; even with words standing between at the end of a proposition ; yes, indeed, e. g. Acta Mart. 360, 8. 9. v. E. Q. Asik) ^ilg AXZ ^u^Oli^ ^] ^h^S^^SLlj he may yet indeed divide these three years. But often this emphasisis 07 7 '^ scarcely perceptible, e. g. ^ar/i. 226. OlAlOl ^^V^ I have purchased it (legally ?y\ A. 180. 16. 3. After "45" add: Ephr. I. 9. F. 7. 10. A. 3;". A. 180. 18. 14. After "die," add: "sometimes the expres- p p sion J (OOl |J by no means, on no account, stands before the infinitive, e. g. Ephr. I. 40. C. 2 ". A 180. 22. 6. After " is ", omit ' which is ", and add : " ; also i Sam. XXII. 16 {cf. Ephr. I. 377, E) which are ". A. 181. 9. 8. After "weep", add: ''Barh. 19. 20; Ephr. II. 204, C. 4;". A. 181. 12. 2. After " 21 ", add : ** Acts 1. 1 ; 11. 4. v. 42;". A. 181. 14. 3. After " 16,', add : " Ephr. I. 85. B. 4. 5;". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 4 1 A. IS I. 25. 6. After " teach ", add : '^ Ephr. I. S92, B. 2;". A. 181. 27. 4. After "enter", add : "Sometimes, for the sake of perspicuity, %a01 is inserted between, e. g. Asscja. II. 438, 19. *D*,Sq1j ^(S\ ^ by spitting ;". A. 181. 29. 4. After " me ", add: " ; or it indicates compari- 7 son in connection with > f .] , e. g. Ephr. III. 568, F. 8. i- rfiV)\ > yjfc f even as they are accustomed to worship them (the trees). United with the suff,^ it makes the verh^ e. g. Ephr. I. 194, D. 2. 3. aiS^ovi\ llo Ae som^/^^ tokillhirri\ substantively, e. g. I. 312, B. 1. ;.i^ ^j v^ r^^Vno ^ /% way from Seir. Besides, it marks the \u2i\An gerund with ad, e. g. J5ar/i. 466. \\V>Vi\ for hearing-^ 272, 2. v. E., and the supine in u, e. g. -^ssern. III. P. 1. 115, 6. *^ t> 7 "^ t 7 7 o;^jZ\rr>V)\ t lOrnS unpleasant to hear''\ A. 182. 22. 6. After "him", add: ''Ephr. I. 392,0.2;". A. 182. 24. 5. After"Byssus", add: '' Ephr, III. 578. C. 2; Barh. 88. 13;". A. 183. 4. 10. After "214, 1. ",add : JS^o/^r. I. 283, B. 5. 6; II. 232, B. 7; I. 314, C. 8; 217, A. 8. 9;". A, 183. 7. 7. After " oath ", add: Ephr. III. 565. E. 8. F. 1 ; Assem. I. 261, 2 ; Barh. 73. 1 ; ". A. 183. 15. 1. After "Lord", add: "This projioun ia doubled when two or move participles are united, e. g. Acts II. 23. tOAj] ^AlSflgQ tOAj*! ^\^ ye see and ye hear-^ yet the second pronominal mark may be wanting, e.g. Acisl. 11. P 7 ' 7 xp 9v 7 xppp ]<^>^ ^ ;i>*0 tO Aj] ^jlSQa^ |jiD i^'/^y 5towc? ye and gaze towards heave?i ? ". A. 183. 23. 3. After"( 65)", add: ''Barh. 120, 5. loCTl Uco he hates ( 65) ; JE:/?^r. I. 39, E. 7. |l>]o ^Is ^JjCO \l^ \LJ V\ > '^ rn 1 0010 awtZ ^oe/ ^e?^/^e9 /^e /ovetZ ; or with fOOl ~ I p 7 preceding, e. g. Bzrh. 562, 14. ^^il^?; 0001 they direct] ". A. 183. 25. 10. After "2", add: " ^cis II. 7. 12. 30;". A. 184. 5. 1. After "Eem.", add: " Less often for the for- mation of the imperfect, (ooi , united with Aji] or fOOl Aaf and %M2i {to remain), contributes, in connection with > or p 7 P I " following before the participle, e. g. Barh. 597, ;2lO A-i| /le told a falsehood ; 468, 5. |;J looi ^aOIoAaI /^e ^oo/i; up a 7 7 7 p p W; 581, rve**^ r^ ^ he limped {conti?iued hobbling) *\ A. 185. 25. 9. After "19", add: "Rem. The;?r^., in con- nection with (001 (which then precedes the ^ar^.), forms a periphrastic imjjerative, nearly resembling the subjunctive, 7 p . 7 e. g. Asseni. I. 455, ^^ AuOOl knoiv (scias) ; III. P. 1. 600, 10^7 k7ip 18. V. E. ^-a^r^ .oZuoOl know ye\ 358, 10. .oZuooi ^'rOl m. P doye\ even without |001 , but with the personal prorvoun 7 1 added, e. g. Assem. I. 40, 8. Ajf ;al... ^e dumb; 351, 22. v. V-np 7-^p ^''^ E. Aj| !D0U ^'^z've; 378, 10. Ajf looiO \0^ remain and be (Agrell. Sujipl. p. 25). B. T1\\q optative, e.g. Assem. 7 77^ 77 7 III. P. 1. 572, 6. 7; 568, 10. lail]o ^a:LALDO :>CL.^ASd ^ P P -x may he be fortijied and strengthened by God; 597, lO. fjjOlOl l4i> may Ids memory be destroyed [Agrell. Suppl. p. 32 )". A, 186. 8. 12. After "47", add: " III. 2. ^L^ OOCn ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 421 t:^!'^^? ^N>f Ol!^ ,^1 V)imo they who were accustomed to bring and lay him down ; ". A. 186. 13. 6.~ After " HavAov ", add : " It should, however, X 7 be remarked, that -'r, in the above named connection, is, for the most part, pleonastic, and that besides, the fmite verb, at the same time, contains the same idea within itself (cf. the JjSitin jubere, ccBpisse, and the Greek apxecr^aty. A. 186. 23. 1. After "Eem.", add: " Before such a parti- 7 ciple, yO or J is only seldom wanting; indeed, adjectives, with a participial meaning, are united with ^ or > , e. g. wi-m , 7 7 ' -i " ' ' Acts XX. 12. .ft.A* ,.0 i^CJvra] IX. 41. f^^> ,.0 ^Cjoav \ Apoc. XIX. 20. ^LLl p ^wvTff ". A. 186. 30. 6. After " I3'", add : "The part, when not used as a noun, takes no svffix, but always permits the mark of the case to follow with the objective suf., e. g. Matt. X. 40 ; V. 44; Luke X. 26; XXII. 43; John Vl. 6; VIII. 6, 7; Burh. 520,9- 125, 13". A. 187. 12. 8. After "bed", add: '' Ephr. 1. 82. A. 7. 8. AuOOl y-lD? //iarc 5/6y9^; B. 2. ZUOOI ^TIIa.I^ //oy; 11. 339, A. 5 ; III. 566, A. 3 ". A. 187. 14. 4. After ^^9idus^\ add: "and culjectives in ^iVw, ". A. 187. 14. 11. After ''timendus'\ add: " ^ssewx. III. P. 2. 118, IhkvCO adorandus\ III. P. 1. 536, 20; iJar/i. 609, 10. 7 7 froNrsV) laitdabili<^\ Assem. II. 40. |'=^\Vo docibilis\ ". A. 187. 26. 1. Before '' by\ add: "a vcr5 united with a part, may either follow in the ivfin. with ^ , e. g. JbAn III. 30. ^.nV^S wi^O 'i^;!^!^ l)o OCT Oot!^ he must increase but Iriiust decrease \ Barh. 6, 5. v. E ; 205, 8 ; or in the fut. with J preceding, e. g. J5ar/i. 476, 9. ]^Aj> |J0 h^ must be 422 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. called \ Luke XII. 12; XXII. 37; and impersonalhj^ e. g. Assem. I. 70, 17. ^^^Q^ tJDjl one must knoiv^ ". A. 188. 2. 10. After "4", add: *' ; with the ^^^ following, e.g. Assem. III. P. 11.220. jk^lZZj \oj] one must say \ Barh. 410, 12. "HiD it is fit '\ A. 188. 12. 2. After '' participle "", add: "united with the personal j)ronoun ". A. 190. 4. 1. Before " LV.", add : "*QOlJ' ^ ". A. 190. 5. 2. After " following", add : "e.g. Num. XIV. 2. *2)oA] .Zu^ Othatioe had died'\ A. 190. 13. 1. After "when", add: "in connection with a noun^\ A. 190. 16. 5. xVfter "3", ..add : '' Eplir.W. 1. A. 5. 6; 12. C. 3. 4. Also, instead of "it", in same line, add: '*the ex- 7 7 pression j ,^il ^So". A. 190. 17. 10. After "brother", add: "Also *QC31 (from ^OlI) is found in Ephr. III. 593. B. 6 f .". A. 191. 2. 5. After "you", add: " i?ar^. 447, 4 ; Ephr. 1. 40. D. 7;". A. 191. 3. 4. After "him", add: " Apoc. XYIII. 7;". A. 191. 7. 4. After "generation", add: '' Barh. 115, 5; Ephr.l. 124. C. 3;". A. 191. 9. 13. After " us ", add : ''Assem. 1. 431;". A. 19!. 25. 13. After "him", add: "26.9; 167, 13; 251; Assem. 1. 28. 8. v. E;". A. 192. 25. 5. After "9 ", add : "; Ephr.ll. 20. C. I; 118,F. 5; 125, E. 4; Ephr. I. 9. E. 5". A. 103. 16. 13. After "37," add: '' Assein, 1.38 (not II) ; v 7 174, 4. V. E. Hence OOl is often put for Ajf , cf. Tychsen Elem. Syr. 48, 4. v. E. Aioa) OOl thou ivho hast given -^ 49, . I 7 4v 3. A.ftJD 001 tliou who hast united :^\ ADDITIONS AND CORIIECTIONS. 42b A. 193. 22. 9. After *' hirn ", add: "Here also belong in- stances in which writers designate themselves by chang- ing the phraseology back again from the 1 plur. to the 1 sing.^ e. g. Barh. 513. 4. v. E. '*. A. 194. 3. 12. After "11", add : J^j^Ar. II. 316. A. l.'\ A. 194. 5. 10. After " 20 " add : " Acts V. 40 ; Ephr. I. 28 1, B. 1 ; 293, A. 4; II. 207, B. 3; 232, C. 7; 484, C. 4. 5.". A. 194. 14. 9. After "8", add: ''Assem. II. 400, 2; Barh. 74, 2. 3; 265,5;". A. 194. 15. 2. After " 2 ", add : '' or part, pass., e. q. Acta Mart. II. 364, 1. l2jQ>j U^CdI looi *^>*^V^ who was clad ivith a white stola ; ". A. 194. 17. 6. After "29", add: "(also with ^ ActsY. 3);". A. 194. 20. 12. After "10", add: " ^pjZf to be estrang- ed, e. g. Ephr. I. 1. C. 5,*'. A. 194. 25. 13. After "33," add: " Eem. The prepositions LCl^ and fU are found in connection with the last two cases ( y and d), and especially in connection with personsJ'\ A. 195. 3. 6. After " A.", add : ''Barh. 288, 12 ; Assem. I. 303, 12; ^c-^s II. 30; 4. 1. USd ^So to speak] also the Pass. e. g. Ephr. II. 229, B. 3. ^Ci^AkSD ria>*Z| to think to re- fiect ; ". A. 195. 7. 5. After "14", add: "; II Sam. IV. 5; Ephr. I. 81. B. 1.2; Barh. 555, 13.". A. 195. 11. 11. After " 6 ", add : " ^'/^Ar. I. 131. E. 5; III. 5(0. F. 4; 570, B. 1. 2; Assem. I. 239, 3-5; Barh. 327, 10 (cf. 54, B. 1 ).". A. 195. 12. 7. After " accusative ^\ add: " of the person and thing. ". A. 195. 19. 3. After " 10", add: " Fa. and Aph. fn-ra ^Si^^, e.g. Ephr. III. 570. C. 3. |aj^Q ^^OlOxSiAiJ he zmshed to c/othe him with glory, I. 20. A. 5; SL^ I. 127, E. 6; *,^jX2l III. 569, A. 2. 3 ; ." -^^.-^ 424 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 105. 25. 7. After *^32", add: '' Ephr. I. 389, D. 3; II. 316. F. 2; 20. D. 4. Here belong also ^:iD, e. g. 7 7 Assem. I. 75. 7. 8 ; ^>ol, e. g. II. 372, 5. 6. v. E.". A. 195. 26. 9. After ''signification", add: "in respect to persons and things.". A. 196. 12. 13. After " E.", add : "; Ephr. II. 20. D. 2.". A. 196. 16. 7. After " III. l.",add: "; Ephr. 11. 20. D. 3.". A. 196. 26. 11. After "43 ", add: "^c^s III. 4. 5;". A. 197. 1. 1. After "16", add: " *Q ^ij to blush on ac- count of something] Ephr. III. 571, B. 5. 6 ; ". A. 197. 4. 1. After " 13", add: " *Q ^\\ to punish; Ephr. I. 40. C. 6; ". A/ 197. 14. 2. After " one ", add : " Ephr. I. 312. A ; ". A. 197. 24. 4. After " 23", add : "; Ephr. I. 228, A. 2.". A. 198. 1. 12. After " 19 ", add : ''-.Ephr. I. 85, 2. 3 ;". A. 198. 7. 9. After "him", add : "; Ephr. I. 117, E. 3 ; II. 339, B. 7; II. 209, A. I ; I. 84. D. 3.". A. 198. 9. 11. After "e. g.", add: '' \Ephr, I. 330, B. 8 ; L 40, B. 2 ; ". A. 198. 15. 4. After " sons ", add: "; and looi V , Barh. 562. 10. P OlL '\0CIU he will not have. Also OlL Aj] may- signify he has written is an author^ e. g. Barh, 19. Aa] IidAo Craii he has written a hook] or, it is permitted to him^ e.g. Assem. III. 1. 151, 5. 21^]SQ^ ^j^ bS\ it is permitted 7 to us to learn ; with ^>Q^ = to belong to one^ e. g. Barh. 442 12. ISdJ^O Ul\n\ A^lj all which belongs to him {Agrell.Y\ A. IDS. 19. 8. After '' 9 ", add: ''Ephr. 11. 209, A. 1;". A. 199. 1. 5. After "evil", add; Ephr. I. 83. D. 7; 24. A. 8; ". A. 199. 4. 11. After " 18" add: ''Passives, e.g. Ephr. II. 201, F. 3; I. 125, D. 1;". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 425 A. 199 22. 7. After*- him", add :'' Ephr. I. 318, C. 5;". A. 200. 1. 13. After" 13", add: '' Ephr. I. 6. D. 6 F. 3;". A. 200. 5. 6. After "thee", add: '' Ephr. I. 117, B. 4;". A. 200. 6. 2. After "signification", add: '' Ephr. I. 123, F. 4;". A. 200. 12. 3. After " 6 ", add : " also, finally ;/) verbs of mo- tion after or against^ e. g. |Z| , ^ri\TO , ZUj^J , .naj etc. So also ^.1 ^CLO to stand up against any one^ e. g. Acts IV . r I 7 r Q I ; \y^ 5>a>) to lift up against, e. g. ^c^5 IV. 3 ; ^ ]*j^ ^0 wa/;e aw assault against^ e. g. Barh. 305, 4. v. E ; 41 1, 2 ; 417, (cf. 5. Agrell. p. 63.)". A. 200. 28. 1. Before ";I Tim:\ add :" and >Aa ^, e. g. ". A. 200. 28. 8. After "22", add: "j Ephr. 1. 30?, F. 1 ; 418, B. 2.". A. 201. 19. 9. After " following ", add: " and so that, after 7 the first ( fOa ), the jut.^ with j preceding, follows, e. g. Ephr, I. 118, F. 3. 4. *|ooiJj ,ri2) he permitted to pro- ceed] or with the copulapreoeding the finite verb, e. g. Ephr, II. (K 7 7 212, A. 7. 8. wiCnOnn^O f02i he permitted him to dress -J even without the copula preceding, e. g. ". A. 201. 21. 11. After "itself", add: " Assem. I. 84, 11 . 12. *> *- p '' .. .Qj| |p ji^a lie permitted them to throw ; with ^ before the V " ' \ ' infin. e. g. J:55em. III. P. 1. 598, 7. 8. j^lSOl 0^03 they permit to make. If the finite verb follow in the 3d. p/wr., it may be considered by some as impersonal, e. g. Assem. I. 372, 9. aiQui^j|0 Lf02i I commanded that he should bow doun. ' 7 7 The same holds good in respect to >r , e.g. ". A. 201. 22. 5. After "14", add: "; 213. 12. OiAI^do jfB he permitted to put him to death] 173,4. Ol,^\ j,a 426 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Jte yermiited to seize him ; Matt. II. 16. v*4^ >r* ^^^ 'permit- ted to ldll\ consequently it should be remarked that the idea of co7nmanding even is often included. Often also a noun^ 9 instead of ayZ;2zY^ ve'r*^, is found with pO5, e. g. Barh. 165, I 0. ,.Q2) jsQ^i^ Ol^ he pe^'mitted him to dress [ordered Itirn a dress) '^ and sometimes jSd") also takes the same significa- X 7 p 7 7 tion, e. g. E2)hr. II. 212. A. 7. 8. a01QjA^1o jolSD -pk)! i/ie king permitted to carry him in. " A. 202. 2. 7. After " 11." add: '' Ephr, II. 220, B. 4; 221. A. 6. ^ is also found before the finite verb, e. g. Ephr. III. 567. B. 8, C. 1. ^^.ZkoAk) .ooiAi>an\ 0^00]^-^ o/^/iose who had lost their clothes were they sought " . A. 202. 10. 3. After "28", add: " ^c^5 III. 13; Ephr. III. 571. B. 1; I. 2. B. 1.". A. 202. 14. 5. After "prayers", add : '' Neh. I. 8. Here also belong " . I 7 * A. 202. 15. 8. After " 15", add: '^j^joAsl to pro??iise, e. g. II. Fet. II. 19;". X 7 -n A. 202. 18. 5. After "3, 5", add: " ^OsiZI todrinh\ e. g. Barh. 322, 14; 333, 6. v. E ; ". A. 202. 26. 7. After " etc.", add : " ; M^liZ] to bestir one's self, 7 7 -n 777 e. g. Barh. 213 ; r^j2] to unite one's self, 269, 5. v. E ; ^^2^2] to mutually accuse themselves, e. g. Assem. III. P. II. 457, 7.". A. 203. 4. 2. After " etc.", add : " The same is true in respect 7 i y "^ to ^1] [to be removed) , e. g. Barh. 312, 8; fC^\ i^tobeldlled)\ r>2l, 13; *lIiD {to be brought forth) , Assem. II. 183, 16. v. E; >^^^ {to be forsaken), Barh. 271, 13.". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 427 A. 204. 3. 3. After " 9 ", add: " by JoLm] , e. g. Acts V. 9. Qo-CniSoL .0Aa0A*]> ^dD rl uTL (Tvve(pcjV7J}:7j vixlv TTElpdoat ; ". ^ A. 204. 19. 6. At end of liein. add : '; or when synonymous verbs are united together, e. g. Asseyn. I. 32, 1. \^\D0 "{l] he came (ivent) and arrived \ Barh. 570, 11. 476; 371, 12.". A. 205. 4. 7. After "etc.'^ add: "jmore frequently, like the noun, it is considered as absolute without a svfflx preceding, 7 I c. g. Matt. XXII. 25. 0001 Aa] they were \ Barh. 287, 1. .. 7 X f ^0C\ Au| they were\ seldom does looi precede, e. g. Barh. 7 10 p 94, 7. ..jkCloA-i] (OOl he iuas\ sometimes ]oai is wanting for V marking past time, e g. Assem. I. 34, 8. v. E. ^aZu] ^ as I 7 I 7 t\ i\ 0-7 luas', Matt. II. 9. waCToAj*]) ]ju\ ^ ^^ ]A^ over the place ivhere the child was. Also the expression ]ooi La\ is used in the absolute without taking the gender and number ^0^0 of the following noun, e. g. looi A^f fZo-i^-^a it icas a combat-^ Barh. 2SS, 4. ]-^Sd1 ^ySQl ]oGl La] there laej-e 20 Emirs', 415, 3; 221, 10; MarkXV. 25; II John verse 12; but the resfular union is the most common, e. g. John IX. 16; I. 39;^XIX. 14 i Luke XXIII. 44. {Agrell. p. 6)." I A. 205. 5. 1. After ' Eem.", add : " La] and ]ooi with ^ before the infin. following, mark the Latin gerund, e. g. Matt. XXVI. 35 ; Acts XXVIL 2; Zu| has also the fut. following, e. g,^c^5XXVIL26.". A. 205. 11. 3. After "27 ", add : "So also ]6oi is pleonastic after U in a mere negation or negative question ( nonne ? ) , 428 ADDITIONS AND CORIIKCTIONS. e. g. Ephr. 1.2i,I>. 8. V ]nm\0 U^( a'r^^| UM .07 GlSd> 1 001 the trees and plants were not created at the same time with the earth ; 24, D. 1 ; 26, B. 3. F. 2f.". A. 205. 16. 1. After "17", add: "The apocopate M ]oiJ sometimes takes the signification of the subjunctive^ and the aorist if^n-j = Kal eytvero is translated by > fOOl, or, instead t- 7 T> 7 of J we sometimes find O, e. g. Luke I. 59, oZjO JOOIO tltere they came ; also by omitting j or O, e. g. Mark I. 9. 12] "looiO there he came\ Luke I. 22; V. 17. Often how ever, [001 remains untranslated, e. g. ilfa^^. IX. 10; Jfar^ IV. 4; Lukel. 23; 11. 46.". A. 205. 26. 1. After "Eem.", add: "Besides jk)|, the ^er^5 P 17 1\ Q 7 U^, ^a^a, ^], ]l), ];0, .TiAs) also belong here." A. 206. 4. 11. After "97, 1", add: " ; Ephr, I. 85, C. 5. 6.". A. 207. 17. 7. After " 44 ", add : " ; Ephr, I. 267, C. 3 ; III. PPX'^*. PO*w 589, D. 1. ISQQDOriij {j^O, lovely breezes; ActsYl. 11. ]2ijQ..j U-lD blasphemous words ; or without J with the construct state preceding, e. g. Ephr. II. 208. C. 4. 5. (*JQI5 wj]Sd xy^^ o;i account of the holy vessels ; F. 3.". A. 208. 1. 3. After "box", add: ''Ephr. I. 283, A. 7; 295, F. 5 ; ". A. 208. 3. 1. After "pillar", add: "; Ephr. 1. 122; A. 3; 7 7 P without 3 , e. g. Ephr. IT. 208, F. 3. Ijuj.JO ]i]\2i jco] aw troTi and brazen chain \ II. 227, C. 4. 5;". A. 208. 13. 5. After "household", add: '' Assem. I. 386;". A. 208. 14. 1. Before "some", add: "; e. g. Assem. I. 397; 405, 17; Barh, 278,5. 6.". A. 208. 17. 7. After "13", add: " The relation of Tzwrwi^-r and time is marked by the noun used as an adjective, e. g. i?arA. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 429 * , r ^0 r 134, 1. CJly^^o "U*.'^ IJ months- Acta Mart, II. 348, 12. t> ' 7 7 ]ASDaj ]tl a full year {lit. of days):' A. 208. 26. 9. After 167, 1 ", add : " Ephr. I. 310, F. 5; 320, D. 5 ; ". A. 208. 28. 2. After "91, 2 ", add : " Ephr. I. 420, E. 8; ". A. 209. 1. 2.--After ''freeman ", add: " Ephr. I. 84, B. 3 ; ". A. 209. 2. 6. After " heretic ", add : " On the contrary, Ephr. II. 227, F. 3 ; ". A. 209. 3. a-^After "20", add: "; Asse)}t. III. P. I. 449, 14; 408, 12. 13.". A. 209. 7. 7. After '^ 14 ", add : " Ephr. I 1. D. 1 ; ". A. 209. 11. 13.~After "32", add: "; Barh. 448, 9. OISdoI 7 17 Jili en the same day\ 180, 8. .A^)) \^ again^ anew\ 289, 10. It ( ;q ) also corresponds with the the Latin natus^ in designating age, e, g. Fhil. III. 5 ; Luke II, 42." A. 209. 14. 11. After "free", add: "; Loi bpa vnfe\ (V>iO L\^ holy virgin ( nonne ) == nata^ in giving the age; ". A. 209. 26. 2. Before " Luke , add " and f^ ; ". A. 209. 27. 2. After "0", add: ''Matt. X. 25; XIII. 17, 52; Barh. 180,3; 441,3;". A. 210. 3. 7. After "XIX. 2", add: "; Barh. 516, 7; ". A. 210. 7. 4. After "16", add: ''Ephr. I. 308, D. 3; II. 20. F. 2 ; ". A. 210. 8. 4. Before "sometimes", add :"( more frequently ^ I by laauS) ." A. 210. 18. 5. After " Persia ", add : " ; Acta Mart. II. 343, 11. 12, V. E. With 5 preceding, it {LJ^) forms; pat,- 7 7 " rynyniics, e. g. Asse^n. III. P. I. 426, 19. ilcolflD A^Oj a 7 7 -^ Saeanide; Barh. 580, 1. ^riil Z\a.S> Ahbasides:' 430 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 210. 23. 3. After "hydraulics", *' add : *' Here are also found compounds with f,^ and Tr^y in the p/ur., e. g. Assem. III. P. II. 693, 14. v. E. IZ^lj OUylu the congre- gallon of a church ; Barh. 235, 4. OlAa.O ^.i^J^ his family ; ^%P 7 7 7 7 * 106, 4. ll..>* -V^\ soldiers\ \d\b with the mark of the case preceding = the remainder. '''' A. 211. 24. 9. After " etc.", add : "Rem. Ahtro,cts formed from concretes take the ending ]Zq, e.g. ]2qaj) (from *aj|) humanity \ ]2q A.\a embassy (from]N iNt)); ]Zqa1D0CTIj if^e Roman power or a person ivho is a Roman (Rofnerthum, lit, Romandorit, ) etc. In addition to these, there is sometimes added, a concrete explanatory term, e. g. Assem. II. 177. P P -X 17 P -X > -X JaSdoj fc\AOo| (Zo>V)Om> Romandom^ \. e. a Roman. More frequently abstracts are used in ^i^/es, e. g. J.sse?/z. III. P -X 7 P. I. 372, 15. y.ZQ.a-ikA thy royal majesty; 598, 2. *. -X 7 7 QsZqa^.\V)\ ?/ow7- highness-^ 303, 17. v. E. etc. A change or exchange of gender does not occur, when the container (vessel) stands for the contained or the place for those who 7 -n 9 live in it, e. g. Assem. I. 160, 8. A^O ]l)] ^/ze inhabitants of the land went in \ Barh. 510, 7. 82, 8. Sometimes the sing, and plur. are found near each other, e. g. j5ar^. 588, *. *. I7P7 1 P** 7. .001-^ ^"5uJDj]j 1>Z] .n\m ]ircl>L all the inhabitants of Arbela went up into the fortress^ ( cf. Agrell. p. 165 ) ." A. 212. 2. 2. After "new", add: "Rem. The w^w^^r is also, sometimes designated by the mascidine^ e. g. II Cor. V. P 17 10. ^^dyaSov; Ga/. IV. 18. ;aJ2l* KaAoi ; 717a. XXVII. 23. ^AjlO KaKov ; hence it is difficult always to decide which gender is really used, still it can be definitely determined, in ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 431 most cases whether the feminine is employed for the neuter, although there is no fixed law perceptible in respect to it, as it ( the neuter ) seems to arise from impersonal expressions, * X f e. g. Acts VI. 2 ; on the contrary, see Mark VII. 2T. |;^^ U", etc.". A. 212. 9. 11. After *'12", add: "Here belongalso?7ia7-/j5q/ P 7 7 time as divisions of tim^, e. g. Mark I. 32. |aSqs . > ^\Kj^^ by the setting of the sun ; Ps. L. 1 ; Barh. 466, 2. So also or JO 7 we find in Matt. XIII. 48. ISo* wi,*^m\ cttI t5v a/ymAov , or IASdqLd an oath', Barh, 454." A. 213. 8. 1. After " Canaanite ", add: "; Ephr. II. 203, C. 8. D. 1; I. 310, B. 1. 2.". A. 213. 10. 2. After ''noun'\ add: ''Barh. 535 6; ^cis VII. 30; Gal. IV. 24; Barh. 602, 11 ; . A. 213. 12. 5. After "genitive", add: "with j.". A. 213. 13. 5. After " barley ", add : " ; ^ar^. 304, 2. I^Jj yA* II jar) a 5w5/ie/ 0/ id;/tmi{ ; 522, 13 ; 524, 4 ; 299, 4. v. E. Also between the principal noun and the one in apposition, B. suffix is sometimes found attached to the former, e. g. Barh- n I -K-x *. 7 7 225, 10. ]vl^>0 llol .0ailll4^ wY7^ ^^ez> /oo^/s of drachms and denarii ; or several words occur between, e. g. Barh. 89, 4. 5. "looij ^ASaK0 llSofev* Vf^*^ 650 ;30wwc?5 o/" gold. But whether synonyms with the copula O , could be properly considered as an instance of apposition, may be doubted, and more especially when w^e refer to the whole subject of the union of nouns of a similar meaning, e. g. Barh. 118, 13. , 7 i\*y ]ZaaiQSDO U? gifls and donations] 298, 3; 521, 15. 589 ; 322, 2 { AgrelL pp. 156, 157 ) .". . A. 213. 19. 6. After " 19 ", add: " ] Ephr. I. 18. A. 6; 24. E. 1 ; ." A. 213. 28. 4. After "contents", add: '' Heb. IX. 10; Ephr. I. 282. D. 1. 2; II. 464, E. 1 ; Acta Mart. II. 346, 8; ". 432 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 214. 1. 4. After "v. E.", add: '' Ephr. I. 125. D. 7. 8 ; ". A. 214. 7. 11. After "9", add: "In the New Testament, and wherever the two forms appear alike together, they are used promiscuously without any perceptible distinction from each other, e. g. Luke 11. 13. .ji.1* ^Sd and XIII. 7. llli ^ suddenly. Dififerent Syriac writers recognize this peculiarity, e. g. Bark. 20, 4. ^^.is ^-i^^j) & 19, 7. 8. ^10>f]Il3 40 years; cf. 544, 13. with 334; 596, 7. with b77, 15.". A. 214. 15. 7. After "001", instead of "is", add: " ^z., ^aOI /., pi. tOJOl w., ^.*.J01/., corresponding with the Greek article 6, i] , ^/. ot , a2, are". A. 214. 17. 2. After "It stands", add: " They stand ;" also line 18. W. 11. instead of " follows ", read : " follow.". A. 214. 18. 9. After " IG ", add: " Mark V. 33. IZAj] ^3 p p .. I ^Ol but the wife {^rj 6e yvvrj ) ; Matt. XXV. 4. 1 ASll*.::^^ ^J ^aJCn but (they) the wise {young ivomen) ( = at (Je (ppovLiioL ) ; V. 8, 9, 11;". A. 214. 20. 2. After "whole", add: " (^tyeVerovy^ 6 dv'^pcjnog ). In the first case even the oblique cases are prece- ded by these pronouns, restoring the marks of cases, e. g. Ltike 7 7 XVI. 21. OOIJ = rov] Matt. XII. 13. 001^= rai; Rev. XVII. 1. aOlJ =r7]g, etc. But this peculiarity of speech is found not merely in the translation of passages in the New P I 7 7 Testament, but often also in Assem. e. g. I. 30, 2. ^a.^^^ 001 > p . ^ p the saint; and in Barh. 487. ]lQ'^0> .QJOl the design, etc.". A. 215. 9. 12. After " 16", add : " Ephr. I. 314, C. 2; II. 207, B. 6;" A. 215. 13. 6. After "faith", ad(i: "; Actsl. 15; VI. 12; Ephr. I. 314, 7; 439. B. 6. 7. D. 1." A. 215. 17. 8. After "50", add: "; Ephr. 1. IB. 4; 121, F. 7; 128, 0. 3; II. 40. D. 5; 153, D. 8; III. 570, F. 8. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 433 A. 215. 20. 11. After "palace", add: "; Eijhr. 11. 318, C, 4.". A. 215. 22. 5. After " B ", add : " ( e. g. Ephr. I. 392, 4. 5 II. 330, A. 3. 4; B. 8. 9 ; III. 567, B. 3) ." A. 215. 26. 7. After "oath", add: ''Ephr. III. 750, E. 6 1. 18, A. 3; 119, A. 5;". A. 216. 14. 4. After "earth", add: " When two such ^ei lives follow each other, the pleonastic suffix is attached to the former and not to the latter, e. g. Acts IV. 8. liQl> M01QJQ2^t 0^^<> \Lk;CLt Z\aO> (a^aoo ye rulers of tlie people and elders of the house of Israel^ hear! ". A. 216. 21. 6. After "Jerusalem", add: ''Ephr. I. 292. E. 2. 3 ; ". A. 216. 25. 4. After "2", add : "; Ephr. II. 220, F. 7." A. 216. 27. 9. After "21", add: "; more frequently with the preposition preceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 85, C. 2. jAl tQ^f ) ^iD of the riches of our father is he rich.^^ A. 216. 30. 2. After ^'' prophet ", add : " with the pron. pre- 9 7 -n P ceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 25, B. 4. -C71 loilS^j ]>C71 that is the Op-n OP 7 7 itor/^ o/" Go^; III. 579, C. 4. 5. U-*^ t? |j01 IiaDj OOl ^/izs ( a work ) o/" nature, that of design. ". A. 217. 5. 5. After "j", add: " for designating the author, as in Ps. 4 and flf., or when a drawing audi something fixed SiVQ thereby expressed.". A. 217. 6. 11. After "Lord", add: " ^c^s II. S4 ; Ephr. I. 319, B. 6. 7. etc;". I 7 A. 217. 9. 7. After "Franks", add: " 1 Kings X. 18. ^^JZio] Ti P 7 0- ' ^ looij gold of Ophir; Ephr. I. 119, E. 2-5. *|ZQ^la| X 7 -n OOla'jZ ^iD'i the peculiarities of both { the water and fire ) , by which it appears that > before -So is not to be over- looked; ". A. 217. 12. 1. After " Turks", add : "; jG^V^r. I. 312, E. 2. p-n-np.. * * 7 17 IIJioAa VAa!i2) ^Sd *0>a ^'f^\ ^^ ^"^^^^^ ^^^ Philistines; 434 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. I. 131, K. 7. We also find *Q with > preceding for mark- ing the idea of place, e. g. ]qqO VpOrSoO) iAoms of the (^ which are in the) desert. ''\ A. 217. 17. 7. After ''him", add: "; Ephr. III. 562, C. 6; I. 121, A. I.". A. 217. 25. 4. After "20", add: "More frequently is the ^ewmz;^ expressed by of from (de) (instead of which, we ^ " 7 r p 7 also find ^i^^^ and ^), e. g. Barh. 230. ]nS^y ]ci'^ the history of the hound -^ 589, 5. v. E; 120, 3. 4; by since, after, from there to, e. g. Assem. I. 236, 6. v. E (Agrell. pp. 129,130).". A. 217. 29. 8. After "Egypt", add: ''Ephr. I. 349. B. 5;". A. 218, 5. 5. After "love", add: ''; or the genitive may he -* 7 *. used in the ablative, e. g. Barh. 285, 2. (1 ilV) wt'^Q^l sma/^ in number-, 268, 15; 229, 13.". A. 218. 6. 1. After "Rem. ", add: " As ablative, it is also often used to denote a definite time, e. g. Barh. 314, 10. \\iQ^ ^\oj on each day.'\ A. 218. 9. 10. After " 12", add: "; Ephr. I. 318, D. 9. 10.". A. 218. 22. 5. After " together ", add :", where usually the personal object of the accusative follows the dative.''\ A. 218. 23. 9. After "32", add: "; yet sometimes the posi- tion of the accusative is reversed, e. g. Ephr. I. 84, E. 2. 7 , y 7 f^ -ts w>.\Sd^ wiASof Aaoirfj ^Aa/ i 7i(2?;e ^i>en my servant to my spouse; but if \X\e accusative is the object, it usually stands after the dative, e. ^.Acts III. 3. .O^Ajj ]Ao>] Cl^ ^/^ai ^Aey ^^^^ ^^ ^^^'^ alms. ". A. 218. 24. 1. After "Eem.", add: "Also the dative more frequently stands for the genitive in nouns indicating rcore P *. 7 7 nearly fixed time, Assem. I. 2. ]ZqqLSq^ ]AiaO m ^^r ?/car of the reign; Barh. 13, 10. , where the genitive with j merely precedes ; Barh. 13,9. So in respect to the names of the months, 2 is placed before the day of the month.". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 435 A. 218. 26. 10. Before "usually", add: '': e. g. Ephr. J. 318. E. 4.". A. 219. 7. 2. After " ; a ) ", add : " , in respect to fized places, a) adode at a place (where ?), e. g. Acts V. 2^. C1m.Q| U |;^Q0| A.*^ .QJf they found them not in the prison; V. 25; i3).". ^ A. 219. 18. 11. After "deep", add: ''Acta Mart. II. 360 13. 14;". A. 219. 25. 9. After "20", add: " In fixed measures *r5 is frequently used, e. g. Ephr. I. 122, C. 4. D. 8. Also fixed geographical degrees are expressed by the accusative, e. g. 7 P P7 Ephr. I. 123. B. 3. ^.iJioZo 1|Sd UcuSo 180.". A. 220. 2. 2. After "6", add: "^c^sl. 16; E2^hr. I. 19. 0. 6; d) infinitive forms, e. g. Barh. 443, 12; Ephr. I. 194, D. 1; D. 4, 39, D. 7.9. 0. 8.". A. 221. 8. 6. After " 21 ", add : " Ephr. III. 591, D. 2; ". A. 221. 18. 4. After "Moses", ^M: ''Ephr. III. 590. E- 5. 6; I. 131. D. 4 f.; II. 223, C. 7. 8; I. 554, D. 7. 8.". A. 221. 16. 1. After "Lord", add: "Less often does it occur with the marking of the cases.". A. 221. 19. 8. .After "other", add: " ; Barh. 57, 11; 38, 6; 541, 11.". A. 222. 9. 5. After " v. E. ", add : " Ephr. IL 227, D. 8. 7 P P 7 . . 1 1 f^; Ujl>j V*-^rO ^^ an army which was greater than the first', E. 1; L 319, C. 5. 6. E. 5 f. ; IL 239, D. 1. 2; L 40. A. 2. Less frequently the object compared occurs with _Ld before the subject ; ". A. 222. 10. II. After "man", add: " ; Barh. 359, 2. 3.". A. 222. 11. 7. After "very", add: " *^^CD much.'\ A. 222. 15. 5. After "12", add: "; i?arA. 373, 9 ; 397,7; so without _k), e. g. Barh. 536, 7; 129, 12; particularly in ^ I 7 I 7 adverbial comparison, e. g. Matt. VI. 30. '^L^ t .i fin ttoAaoj iiaXXov.''\ ^ A. 222.' 18. 5. After "younger", add: "also Barh. 325, 12. 13; Ephr. I. 80. B. 5; 63. B. 2;". 436 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 222. 23. 13. After "forgiven", add: "; sometimes ^ is used with j following, not entirely as a mark of the geni- tive^ e. g. Assem. 11. 122, 6. 1q..j ^k) OIJOOJ 50j Jns be- havior is held up as ( compared w^ith ) that of the many even with the insertion of a pronoun following, e. g. Barh* 84, 3. .-aOlQrilj a01 _Ld \^Lk more, than that of his father 'j but also in the signification, than that, e. g. Assem. 7 fy t\ I. 239, 3. 4. ^CQJj ^Ld more, than that he could receive ; still this > is sometimes also pleonastic, viz. before the prepositions *Q and ^ , e. g. Barh. 489, 3. 4. v. E ; Matt. X. 37. wi.lj ^ JaZu more than me \ John III. 19. JaA^ paiQl^> ^Sd more than the light ; also before particles, h 7 7 * 17 e. g. Rom. XIII. 11. ^iSo^cn ^Dj ^^ 'f^b^* more than when we believed,''\ A. 222. 28. 6. After "3", add: "Sometimes o} ^instead of ^Sd , stands before the object compared, with the adjective X 7 7 X p 7 or verb preceding, e. g. Barh. 582, 13. (jLki Of %a.^ >n<^ I 7 p 7 JaAa "IZqLd cfm^/i w to me dearer than life', Matt. XIX. 24; II. Pet. II. 21.". A. 223. 4. 7. After "Apostles", add : ".455m. I. 261, 2. 3, noun ]j^.> (^AV> the most excellent 7nan ( even with the following in the singular); ". A. 223. 6. 8. After "Judah", add: "^55ew?. I. 306, 17. 18; even merely with *Q before the suffix, e. g. Barh. 506, 4. tOCTLD (OOI *1DJJ loho luas the oldest among them; ^\ A. 223. 13. 13. After "evils", add: ";orby ^'i , e. g. 7 -X P 7 -X Barh. 513, 1. ^Ad) "Joj the greatest of us; or with ^^..arD, e. g. Assem. I. 55, 1. Am^^O ^OS ^Ae holiest of all-, ". A. 223. 19. 2. After "king", add: " Ephr. III. 586, 0. 3; 569, F. 1 ; 570, A. 8; 11. 339, B. 6; 316, A. 8; by .adding a ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 437 Hynonymous adjective, e. g. Bark. 6, 4. ]<^'">ri ISo^j^) ].i^iD the wisest king. . Here also belong the duplication of words by synomyms of the same root, e. g. Assem.. III. P. 7 7 7 9 1. I. 333, 4. 5. IAojqSdo 1A:Li*^ the greatest happiness-^ or words of a difierent root, especially of adverbial formations, I P I f 7 7 e g. Barh. 429, 5. ZuUAoo ^^.^t^ very quick \ 481, 9; A. 223. 21. 3. After ''3", add: " ; by ^'' or ^j fol- 17 e*7 7 lowing, e. g. Barh. 454, 3 ; by w-^ JKey. XXI. 1 1. ]/ ;r>>V> ->~^ ]Sm ihe most costly stone ; by Ito and the 7w?w?i fol- lowing, e. g. ^Coi^QD IL^ the highest praise (literally, full of praise ) . ". A. 223. 26. 10. After "mountains", add: ";by (Ij = iz/ no . means, with an adjective following, e. g. i^/zr^. 606. JQII P> ^y wo means small, i. e. really 2;e;y great. Also belong here a figurative manner of expression, e. g. ^Xi^iO A^ilo PP..I7P7 or fAl^rSO) |A.2i^Sd tJie queen, i. e. the most important fer son of the city, e. g. Assem. I. 531, 4. Sometimes we find a cir- I 7 * I ? cnmlocution, e. g. a-i^CO ^^ JaAj ?7zore ^/iw mvch, i. e. 1*7^17 17 * very much, or ^^Lo *^^C0 --iv^ ^^ much and {farther ) move than muchy. A. 224. 10. 9. After '' Burh:\ add: "20.4;". A. 224. 16. 6. After "cities", add: "; sometimes, in the larger numbers, the thousands precede the object numbered, -" P 7 7 7 in the emph. St., e. g. Assem. III. P. 1. 421. [m-^ XxJZl^. ^A*( 60.000 Aorsmew; Barh. 189, 14. 15. (AmSU |*f^^ ^^ 20.000 sow/5; 405, 1; 341, 11; 134, \\.'\ 29 43S ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 224. 26. 5. After "11", add: ''\Ephr. II. 233. C. 7. i-n '^7 P I.. 7 ^l*Zo ^ZtiDO *SLiv ^aV^Oi 1290(?a2/5; D. 8. 9. With a sw^a; attached, they become more closely connected with (drawback towards) the preceding noun^ e. g. ^c^s I. 24; .OOUjZ ^^ai o/' botk these \ Ephr. III. 570, B. 3. 4 ; 571, A. 5. 6 ; 572, E. 5. 6 ( cf. ^ 46. 2. 6. Kem. ) ". A. 225. 2. 11. After "11", add: "Rem. The ordinal num bers, fir St ^ second^ etc., following each other, are expressed either by a numeral a^ec^we connected with O, or without the same, e. g. Barh. 240, 12-14. 16. 17 ; or so that the series r begins with V-^r^ and the ordinals are exchanged for the cardinals with > preceding, e. g. Barh. 5, 3-5 ; or so that for 7 P OX 1 fi^rst, pA* m., Ir>*/.; and for second^ Wt*A ^2-, |A;-js*| /., are P X 7 used, e. g. 481, 15; or finally, so that Pr**| after ^m is used in all the following ordinals, e. g. Barh. 444, 14-16.". A. 225. 19. 5. After "third", add: ''Ephr. I. 236, D. 1. 2. J27, A. 2; E. I. F. 3;". 225. 21. 2. After "86, 11", add: "; Ephr 11. 221. Rem. 7. V. E.". Ai 225. 22. 1. After " Rem.", add : " In designating years 7 7 OP days and hours^ the nouns \L\A |LdQa , |Al stand before, the cardinals in the emphatic st. with j following ; or with- out J in the constr. St., with *0 preceding, e. g. |aSQ>j ^QjJO; or in the accusalive without *a, e. g. Birh. 515, 7 -X 11. |fiSD>A ^Qj in the fifth day. Nor do the ordinals always take the formative letter > after the emphat. St., e. g., n -n 7 7 7 Bark. 35, 13. |YCQ,lftSnj jAlATD z?2^/ie \bthyear\ but always 7 before numbers expressed by letters, e. g. 454, 1. IjZ ]AlaO in the Q07 fh year; 138, 11. 12. CTUJd) AjaO mif/ielll5/A ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 439 year\ sometimes without any letter to mark the year, e. g. Bark. 311, 4. V. E. ^OOl OlSiDZ| -Aoi tldi occurred in the year \Ub:\ A. 226. 3. 7. -After " 30 ", add : '' Ephr. II. 223. C. 2; ". A. 226. 6. 12. After ''week", add: " Here wo find J>OcLa with the numeral added and |*^^*^ following, e. g. Barh- 7 f ^ 566, 7. 8. 12. ]nm!D p>* VOa>.Q on the first dai/ of the week; 7 9 Q *- 583, 8 ; without l^lmiD , e. g. 518, 3. "|AiZ ^a>^ on the *<. third day [of the week) \ with ^Ql^ omitted.". A. 226.^ 8. 8. After "12, v. E.", add : " ; Ephr. I. 236. D. 2. The days of the week are more nearly fixed by the days of the month, thus the day of the week is more nearly marked X by ^Qli.O , and Q is omitted before the number of the X *s 9 day_of the month, e. g. Barh. 50, 9. ^a^-O ^.^wl #01.00 9 or 9 7 |A ]jQa.lD PkO^I on the fourth day of the week ( Wednes- day) the Qth of Sanitary \ 566, 10. 11; or the day of the month stands before the day of the week without ^GLi and is thus more precisely marked, e. g. Asse^n. I. 426, 14. 15. OlO 9 9 7 ox r Ti 9 7 7 -X lAlAo ^rQjiJ ^ja'HLQ ]oaO H^ ^Qa on the 3d of April on the first day of the iueek\ or |*^^*^ is wanting, e. g 0" 9 9 9 7 %. Barh. 562, 5. v. E. \jr^ ^::^\^ "U^^^ ]flV)i ^O*^ on the fifth day of the iveek on the eighth day of August ; some- times also ^Gu falls away both in the day of the month 9 7 7 p and of the week, e. g. Barh. 304, 10. 11. ilOj| 01.^^5 I i>^ 9 9 f^ 9 7 \^ ^ji p) iQlOO |;IS11 I'D AS on the morning of the fourth 7 day of the week on the \Qth of December ; even without l*"^**^ ^ 10 9 9 7 9 X. ill Assem. II. 266, 20. IQ^isAo ^aA^Z |Ab^Zj UHq ou 440 ' ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. the night of the third day of the week on the 30^/i of July, Also the day of the week and that of the month are transposed, e. g. Barh. 548, 15. 16; 547, 3 ( cf. Agrell App. II. p. 7 fi: ) .''. A. 226. 1 1. 7. After <^e. g.", add: " Ephr. L 9. B. 2; ". A. 226. 17. 12. After " 8 '\ add: .>/ir. III. 575, C. 6 ; ". A. 226. 23. 11. After "38", add: '' Ephr. I 85, D. 1;". A. 226. 27. 6. After "24", add: '' Ephr. I. 240, A. 3; Assein. I. 111.4;". A. 227. 3. 7. After " time ", add : " ; or in Zu| , e. g. A*]AAZ for the third tirn.e.^\ A- 227. 4. 1. Before "3. Fractions", add: ''Rem. The Iff ? I. f fi ns IP I following, ZutOpO, AaU^jZ, Lk\Lj^L first, second, etc., are a formative series of numeral adverbs ; also feminines of or * 7 or cardinals with > preceding, e. g. Ir**?, ^^'^?) A^Zj etc.; or 1 t> t> I ' ? r y - also lAin^l, ]A*r>*1, IA^AjlIZ, or Aa.SdP, ^, ^O, or ip7 i\ r -^ finally AalLD^O, ^)Ao, ^-tr-^OI united by the copula^. A- 227. 6. 9. After " VII. 2 ", add : " Barh. 256; 417, 8 ; ". A. 227. 8. 8. After "]r^", add: ''\Ephr. I. 236 , F. I; 245, D. 7. IaSDa* ^ ^ .1- . By *.Aa and IZq-^Ls) P -x r (half), is I- expressed, e. g. Ephr. II. 222, D. 5. ^lon* A. 227. 9. I. Before "79", add: ''Rem. Among the un- determined numeral relations, are o] or, e. g. Matt. XVIII r ti 7 20. (A^Z o| ^>Z tivo or three; without o), e. g. Barh. h r y y 603,15. 16. ..ak^A* Moil /o?/r or/ye; 217, 15.". A. 227. 26. 2 and 6. After " The ", add : " adjective or ", also after "first", add: " ixs epithetic, q. ^. Matt. XIII. 17. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 441 {kiCiJ H^Mr^O many prophets \ Bark. IGO, 5. v. E. U-^ |A'1.^QD many words \ ". A. 228. 8. 1. After " teacher ", add: "sometimes j is found as epithetic before the adjective^ e. g. Luke XI. 25 ; or, instead of ?, p is used, e. g. ikZar/fc. XII. 3; Luke XX. 10, 11, and stands 'm the absolute state in connection with a preceding Tioun in the enipkatic state. This is especially true in respect; \ I X f to the participk, e. g. Acts Vll. 56. ^>mA2) ,.0 [iA^Qs the 17 7 7 opened heaven ; i^arA. 83. 1 0. ;^;0) IkJQa i/^e co/t/ day ; j1c/ XXVII. 41; Barh. 286. ISoij lAoOjl to a high place ; but when with a j!?ar^. thus marked, a second (part. ) is united, 5 falls away in connection with the latter, e. g. Luke II. 12; p T'lssewi. II. 303, 23. fr-^^O ]p? Xj^bSo a short and lim- ited timey. A. ,228. 19. 4. xifter "adjective", add: "; in the absolute stated, A. 229. 18. 6. After "evil", add: ''It should still be especially remarked, that when the masculine adjective occurs with or without (OOl in the absolute state and without j pre- ceding, it is impersonal, e. g. I Cor. XI. 13. IZAjy ]|u is it ^ ^ p becoming for a woman \ Acts XIX. 36. tO.'i\ Uo ye must, X . p > p with 001 following, e. g. ilia^^. XVIII. 8. 9. yj^ 001 *i4 ^^ w ^ei^er for thee; without 001 , e. g. Matt. XV. 26. 7 -n I 7 p *^CQSd\ ^^a ]J it is not proper to take ; less frequently is the feminine used and generally in connection with the jtwo- P 7 1 9 . . noun, e. g. 1 Cor. VII. 26. |;..2is l?01? that this is good\ Acts XII. 9. ^01 Zooi \\^\l that this is true; Luke 442 ADDITIONS AND CCRRECTIONS. XVIII. 25. a01 ]1a.^? iJi^(^^ it may be easier -^ also withoul i\\Q pronoun, e. g. Tim.YL 7. l^Jr-^O a?td it is certain \ JBarh- 531, 8. MvSo it is possible] and even the negative phrase (> r^ ]j appears, in consequence of which, we also find ZoGI. But the /em. adjective stands in the emphatic st.^ when the wei^^er as subject or object is indefinite, e.g. Ro7n. VII. 13, 13. lA^^^*^^ dya'^Ov, v. 21 ; i?a?7i. 504, 14. ]Aaa.Q ^ |Ao4 {to distinguish) the good from the bad. Also the jt?/wr. p.. p fern, is found in the absolute St., e. g. .T^'^. III. 8. ^^4? IS > i\ ^jlJ| ^^iiNoi = ravra kariv ra KaXd\ John I. 50; Kom. p.. ly p pP P VIII. 38. f rAl> l]o ^SQ^r^? ]]o = oi;re evEorura ovre fiEXXovra ( cf. Agrell. Append. )'. A. 230. 10. 6. After "invalids", add: "^c^s III. 9;" A. 230. 11. 7. After "312,7", add; ''Acta Mart. II. 394, 21;". A. 230. 23. 7. After " 23 ", add : " Also the feminine col lective names may be united with iheplur. masc. of the ve7'b^ 7 I P P ^ ^ e. g. Barh. 238, 6. 0001 ^AwJ IjQ.. ^^ the great multitude (of your horses) ascended': 5 \0y 17. 18; 533, 13.". A. 230. 27. 10. After "8", add: " ; also the plur. form stands in an inverted position with i\\Q>singular verb, e. g. ..17 PPP P PP ..I? Ephr. I. 18. A. 5. ^jlQ> IAj^V^ Zooi 13 ^.y ^^y birds raise the?nselves (fly) inflocks.''\ A. 231. 6. 1. After " 12 ", add : '' Ephr.l. 10. C. 8;". A. 231. 13. 1. After "opened", add: '' Ejihr. II. 20. D. I ; even". A. 231. 20. 12. After "porches", add: ''Ephr. I. 40. B. ADDITIONS AND COHnECTIONS. 443 Aa 231. 25. 8. After "9", add: " relating to an object in tho neuter gender, e. g. Barh. 186, 16. 17. \^} O0L*Z| a denarius was given \ even the fenn. nonn with the masc. sing., e. g. i?ar/j. 118, 11. Olbk wiOloAalj ]ZqJ-m the tent which belonged to him ; ". A. 231. 28. 3. After "walls", add : '' Ephr. II. 2. B. 6. 7; I. 122. F. 4 ; ". A. 232. 8. g. After " writing ", omit the period and add : " (no one, of course, will make the transcriber responsible )". A. 232. 14. 6. After "r*^, add: " hL ^ ;\ * A. 232. 16. 5. After " country \, add: '' Ephr. Ill, 571, A. 8 ; ". A. 232. 24. 8. After " Egypt ", add : " Ephr. II. 464. C. 3;". A. 233. 6. 2. After " 10 ", add : " ; and vice versa, e. g. Barh. 288, 7. ]Aaa.O ^\Sil\ IAajlQ a^j. it was custom- ary to return evil for evil.^\ A. 233. 10. 9. After "mankind", add: " ^c^5 II. 41;", A. 233. 17. 7. After " 16", add: " ; Ephr. I. 194, B. 1.". A. 234. 21. 3. After " eyes ", add : " ; Ephr. II. 232, D. 2.". A. 234. 24. 8. After "eggs", add: " ( cf. Ephr. I. 18, A. 5).". *A. 235. 13. 4. After " granted", add: "; perhaps however, |1S2aJ should not here be rendered, Jie would grant ox fulfil, which mode of reading is found in the parallel passage in Assem. III. P. 11. 126, 11. 12.". A. 235. 22. 6. After "A", add: "40, A. 6; 318, F. 3;". A. 236. 1. 2. After "230. D ", add: ''Acta Mart. 11. 349, T^ 1^ . 25. OlAxkO oik:] 0C71 lAAjQSQL!iD ^Q he was baptized, he and his mother and his sister ; ". A. 236. 2. 8. After 'invited", add: ''Ephr. II. 223, B. 8, C. 1 ; ". A. 236. 8. 5. After "4", add: " Ei^hr. I. 311, D. 4 ; ". 444 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. A. 236. 25. 3. After " sorrow ", add : " Eiohr. III. 593, B. 6f.;". A. 236. 28. 11. After "nature", add: "When several sub. 7 jects are in the 2d. person with Aj] preceding, the second plur. follows, e. g. Ephr. 11. 211, D. 6. 7. .oAaZu] I'p^^ij^ ^jlMIO Aj| thou and thy wife have {ye have) drunk laine. Yet one of the subjects, (the most important one ) is found in the preceding pronoun of the first person, the verb follow- ing the same rule (of. Michaelis Chrest. 28, 7. 9)". A. 237. 7. 9. After "hair", add: ''Actsl. 12;". A. 237. 11. 5. After "22", add: "; Ephr. 11. 318, E. 3; 327, A. 8; I. 119, E. 7; 126, E. 1; 131, C. 7; 40, D. 6.". A. 237. 17. 9. After " preached ", add : " An ellipsis is found in Syriac like that found in Hebrew in Jp^ , e. g. Ephr. I. P 7 9 7 7 320, C. 2. 3. looijj ]|iQl,OaO and 17 00 gold coins ; D. 8. P * I 7 -n laCQSj ^>\n^ 70 silver shekels. So the noun -iain an army P 7 ( 11 i t ) to collect together-^ Barh. 107, 5. 6.; so also * 7 ^01)1; 142, 5;". A, 237. 24. 3. After" 12," add: "; Ephr. I. 169, C. 5.". A. 237. 24. 8. After "39, 11. ", add: ''Ephr. I. 89, E. 1. 2.4;". T, 7 A. 237. 25. 14. After "19.", add: " :>al to die, literally, 7 to finish ( \l^ ), e. g. Barh. 252, 7;". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. ' 445 A. 238. 17. 5. After "sword", add: ";/?/ir. II. 100, B; I. 319, E. 8; 12, A. 7.". A. 240. 11. 6 After "out", add: '' Ephr. 222, A. 1;". A. 240. 12. 6. After "again ", add : " Ejohr. 1. 295, F. 5. 6;*\ A. 240. 14. 4. After "again ", add: '' Ephr. II. 125, B. 6;". A. 240. 15. 5. After " again ", add : '' Ephr. I 39, E. 6 ;". A. 240. 17. 10. After "earth", add: '' Ephr. I. 281, D. 6. 7. Also, Jl2) to turn one's self, is found with a similar signifi- cation, e. g. Ephr. II. 98, E. 2. .Qj] *t| ]i2) .001^ 001 he brought them again into activity ; ". A. 241. 2. 8. After evil", add : ''Ephr. III. 592, A. 3. 4;". A. 241. 7. 10. After "III. 8.", add: "; Ephr. II. 100, A. 4 (with the copula) , e. g. Ephr. I. 82, C. 5. s^a"! ]oot wftOU ;)0 ^r^J as he had named him before] II. 212, 0. 2. 3; I. 439, C. 7.8 ; II. 203, B. 5 ; 220, 0. 6 ; also the passive, e. g. 7 7 Ephr. I. 195, D. 2. y)ai;oll 2;i>o]Z)o ASDjoZJj ]A1sd ^/ie word which had before been spoken to Abraham ; II. 221,, (Rem. 2.) ; e) ^ 7 hastened therefrom; Barh. 73, 7. oa;flD|0 r:iOl;CD he cried out quickly ( exclaimed ) ; also \^\e passive, e. g. -Ejo/^r. I. 24, 7 7 7 7 -R r. 3. 5;i^0 i^(3\\Lci:i\ he fell quickly from {hastened). Fi- 7 nally ; /) -^'=^"" to suffice, for svfjiciently, is used, e. g. J^pZ'-r. X 7K-7 X7 7 II. 464, F. 5. .0C7l.i.S;DQlo\ Oi^S QOaO) ]] ?Acy r/eV^ wo^ ez;e?i sufficiently protect themselves ; *0;rD ?o approach, for 7 7 1> 7 7 ^ea% a//?2os^ e. g. i?ar/j. 551, 11. .JjAsZj L^^Q he was 446 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. almost confirmed Ephr. I, 169, C. 1.; .|o| to deal basely^ ^ -x Ty ? for base, e. g. Ephr. II. 128, F. 2. .O^^lZj .oA^io] ^e /iaz^e dealt basely, etc.". ' A. 241. 22. 2. After v. E.", add: ''Ephr. II. 232, A. 1 ;". A. 242. 2. 6. After " partly etc.". add: "; and Ollo Ijcn m.j Cl^ (?^/ ^^^y (tf- Ag'rell. Suppl. p. 162), e. g. J^arA. 165, 1. 10. [001 ^1 >> 01^ pCT /it; t7s very much beloved 7 7 -n , 587, 9 ; -. so very, e. g. ^arA. 232, 6. jAjA] OlLs ]j01 /^e distinguislied himself so very muclr^ with the jo/wr. following, 7 7 * * #k P P e. g. jBarA. 122, 13. 0^]Z| 01^ ]jai ^/z^y t^ere pressed very much; with j following = so i^er?/, ^Aa^, e. g. Barh. 7 .1*'I7 *. pp 411,3. J 0001 ^fo..!^ 01^ I J 01 they were so much, that; - ^ p p with the fern., e. g. i?arA. 492, 8. OliikO ]j01 Amj;a 'n^a they becaine so distinguished. Also the adverb is expressed by the /em. Ol^ pOl a// this ". A. 242. 7. 4. After '"degrees", add: "424,11; 571,8.9; Evhr. I. 379, C. 5 ; ". A. 242. 9. 2. After "there", add: "; Barh. 574; Assem. III. P. I. 130, 9 ; c) the Latin adverbial ending atim is expressed *p ^ ^ p by the nonn, e. g. Barh. 424, 10. JiSCLm flSQ^j handfid ; 410,5; 334, 11 , etc.". A. 242. 19. 7. After " this", add: " Ephr. II 9, C. 2; ". A. 242. 24. 2. After " wish ", add : " Ephr. I. 169, C. 6/. ; II. 5, A. 4/". A, 243. 7. 4. After "35 ", add : " ; something doubtful con- firmed by an affirmation, is expressed by ..a-D |iSdj^ , e. g. Ephr. I. 370, (Jacob of Edessa ) ^^ P rOr^ ^l* ^^^ OP ... llSO-^ did not Saul somehow know David ? Ephr, III. 593, D. 1.". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 447 A. 243. 8. 1. Instead of the Rem. ( lines 8 and 9 from top), add: "Rem. Also .] is employed in the direct questioHy e. g. Ephr. II. 5. A. 6. tS\ ^^-^ A thou knowest. So also ]y\ ( apa), e. g. Barh. 131, 12. J ]j1 , e.g. Ephr, I. 436, ( note from Jacob of Edessa, 1. 2 ) ; |iSd for ]Sq^ , e. g. Barh.U^, 10. etc.". X A. 243. 22. 15. After "yes ", add : " Yet we also find ^1 in connection with the affirmative with the repetition mostly of the thing, e. g. Acts V. 8 ; or without a repetition ( lit. en- tirely simple), e. g. Matt. XXI. 16;". A. 243. 26. 13 After "father", add: "or simply ]]> , e.g. Barh. 370, 13.". A. 244. 3. 1. After "veri", add: " A double negation, as in Greek, makes the negation more emphatic, e. g. Barh. 7 7 9 491,9; icn] ]] auj ]] he lias (positively) injured no one \ 93, 9 ; 606, 2. The same is true in respect to oL V or ]] 7 9 7 9 7 qL , ]]> , ]V^S> and ]iQ^?) , after verbs signifying to fear, 9 9 correspond with the Latin ne, e. g. Barh. III. JJj (OOl ^{u*j he feared that ; ^jo/ar. I. 80, D. 6 ; also y5>> = w^ , that not ; ^ssew. I. 455, 1.". A. 244. 9. 6. After "imperishable", add: "; Ephr.l. 310, C. 1. 2; II. 212, D. 8; I. 128, D. 1.". 9 9 A. 244. 14. 3. After " IX. 3.", add : "; in 1k)l "^ on no 9 possible account , %i\ , preceding the latter ]] , strengthens the negation, e. g. ^iVjr. III. 569, B. 3. 4.". A. 244. 21. 12. After "19," add: " A^ ^ out from be- ^.. I i\ -^ 9 7 tween something', Acts III. 5. IAaId Zu^ ^ loilL 448 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. XIjuD] Cl^j whom God has raised from the dead ; 2a^ ^ from 0716 here; also ^\ ^ , e. g. Ephr. I. 392, B. 4. 5. "^ol* ZqI -Id Ul /^^ came herefrom Saul: I. 84, A. 8. etc.;". ^^ A. 244. 26. 12. After " walls", add : ''Ephr. I. 81, E. 5. 6;". A. 244. 28. 1. After "excellence," add: "also by their ( \)Jl1o _Sd ) collocation, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. D. 8. NSaAO |S>0>| ^sD out over the firmament \^\ A. 245. 2. 2. After "him", add: ''Ephr. II. 318, C. 5.". A. 245. 8. 3. After " 13 ", add : " Ephr. I. 292, C. 3/. ; III. 595, C. 3. 4 ; also with the copula, e. g. Darh. 270. yJ^O jA Aa.2 between me and thee ; Aj^ is seldom repeated with the copula standing between, or with ^ preceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 13, B. 6. 7.". A. 245. 10. 3. After "David ", add : " or with the copula 7 7 7 *> 7 united, e. g. Ephr. II. 204, F. 6. lio^O ;>all ^ :>a\s\ from eternity to eternity and until \ I. 237,0. 5/.: 361, A. 6. 7;". A. 245. 17. 4. After "66. 6", add: "; Ephr. I. 25, D. 4/." A. 245. 21. 2. After " 17", add: "Ephr. I. 122, F. 1; 318, F. 3. 4.". A. 245. 23. 12. After " 193, 19; ", add : "Ephr. I. 310, D. 8; also it (ili) serves to designate realization (*0 essentice), 7 ^ 7 7 pix e. g. Ephr. II. 324, E. 6. ^0^00^ Ojum .^OlOlV;^ ]ju1Lo y.QJLM Enoch and Elijah lived before their time ( as types) j or *0 stands before an asseveration, e. g. Barh. 183, 10. 7 |Ol \sD by God ! \ but sometimes it is wanting before an as- severation ; ". A. 245. 25. 6. After " to ", add : " until to, about, e. g. 7 7 Ephr. I, 122, D. 8. l]iDA\A\ ^0^^ about 300 {miles)-, or with liiool = near to, added, e. g. Ephr. I. 122, C. 8. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 440 .! P 7 7 9 7 7 *. ILld UalL laSnS \^^ llDjanl nearly 6000 miles. 9 9 Also here may be reckoned (as opposite relations) t^ >fAc -ik what to me and thee ( what have I to do with thee ) Mark VII. 5 j John II. 4 ; Luke IV. 22; ilfai^. XXVII. 19."! A. 245. 28. 1. After *' 14", add: "and ^Xii sometimes stands 0"7 7 for 0, e. g. jE:7?/ir. I. 13, A. 1. JjlSd ^11 i/i iAe water, or it = against, e. g. ^^ir. I. 389, B. 5;". A. 246. 1. 3. After "29", add: "^c^sll. 34. >i1iV).' ^ to my right ( hand ) ; it is synonymous with iD ( =- ])er ) ^y viV^wf! q/; e. g. ^;?^r. I. 126, B. 4. aiZoSOxiaM _Ldo OIJOIQJJ poll ^So by virtue of the splendor of his light and warmth ; ". A. 246. 4. 9. After "feet", add: "; it is also used in the 9 formation of the adjective, e. g. Acta Mart, II. 394, 17; |l > 11 ]J>0 ]^)o ]]j 'painless and unharmed. It can take no svjf., and instead, the separate jorowoww follows, e. g. John XV. A. 246. 18. 5. After " 4 ", add : " ; or they are not united by r and, e. g. ^j^/ir. III. 569, B. 6 ; and even after p and other antecedent joar^zc/es; e. g. Matt. I. 20, 24; VI. 5, 7 ; XXIV. 22 ; Mark XIV. 72. etc. " A. 246. 21. 5. After " 19," add: ''Acta. Mart. II. 273,23. 7 P -x '^ P 7 24. -<^^^ ]r^r>B<^ Ol^ ^ClO ^ll lie turned, went, and ar- rived at the market ; ". A. 246. 22. 2. After "XV. 6.", add: "in the imperative^ T P * 7 e. g. Acta Mart. II. 293, 3. v. E. ^^*\^ U f ^01 VOOD aWse, im/yt and go upon thy feet. ". A. 246. 28. 6. After "5, 6,", add: '' Ephr. I. 119, A. 7. 8. 450 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. O before the pret. and fut.^ is often translated by that^ in order that, e. g. Barh. 321, 3 ; 395, 7; 384, 6. 7.". A. 247. 2. 15. After "v. E. ", add: " Ephr. I. 184, E. 4-6. V. E ( also ^lo S)] ); ". A. 247. 3. 10. After " 4, 5.", add : " Ephr. III. 569, F. 6. 7;". A. 247. 4. 6. After " 13, ", add : " ( also .]o .j ; .*) o? ^1 ; o] \j^a\ ^] ; o] ooul ), ". A. 247. 5. 13. After "24, ", add: " Ephr, I. 271, A. 1. 2"; 7 P 7 A. 247. 6. 7. After "E.", add: "]loani j fco ^1 , e. g. P 7 7 -4c^s I. 1 1 ; J too] U^Ol, Ephr, II. 210, C. 68; 7 9 7 7 7 ^(Jl^y^), Ephr. I. 7, C. 8/ ; ^lo - j U^] , 1.8, 7 p E. 4 f. Also with the falling away of ]l001 , e. g. Ephr, II. 3. E. 3 4; 451, B. 4/.;". T> A. 247. 7. 6. After " 12. 13,", add: " ; and Bl *)] , e. g. Ephr. 1, 21, C. 6/. ; ^] ]] | >OuSn U ^oi o;?/?/ but P ^ 7 " also-, Ephr. 11, 153, E. 1.2; *a1j jQaAtd q1 , I. 24 9 F. 4/ ; ]] *2)] ]] wei^/ier nor, e. g. ^/^/^r. I. 1 17, A 3 /. ; 127, C. 6 ; t|o .1 t6'7je^^er or, e. g. II Cor, XII. 2 also o] ] , e.g. Barh. 597 ; or o] 1>] ."Ij , e.g. i?a/-^. 441 0777 77 7 7 V of I J I ivhether or not ; ^^V^O ^^1^ soon soot 7 "U^O "tiL hither thither , e. g. Barh. 363, 5. v. E, 7 7 7 7 7 1* also ^Ollo tjl!i or ^OlLo ^Gli^ ; finally, ]^V>0 * 7 f*^^ //-o/?* here fro})i there, e. g. Barh. 574 ; ^Gl^ > * ^O lajon ^, e. g. i^ey. XXII. 2. etc. ". A. 247. 21. 8. After " 13 ", add : " Ephr. I. 294, E. 8;". ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 451 A. 247. 29. 8. After " 844", add : " and o>i;/u with el and elfiTj following.". A. 248. 12, 13. After " 13, ", add : " j ^01 ^ because, e. g. i:phr. II. 217, B. 4; j ^Ol ^i^iD because of, e.g. B. 1; 9 7 y *j01 ^OL at the same tinie tluxt^ that, e. g. Ephr, I. 9, F. 6 ; 7 ? r-S thereby, that, (frequently in Ephr.), Ephr, 1.85, D.'3;'\ A. 248. 19. 2. After " 20, % add: " y) j stands after the mark of case ( = "itJ^ with the j9re/?os27ion preceding ), e. g. t> 9 7 7 Assem, I. 83, 14. v. E. VJaUr^ according to the {chronology) of the Greeks ; III. P. I. 527^ 6., etc. ; ". A. 248. 22. 2. After 221, 2.", add : " Ephr. I. 84, F. 6. 7; 446, D. 8. 9 ; also after |ao to be worthy, e. g. III. 579, P. 2;". A. 248. 22. 13. After "7. 8, ", add: ''Ephr. 1. 84, C. 5. 6 ; 11.227. A. 1\ I. 123, C. 3/.;". A, 248. 26. 5. After " nevertheless ", add : " E-phr. I. 75, F. 5. ". A. 249. 8. 13. After " me", add: ''Ephr. II. 20, F. 7.". A. 249. 17. 12. After **3, 4.", add: "Ephr. II. 481, D. 3. 4. ". A. 249. 19. 4. After "436.", add: "The following are f?2^^- P 7 jections formed from verbs ; \L pi. oZ well now ! Barh, 88, 4. ^ao pi. qSdoo up I 599, 1 ; and ]j represents the Heb. jj^5 (== qiicBso), I Kings XXII. 12.". A. 249. 31. 4. After "30", add: "Ephr. II. 235, A. 8.". A. 250. 4. 7. After "27", add: " ^c^s II. 7.". A. 250. 18. 5. After "4-11.", add: "Ephr. 2. 233, D. 7; III. 563, E. 4;". A. 250. 21. 33.- After "17, 19.", add : "Also t\\Qsing. QQ^ P 7 7 ^ > is found in Ephr. III. 584, D. 4. liZ] OOlj OlTiQ^ the hap- py place. ". 452 ADDITIONS AND COKIIECTIONS. A. 250. 24. 1. Instead of "Appendix ", add : " 87.". A. 251. 5. 1. After "ye.", add: "In a longer period the finite verb is found at the end of such period, e. g. Ephr. II. y 9 7 210, D. 5 E. ^. ,ril 1v^m\ afea&t he arranged ; II- 123, A. 1 4; L 446, E. 3. 4; or it is separated from it8 auxiliary verb by several words, e. g. Ephr. II. 21 1, C. 8 7 -i> 7 ^ D. 2. t;nV)N >'}l>2 Xl^ 1 1 if thou art now on the stand to read\ or the auxiliary follows the^m*^^ verb, e. g. Zi/V^/-. 11. 212, C. 5. 6. ]oai 1^. 13 l^AjjO Ae would not 2^cr- mit himself to be persuaded ; even so the infinitive with ^ before the verb upon which it is dependent, e. g. Ephr. 1. 83, p P7 1>I 7P"> ft7*7 D. 3. 4. 2oci V^ACD oi^j ^oinSs ]oaiV^\ ^lyl ^i^fii? U] iw^, because, to be the husband of two wives loas hateful to him-, 84, A. 7. 9; I. 2, A. 7.". A. 251. 9. 2. After " men", add: "they stand between the relation of genitive and another noun ;". Ai 251. 9. 11. After " noun^\ add: "of which it should be remarked that the subject sometimes stands after the verb v IS and object, e. g. Acts V. 26. "ISOI .Oj] ^S\^ V^} 'HKy 7X0 NX ^ 00CJ1 -.jL^bM) then they feared lest the people should stone them ; the object stands before the verb, e. g. Acts V. 28. 7 7 .Q2k^2 U ^j]]) that ye should not teach \ Ephr, III. 565, A. 5. 6 ; the object stands between the auxiliary ^xi^ finite verb."". A. 251. 11. 11. After "heaven", add: ''Ads III. 21; V. ts 9 7 9 41 ; Ephr. II. 232. D. 1. 2. ^onmi? llQl looi ^^Al ^Olj ^Aa^ ^/ze people should endure this ; c?) The aoJ/'ec^zVe stands before its noun separated by another 7ioun placed betweeUi whose signification is connected wiLli ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 453 9 7 * r the first noun, e. g. Ephr, II. 227, E. 7. 8. 00>rlQnl^) 1\ I .. 7 7 7 '7 1 1 4 .1 CIO ,>Q1o\i n jt^-^0 and many of Alexander's generals \ or it is separated from its noun by the auxiliary verb, e. g. /?/ir. I. 309, R 5. 6. '\l\^ )o01 Uru o] ]oai VSOau 7 o|> ^^a^ /^e was either Joshua or another prophet,''\ A. 251. 12. 6. After " particles", add : " concerning which it should be remarked that the adverb more frequently precedes the verb. ". A. 251. 13. 10. After "city", add: " or; e) it is found at the end of the sentence, e. g. Ephr. I. 126 ; /) in poetry also, the verb stands between the noun in the genitive and another 7 noun connected, e. g. Ephr. III. 564, B. 3. 4. yji]o 9 7 7 * 9 9 *^ f 7 |Qa>;a) iHl > |Zni\i> OOl as he who held under (cher- ished) the loveliness of Paradise^ C. 8. 9; 576, F. 8. 9. The poetical arrangement of words also belongs here, e. g. Ephr^ 17 4k 7*. 9 99 7 III. 572, F. 2.3. *Ajao"| JDQ4 ^01072)Qa^ Ik)] ]a^? a/so o the other hand the external beauty of Paradise cannot be described. ". ^ 88. General View of Syriac Metre. 1. Since Syriac literature is rich in ecclesiastical poetry, com- posed in a fixed measure and rhythm, I did not dare to omit here a general survey of the external form of the same, and finally, therefore, decided that a brief and clear view of Syriac metrical forms and laws should be presented. The origin of this poetry is found in the most ancient Syrian church, at the time when history mentions the Gnostic Bardesanes, living in the second half of the second century of the Christian Era {cf. Aug. Hahn : Bardesanes gnosticus Syrorum primus hymn- ologus. LipsicB^ 1819), who endeavored to put his Gnostic writ- ings into poetry, by which, according to the testimony of Ephrem Syrus (born 307, died 378), he drew the minds of 30 454 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. youth to himself and won them to his views. He was accus- tomed to have David before him as a model poet, and even to t> f 7 t p I write out each one of the 150 Psalms ( iO),lo (Z'^aIoI). Thus he stood forth as the first hymnologist of the Syrian church. His poetic talent was transmitted to his son Harmonius, who, in respect to his writings, walked in the footsteps of his father. His poems, with the exception of a small fragment of the first, are lost, and only the ecclesiastical form remains. Then Ephrem, who decidedly, in every possible manner, opposed the the long continued Gnostic errors of his time, established a sim- ilar musical school (to those of Bardesanes and his son) for young persons of both sexes, and performed so elegantly, while he retained both the external forms of poetry, that a thankful age called him the " cithcra of the Holy Ghost." After his time, history records the names of many distinguished Syrian poets, though Ephrem still remains the chief authority for the study of Syriac metre, as almost half of his extensive writ- ings belong to the department of poetry. 2. The terms applied to the dififerent departments of Syriac poetry, as far as they are known to us, comprehend various kinds in respect to form and contents. The more general term ( I'^PiD ) makes it a condition that there should be equality in verses according to the number of syllables and rhythm, but not a division into strophes, "which also seems to be indicated by the more extensive term I A*jbSQlJD> f'^pD, i. e. a discourse on rhythmical oneasure ( lit. discourses on measures ). On the contrary, the peculiarity of that kind, which is divided into strophes, is indicated by |*)^, in respect to which, refer- ence is made by Ephrem, to the substance, at least, of the rad- ical idea, and, what he calls poetry, forms, in his estimation, the basis of philosophical inquiry and investigation, or the basis of the fundamental laws of refutation and dogmatical unity. Melo- dy and its laws are generally indisated by UD, which includes metrical form, extending so far back as to comprehend our ( German ) ecclesiastical intonations and antiphonies answering to each other only at short intervals. That which is included under IZuJOtl is, at the same time, comprehended under |J^. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 455 The former term included such a change of song that each Btrophe, or its closing part, was so marked as to indicate that it might be repeated in the chorus, by which, indi- vidual strophes might bo added as a suitable doxoj. ogy. The psalmodic form and its fundamental idea were probably indicated by lZy,*V)l , 1jnV>|Vr> and ^r>-*t cor- responding with the Hebrew terms 'ii'^^r/^ and -ji^ , and in each case borrowed from them. Also from the import and sig- P 9 , -A nification of ]A n Z, it was, uo doubt, mostly used in praise of martyrs and saints, But what kind of song was understood by |A \nro (meaning literally, degrees, scales), is doubtful, though one would suppose, from the signification of the term indicating it, that this particular species of hymns, with their accompanying tunes, was arranged in an advancing, ascending rhythm. Probably this term was merely transferred from the Hebrew tlib3>?2M as the ground form. '= r " 3. Rhythmical measure, formed in respect to the quantity of syllables, is not known in Syriac poetry. Only according to the number of syllables is metrical succession measured and limited, and thereby the place of the accent is made known, there- fore, strophes themselves also move on in even, rhythmical order, and are only occasionally interrupted by the change of longer verses {dlicG)/\,a). Thereby a mixed mode was established, which was also used by Ephrem. Lines of verses generally contain j^Xz/'e and seven syllables. Bardesanes wrote especially in the former, and his son, Harmonius,in the latter. In respect to the former, Ephrem bears witness in the subscription of his n^^M? 7 k -KPT poem againstHiiretiker (Uo^ ^5y.Ci)Ql WjA^) T. III. p. 128, 19 y y ? p 9 y T yi in the words ^jJIJjLd ymsAna okAa ,^r^} ^GlO;.u*> * ..p y ]1 r> ^^ i. e closed are the 1 7 hymns in the measure of Barde- mnes. He (Ephrem) therefore called the measure of five sylla- bles that of Bardesanes, although the Syrians, rightly believ- ing, rejected the appellation and called it the Balaic measure. 456 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 9 9 after Balaus (\n), a pupil of Ephrem. But as Ephrem himself preferred to use that kind of verse whose lines had seven syllables, it might properly be called Ephremic. He also some- times wrote in a measure of four syllables. Harmonius also is said to have composed poetry of the same kind, also Jacob von Sarug, towards the end of the fifth century, and in the Actis Martyrum^ Tom. II. p. 230 344, we find a more exten- sive commendatory poem of the same kind from Symeon Styli- ta. We have only a fragment of poetry, whose measure is six syllables, from Bardesanes, preserved by Ephrem. The length of strophes which are employed with considerable uniformity, seems to have been subjected to no fixed laws, but was left to the poet, and perhaps made dependent upon the contents and scope of the thought. Hence we find measures called strophes, which contain from four to thirteen lines. Cf. Hahn et Sieffert: Chrestomathia Syriaca sive S, Ephrcemi carmina selecta^ Lip- sice, 1821. 8. The original basis of Syriac metre is found in certain gram- matical rules relating to euphony, indicated by the marks Mar- hetono and Mehagyono ( 7) ; crasis by Linea Occultans ( 8 ); and the adding or dropping of preceding vowels ( 15) . These euphonic fundamental laws are only valuable, to any great ex- tent, in metrical song. Before all other considerations we should take notice that the accumulation of vowelless conso- nants does not disturb the euphony, and to aid in preventing such a disturbance, vowelless initial letters of a word are added in r>ronunciation to the last syllable of the preceding word when such word ends with a vowel, by which the ornament of the word is not destroyed, but the euphony is improved. This arrangement is observed not only in one and the same verse, but also when the same relation exists in two verses ( the final syllable of the first and the initial syllable of the one succeed- ing, immediately following each other). The following lines are thus pronounced : ^i^ ^^S2AZ^ \C^ Musche' m thalmedh huV I . h V) wOlOV'^mN sephrau'sh maydne. 'UfCiL'i V=i> Rdbho' dh ebhroye . OlialoA >>. l , Vn \Z thdlmdan' I yulphdneh. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 457 Bnt when this diflSculty of pronunciation by concatenation cannot be otherwise overcome, either all of the unnecessary vowels fall away by dropping the supernumerary syllables, or, on account of a want of completeness in respect to the neces- sary number of syllables, the metre is perfected by the addition of vowels for the formation of new syllables, as in case of y A Mehagyono ( ]A!^> for *|AL-mj). Therefore, in metrical song, both of the peculiarities called, in grammatical language, SyncKresis and Diceresis are valuable. 1. The first occurs, when, by the aid of an auxiliary vowel, the initial letters of a word form a new syllable, particularly ; a) \ (with or ) in the pronouns #03^ ^ ^^| , \i\ , which, in con- nection with the part.j are generally pronounced in one syllable, e.g. tQJ| ^OUIdZ pronounced ih^ m'ih'i-nun-^ verbs ]] , e. g- ;^| (J J pronounced d^lo-mar-^ so Ulso in the pan. P. of U verbs, e. g. IJjlLdIj pronounced d" miro. This is also the case with the prosthetic \ taking , e.g. - \^/] V^^i pronounced 7f bhath-mol, and, in words translated from the Greek, which, with 2 initial, soften the pronunciation, from the fact that 1 with precedes, e. g. ]V)i nm] = Gxrjua pronounced sk'imo, P 7 There are also examples in which ] is a radical letter as VmJ , P 7 p 6. g. V] looi pronounced Jf vo-hho. So also; b) \n words of three syllables, the vowel standing over the first radical letter is dropped, when the middle syllable is pronounced with a long immutable vowel ( Q , a. , and a. ). In this case, the form of the word continues to be easily recognized, and the vowel, p . r which is dropped, is readily perceived, e.g. |Zqo> read r^bhutho; P I 7 7 t^' *>' pxono\ineedhlfk\mo\ \\y\^ pronounced ^^/i^/o/^/^o, 458 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. etc. The same is also true with vowels over auxiliary conso- nants which did not originally belong to the radical word, e. g. Uonnm pronounced 5** /cubhlo ; |A-iA>Z pronounced th^ ritko. Finally, there is also a similar rejection of those vowels, which the preforraatives or prefixes of the verb, generally take, e. g. y> 7 p r -K r *>. r ]pj \*r^^3 i^Yonounced shabhro^n-lrez; >0^> OlV) pronounced I r p 7 manu'dh-nHsur ; .^LiAdj ]ljk\ lironounced aino^ d/i-kUhibh. 2. In the middle of a word vowels are omitted in pronuncia- 7 7 f tion as follows : In the verb, in Ethpa,, e. g. *.fc-^j2)Z| pro- nounced eth'pHag\ in the noun especially, of the middle sylla- P 7 X p ^ P 7 ble, e. g. (AklxXSD pronounced si??i*i/io; fZo 01-^ pronounced ai^ hutho. 3. Vowels, at the end of a syllable, fall away; a ) in the verb, when the grammatical form, notwithstanding the falling away, remains suflSciently recognizable in pronunciation, as in Pa. , T T e. g. 2l:^ read al" ph ; especially in the part. act. Pe., e. g. 7 7 P Aj] ^^flO pronounced soc/^V-a^/i ; and in the -part. pass. Pe., 9 7 P 7 e. g. Ir^^*^ pronounced /easy'; \.kSih pronounced raphy'; p X |Aa\.t read g"" I'iih ] b) in the noun, of the emohat. state, P 7 P I 0, g. Vn^P read phagr^ ; ]m*n read bish'' . There is no common law for the occurrence of sijnoRresis. It only appears when the number of syllables in the metre is too great and the connecting word admits of contraction. So secondly in dimresis, by which an inadequate number of syllables may be compensated when there are vowelless conso- nants which make possible an increase in the number of sylla- ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 459 bles, Mehagyono properly comes Id, especially when synonymous forms appear with the vowels added, e. g. ]li\ and ]fci'\ , or when the nature of consonants allows such a vowel e. g. ^ in .001 iSs , in which case it may be read t001>\s . It is otherwise usually with the auxiliary vowel ( sheva mobile) ; and not only in the middle, but also at the beginning of a word, e. g. nn^ read sh^bhak\ \^Oi:nm read sh'muil. The rhythmical termination of verses ( bfioioTeXevra ) imme- diately following each other, is more dependent npon the for- mation of the words and thoughts, than upon a special peculi- arity of Syriac poetry. " V THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. JUN !? 1S43 ^S'^JAN 4 19S6 5. :Z E APn G 1 944 iiJG15'RR-5PM iKfnrnrcf .' tCi, / h^^->i-^ 1 -n J '; , ^^ MS^ii RECEIVED LOAN DEPT woai 496SJtT RECEIVED SEP 2 -'66 -3 PM LOAN P CP T. MAY 8196763 IN STACKS 2 j b/ "4 PW R m MAY^B 1961 LD 21-100r/i-7,'33 .jf.i'u^BB :504O UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY